20_RT_OM_EN_USC
FIRST EDITION
2020 DODGE GRAND CARAVAN
OWNER’S MANUAL
2020 DODGE GRAND CARAVAN
©2019 FCA US LLC. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. TOUS DROITS RÉSERVÉS.
DODGE IS A REGISTERED TRADEMARK OF FCA US LLC OR FCA CANADA INC., USED UNDER LICENSE. DODGE EST UNE MARQUE DÉPOSÉE DE FCA US LLC OU FCA CANADA INC., UTILISÉE SOUS LE PERMIS.
APP STORE IS A REGISTERED TRADEMARK OF APPLE INC. GOOGLE PLAY STORE IS A REGISTERED TRADEMARK OF GOOGLE.
Whether it’s providing information about specic product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s heritage, knowing what steps to take following an
accident or scheduling your next appointment, we know you’ll nd the app an important extension of your Dodge brand vehicle.
Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go directly to the App Store
®
or Google Play
®
Store and enter the search
keyword “Dodge” (U.S. residents only).
mopar.com/om owners.mopar.ca
DOWNLOAD A FREE ELECTRONIC COPY OF THE MOST UP-TO-DATE
OWNER’S MANUAL, UCONNECT AND WARRANTY BOOKLETS
U. S. Canada
WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway motor vehicle can expose you to
chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the
engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently
when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
This Owner’s Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may also include
a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any features and equipment described in this
manual that are not on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its
products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
With respect to any vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
If you are the rst registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Booklet by calling 1-800-423-6343 (U.S.) or
1-800-387-1143 (Canada) or by contacting your dealer.
This Owner’s Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your most up-to-date Owner’s Manual, Navigation/Uconnect manuals and
Warranty Booklet can be found by visiting the website on the back cover. U.S. residents can purchase replacement kits by visiting www.techauthority.com and Canadian
residents can purchase replacement kits by calling 1-800-387-1143.
The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, resulting in an accident and
personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take their attention off the road.
Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones, computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices, by the driver while the vehicle is moving
is dangerous and could lead to a serious accident. Texting while driving is also dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle is moving. If you nd yourself
unable to devote your full attention to vehicle operation, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. Some states or provinces prohibit the use of
cellular telephones or texting while driving. It is always the driver’s responsibility to comply with all local laws.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared to help you get acquainted with your new Dodge brand vehicle and to provide a convenient reference source
for common questions.
Not all features shown in this manual may apply to your vehicle. For additional information, visit www.mopar.com (U.S.), www.mopar.ca (Canada) or your local
Dodge brand dealer.
Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels
far below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a friend or use
public transportation.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reexes are slower and your judgment is impaired
when you have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
WARNING!
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
1 INTRODUCTION.............................................................................................................................. 7
2 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE ...................................................................................9
3 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ........................................................82
4 SAFETY .........................................................................................................................................103
5 STARTING AND OPERATING ...............................................................................................162
6 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY .....................................................................................................194
7 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE ...................................................................................... 226
8 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ............................................................................................266
9 MULTIMEDIA .............................................................................................................................. 275
10 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE .....................................................................................................364
11 INDEX .............................................................................................................................................368
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 1
2
INTRODUCTION
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL..................................8
Essential Information .................................... 8
Symbols .......................................................... 8
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS .................................8
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS........... 8
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
KEYS ........................................................................ 9
Key Fobs......................................................... 9
IGNITION SWITCH .................................................11
Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) ...................... 11
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED .........................12
How To Use Remote Start ...........................12
Remote Start Abort Messages....................12
To Enter Remote Start Mode ...................... 12
To Exit Remote Start Mode Without
Driving The Vehicle ..................................... 13
To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The
Vehicle .......................................................... 13
General Information ....................................13
SENTRY KEY ..........................................................13
Key Programming ....................................... 14
Replacement Keys....................................... 14
General Information ....................................14
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED .....15
Rearming Of The System............................. 15
To Arm The System .....................................15
To Disarm The System ................................15
Tamper Alert................................................. 16
DOORS .................................................................. 16
Manual Door Locks...................................... 16
Power Door Locks — If Equipped ............... 17
Power Sliding Side Door — If Equipped ...... 18
Child Locks................................................... 19
SEATS .................................................................... 20
Manual Adjustment (Front Seats) — If
Equipped ...................................................... 20
Manual Adjustment (Rear Seats) ............... 21
Power Seats — If Equipped ......................... 27
Heated Seats — If Equipped ....................... 28
Plastic Grocery Bag Retainer Hooks........... 30
HEAD RESTRAINTS .............................................. 30
Supplemental Active Head Restraints
— Front Seats ............................................... 30
Head Restraints — Second Row Quad
Seats............................................................. 31
Head Restraints — Second Row Bench...... 32
Head Restraints — Third Row...................... 32
STEERING WHEEL ............................................... 33
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column .............. 33
Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped ....... 34
MIRRORS .............................................................. 34
Automatic Dimming Mirror
— If Equipped .............................................. 34
Automatic Dimming Mirror With Rear
View Camera Display — If Equipped ........... 35
Outside Mirrors ........................................... 35
Interior Observation Mirror.......................... 36
Power Mirrors — If Equipped ...................... 36
Outside Mirrors Folding Feature................. 36
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped..................... 37
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors
— If Equipped .............................................. 37
EXTERIOR LIGHTS ...............................................37
Headlight Switch.......................................... 37
Multifunction Lever .................................... 37
Daytime Running Lights (DRLs)
— If Equipped ............................................... 38
High/Low Beam Switch .............................. 38
Flash-To-Pass............................................... 38
Automatic Headlights ................................. 38
Headlights On With Wipers
— If Equipped ............................................... 38
Headlight Delay — If Equipped.................... 38
Lights-On Reminder..................................... 39
Front Fog Lights — If Equipped .................. 39
Turn Signals ................................................. 39
Lane Change Assist..................................... 39
Battery Protection ....................................... 39
INTERIOR LIGHTS ................................................39
Courtesy/Interior Lighting........................... 39
WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHERS ...............41
Windshield Wiper Operation ....................... 41
Rear Wiper And Washer.............................. 42
CLIMATE CONTROLS ...........................................42
Manual Climate Control Overview .............. 42
Automatic Climate Control Overview.......... 48
Climate Control Functions........................... 56
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)
— If Equipped ............................................... 56
Operating Tips ............................................. 57
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 2
3
WINDOWS ............................................................59
Power Vent Windows — If Equipped ..........59
Power Windows............................................59
HOOD......................................................................61
Opening The Hood ....................................... 61
Closing The Hood.........................................61
LIFTGATE................................................................62
Opening ........................................................62
Closing.......................................................... 62
Power Liftgate — If Equipped ...................... 62
Cargo Area Features ...................................63
LOAD LEVELING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED .........63
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED..........63
Before You Begin Programming
HomeLink® .................................................. 64
Programming A Rolling Code ......................64
Programming A Non-Rolling Code............... 65
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming..... 66
Using HomeLink®........................................67
Security......................................................... 67
Troubleshooting Tips ...................................67
General Information ....................................68
INTERNAL EQUIPMENT ........................................68
Storage ......................................................... 68
Cupholders .................................................. 73
Sun Screens — If Equipped ......................... 75
Electrical Power Outlets — If Equipped.......75
Power Inverter — If Equipped......................77
Smoker's Package Kit — If Equipped .........78
Sunglass Storage Bin — If Equipped........... 78
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED............. 79
Deploying The Crossbars............................. 79
Stowing The Crossbars................................ 80
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER ...................................... 82
Instrument Cluster Descriptions ................ 84
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY ..................... 85
Instrument Cluster Display Location And
Controls ....................................................... 85
Oil Life Reset................................................ 87
Instrument Cluster Display Menu Items .... 87
TRIP COMPUTER ................................................. 93
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES.................. 94
Red Warning Lights ..................................... 94
Yellow Warning Lights ................................. 97
White Indicator Lights ...............................100
Green Indicator Lights...............................100
Blue Indicator Lights..................................100
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II.....101
Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity .............................................101
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND
MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS .............................102
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES.............................................103
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .................103
Electronic Brake Control (EBC) System ...104
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS ........................ 110
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM)
— If Equipped .............................................110
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)........................................................115
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS ................. 119
Occupant Restraint Systems Features .... 119
Important Safety Precautions...................119
Seat Belt Systems ....................................120
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS)...131
Child Restraints .........................................141
Transporting Pets .....................................159
SAFETY TIPS ...................................................... 159
Transporting Passengers ..........................159
Exhaust Gas...............................................159
Safety Checks You Should Make
Inside The Vehicle ....................................160
Periodic Safety Checks You Should
Make Outside The Vehicle ........................161
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE .................................... 162
Normal Starting .........................................162
Cold Weather Operation
(Below –22°F Or −30°C) .........................163
After Starting — Warming Up The
Engine ........................................................163
If Engine Fails To Start .............................163
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED........ 163
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 3
4
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS ...... 163
PARK BRAKE ..................................................... 164
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION............................ 165
Key Ignition Park Interlock ........................166
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock
System........................................................166
Fuel Economy (ECON) Mode .....................167
Six-Speed Automatic Transmission ..........167
Gear Ranges ..............................................168
POWER STEERING............................................. 172
Power Steering Fluid Check ......................173
SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED.................... 173
To Activate..................................................174
To Set A Desired Speed.............................174
To Vary The Speed Setting ........................174
To Accelerate For Passing ........................175
To Resume Speed......................................175
To Deactivate .............................................175
PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST
— IF EQUIPPED................................................... 175
ParkSense Sensors ...................................176
ParkSense Warning Display......................176
ParkSense Display.....................................176
Enabling/Disabling ParkSense .................178
Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist
System........................................................178
Cleaning The ParkSense System..............178
ParkSense System Usage Precautions ....178
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA .............179
REFUELING THE VEHICLE .................................181
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message.................181
VEHICLE LOADING ............................................182
Certification Label .....................................182
TRAILER TOWING...............................................183
Common Towing Definitions .....................183
Trailer Hitch Classification ........................184
Trailer Towing Weights
(Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings) ..........186
Trailer And Tongue Weight .......................186
Towing Requirements ...............................187
Towing Tips ................................................189
RECREATIONAL TOWING
(BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.) ..........................191
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another
Vehicle........................................................191
Recreational Towing — All Models............191
DRIVING TIPS......................................................192
Driving On Slippery Surfaces ....................192
Driving Through Water ..............................192
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS .......................194
BULB REPLACEMENT ........................................194
Replacement Bulbs ..................................194
Replacing Exterior Bulbs ...........................196
FUSES.................................................................. 197
General Information ..................................198
Totally Integrated Power Module
(Fuses) .......................................................198
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING ....................... 202
Jack Location .............................................203
Spare Tire Tools.........................................203
To Access Spare Tire Winch Drive Nut .....203
Spare Tire Removal ..................................205
Spare Tire Removal Instructions ..............205
Preparations For Jacking .........................206
Jacking Instructions...................................206
Securing The Compact Spare Tire............210
Road Tire Installation ................................211
TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED................... 212
JUMP STARTING ................................................ 219
Preparations For Jump Start.....................219
Jump Starting Procedure ..........................220
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS ......................... 221
GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE ........................... 222
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE ............................. 223
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE ....................... 224
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE
SYSTEM (EARS) ................................................. 225
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)....................... 225
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 4
5
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING .................................. 226
Maintenance Plan......................................227
ENGINE COMPARTMENT .................................. 231
Engine Compartment — 3.6L ....................231
Checking Oil Level......................................232
Adding Washer Fluid .................................232
Maintenance-Free Battery .......................232
Pressure Washing......................................233
DEALER SERVICE .............................................. 233
Engine Oil ..................................................233
Engine Oil Filter..........................................234
Engine Air Cleaner Filter ...........................235
Air Conditioner Maintenance ...................235
Accessory Drive Belt Inspection................236
Body Lubrication........................................237
Windshield Wiper Blades ..........................238
Exhaust System ........................................238
Cooling System ..........................................239
Brake System ............................................242
Automatic Transmission............................243
RAISING THE VEHICLE ...................................... 244
TIRES ................................................................... 245
Tire Safety Information .............................245
Tires — General Information .....................252
Tire Types ...................................................256
Spare Tires — If Equipped .........................257
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care ....................259
Tire Chains and Traction Devices ............260
Tire Rotation Recommendations .............261
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES ..................261
Treadwear ..................................................261
Traction Grades .........................................261
Temperature Grades .................................262
VEHICLE STORAGE.............................................262
BODYWORK ........................................................262
Protection From Atmospheric Agents.......262
Body And Underbody Maintenance..........263
Preserving The Bodywork..........................263
INTERIORS .........................................................264
Seats And Fabric Parts..............................264
Plastic And Coated Parts...........................264
Glass Surfaces ..........................................265
Cleaning The Instrument Panel
Cupholders.................................................265
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
IDENTIFICATION DATA.......................................266
Vehicle Identification Number ..................266
BRAKE SYSTEM..................................................266
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE
SPECIFICATIONS ................................................266
Torque Specifications................................266
FUEL REQUIREMENTS ......................................267
3.6L Engine................................................267
Reformulated Gasoline ............................268
Materials Added To Fuel ...........................268
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends .....................268
Do Not Use E-85 In Non-Flex Fuel
Vehicles......................................................269
CNG And LP Fuel System
Modifications .............................................269
MMT In Gasoline........................................269
Fuel System Cautions................................270
Carbon Monoxide Warnings......................270
FLUID CAPACITIES ............................................ 271
FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS................................ 272
Engine ........................................................272
Chassis.......................................................274
MULTIMEDIA
CYBERSECURITY ............................................... 275
SAFETY AND GENERAL INFORMATION .......... 276
Safety Guidelines.......................................276
RADIO 430/430 NAV........................................ 277
General Handling.......................................277
Getting Started ..........................................279
Radio Mode................................................281
Media Mode...............................................286
Remote Devices.........................................299
Uconnect Phone— If Equipped .................304
Navigation — If Equipped ..........................317
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF
EQUIPPED .......................................................... 340
Radio Operation.........................................340
CD Player....................................................340
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 5
6
USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED .............. 340
Connecting The External USB Device.......341
Using This Feature.....................................341
Controlling The External USB Device
Using Radio Buttons ..................................341
Play Mode...................................................341
List Or Browse Mode .................................342
Bluetooth® Streaming Audio (BTSA) .......343
UCONNECT MULTIMEDIA — VIDEO
ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM (VES)
— IF EQUIPPED................................................... 344
Getting Started...........................................344
Play Video Games......................................344
Play A DVD Using The Touchscreen
Radio...........................................................346
Play A DVD Using The VES Player
— If Equipped .............................................347
VES Remote Control — If Equipped ..........348
Remote Control Storage............................349
Locking The Remote Control.....................349
Replacing The Remote Control
Batteries.....................................................349
Headphones Operation .............................350
Controls ......................................................350
Replacing The Headphone Batteries .......350
Accessibility — If Equipped........................350
Stereo Headphone Lifetime Limited
Warranty.....................................................351
System Information ...................................351
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES ....359
Regulatory And Safety Information...........359
VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS
— IF EQUIPPED ..................................................360
Voice Command System Operation .........360
Commands ................................................361
Voice Training ...........................................363
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE
FOR YOUR VEHICLE .......................................... 364
Prepare For The Appointment ..................364
Prepare A List.............................................364
Be Reasonable With Requests.................364
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE .............................. 364
FCA US LLC Customer Center...................365
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center...........365
In Mexico Contact......................................365
Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands..........365
Customer Assistance For The Hearing
Or Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) ................365
Service Contract .......................................365
WARRANTY INFORMATION .............................. 366
MOPAR PARTS................................................... 366
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS ........................ 366
In The 50 United States And
Washington, D.C. .......................................366
In Canada...................................................366
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS ........................ 367
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 6
7
INTRODUCTION
Dear Customer,
Congratulations on selecting your new vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality. This Owner’s
Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your
vehicle. It is supplemented by Warranty Information and customer oriented documents. Within this information, you will find a description of the services
that FCA US LLC offers to its customers, the vehicle's warranty coverage, and the details of the terms and conditions for maintaining its validity. Please
take the time to read all of these publications carefully before driving your vehicle for the first time. Following the instructions, recommendations, tips,
and important warnings in this manual will help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle. Be sure you are familiar with all vehicle controls,
particularly those used for braking, steering, transmission, and transfer case shifting (if equipped). Learn how your vehicle handles on different road
surfaces. Your driving skills will improve with experience.
This Owner’s Manual describes all versions of this vehicle. Options and equipment dedicated to specific markets or versions are not expressly indicated
in the text. Therefore, you should only consider the information which is related to the trim level, engine, and version that you have purchased. Any
content introduced throughout the Owner’s Information, that may or may not be applicable to your vehicle, will be identified with the wording “If
Equipped”. All data contained in this publication are intended to help you use your vehicle in the best possible way. FCA US LLC aims at a constant
improvement of the vehicles produced. For this reason, it reserves the right to make changes to the model described for technical and/or commercial
reasons. For further information, contact an authorized dealer.
When it comes to service, remember that authorized dealers know your vehicle best, have factory-trained technicians and genuine MOPAR® parts, and
care about your satisfaction.
1
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 7
8
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Essential Information
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and illustrations may differ from your vehicle's
equipment.
The detailed Index at the back of this Owner's Manual contains a complete listing of all subjects.
Symbols
Some vehicle components have colored labels whose symbols indicate precautions to be observed when using this component. Refer to “Warning
Lights and Messages” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further information on the symbols used in your vehicle.
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against operating procedures that could result in a collision, bodily injury and/or death. It also contains
CAUTIONS against procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you do not read this entire Owner’s Manual, you may miss important
information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may lead to a collision resulting in serious
injury or death.
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 8
9
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
KEYS
Key Fobs
Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. This
system consists of a Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) key fob and a Wireless Ignition Node
(WIN) with integral ignition. You can insert the
key fob into the ignition switch with either side
up. It also contains an emergency key, which
stores in the rear of the key fob.
NOTE:
The key fob may not be found if it is located next
to a mobile phone, laptop or other electronic
device; these devices may block the key fob’s
wireless signal.
The emergency key allows for entry into the
vehicle should the battery in the vehicle or the
key fob become depleted. You can keep the
emergency key with you when valet parking.
To remove the emergency key, slide the
mechanical latch at the top of the key fob
sideways with your thumb and then pull the key
out with your other hand.
NOTE:
When using the emergency key to gain access
to your vehicle, be aware that the security alarm
may be triggered. Insert the key into the ignition
and place the ignition in the ON/RUN position to
disarm the security system.
Key Fob
Emergency Key Removal
To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate
Push and release the unlock button on the key
fob once to unlock the doors. Push and release
the unlock button a second time within five
seconds to unlock the liftgate. The turn signal
lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock
signal.
To Lock The Doors And Liftgate
Push and release the lock button on the key fob
once to lock the doors. The turn signal lights will
flash to acknowledge the lock signal.
2
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 9
10 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Replacing The Battery In The Key Fob With
Remote Control
The replacement battery is one CR2032
battery.
NOTE:
Perchlorate Material — special handling may
apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazard-
ouswaste/perchlorate for further informa-
tion.
Do not replace coin battery unless the instru-
ment cluster display shows the message
“Key Fob Low Battery”.
Do not touch the battery terminals that are
on the back housing or the printed circuit
board.
1. Remove the emergency key by sliding the
mechanical latch on the back of the key
fob sideways with your thumb and then pull
the key out with your other hand.
Emergency WIN Key Removal
2. Gently pry the two halves of the key fob
apart. Make sure not to damage the seal
during removal.
Separating WIN Key Fob Case
3. Remove the battery by turning the back
cover over (battery facing downward) and
tapping it lightly on a solid surface such as
a table or similar, then replace the battery.
When replacing the battery, match the (+)
sign on the battery to the (+) sign on the
inside of the battery clip, located on the
back cover. Avoid touching the new battery
with your fingers. Skin oils may cause
battery deterioration. If you touch a battery,
clean it with rubbing alcohol.
4. To assemble the key fob case, line up the
two case halves, and snap them together.
Programming Additional Key Fobs
Programming the key fob may be performed by
an authorized dealer.
NOTE:
Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it
cannot be repurposed and reprogrammed to
another vehicle.
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 10
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 11
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Innovation, Science and
Economic Development Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic
Development applicables aux appareils radio
exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée
aux deux conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de
brouillage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en compro-
mettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar
cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s authority to
operate the equipment.
IGNITION SWITCH
Wireless Ignition Node (WIN)
The Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) operates
similar to an ignition switch. It has four
operating positions, three with detents and one
that is spring-loaded. The detent positions are
OFF, ACC, and ON/RUN. The START position is a
spring-loaded momentary contact position.
When released from the START position, the
switch automatically returns to the ON/RUN
position.
Wireless Ignition Switch
1 — OFF
2 — ACC (Accessory)
3 — ON/RUN
4 — START
2
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 11
12 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED
How To Use Remote Start
All of the following conditions must be met
before the engine will remote start:
Gear selector in PARK
Doors closed
Hood closed
Liftgate closed
Hazard switch off
Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not
pushed)
Battery at an acceptable charge level
System not disabled from previous remote
start event
Vehicle security alarm not active
Ignition in OFF position
Malfunction Indicator Light is not illuminated
Remote Start Abort Messages
The following messages will display in the
instrument cluster display if the vehicle fails to
remote start or exits remote start prematurely:
Remote Start Aborted — Door Ajar
Remote Start Aborted — Hood Ajar
Remote Start Aborted — Fuel Low
Remote Start Aborted — L/Gate Ajar
Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle To
Reset
The instrument cluster display message stays
active until the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
position.
To Enter Remote Start Mode
Push and release the Remote Start button on
the key fob twice within five seconds. The
vehicle doors will lock, the turn signals will flash
twice, and the horn will chirp twice. Then the
engine will start, and the vehicle will remain in
the Remote Start mode for a 15 minute cycle.
NOTE:
If an engine fault is present or fuel level is
low, the vehicle will start and then shut down
in 10 seconds.
The park lamps will turn on and remain on
during Remote Start mode.
For security, power window operation is
disabled when the vehicle is in the Remote
Start mode.
The engine can be started two consecutive
times (two 15 minute cycles) with the key
fob. However, the ignition must be placed in
the ON/RUN position before you can repeat
the start sequence for a third cycle.
WARNING!
Do not start or run an engine in a closed
garage or confined area. Exhaust gas
contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is
odorless and colorless. Carbon Monoxide is
poisonous and can cause serious injury or
death when inhaled.
Keep key fobs away from children. Opera-
tion of the Remote Start System, windows,
door locks or other controls could cause
serious injury or death.
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 12
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 13
To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving
The Vehicle
Push and release the Remote Start button one
time or allow the remote start cycle to complete
the entire 15 minute cycle.
NOTE:
To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system
will disable for two seconds after receiving a
valid Remote Start request.
To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The
Vehicle
Before the end of the 15 minute cycle, push and
release the unlock button on the key fob to
unlock the doors and disarm the vehicle
security alarm (if equipped). Then, insert the key
into the ignition and place the ignition in the
ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
The ignition must be placed in the ON/RUN
position in order to drive the vehicle.
The message “Remote Start Active — Key To
Run” will display in the instrument cluster
display until you place the ignition in the
ON/RUN position.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Innovation, Science and
Economic Development Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic
Development applicables aux appareils radio
exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée
aux deux conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de
brouillage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en compro-
mettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar
cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s authority to
operate the equipment.
SENTRY KEY
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents
unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the
engine. The system does not need to be armed
or activated. Operation is automatic, regardless
of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked.
2
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 13
14 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
The system uses a key fob, keyless push button
ignition and a Radio Frequency (RF) receiver to
prevent unauthorized vehicle operation.
Therefore, only key fobs that are programmed
to the vehicle can be used to start and operate
the vehicle. The system cannot reprogram a key
fob obtained from another vehicle.
After placing the ignition switch in the ON/RUN
position, the vehicle security light will turn on for
three seconds for a bulb check. If the light
remains on after the bulb check, it indicates
that there is a problem with the electronics. In
addition, if the light begins to flash after the
bulb check, it indicates that someone
attempted to start the engine with an invalid key
fob. In the event that a valid key fob is used to
start the engine but there is an issue with the
vehicle electronics, the engine will start and
shut off after two seconds.
If the vehicle security light turns on during
normal vehicle operation (vehicle running for
longer than ten seconds), it indicates that there
is a fault in the electronics. Should this occur,
have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible by
an authorized dealer.
All of the key fobs provided with your new
vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle
electronics.
Key Programming
Key fob programming is performed at an
authorized dealer.
Replacement Keys
NOTE:
Only key fobs that are programmed to the
vehicle electronics can be used to start and
operate the vehicle. Once a key fob is
programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be
programmed to any other vehicle.
NOTE:
Duplication of key fobs may be performed at an
authorized dealer. This procedure consists of
programming a blank key fob to the vehicle
electronics. A blank key fob is one that has
never been programmed.
When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer
System serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you
to an authorized dealer.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Innovation, Science and
Economic Development Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
CAUTION!
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not
compatible with some aftermarket remote
starting systems. Use of these systems may
result in vehicle starting problems and loss of
security protection.
CAUTION!
Always remove the key fobs from the vehicle
and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle
unattended.
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 14
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 15
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic
Development applicables aux appareils radio
exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée
aux deux conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de
brouillage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en compro-
mettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar
cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s authority to
operate the equipment.
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED
The vehicle security alarm monitors the vehicle
doors for unauthorized entry and the ignition
switch for unauthorized operation. When the
alarm is activated, the interior switches for door
locks, power sliding doors and power liftgate
are disabled. The vehicle security alarm
provides both audible and visible signals.
If something triggers the alarm, the vehicle
security alarm will provide the following audible
and visible signals: the horn will pulse, the park
lamps and/or turn signals will flash, and the
vehicle security light in the instrument cluster
will flash.
Rearming Of The System
The vehicle security alarm will rearm itself after
the 15 additional minutes of the park lamps
and vehicle security light flashing, if the system
has not been disabled. If the condition which
initiated the alarm is still present, the system
will ignore that condition and monitor the
remaining doors and ignition.
To Arm The System
Follow these steps to arm the vehicle security
alarm:
1. Make sure the vehicle’s ignition is placed
in the OFF position (refer to "Starting The
Engine" in "Starting And Operating" for
further information).
2. Perform one of the following methods to
lock the vehicle:
Push lock on the interior power door lock
switch with the driver and/or passenger
door open.
Push the lock button on the key fob.
3. If any doors are open, close them.
To Disarm The System
The vehicle security alarm can be disarmed
using any of the following methods:
Push the unlock button on the key fob.
Cycle the vehicle ignition system out of the
OFF position. Insert a valid key into the igni-
tion switch and place the ignition into the ON
position.
2
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 15
16 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
NOTE:
The driver's door key cylinder and the liftgate
button on the key fob cannot arm or disarm
the vehicle security alarm.
The vehicle security alarm remains armed
during power liftgate entry. Pushing the lift-
gate button will not disarm the vehicle secu-
rity alarm. If someone enters the vehicle
through the liftgate and opens any door, the
alarm will sound.
When the vehicle security alarm is armed,
the interior power door lock switches will not
unlock the doors.
The vehicle security alarm is designed to protect
your vehicle. However, you can create
conditions where the system will give you a false
alarm. If one of the previously described arming
sequences has occurred, the vehicle security
alarm will arm regardless of whether you are in
the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle
and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this
occurs, disarm the vehicle security alarm.
If the vehicle security alarm is armed and the
battery becomes disconnected, the vehicle
security alarm will remain armed when the
battery is reconnected; the exterior lights will
flash, and the horn will sound. If this occurs,
disarm the vehicle security alarm.
Tamper Alert
If something has triggered the vehicle security
alarm in your absence, the horn will sound three
times and the exterior lights will blink three
times when you disarm the vehicle security
alarm. Check the vehicle for tampering.
DOORS
Manual Door Locks
Lock the front doors by pushing down on the
lock knobs on each door trim panel.
If the lock knob is down when you shut either
front door, the door will lock. Make sure the
keys are not inside the vehicle before closing
the door.
Door Lock Knob
If the lock knob is rearward when you shut
either side sliding door, the door will lock. Make
sure the keys are not inside the vehicle before
closing the door.
WARNING!
Do not leave children or animals inside
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior
heat build-up may cause serious injury or
death.
For personal security and safety in the
event of an collision, lock the vehicle doors
as you drive as well as when you park and
leave the vehicle.
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 16
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 17
(Continued)
Power Door Locks — If Equipped
Power door lock switches are located on each
front door trim panel. Use these switches to lock
or unlock the doors.
Driver Power Door Lock Switches
If you push the power door lock switch while the
key fob is in the ignition, and any front door is
open, the power locks will not operate. This
prevents you from accidentally locking your
keys in the vehicle. Removing the key fob or
closing the door will allow the locks to operate.
A chime will sound if the key fob is in the ignition
switch and a door is open, as a reminder to
remove the key fob.
NOTE:
If you push the power door lock switch while the
sliding door is open, the sliding door will lock.
Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped
The auto door lock feature default condition is
enabled. When enabled, the door locks will lock
automatically when the vehicle's speed exceeds
15 mph (24 km/h). The auto door lock feature
can be enabled or disabled by your authorized
dealer per written request of the customer.
Please see an authorized dealer for service.
Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the
automatic transmission into PARK or the
manual transmission into FIRST gear or
REVERSE, apply the parking brake, turn the
vehicle OFF, remove the key fobs from
vehicle, and lock all doors. and lock your
vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving
children in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child
or others could be seriously or fatally
injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the
gear selector.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-
tended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
WARNING! (Continued)
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to chil-
dren. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
WARNING! (Continued)
2
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 17
18 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Unlock Doors Automatically On Exit — If
Equipped
The Unlock Doors Automatically On Exit feature
unlocks all of the vehicle doors when any door
is opened. This will occur only after the gear
selector has been placed into the PARK
position, after the vehicle has been driven (the
gear selector has been placed out of the PARK
position and all doors closed).
The Unlock Doors Automatically On Exit feature
will not operate if there is any manual operation
of the power door locks (lock or unlock).
On vehicles equipped with the optional
instrument cluster display, refer to “Instrument
Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
NOTE:
Use the Automatic Door Locks at 15 mph
(24 km/h) and Unlock Doors Automatically On
Exit features in accordance with local laws.
Power Sliding Side Door — If Equipped
Push the button on the key fob twice
within five seconds to open, close, or
reverse a power sliding door.
The power sliding door may be power opened or
closed in several ways:
Key fob
Inside or outside handles
Buttons located:
In the overhead console
Just inside the sliding door
On the outside handle
Push the button on the key fob twice within five
seconds to open a power sliding door. When the
door is fully open, pushing the button twice
within five seconds a second time will close the
door.
There are power sliding side door switches
located on the B-pillar trim panel, just in front of
the power sliding door for the rear seat
passengers and in the overhead console for the
driver and passengers. Pushing the switch once
will open the power sliding door. If the switch is
pushed while the door is under a power cycle,
the door will reverse direction.
NOTE:
The power sliding side door must be unlocked
before the power sliding door switches will
operate.
Power Sliding Door Switch
If the inside or outside door handles are used
while the power sliding side door is activated,
the power sliding door feature will be canceled
and will go into manual mode.
To avoid unintentional operation of the power
sliding doors from the rear seats, push the
power sliding door master lock button, located
in the overhead console, to disable the switches
and handles for the rear seat passengers.
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 18
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 19
NOTE:
The power sliding side door switches will not
open the power sliding door if the gear
selector is in gear or the vehicle speed is
above 0 mph (0 km/h). To close the power
sliding door with the gear selector in gear and
vehicle speed at 0 mph (0 km/h), the brake
must be pushed.
If anything obstructs the power sliding side
door while it is closing or opening, the door
will automatically reverse to the closed or
open position, provided it meets sufficient
resistance.
If the power sliding side door is not in the full
open or close position, it will fully open when
a power sliding door switch is pushed. To
close the door, wait until it is fully open and
then push the switch again.
If the power sliding door encounters multiple
obstructions within the same cycle, the
system will automatically stop, the power
sliding door motor will make a clicking sound
until the door has no further movement. This
clicking sound can be stopped by pulling the
inside or outside handle. If this condition
occurs, no damage is done to the power
sliding door motor. The power sliding door
must be opened or closed manually.
Overhead Console Control Buttons
Child Locks
To provide a safer environment for small
children riding in the rear seats, the sliding
doors are equipped with a Child Protection Door
Lock system.
NOTE:
When the Child Protection Door Lock System is
engaged, the door can only be opened by using
the outside door handle even though the inside
lock is in the unlocked position.
Child Protection Door Locks
WARNING!
You, or others, could be injured if caught in
the path of the sliding door. Make sure the
door path is clear before closing the door.
1 — Left Sliding Door
2 — Liftgate
3 — Right Sliding Door
4 — Sliding Door Power Off
2
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 19
20 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
SEATS
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint
System of the vehicle.
Manual Adjustment (Front Seats) — If
Equipped
Manual Front/Second Row Seat Adjuster
Both front seats are adjustable forward or
rearward. The manual seat adjustment handle
is located under the seat cushion at the front
edge of each seat.
Manual Seat Adjuster
While sitting in the seat, pull up on the handle
and slide the seat forward or rearward. Release
the bar once you have reached the desired
position. Then, using body pressure, move
forward and rearward on the seat to be sure
that the seat adjusters have latched.
WARNING!
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,
people riding in these areas are more likely
to be seriously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of
your vehicle that is not equipped with seats
and seat belts. In a collision, people riding
in these areas are more likely to be seri-
ously injured or killed.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly.
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving
is dangerous. The sudden movement of the
seat could cause you to lose control. The
seat belt might not be adjusted properly
and you could be injured. Adjust the seat
only while the vehicle is parked.
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so
that the shoulder belt is no longer resting
against your chest. In a collision you could
slide under the seat belt and be seriously or
even fatally injured. Use the recliner only
when the vehicle is parked.
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while driving may be
dangerous. Moving a seat while driving could
result in loss of control which could cause a
collision and serious injury or death.
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 20
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 21
Manual Reclining Seats — If Equipped
For models equipped with manual reclining
seats, the recline lever is located on the
outboard side of the seat.
Manual Recline Lever
To recline, lean forward slightly, lift the lever,
then push back to the desired position and
release the lever. Lean forward and lift the lever
to return the seatback to its normal position.
Using body pressure, lean forward and rearward
on the seat to be sure the seatback has latched.
Manual Adjustment (Rear Seats)
Stow 'n Go Seating
On vehicles equipped with Stow 'n Go seating,
the second and third row seats can be folded
into the floor for convenient storage.
Second Row Stow 'n Go
On vehicles equipped with Stow 'n Go seats, the
seats will fold and tumble in one motion.
To stow the second row seats, proceed as
follows:
1. Move the front seat fully forward.
2. Recline the front seatback fully forward.
3. Raise the armrests on the second row seat.
NOTE:
Seat will not stow in the storage bin unless the
armrests are raised.
Seats should be adjusted before fastening
the seat belts and while the vehicle is
parked. Serious injury or death could result
from a poorly adjusted seat belt.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that
the shoulder belt is no longer resting against
your chest. In a collision you could slide under
the seat belt, which could result in serious
injury or death.
WARNING!
Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the
top of the seatback. This could impair
visibility or become a dangerous projectile in
a sudden stop or collision.
2
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 21
22 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
4. Slide the storage bin locking mechanism to
the “lock” position and then pull up on the
storage bin latch to open the cover.
Storage Bin Cover Lock Release
5. Pull upward on the seatback recliner lever
located on the outboard side of the seat.
Seatback Recliner Lever, Seat Tumble, And Head
Restraint Fold Lever
The non-adjustable head restraint and seat-
back will fold automatically during the seat
tumble. No additional actuation is
necessary.
Non-Adjustable Head Restraint
Automatic Folding Seatback
The seat will automatically tumble into posi-
tion for easy storage.
Tumbled Second Row Seat
NOTE:
You may experience deformation in the seat
cushion from the seat belt buckles if the seats
are left folded for an extended period of time.
This is normal and by simply opening the seats
to the open position, over time the seat cushion
will return to its normal shape.
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 22
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 23
(Continued)
6. Push the seat into the storage bin.
Seat In Storage Bin
7. Close the storage bin cover.
To Unstow Second Row Seats
To unstow the second row seat, proceed as
follows:
1. Pull up on the storage bin latch to open the
cover.
2. Pull up on the strap to lift the seat out of the
storage bin and push the seat rearward to
latch the seat anchors.
3. Lift the seatback to the full upright position.
4. Return the head restraint to its upright
position, close the storage bin cover and
slide the storage bin locking mechanism to
the “unlocked” position.
WARNING!
In a collision, serious injury could result if the
seat storage bin covers are not properly
latched:
Do not drive the vehicle with the storage bin
covers open.
Keep the storage bin covers closed and
latched while the vehicle is in motion.
Do not use a storage bin latch as a tie
down.
CAUTION!
The storage bin cover must be locked and
flat to avoid damage from contact with the
front seat tracks, which have minimal clear-
ance to the cover.
Do not sit on the second row seat when it is
in the stowed position with the seatback
upright otherwise damage to the seat may
occur.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
In a collision, you or others in your vehicle
could be injured if seats are not properly
latched to their floor attachments. Always
be sure the seats are fully latched.
Sitting in a seat with the head restraint in its
lowered position could result in serious
injury or death in a collision. Always make
sure the head restraints are in their upright
positions when the seat is to be occupied.
2
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 23
24 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Stow 'n Go Seat — Folded And Latched Position
To tumble or stow the seat from the folded and
latched position, proceed as follows:
1. Return the seatback to the upright
position.
Raising The Seatback
2. Return the head restraint to the upright
position.
Raising The Head Restraint
3. Pull up on the seatback recliner lever on the
outboard side of the seat to fold head rest,
seatback, and tumble the seat forward.
Easy Entry Second Row
The second row Stow 'n Go seats allow easy
entry to the third row seat or rear cargo area.
Pull up on the seatback recliner lever on the
outboard side of the seat.
Seatback Recliner Lever
The seat will automatically fold into position for
easy entry into the third row.
WARNING!
In the event of a collision you could be injured
if the seat is not fully latched.
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 24
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 25
Second Row Bench Seat — If Equipped
While the bench seat does not stow in the floor,
it is removable for added cargo space.
Second Row Bench Seat
Release levers are located on the rear leg
assemblies, near the floor. To remove the seat,
squeeze each release handle and rotate
downwards to deploy the wheels. A lock
indicator button pops up when the seat is
unlocked. The seat assembly can now be
removed from the vehicle and moved on its
Easy Out Rollers.
Release Handles
To reinstall the seat, align the seat into the
detent positions on the floor. Squeeze the
release handle and rotate upward until the lock
indicator button returns into the handle.
Manually Folding Third Row Seats — If
Equipped
To manually fold the third row seats, proceed as
follows:
1. Lower the center head restraint down to
the seatback by pushing the button on the
guide and pushing the head restraint
down.
2. Lower the outboard head restraints by
pulling on the release strap marked “1”
located on the outboard side of the head
restraint.
Head Restraint Release Strap “1”
WARNING!
If not properly latched, the seat could become
loose. Personal injuries could result. After
reinstalling these seats, be sure the red
indicator button on the release handles
return into the handles.
2
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 25
26 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
3. Pull release strap marked “2” located on
the rear of the seat to lower the seatback.
Release Strap “2”
4. Pull release strap marked “3” to release the
anchors.
Release Strap “3”
5. Pull release strap marked “4” and tumble
the seat rearward into the storage bin.
Release Strap “4”
Stowed Third Row Seat
NOTE:
You may experience deformation in the seat
cushion from the seat belt buckles if the seats
are left folded for an extended period of time.
This is normal and by simply opening the seats
to the open position, over time the seat cushion
will return to its normal shape.
To Unfold Third Row Seats
To unfold the third row seats, proceed as
follows:
1. Pull up on the assist strap to lift the seat
out of the storage bin and push the seat
forward until the anchors latch.
2. Pull release strap marked “2” to unlock the
recliner.
3. Pulling strap “4” releases the seatback to
return to its full upright position.
4. Raise the head restraint to its upright
position.
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 26
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 27
Tailgate Mode
To fold the third row seats into Tailgate Mode,
proceed as follows:
1. Pull release strap “3”, then pull release
strap “4” to rotate the entire seat
rearward.
2. To restore the seat to its upright position, lift
up on the seatback and push forward until
the anchors latch.
Power Seats — If Equipped
Some models may be equipped with eight-way
power seats for the driver and front passenger.
The power seat switches are located on the
outboard side of the seat. The switches control
the movement of the seat cushion and the
seatback.
Driver Power Seat Switch
WARNING!
In a collision, you or others in your vehicle
could be injured if seats are not properly
latched to their floor attachments. Always
be sure the seats are fully latched.
Sitting in a seat with the head restraint in its
lowered position could result in serious
injury or death in a collision. Always make
sure the head restraints are in their upright
positions when the seat is to be occupied.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death, never
operate the vehicle with occupants in the
third row seat while in the tailgate mode.
1 — Seat Switch
2 — Seatback Switch
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while driving may be
dangerous. Moving a seat while driving
could result in loss of control which could
cause a collision and serious injury or
death.
Seats should be adjusted before fastening
the seat belts and while the vehicle is
parked. Serious injury or death could result
from a poorly adjusted seat belt.
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so
that the shoulder belt is no longer resting
against your chest. In a collision you could
slide under the seat belt, which could result
in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat
or impede its ability to move as it may cause
damage to the seat controls. Seat travel may
become limited if movement is stopped by an
obstruction in the seat's path.
2
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 27
28 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
The seat can be adjusted both forward and
rearward. Push the seat switch forward or
rearward. The seat will move in the direction of
the switch. Release the switch when the desired
position has been reached.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or
down. Pull upward or push downward on the
rear of seat switch, the seat will move in the
direction of the switch. Release the switch when
the desired position has been reached.
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted
in two directions. Pull upward or push
downward on the front of the seat switch, the
front of the seat cushion will move in the
direction of the switch. Release the switch when
the desired position has been reached.
Reclining The Seatback
The angle of the seatback can be adjusted
forward or rearward. Push the seatback switch
forward or rearward, the seat will move in the
direction of the switch. Release the switch when
the desired position is reached.
Power Lumbar — If Equipped
Vehicles equipped with power driver or
passenger seats may also be equipped with
power lumbar. The power lumbar switch is
located on the outboard side of the power seat.
Push the switch forward to increase the lumbar
support. Push the switch rearward to decrease
the lumbar support.
Power Lumbar Switch
Heated Seats — If Equipped
On some models, the front seats may be
equipped with heaters located in the seat
cushions and seat backs.
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while driving may be
dangerous. Moving a seat while driving
could result in loss of control which could
cause a collision and serious injury or
death.
Seats should be adjusted before fastening
the seat belts and while the vehicle is
parked. Serious injury or death could result
from a poorly adjusted seat belt.
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so
that the shoulder belt is no longer resting
against your chest. In a collision you could
slide under the seat belt, which could result
in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat
or impede its ability to move as it may cause
damage to the seat controls. Seat travel may
become limited if movement is stopped by an
obstruction in the seat's path.
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 28
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 29
Front Heated Seats
There are two heated seat switches that allow
the driver and passenger to operate the seats
independently. The controls for each heater are
located on the switch bank below the climate
controls.
You can choose from HI, LO or OFF heat
settings. Amber indicator lights in each switch
indicate the level of heat in use. Two indicator
lights will illuminate for HI, one for LO and none
for OFF.
Push the heated seat button once to turn
the HI setting on.
Push the heated seat button a second
time to turn the LO setting on.
Push the heated seat button a third time
to turn the heating elements off.
NOTE:
Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
within two to five minutes.
If the HI-level setting is selected, the system will
automatically switch to LO-level after approxi-
mately 60 minutes of continuous operation. At
that time, the display will change from HI to LO,
indicating the change. The LO-level setting will
turn off automatically after approximately
45 minutes.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start,
the heated seats can be programmed to come
on during a remote start.
This feature can be programmed through the
instrument cluster display. Refer to “Instrument
Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
WARNING!
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the
skin because of advanced age, chronic
illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medica-
tion, alcohol use, exhaustion or other phys-
ical condition must exercise care when
using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if
used for long periods of time.
Do not place anything on the seat or seat-
back that insulates against heat, such as a
blanket or cushion. This may cause the seat
heater to overheat. Sitting in a seat that has
been overheated could cause serious
burns due to the increased surface
temperature of the seat.
WARNING!
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the
skin because of advanced age, chronic
illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medica-
tion, alcohol use, exhaustion or other phys-
ical condition must exercise care when
using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if
used for long periods of time.
Do not place anything on the seat or seat-
back that insulates against heat, such as a
blanket or cushion. This may cause the seat
heater to overheat. Sitting in a seat that has
been overheated could cause serious
burns due to the increased surface
temperature of the seat.
2
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 29
30 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Plastic Grocery Bag Retainer Hooks
Retainer hooks which will hold plastic grocery
bag handles are built into the seatbacks of all
rear seats and some front seats. The floor
supports the partial weight of the bagged
goods.
HEAD RESTRAINTS
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk
of injury by restricting head movement in the
event of a rear impact. Head restraints should
be adjusted so that the top of the head restraint
is located above the top of your ear.
Supplemental Active Head Restraints —
Front Seats
Active Head Restraints are passive, deployable
components, and vehicles with this equipment
cannot be readily identified by any markings,
only through visual inspection of the head
restraint. The Active Head Restraints (AHR) will
be split in two halves, with the front half being
soft foam and trim, the back half being
decorative plastic.
When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the
front half of the head restraint extends forward
to reduce the gap between the back of the
occupant’s head and the AHR. This system is
design to reduce the risk of injury to the driver
or front passenger in certain types of rear
impacts. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in
“Safety” for further information.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the
head restraint. To lower the head restraint,
push the adjustment button, located at the
base of the head restraint, and push downward
on the head restraint.
Adjustment Button
For comfort, the Active Head Restraints can be
tilted forward and rearward. To tilt the head
restraint closer to the back of your head, pull
forward on the bottom of the head restraint.
Push rearward on the bottom of the head
restraint to move the head restraint away from
your head.
Active Head Restraint (Normal Position)
WARNING!
All occupants, including the driver, should
not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s
seat until the head restraints are placed in
their proper positions in order to minimize
the risk of neck injury in the event of a
crash.
Head restraints should never be adjusted
while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a
vehicle with the head restraints improperly
adjusted or removed could cause serious
injury or death in the event of a collision.
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 30
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 31
(Continued)
Active Head Restraint (Tilted)
NOTE:
The head restraints should only be removed
by qualified technicians, for service purposes
only. If either of the head restraints require
removal, see an authorized dealer.
In the event of deployment of an Active Head
Restraint, refer to “Occupant Restraints/
Resetting Active Head Restraints (AHR)” in
“Safety” for further information.
Head Restraints — Second Row Quad Seats
The head restraints on the second row quad
seats are non-adjustable and non-removable.
The head restraint will automatically fold
forward when the seat release lever is pulled
during the Stow n’ Go procedure. Refer to
“Seats” in this chapter for further information.
WARNING!
ALL the head restraints MUST be rein-
stalled in the vehicle to properly protect the
occupants.
All occupants, including the driver, should
not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s
seat until the head restraints are placed in
their proper positions in order to minimize
the risk of neck injury in the event of a
collision.
Do not place items over the top of the
Active Head Restraint, such as coats, seat
covers or portable DVD players. These
items may interfere with the operation of
the Active Head Restraint in the event of a
collision and could result in serious injury or
death.
Active Head Restraints may be deployed if
they are struck by an object such as a hand,
foot or loose cargo. To avoid accidental
deployment of the Active Head Restraint
ensure that all cargo is secured, as loose
cargo could contact the Active Head
Restraint during sudden stops. Failure to
follow this warning could cause personal
injury if the Active Head Restraint is
deployed.
WARNING! (Continued)
2
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 31
32 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Head Restraints — Second Row Bench
The second row bench seat is equipped with
adjustable head restraints.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the
head restraint. To lower the head restraint,
push the adjustment button, located at the
base of the head restraint, and push downward.
Adjustment Button
To remove the head restraint, raise it as far as it
can go. Then, push the release button and the
adjustment button at the base of each post
while pulling the head restraint up. Seatback
angle may need to be adjusted to fully remove
the head restraint. To reinstall the head
restraint, put the head restraint posts into the
holes and push downward. Then, adjust the
head restraint to the appropriate height.
NOTE:
For child restraint tethering, refer to “Occupant
Restraint Systems” in “Safety” for further
information.
Head Restraints — Third Row
The outboard head restraints can be manually
folded forward for improved rearward visibility.
They are non-removable. Pull the release strap
to fold them forward.
Head Restraint Release Strap “1”
NOTE:
The head restraints must be raised manually
when occupying the third row.
Do not fold if there are passengers seated in
the third row seats.
1 — Release Button
2 — Adjustment Button
WARNING!
A loose head restraint thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could cause serious
injury or death to occupants of the vehicle.
Always securely stow removed head
restraints in a location outside the occu-
pant compartment.
ALL the head restraints MUST be rein-
stalled in the vehicle to properly protect the
occupants. Follow the re-installation
instructions above prior to operating the
vehicle or occupying a seat.
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 32
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 33
The head restraint in the center position can be
raised and lowered for tether routing or height
adjustment. Refer to “Occupant Restraint
Systems” in “Safety” for further information.
NOTE:
To remove the center head restraint, raise it as
far as it can go. Then, push both the release
button and the adjustment button at the base of
each post while pulling the head restraint up. To
reinstall the head restraint, put the head
restraint posts into the holes and push
downward. Then, using the adjustment button,
adjust the head restraint to the appropriate
height.
Adjustment Button
Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Safety” for
further information.
STEERING WHEEL
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column
This feature allows you to tilt the steering
column upward or downward. It also allows you
to lengthen or shorten the steering column. The
tilt/telescoping lever is located below the
steering wheel at the end of the steering
column.
Tilt/Telescoping Lever
To unlock the steering column, push the lever
downward (toward the floor). To tilt the steering
column, move the steering wheel upward or
downward as desired. To lengthen or shorten
the steering column, pull the steering wheel
outward or push it inward as desired. To lock
the steering column in position, push the lever
upward until fully engaged.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while
driving. Adjusting the steering column while
driving or driving with the steering column
unlocked, could cause the driver to lose
control of the vehicle. Failure to follow this
warning may result in serious injury or death.
2
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 33
34 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped
The steering wheel contains a heating element
that helps warm your hands in cold weather.
The heated steering wheel has only one
temperature setting. Once the heated steering
wheel has been turned on it can operate for an
average of 80 minutes before automatically
shutting off. This time may vary depending on
the temperature of the environment.
The heated steering wheel can shut off early or
may not turn on when the steering wheel is
already warm.
The heated steering wheel control button is
located on the center of the instrument panel
below the climate controls.
Push the heated steering wheel button
once to turn the heating element on.
Push the heated steering wheel button a
second time to turn the heating element off.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the heated
steering wheel to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start,
the heated steering wheel can be programed to
come on during a remote start. Refer to
“Instrument Cluster Display” in
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
MIRRORS
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
The mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left,
and right for various drivers. The mirror should
be adjusted to center on the view through the
rear window.
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight
glare from vehicles behind you.
NOTE:
The Automatic Dimming feature is disabled
when the vehicle is in REVERSE to improve rear
view viewing.
WARNING!
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the
skin because of advanced age, chronic
illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medica-
tion, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other phys-
ical conditions must exercise care when
using the steering wheel heater. It may
cause burns even at low temperatures,
especially if used for long periods.
Do not place anything on the steering wheel
that insulates against heat, such as a
blanket or steering wheel covers of any type
and material. This may cause the steering
wheel heater to overheat.
WARNING! (Continued)
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 34
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 35
The Automatic Dimming feature can be turned
on or off through the touchscreen.
Press the mirror dimmer button once to turn
the feature on.
Press the mirror dimmer button a second
time to turn the feature off.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
Automatic Dimming Mirror With Rear View
Camera Display — If Equipped
A single ball joint mirror is provided in the
vehicle. It is a twist on mirror that has a fixed
position at the windshield. The mirror installs on
the windshield button with a counterclockwise
rotation and requires no tools for mounting. The
mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left, and
right for various drivers. The mirror should be
adjusted to center on the view through the rear
window.
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight
glare from vehicles behind you.
When the vehicle is placed into reverse gear, a
video display illuminates to display the image
generated by the rear view camera located on
the liftgate handle. The auto dimming feature is
also disabled to improve rear view viewing.
Automatic Dimming Mirror With Rear View Camera
Outside Mirrors
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside
mirror(s) to center on the adjacent lane of traffic
with a slight overlap of the view obtained on the
inside mirror.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during
cleaning, never spray any cleaning solution
directly onto the mirror. Apply the solution
onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean.
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in an outside
convex mirror will look smaller and farther
away than they really are. Relying too much
on side convex mirrors could cause you to
collide with another vehicle or other object.
Use your inside mirror when judging the size
or distance of a vehicle seen in a side convex
mirror.
2
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 35
36 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Interior Observation Mirror
The convex interior observation mirror provides
the driver and front seat passenger a wide field
of view to conveniently view passengers sitting
in the rear passenger seats. To use the interior
observation mirror, push on the raised bars on
the compartment door and release (the door
will swing downward), then raise the door until it
is almost closed and release. The door will latch
in position to use the interior observation
mirror.
NOTE:
From the “observation mirror” position, the door
can only be closed.
To return to the full open position, the door must
first be closed and then opened by pushing the
latch again to release.
Observation Mirror
Power Mirrors — If Equipped
The power mirror controls are located on the
driver-side door trim panel.
Power Mirror Controls
The power mirror controls consist of mirror
select buttons and a four-way mirror control
switch. To adjust a mirror, push either the L
(left) or R (right) to select the mirror that you
want to adjust.
NOTE:
A light in the selected button will illuminate
indicating the mirror is activated and can be
adjusted.
Using the mirror control switch, push on any of
the four arrows for the direction that you want
the mirror to move.
Outside Mirrors Folding Feature
All outside mirrors are hinged and may be
moved either forward or rearward to resist
damage. The hinges have three detent
positions:
Full forward position
Full rearward position
Normal position
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 36
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 37
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are heated to melt frost
or ice. This feature will be activated
whenever you turn on the rear window
defroster (if equipped). Refer to “Climate
Controls” in this chapter for further information.
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped
An illuminated vanity mirror is located on the
sun visor. To use the mirror, rotate the sun visor
down and swing the mirror cover upward. The
lights turn on automatically. Closing the mirror
cover turns off the lights.
Lift Mirror Cover
EXTERIOR LIGHTS
Headlight Switch
The headlight switch is located on the left side
of the instrument panel. The switch controls the
operation of the headlights, parking lights,
instrument panel lights, interior lights and the
fog lights (if equipped).
Headlight Switch
Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the
first detent for parking light and instrument
panel light operation. Rotate the headlight
switch to the second detent for headlight,
parking light and instrument panel operation.
Multifunction Lever
The multifunction lever is located on the left
side of the steering column.
Multifunction Lever
The multifunction lever controls the:
Turn Signals
Headlight Beams Low/High
Flash-To-Pass
Front and Rear Wipers/Washer Functions
2
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 37
38 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) — If
Equipped
The headlights on your vehicle will illuminate
when the engine is started and the
transmission is in any gear except PARK. This
provides a constant "lights on" condition until
the ignition is placed in the OFF position. The
lights illuminate at less than half of normal
intensity. If the parking brake is applied, the
Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) will turn off.
Also, if a turn signal is activated, the DRL lamp
on the same side of the vehicle may turn off for
the duration of the turn signal activation. Once
the turn signal is no longer active, the DRL lamp
will illuminate.
High/Low Beam Switch
Push the multifunction lever toward the
instrument panel to switch the headlights to
high beams. Pulling the multifunction lever
back toward the steering wheel will return the
lights to low beams.
Flash-To-Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your
headlights by lightly pulling the multifunction
lever toward you. This will cause the high beam
headlights to turn on, and remain on, until the
lever is released.
Automatic Headlights
This system automatically turns the headlights
on or off according to ambient light levels. To
turn the system on, rotate the headlight switch
counterclockwise to the AUTO position. When
the system is on, the headlight time delay
feature is also on. This means the headlights
will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you place
the ignition into the OFF position. The headlight
time delay can be programmed to 0, 30, 60, or
90 seconds. Refer to “Headlight Delay” in this
section for further information.
To turn the automatic system off, move the
headlight switch out of the AUTO position.
NOTE:
The engine must be running before the
headlights will come on in the automatic mode.
Headlights On With Wipers — If Equipped
When your headlights are in the AUTO mode
and the engine is running, the headlights will
automatically turn on when the wiper system is
also turned on. Headlights on when windshield
wipers are on may be found on vehicles
equipped with an automatic headlight system.
NOTE:
The Headlights with Wipers feature can be
turned on or off through the instrument cluster
display. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
Headlight Delay — If Equipped
This feature provides the safety of headlight
illumination for up to 90 seconds after exiting
your vehicle.
To activate the delay feature, place the ignition
in the OFF position while the headlights are still
on. Then turn off the headlights within 45
seconds. The 90 second delay interval begins
when the headlight switch is turned off. If the
headlights or parking lights are turned back on
or the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, the delay will be cancelled.
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 38
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 39
When exiting the vehicle the driver can choose
to have the headlights remain on for 30, 60 or
90 seconds or not remain on. To change the
timer setting, see an authorized dealer.
The headlight delay time is programmable on
vehicles equipped with an instrument cluster
display. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
If the headlights are turned off before the
ignition, they will turn off in the normal manner.
NOTE:
The headlights must be turned off within 45
seconds of placing the ignition in the OFF
position to activate this feature.
Lights-On Reminder
If the headlights or the parking lights are left on,
or if the dimmer control is in the extreme top
position after the ignition has been placed in
the OFF position, a chime will sound when the
driver's door is opened.
Front Fog Lights — If Equipped
To activate the front fog lights, turn on the
parking lights or the low beam headlights and
push in the headlight switch control knob.
Pushing the headlight switch control knob a
second time will turn the front fog lights off.
Turn Signals
Move the multifunction lever up or down and
the arrows on each side of the instrument
cluster display will flash to show proper
operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.
NOTE:
If either light remains on and does not flash, or
there is a very fast flash rate, check for a
defective outside light bulb. If an indicator fails
to light when the lever is moved, it would
suggest that the indicator bulb is defective.
Turn Signal Warning
If the vehicle electronics sense that the vehicle
has traveled at over 18 mph (29 km/h) for
about 1 mile (1.6 km) with the turn signals on, a
chime will sound to alert the driver.
Lane Change Assist
Tap the lever up or down once, without moving
beyond the detent, and the turn signal (right or
left) will flash three times then automatically
turn off.
Battery Protection
This feature provides battery protection to avoid
wearing down the battery if the headlights or
parking lights are left on for extended periods of
time when the ignition is in the OFF position.
After eight minutes of the ignition being placed
in the OFF position, and the headlight switch in
any position other than OFF or AUTO, the lights
will turn off automatically until the next cycle of
the ignition or headlight switch.
The battery protection feature will be disabled if
the ignition is placed in any position other than
OFF during the eight minute delay.
INTERIOR LIGHTS
Courtesy/Interior Lighting
At the forward end of the overhead console are
two courtesy lights (standard dome light has
two buttons). These interior lights are turned on
when a door or the liftgate is opened, the
remote keyless entry key fob is activated, or
when the dimmer control is moved to the
extreme top.
2
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 39
40 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
The interior lights will automatically turn off in
approximately 10 minutes for the first
activation and 90 seconds every activation
thereafter until the engine is started, if one of
the following occur:
A door, sliding door or the liftgate is left open.
Any overhead reading light is left on.
NOTE:
The ignition must be placed in the OFF position
for this feature to operate.
The courtesy lights also function as reading
lights. Push in on each lens to turn these lights
on while inside the vehicle. Push a second time
to turn each light off. You may adjust the
direction of these lights by pushing the outside
ring, which is identified with four directional
arrows (LED lamps only).
Rear Courtesy/Reading Lights — If Equipped
The overhead console has two sets of courtesy
lights. The lights turn on when a front door, a
sliding door or the liftgate is opened. If your
vehicle is equipped with Remote Keyless Entry,
the lights will also turn on when the unlock
button on the key fob is pushed.
The courtesy lights also function as reading
lights. Push in on each lens to turn these lights
on while inside the vehicle. Push the lens a
second time to turn each light off. You may
adjust the direction of these lights by pushing
the outside ring, which is identified with four
directional arrows.
Reading Lights
Rear Console Halo Lighting
Halo lights are strategically placed soft lighting
that help to illuminate specific areas to aid the
occupants in locating specific features while
driving at night.
The rear overhead console has recessed halo
lighting around the perimeter of the console
base. This feature provides additional lighting
options while traveling and is controlled by the
ambient light dimmer control of the headlight
switch.
Ambient Light Dimmer Control
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 40
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 41
Dimmer Controls
The dimmer switch is located next to the
headlight switch.
Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
With the parking lights or headlights on, rotating
the left dimmer control upward will increase the
brightness of the instrument panel lights.
Rotating the left dimmer control completely
upward to the second detent (extreme top
position) will turn on the interior lights. The
interior lights will remain on when the dimmer
control is in this position.
Rotating the left dimmer control to the off
position (extreme bottom) will turn the interior
lights off, and will remain off when the doors or
liftgate are opened.
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness Feature)
Rotate the dimmer control upward to the first
detent. This feature brightens all text displays
such as the odometer, instrument cluster
display, and radio when the parking lights or
headlights are on.
WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHERS
The wipers and washers are operated by a
switch within the multifunction lever. Rotate the
end of the multifunction lever to select the
desired wiper speed.
Washer And Wiper Controls
NOTE:
Always remove any buildup of snow that
prevents the windshield wiper blades from
returning to the off position. If the windshield
wiper switch is turned off and the blades cannot
return to the off position, damage to the wiper
motor may occur.
Windshield Wiper Operation
Rotate the end of the lever upward, to the first
detent past the intermittent settings for
low-speed wiper operation. Rotate the end of
the lever upward to the second detent past the
intermittent settings for high-speed wiper
operation.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the
windshield could lead to a collision. You might
not see other vehicles or other obstacles. To
avoid sudden icing of the windshield during
freezing weather, warm the windshield with
the defroster before and during windshield
washer use.
2
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 41
42 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Intermittent Wiper System
Use the intermittent wiper when weather
conditions make a single wiping cycle with a
variable pause between cycles desirable.
Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to the
first detent position, and then turn the end of
the lever to select the desired delay interval.
There are five delay settings, which allow you to
regulate the wipe interval from a minimum of
one cycle every second to a maximum of
approximately 36 seconds between cycles. The
delay intervals will double in duration when the
vehicle speed is 10 mph (16 km/h) or less.
Windshield Washers
To use the windshield washer, push on the end
of the lever to the second detent and hold while
spray is desired. If the lever is pushed while on
the intermittent setting, the wipers will turn on
and operate for several wipe cycles after the
lever is released, and then resume the
intermittent interval previously selected. If the
lever is pushed while the wipers are in the off
position, the wipers will operate several wipe
cycles, then turn off.
Mist Feature
Push the end of the multifunction lever inward
(toward the steering column) to the first detent
and release for a single wiping cycle.
NOTE:
The mist feature does not activate the washer
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed
on the windshield. The wash function must be
used in order to spray the windshield with
washer fluid.
Rear Wiper And Washer
Rotating the center ring of the wiper lever to the
first detent activates the rear intermittent
wipers. To activate the washers, rotate the
center ring fully forward and the washers will
spray until the ring is released, and then
resume the intermittent interval.
NOTE:
Rear window wipers function in the intermittent
wiper speed only.
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The Climate Control system allows you to
regulate the temperature, air flow, and direction
of air circulating throughout the vehicle. The
controls are located on the touchscreen (if
equipped) and on the instrument panel below
the radio.
Manual Climate Control Overview
The air conditioning and heating system is
designed to make you comfortable in all types
of weather.
Manual Temperature Controls
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 42
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 43
Manual Climate Control Descriptions
Icon Description
A/C Button
Push the A/C button to engage the Air Conditioning (A/C). An LED will illuminate when the A/C system is engaged.
Recirculation Button
Press and release this button to change the system between recirculation mode and outside air mode. Recirculation can
be used when outside conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity are present. Recirculation can be used in all
modes except for Defrost. Recirculation may be unavailable if conditions exist that could create fogging on the inside of the
windshield. The A/C can be deselected manually without disturbing the mode control selection. Continuous use of the
Recirculation may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur. Extended use of this mode is not
recommended.
Front Defrost Mode Button
The Front Defrost button changes the current airflow setting to Defrost mode. The indicator illuminates when this feature is
on. Air comes from the windshield and side window demist outlets. When the defrost mode is selected, the blower level will
increase. Use Defrost mode with maximum temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting and
defogging.
Rear Defrost Button
Push and release the Rear Defrost Control button to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors
(if equipped). An indicator will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically
turns off after 15 minutes.
Left Front Temperature Control
Provides left front seat occupant with independent temperature control. Turn left for cooler or right for warmer temperature
settings.
2
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 43
44 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Front Blower Control
There are seven blower speeds. Use this control to regulate the amount of air forced through the system in any mode you
select. The blower speed increases as you move the control clockwise from the off position.
Right Front Temperature Control
Provides right front seat occupant with independent temperature control. Turn left for cooler or right for warmer
temperature settings.
Panel Mode
Panel Mode Button
Push button to select Panel Mode. The indicator illuminates when this mode is on. Air comes from the outlets in the
instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the center
outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow direction.
Bi-Level Mode
Bi-Level Mode Button
Push button to select Bi–Level Mode. The indicator illuminates when this mode is on. Air comes from the instrument panel
outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
NOTE:
Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air from the
floor outlets.
Icon Description
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 44
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 45
Controlling The Rear Climate Controls From
The Front Panel Controls
The rear Manual Climate Control system has
floor air outlets at the rear right side of the third
row seats and overhead outlets at each
outboard rear seating position. The system
provides heated air through the floor outlets or
cool, dehumidified air through the headliner
outlets.
The rear system temperature control buttons on
the faceplate are located below the radio
system, located on the instrument panel.
Floor Mode
Floor Mode Button
Push button to select Floor Mode. The indicator illuminates when this mode is on. Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight
amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
Mix Mode
Mix Mode Button
Push button to select Mix Mode. The indicator illuminates when this mode is on. Air is directed through the floor, defrost,
and side window demister outlets. This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the
windshield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.
Icon Description
2
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 45
46 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Manual Temperature Control
The Three-Zone climate control system allows
for adjustment of the rear climate controls from
the rear MTC panel.
Icon Description
Rear Blower Control — If Equipped
Use this control to regulate the amount of air forced through the rear system in any mode you select. The rear blower speed
increases as you move the control to the right from the O (off) position. There are seven blower speeds. To allow the rear
overhead control, turn the knob fully to the left, past the O (off) position into the REAR control position.
Rear Temperature Control — If Equipped
Provides temperature control for the rear cabin. Turn left for cooler or right for warmer temperature settings in the rear
cabin.
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 46
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 47
Icon Description
Panel Mode
Rear Panel Mode
To change Rear Mode to Panel Mode, turn the Rear Mode Knob to Rear Panel Mode position. Air comes from the outlets in
the headliner. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air. Moving the air vanes of the outlets
to one side will shut off the airflow.
Bi-Level Mode
Rear Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from both the headliner outlets and the floor outlets.
NOTE:
To change Rear Mode to Bi-Level Mode, turn the Rear Mode Knob to Rear Bi-Level Mode position. In many temperature
positions, the Bi-Level mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the headliner outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Rear Floor Mode
To change Rear Mode to Floor Mode, turn the Rear Mode Knob to Rear Floor Mode position. Air comes from the floor outlets.
Rear Temperature Control Knob
To change the temperature in the rear of the vehicle, turn the Temperature Control Knob. Turn it to the right to raise the
temperature, or turn it to the left to lower the temperature. The rear temperature settings are displayed in control head.
When rear controls are locked by the front system, the Rear Temperature Lock symbol on the control head is illuminated and
any rear overhead adjustments are ignored.
Rear Blower Control Knob
The rear blower control can be manually set to off, or any fixed blower speed by rotating the Blower Control Knob in the rear
of the vehicle. This allows the rear seat occupants to control the volume of air circulated in the rear of the vehicle.
2
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 47
48 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Climate Control Overview
Automatic Temperature Controls
Automatic Climate Control Descriptions
Icon Description
A/C Button
Push the A/C button to engage the Air Conditioning (A/C). An LED will illuminate when the A/C system is engaged.
Automatic Operation
Automatically controls the interior cabin temperature by adjusting airflow distribution and amount. Toggling this function
will cause the system to switch between manual mode and automatic modes. Refer to “Automatic Operation” within this
section for more information.
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 48
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 49
Recirculation Button
Press and release this button to change the system between recirculation mode and outside air mode. Recirculation can
be used when outside conditions such as smoke, odors, or high humidity are present. Recirculation can be used in all
modes except for Defrost. Recirculation may be unavailable (button on the touchscreen greyed out) if conditions exist that
could create fogging on the inside of the windshield. The A/C can be deselected manually without disturbing the mode
control selection. Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur.
Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
Rear Climate Control Button
Push the Rear Climate Control Button to control rear compartment climate from the Front ATC Panel. The rear climate
modes will be displayed on the Front Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) Panel Rear Control Display.
Rear Defrost Button
Push and release the Rear Defrost Control button to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors
(if equipped). An indicator will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically
turns off after 15 minutes.
Driver and Passenger Temperature Up And Down Buttons
Provides the driver and passenger with independent temperature control. Push the up arrow button for warmer
temperature settings. Push the blue arrow button for cooler temperature settings.
Icon Description
2
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 49
50 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Blower Control
There are seven blower speeds. Use this control to regulate the amount of air forced through the system in any mode you
select. The blower speed increases as you move the control clockwise from the off position.
NOTE:
Depending on the configuration, your vehicle may be equipped with four blower speeds.
Modes Control Button
Toggle the Modes Control Button to adjust airflow distribution. The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air comes
from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets, defrost outlets and demist outlets. The Mode settings are as follows:
Panel Mode
Panel Mode
Toggle the Modes Control Button until you see Panel Mode Icon on the display. Air comes from the outlets in the instrument
panel. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the center outlets and
outboard outlets can be moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow direction.
Bi-Level Mode
Bi-Level Mode
Toggle the Modes Control Button until you see Bi-Level Mode Icon on the display. Air comes from the instrument panel
outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
NOTE:
Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air from the
floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Floor Mode
Toggle the Modes Control Button until you see Floor Mode Icon on the display. Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight
amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
Icon Description
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 50
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 51
Controlling The Rear Climate Controls From
The Front ATC Panel
The rear ATC system has floor air outlets at the
rear right side of the third row seats and
overhead outlets at each outboard rear seating
position. The system provides heated air
through the floor outlets or cool, dehumidified
air through the headliner outlets. The rear
system temperature control buttons are located
in the Uconnect system, located on the
instrument panel.
Front ATC Panel Rear Control Display
Mix Mode
Mix Mode
Toggle the Modes Control Button until you see Mix Mode Icon on the display. Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and
side window demister outlets. This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield.
This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.
Front Defrost Mode
Front Defrost Mode Button
Push the button to select Front Defrost Mode. The indicator illuminates when this mode is on. Air comes from the
windshield and side window demist outlets. When the defrost mode is selected, the blower level will increase. Use Defrost
mode with maximum temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting and defogging.
Icon Description
2
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 51
52 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Icon Description
Rear Lock Button
Press to lock out the rear manual temperature controls from adjusting the rear temperature and blower settings.
Rear Passenger Temperature Up and Down Buttons
Provides the rear passengers with independent temperature control. Push the up arrow button to increase the
temperature. Push the down arrow button to decrease the temperature. When the SYNC feature is active, the rear
temperature and the front passenger’s temperature will move up and down with the driver’s temperature.
SYNC Button — If Equipped
Press the SYNC button to toggle the Sync feature on/off. The SYNC indicator is illuminated when this feature is enabled.
SYNC is used to synchronize the front and rear passenger temperature settings with the driver temperature setting.
Changing the front or rear passenger temperature setting while in SYNC will automatically exit this feature.
Rear Blower Control
Turn the Blower Control Knob clockwise or counter clockwise to adjust blower speed. There are seven blower speeds. Use
this control to regulate the amount of air forced through the system in any mode you select in Rear Compartment. The
blower speed increases as you move the control clockwise from the off position.
Panel Mode
Rear Panel Mode
Toggle the Modes Control Button until Rear Panel Mode appears on the display. Air comes from the outlets in the headliner.
Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air. Moving the air vanes of the outlets to one side
will shut off the airflow.
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 52
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 53
Rear Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) —
If Equipped
The Three-Zone ATC system allows for
adjustment of the rear climate controls from the
front ATC panel. To change the rear system
settings:
Press the REAR button to change control to
rear control mode, Rear display will appear.
Control functions now operate rear system.
To return to Front screen, press the REAR
button again, or it will revert to the Front
screen after six seconds.
Rear ATC Control Features
1. Adjust the Rear Blower, Rear Temperature
and the Rear Modes to suit your comfort
needs.
2. ATC is selected by pushing the AUTO button.
Once the desired temperature is displayed, the
ATC System will automatically achieve and
maintain that comfort level. When the system is
set up for your comfort level, it is not necessary
to change the settings. You will experience the
greatest efficiency by simply allowing the
system to function automatically.
Bi-Level Mode
Rear Bi-Level Mode
Toggle the Modes Control Button until the Rear Bi-Level Mode appears on the display. Air comes from both the headliner
outlets and the floor outlets.
NOTE:
In many temperature positions, the Bi-Level mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the headliner outlets and warmer
air from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Rear Floor Mode
Toggle the Modes Control Button until the Rear Floor Mode appears on the display. Air comes from the floor vents.
Icon Description
2
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 53
54 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
It is not necessary to move the temperature settings. The system automatically adjusts the temperature, mode and fan speed to provide comfort as
quickly as possible.
Icon Description
Rear Mode Control Knob
Rotate knob to change the air distribution mode for the rear passengers to one of the following:
Panel Mode
Rear Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the headliner. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air.
Moving the air vanes of the outlets to one side will shut off the airflow.
Bi-Level Mode
Rear Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from both the headliner outlets and the floor outlets.
NOTE:
In many temperature positions, the Bi-Level mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the headliner outlets and warmer
air from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Rear Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets.
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 54
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 55
Rear Temperature Control Knob
To change the temperature in the rear of the vehicle, turn the Temperature Control Knob. Turn it to the right to raise the
temperature, or turn it to the left to lower the temperature. The rear temperature settings are displayed in control head.
When rear controls are locked by the front system, the Rear Temperature Lock symbol on the control head is illuminated and
any rear overhead adjustments are ignored.
Push the Rear Temperature Lock button on the front ATC panel. This turns off the Rear Temperature Lock icon in the rear
temperature knob.
Rear Blower Control Knob
The rear blower control can be manually set to off, or any fixed blower speed by rotating the Blower Control Knob in the rear
of the vehicle. This allows the rear seat occupants to control the volume of air circulated in the rear of the vehicle.
Rear AUTO Mode
Rear AUTO is selected by adjusting the rear blower knob counterclockwise to AUTO. The ATC system will automatically achieve
and maintain that comfort level. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is not necessary to change the settings.
You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to function automatically.
Icon Description
2
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 55
56 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Climate Control Functions
A/C (Air Conditioning)
The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the
operator to manually activate or deactivate the
air conditioning system. When the air
conditioning system is turned on, cool
dehumidified air will flow through the outlets
into the cabin. For improved fuel economy,
press the A/C button to turn off the air
conditioning and manually adjust the blower
and airflow mode settings. Also, make sure to
select only Panel, Bi-Level, or Floor modes.
NOTE:
For Manual Climate Controls, if the system is
in Mix, Floor or Defrost Mode, the A/C can be
turned off, but the A/C system shall remain
active to prevent fogging of the windows.
If fog or mist appears on the windshield or
side glass, select Defrost mode, and increase
blower speed if needed.
If your air conditioning performance seems
lower than expected, check the front of the
A/C condenser (located in front of the radi-
ator), for an accumulation of dirt or insects.
Clean with a gentle water spray from the front
of the radiator and through the condenser.
MAX A/C
MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cooling
performance.
Press and release to toggle between MAX A/C
and the prior settings. The button illuminates
when MAX A/C is on.
In MAX A/C, the blower level and mode position
can be adjusted to desired user settings.
Pressing other settings will cause the MAX A/C
operation to switch to the selected setting and
MAX A/C to exit.
Recirculation
In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may
lead to excessive window fogging. The Recircu-
lation feature may be unavailable (button on
the touchscreen greyed out) if conditions exist
that could create fogging on the inside of the
windshield.
On systems with Manual Climate Controls, if
equipped, the Recirculation mode is not
allowed in Defrost mode to improve window
clearing operation. Recirculation is disabled
automatically if this mode is selected.
Attempting to use Recirculation while in this
mode causes the LED in the control button to
blink and then turns off.
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If
Equipped
Automatic Operation
1. Push the AUTO button on the faceplate, or
the AUTO button on the touchscreen on the
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)
Panel.
2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like
the system to maintain by adjusting the
driver and passenger temperature control
buttons. Once the desired temperature is
displayed, the system will achieve and
automatically maintain that comfort level.
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 56
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 57
3. When the system is set up for your comfort
level, it is not necessary to change the
settings. You will experience the greatest
efficiency by simply allowing the system to
function automatically.
NOTE:
It is not necessary to move the temperature
settings for cold or hot vehicles. The system
automatically adjusts the temperature,
mode, and blower speed to provide comfort
as quickly as possible.
The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or
Metric units by selecting the U.S./Metric
customer programmable feature. To provide
you with maximum comfort in the Automatic
mode during cold start-ups, the blower fan
will remain on low until the engine warms up.
The blower will increase in speed and transi-
tion into AUTO mode.
Manual Operation Override
This system offers a full complement of manual
override features. The AUTO symbol in the front
ATC display will be turned off when the system
is being used in the manual mode.
Operating Tips
NOTE:
Refer to the chart at the end of this section for
suggested control settings for various weather
conditions.
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system must be protected
with a high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide
proper corrosion protection and to protect
against engine overheating. OAT coolant
(conforming to MS.90032) is recommended.
Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical
Specifications” for proper coolant selection.
Winter Operation
To ensure the best possible heater and
defroster performance, make sure the engine
cooling system is functioning properly and the
proper amount, type, and concentration of
coolant is used. Refer to “Fluids And
Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications” for
proper coolant selection. Use of the air Recircu-
lation mode during Winter months is not
recommended, because it may cause window
fogging.
Vacation/Storage
Before you store your vehicle, or keep it out of
service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more,
run the air conditioning system at idle for about
five minutes, in fresh air with the blower setting
on high. This will ensure adequate system
lubrication to minimize the possibility of
compressor damage when the system is started
again.
2
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 57
58 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Window Fogging
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in
mild, rainy, and/or humid weather. To clear the
windows, select Defrost or Mix mode and
increase the front blower speed. Do not use the
Recirculation mode without A/C for long
periods, as fogging may occur.
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in
front of the windshield, is free of obstructions
such as leaves. Leaves collected in the air
intake may reduce airflow, and if they enter the
plenum, they could plug the water drains. In
winter months, make sure the air intake is clear
of ice, slush, and snow.
A/C Air Filter
The climate control system filters out dust and
pollen from the air. Refer to an authorized
dealer for filter replacement instructions.
Operating Tips Chart
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause
damage to the heating elements:
Use care when washing the inside of the
rear window. Do not use abrasive window
cleaners on the interior surface of the
window. Use a soft cloth and a mild
washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off
after soaking with warm water.
Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or
abrasive window cleaners on the interior
surface of the window.
Keep all objects a safe distance from the
window.
WEATHER
CONTROL
SETTINGS
Hot Weather And
Vehicle Interior Is Very
Hot
Set the mode control
to , on, and
blower on high. Roll
down the windows for
a minute to flush out
the hot air. Adjust the
controls as needed to
achieve comfort.
Warm Weather
Turn on and set
the mode control to
the position.
Cool Sunny
Operate in
position.
Cool & Humid
Conditions
Set the mode control
to and turn on
to keep windows
clear.
Cold Weather
Set the mode control
to the position. If
windshield fogging
starts to occur, move
the control to the
position.
WEATHER
CONTROL
SETTINGS
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 58
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 59
WINDOWS
Power Vent Windows — If Equipped
The power vent window switch located on the
driver's door trim panel allows the driver to
operate the two vent windows from the driver's
seat.
Power Vent Window Switch Open/Close
Power Windows
You can control either the front or rear windows
using controls located on the driver's door trim
panel.
The driver may lock out the rear power windows
by pushing the bar control just below the power
window controls.
The controls will operate only when the ignition
switch is in the ON/RUN or ACC position and
during power accessory delay.
Power Window Lockout Switch
Driver Power Window Switches
NOTE:
Power window controls will also remain active
for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch
has been placed in the OFF position, depending
upon the accessory delay setting. Opening a
front door will cancel this feature.
There is a single control on the front
passenger’s door trim panel which operates the
passenger door window and a set of controls
that lock and unlock all doors. The controls will
operate only when the ignition switch is in the
ON/RUN or ACC position and during power
accessory delay.
Auto Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection — If
Equipped
The front driver and front passenger controls
may be equipped with an Auto Up feature. Lift
the window switch fully upward to the second
detent, release, and the window will go up
automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way up
during the Auto Up operation, push down on the
control briefly.
2
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 59
60 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
To close the window part way, lift the window
control to the first detent and release when you
want the window to stop.
NOTE:
If the window runs into any obstacle during
auto-closure, it will reverse direction and
then go back down. Remove the obstacle and
use the window control again to close the
window.
Any impact due to rough road conditions may
trigger the auto reverse function unexpect-
edly during auto-closure. If this happens, pull
the control lightly to the first detent and hold
to close window manually.
Auto Up Reset — If Equipped
To reactivate the Auto Up feature, perform the
following steps after vehicle power is restored:
1. Pull the window control up to close the
window completely and continue to hold
the control up for an additional two
seconds after the window is closed.
2. Push the window control down firmly to the
second detent to open the window
completely and continue to hold the control
down for an additional two seconds after
the window is fully open.
Sliding Side Door Power Window Control — If
Equipped
Second row passengers may open and close
the sliding door window by a single control on
the door handle assembly.
The controls will operate only when the ignition
switch is in the ON/RUN or ACC position and
during power accessory delay.
NOTE:
The controls will not operate if the driver has
activated the Power Window Lockout.
The sliding door windows do not open fully.
They stop several inches above the window
sill.
Sliding Door Power Window Control
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the
perception of pressure on the ears or a
helicopter-type sound in the ears. Your vehicle
may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows
down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal
occurrence and can be minimized. If the rear
windows are open and buffeting occurs, open
the front and rear windows together to minimize
the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs with the
sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
minimize the buffeting.
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the
window is almost closed. To avoid personal
injury be sure to clear your arms, hands,
fingers and all objects from the window path
before closing.
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 60
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 61
HOOD
Opening The Hood
To open the hood, two latches must be
released.
1. Pull the hood release lever located on the
instrument panel, below the steering
column.
Hood Release Lever
2. Move to the front of the vehicle and look
inside the center of the hood opening.
Locate, then push the safety catch
downward while raising the hood at the
same time.
Safety Lever Location
Use the hood prop rod to secure the hood in the
open position.
Hood Prop Rod
Closing The Hood
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving
your vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it
could open when the vehicle is in motion and
block your vision. Failure to follow this warning
could result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the
hood to close it. Lower hood to approximately
12 inches (30 cm) and drop the hood to
close. Make sure hood is fully closed for both
latches. Never drive vehicle unless hood is
fully closed, with both latches engaged.
2
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 61
62 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
LIFTGATE
Opening
To Unlock/Enter The Liftgate
The liftgate may be released in several ways:
Overhead console liftgate button
Key fob
Outside handle
Push the liftgate button on the key fob twice
within five seconds to release the liftgate.
Liftgate Handle
Closing
To Close The Liftgate
Grasp the liftgate closing handle and initiate
lowering the liftgate. Release the handle when
the liftgate takes over the closing effort.
The power liftgate may be closed by pushing the
rear power liftgate switch, located in the upper
left trim in the liftgate opening. Pushing once
will only close the liftgate. This button cannot be
used to open the liftgate.
Rear Power Liftgate Switch
Power Liftgate — If Equipped
The power liftgate may be opened or closed in
several ways:
Overhead console liftgate button
Key fob
Outside handle (opens liftgate only)
Rear power liftgate switch
(when liftgate is open)
WARNING!
Driving with the liftgate open can allow
poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle.
You and your passengers could be injured
by these fumes. Keep the liftgate closed
when you are operating the vehicle.
If you are required to drive with the liftgate
open, make sure that all windows are
closed, and the climate control blower
switch is set at high speed. Do not use the
recirculation mode.
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 62
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 63
Using the above ways:
When the liftgate is fully closed, the liftgate
will open
When the liftgate is fully open, the liftgate will
close
When the liftgate is moving, the liftgate will
reverse
Push the Power Liftgate button on the overhead
console to open or close the liftgate.
Push the liftgate button on the key fob twice
within five seconds to open or close the liftgate.
Overhead Console Power Switches
Cargo Area Features
Cargo Area Storage
The liftgate sill plate has a raised line with the
statement “Load To This Line”. This line
indicates how far rearward cargo can be placed
without interfering with liftgate closing.
Rear Cargo Area Loading Limit
NOTE:
With all rear seats stowed or removed, 4 x 8 foot
sheets of building material will fit on the vehicle
floor with the liftgate closed. The front seats
must be moved slightly forward of the rearmost
position.
LOAD LEVELING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The automatic load leveling system will provide
a level-riding vehicle under most passenger and
cargo loading conditions.
A hydraulic pump contained within the shock
absorbers raises the rear of the vehicle to the
correct height. It takes approximately 1 mile
(1.6 km) of driving for the leveling to complete
depending on road surface conditions.
If the leveled vehicle is not moved for approxi-
mately 15 hours, the leveling system will bleed
itself down. The vehicle must be driven to reset
the system.
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
HomeLink® replaces up to three remote
controls (hand-held transmitters) that operate
devices such as garage door openers,
motorized gates, lighting or home security
systems. The HomeLink® unit operates off your
vehicle’s battery.
1 — Left Sliding Door
2 — Liftgate
3 — Right Sliding Door
4 — Sliding Door Power Off
2
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 63
64 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
The HomeLink® buttons, located on either the
overhead console, headliner or sunvisor,
designate the three different HomeLink®
channels. The HomeLink® indicator is located
above the center button.
HomeLink® Buttons/Overhead Consoles
HomeLink® Buttons/Sunvisor/Headliner
NOTE:
HomeLink® is disabled when the vehicle
security alarm is active.
Before You Begin Programming HomeLink®
Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of
the garage before you begin programming.
For more efficient programming and accurate
transmission of the radio-frequency signal, it is
recommended that a new battery be placed in
the hand-held transmitter of the device that is
being programmed to the HomeLink® system.
To erase the channels, place the ignition in the
ON/RUN position and push and hold the two
outside HomeLink® buttons (I and III) for up to
20 seconds or until the red indicator flashes.
NOTE:
Erasing all channels should only be
performed when programming HomeLink®
for the first time. Do not erase channels when
programming additional buttons.
If you have any problems, or require assis-
tance, please call toll-free 1-800-355-3515
or, on the Internet at HomeLink.com for infor-
mation or assistance.
Programming A Rolling Code
For programming garage door openers that
were manufactured after 1995:
These garage door openers can be identified by
the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button located where
the hanging antenna is attached to the garage
door opener. It is NOT the button that is
normally used to open and close the door. The
name and color of the button may vary by
manufacturer.
Training The Garage Door Opener
1 — Door Opener
2 — Training Button
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 64
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 65
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter
1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the
HomeLink® button you wish to program
while keeping the HomeLink® indicator
light in view.
3. Push and hold the HomeLink® button you
want to program while you push and hold
the hand-held transmitter button.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe
the indicator light. The HomeLink®
indicator will flash slowly and then rapidly
after HomeLink® has received the
frequency signal from the hand-held
transmitter. Release both buttons after the
indicator light changes from slow to rapid.
5. At the garage door opener (in the garage),
locate the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button.
This can usually be found where the
hanging antenna wire is attached to the
garage door opener/device motor. Firmly
push and release the “LEARN” or
“TRAINING” button. On some garage door
openers/devices there may be a light that
blinks when the garage door opener/device
is in the LEARN/TRAIN mode.
NOTE:
You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the
next step after the LEARN button has been
pushed.
6. Return to the vehicle and push the
programmed HomeLink® button twice
(holding the button for two seconds each
time). If the garage door opener/device
activates, programming is complete.
NOTE:
If the garage door opener/device does not
activate, push the button a third time (for two
seconds) to complete the training.
To program the remaining two HomeLink®
buttons, repeat each step for each remain-
ing button. DO NOT erase the channels.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
(Rolling Code)
To reprogram a channel that has been
previously trained, follow these steps:
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink®
button until the indicator light begins to
flash after 20 seconds. Do not release the
button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with
“Programming A Rolling Code” step two and
follow all remaining steps.
Programming A Non-Rolling Code
For programming garage door openers
manufactured before 1995:
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go,
place the ignition in the RUN position with the
engine on. Make sure while programming
HomeLink® with the engine on that your vehicle
is outside of your garage, or that the garage
door remains open at all times.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter
1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the
HomeLink® button you wish to program
while keeping the HomeLink® indicator
light in view.
2
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 65
66 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
3. Push and hold the HomeLink® button you
want to program while you push and hold
the hand-held transmitter button.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe
the indicator light. The HomeLink®
indicator will flash slowly and then rapidly
after HomeLink® has received the
frequency signal from the hand-held
transmitter. Release both buttons after the
indicator light changes from slow to rapid.
5. Push and hold the programmed
HomeLink® button and observe the
indicator light.
If the indicator light stays on constantly,
programming is complete and the garage
door/device should activate when the
HomeLink® button is pushed.
To program the two remaining
HomeLink® buttons, repeat each step
for each remaining button. DO NOT erase
the channels.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
(Non-Rolling Code)
To reprogram a channel that has been
previously trained, follow these steps:
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink®
button until the indicator light begins to
flash after 20 seconds. Do not release the
button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with
“Programming A Non-Rolling Code” step two
and follow all remaining steps.
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming
For programming transmitters in
Canada/United States that require the
transmitter signals to “time-out” after several
seconds of transmission:
Canadian radio frequency laws require
transmitter signals to time-out (or quit) after
several seconds of transmission, which may not
be long enough for HomeLink® to pick up the
signal during programming. Similar to this
Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are
designed to time-out in the same manner.
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the
cycling process to prevent possible overheating
of the garage door or gate motor.
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter
1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the
HomeLink® button you wish to program
while keeping the HomeLink® indicator
light in view.
3. Continue to push and hold the HomeLink®
button while you push and release (“cycle”)
your hand-held transmitter every two
seconds until HomeLink® has successfully
accepted the frequency signal. The
indicator light will flash slowly and then
rapidly when fully trained.
4. Watch for the HomeLink® indicator to
change flash rates. When it changes, it is
programmed. It may take up to 30 seconds
or longer in rare cases. The garage door
may open and close while you are
programming.
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 66
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 67
5. Push and hold the programmed
HomeLink® button and observe the
indicator light.
NOTE:
If the indicator light stays on constantly,
programming is complete and the garage
door/device should activate when the
HomeLink® button is pushed.
To program the two remaining
HomeLink® buttons, repeat each step
for each remaining button. DO NOT erase
the channels.
If you unplugged the garage door
opener/device for programming, plug it back in
at this time.
Using HomeLink®
To operate, push and release the programmed
HomeLink® button. Activation will now occur for
the programmed device (i.e. garage door
opener, gate operator, security system, entry
door lock, home/office lighting, etc.) The
hand-held transmitter of the device may also be
used at any time.
Security
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell
or turn in your vehicle.
To do this, push and hold the two outside
buttons for 20 seconds until the red indicator
flashes.
NOTE:
All channels will be erased. Individual channels
cannot be erased.
The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver is
disabled when the vehicle security alarm is
active.
Troubleshooting Tips
If you are having trouble programming
HomeLink®, here are some of the most
common solutions:
Replace the battery in the garage door
opener hand-held transmitter.
Push the LEARN button on the garage door
opener to complete the training for a Rolling
Code.
Did you unplug the device for programming
and remember to plug it back in?
If you have any problems, or require assistance,
please call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the
Internet at HomeLink.com for information or
assistance.
WARNING!
Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide,
a dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in
the garage while programming the trans-
ceiver. Exhaust gas can cause serious
injury or death.
Your motorized door or gate will open and
close while you are programming the
universal transceiver. Do not program the
transceiver if people, pets or other objects
are in the path of the door or gate. Only use
this transceiver with a garage door opener
that has a “stop and reverse” feature as
required by Federal safety standards. This
includes most garage door opener models
manufactured after 1982. Do not use a
garage door opener without these safety
features.
2
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 67
68 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Innovation, Science and
Economic Development Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic
Development applicables aux appareils radio
exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée
aux deux conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de
brouillage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en compro-
mettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar
cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s authority to
operate the equipment.
INTERNAL EQUIPMENT
Storage
Glove Compartments
The glove compartment is located on the
passenger side of the instrument panel and
features both an upper and lower storage area.
Upper And Lower Glove Compartments
To open the upper compartment, push in the
release button located on the left side of the
upper door. The door will automatically open.
Upper Compartment Release Button
To close the compartment door, push
downward on the door's surface to latch the
door closed.
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 68
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 69
To open the lower compartment, pull the
release handle.
Lower Compartment Release Handle
NOTE:
The lower compartment is equipped with a lock
that is a part of the compartment handle.
Center Console Features
There are two consoles available: Basic and
Super.
Basic Console
The Basic Console consists of the following
features:
The Basic Console profile allows vehicle
occupants to easily pass through the first row
to the second.
Four cupholders accept up to extra large size
beverage cups or 20 oz (0.6 L) plastic bottles.
Cupholders are dishwasher safe for cleaning.
The cupholders are removable to access a
large storage bin.
The Basic Console is removable from the
vehicle for additional floor space by removing
the anchor cup plug and clip at the console
base, sliding the console base forward while
lifting slightly to clear the rear load floor hook.
To reinstall the Basic Console:
1. Position the console at a slight angle (front
slightly higher than the rear).
2. Slide the console rearward into the floor
bracket/hook.
3. Align the console until the front anchor cup
plug hole is centered on the winch hole.
4. Reinstall the clip first and then while
pushing downward on the console with
slight pressure, reinstall the cover plug.
5. Pull up on the console to be sure it is firmly
latched.
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a console
compartment lid in the open position. Driving
with the console compartment lid open may
result in injury in a collision.
WARNING!
In an accident, serious injury could result if
the removable floor console is not properly
installed. Always be sure the removable floor
console is fully latched.
2
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 69
70 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Super Console — If Equipped
The Super Console contains multiple storage
areas: a front lower pass through, top forward
bin, top rearward bin and rear pull out drawer.
The Super Console contains a pass through
storage area accessible for both the driver and
front passenger.
Super Console Pass Through
The Super Console tambour doors are opened
by pushing down on the finger tabs and sliding
the door. The front tambour door slides forward,
the rear tambour door slides rearward.
Super Console
NOTE:
The front cupholder light ring and pass through
lighting is controlled by a dimming switch
located on the instrument panel, refer to
“Interior Lights” in this chapter for further
information.
Located in the back of the Super Console is a
storage drawer and cupholders for the rear
passengers.
Rear Drawer Storage
1 — Front Sliding Tambour Door
2 — Cupholder Light Ring
3 — Rear Sliding Tambour Door
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 70
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 71
Front And Rear Overhead Consoles
Front Overhead Console
Two versions of the overhead console are
available. The base front overhead console
features fixed incandescent courtesy/reading
lights, flip-down sunglass storage and conver-
sation mirror. The premium front overhead
console features an LED focused light that
illuminates the instrument panel cupholders,
two swiveling LED lights, flip-down sunglass
storage, conversation mirror, optional power
sliding door switches, and an optional power
liftgate switch.
Front Overhead Console
Rear Overhead Console — If Equipped
The rear overhead storage system is available.
There is an LED at the front of the rear console
that shines down on the front foot-well area
while in courtesy mode, for added convenience.
Rear Overhead Console Features
Front Door Storage
Both interior front door panels have multiple
pockets for storage.
Driver Seatback Storage — If Equipped
The driver's seatback has a primary storage
pocket on all models and an optional secondary
mesh pocket.
Driver’s Seatback Storage
1 — LCD Screen
2 — Rear HVAC
3 — Interior Lights
4 — Storage
5 — Interior Lights
6 — Halo Lighting
WARNING!
If containers of hot liquid are placed in the
bottle holder, they can spill when the door is
closed, burning the occupants. Be careful
when closing the doors to avoid injury.
1 — Bag Holder
2 — Standard Pocket
3 — Mesh Pocket
2
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 71
72 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
Umbrella Holder
An umbrella holder has been conveniently
molded into the left front door entry scuff
molding.
Umbrella Holder
Second Row Seat Storage Bins — If Equipped
The seat storage bins are located on the floor in
front of the second row seats. The area below
the covers can be used for storage when the
second row seat is in the upright position.
Pull up on the storage bin latch to open the
cover. Slide the storage bin locking mechanism
to the "lock" position to allow greater access to
the storage bin.
Storage Bin
Storage Bin Safety Warning
Carefully follow these warnings to help prevent
personal injury or damage to your vehicle:
WARNING!
In a collision, serious injury could result if the
seat storage bin covers are not properly
latched.
Do not drive the vehicle with the storage bin
covers open.
Keep the storage bin covers closed and
latched while the vehicle is in motion.
Do not operate the storage bin covers while
the vehicle is in motion.
Do not use a storage bin latch as a tie
down.
CAUTION!
The storage bin cover must lay flat and be
locked to avoid damage from contact with the
front seat tracks, which have minimal
clearance to the cover. If the storage bin
cover is left in the open position, front seat
adjustment may damage the cover.
WARNING!
Always close the storage bin covers when
your vehicle is unattended.
Do not allow children to have access to the
second row seat storage bins. Once in the
storage bin, young children may not be able
to escape. If trapped in the storage bin, chil-
dren can die from suffocation or heat
stroke.
In a collision, serious injury could result if
the seat storage bin covers are not properly
latched.
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 72
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 73
Seat Storage Bin Cover Emergency Release
Lever
As a security measure, the Seat Storage Bin
Cover has an Emergency Release Lever built
into the latching mechanism.
Storage Bin Cover Emergency Release Lever
NOTE:
In the event of an individual being locked inside
the storage bin, the storage bin cover can be
opened from inside of the bin by pushing on the
glow-in-the-dark lever attached to the storage
bin cover latching mechanism.
Coat Hooks
Coat hooks are located along the headliner for
the second and third row seating positions. The
coat hook load limit is 10 lbs (4.5 kg). Exceeding
the recommended load limit can cause the coat
hooks to break or disengage from the vehicle.
Cupholders
Instrument Panel Cupholders
The instrument panel cupholders are located in
a pull-out drawer just above the lower storage
bin.
Front Cupholders
Pull the drawer out firmly until it stops, and
place the container to be held in either one of
the cupholder wells. The cupholders are
designed to accommodate a wide variety of
container types and sizes. Push down on the
container to engage the cupholder retention
features.
Do not drive the vehicle with the storage bin
covers open. Keep the storage bin covers
closed and latched while the vehicle is in
motion.
Do not operate the storage bin covers while
the vehicle is in motion.
Do not use a storage bin latch as a tie
down.
CAUTION!
The storage bin cover must lay flat and be
locked to avoid damage from contact with the
front seat tracks, which have minimal
clearance to the cover. If the storage bin
cover is left in the open position, front seat
adjustment may damage the cover.
WARNING! (Continued)
2
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 73
74 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Super Console — If Equipped
On models equipped with the Super Console,
there are two cupholders located in the center
of the console.
Super Console Cupholders
For rear passengers two cupholders are located
in the pull-out drawer, located in the back of the
Super Console. Pull the drawer out to the first
position to use the cupholders.
Rear Cupholders
Interior Bottle Holders
There are four bottle holders located in the
interior. One bottle holder is molded into each
front interior door trim panels, and one bottle
holder is molded into each side sliding interior
door trim panel. Each holder accommodates up
to a 20 oz (0.6 L) plastic bottle.
Interior Bottle Holder
Two outboard mesh pockets are on
intermediate seating. The mesh pockets are
flexible enough to hold juice boxes, toys, games
or MP3 players, etc.
WARNING!
If containers of hot liquid are placed in the
bottle holder, they can spill when the door is
closed, burning the occupants. Be careful
when closing the doors to avoid injury.
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 74
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 75
Sun Screens — If Equipped
Sun screens are available for second row
seating windows. The screens store in the sill
trim panels, and the tops of the windows are
equipped with hooks that the sun screens
attach to when pulled out.
Sun Screen Retracted
Gently pull up on the tab to raise the sun screen.
Continue pulling the sun screen until the tab is
near the top of the window.
Once the screen is completely to the top of the
window, extend the top bar of the sun screen
over the two hooks attached to the top of the
window.
Sun Screen Extended
To lower the sun screen, gently lift the tab
upward to disengage the hooks, and feed the
screen back into the base sill.
Electrical Power Outlets — If Equipped
Two 12 Volt (13 Amp) power outlets are located
on the lower instrument panel, below the open
storage bin. The driver-side power outlet is
controlled by the ignition switch and the
passenger-side power outlet is connected
directly to the battery. The driver-side power
outlet will also operate a conventional cigar
lighter unit (if equipped with an optional
Smoker's Package).
Instrument Panel Power Outlets
CAUTION!
Do not exceed the maximum power of
160 Watts (13 Amps) at 12 Volts. If the
160 Watt (13 Amp) power rating is
exceeded the fuse protecting the system
will need to be replaced.
Power outlets are designed for accessory
plugs only. Do not insert any other object in
the power outlets as this will damage the
outlet and blow the fuse. Improper use of
the power outlet can cause damage not
covered by your New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
2
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 75
76 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
One outlet in the removable floor console
(if equipped) shares a fuse with the lower outlet
in the instrument panel and is also connected
to the battery. Do not exceed a maximum power
of 160 Watts (13 Amps) shared between the
lower panel outlet and the removable floor
console outlet.
Removable Console Power Outlet
On vehicles equipped, center console power
outlets are located under the retractable cover.
To access the power outlets push down on the
cover and slide it toward the instrument panel.
Center Console Power Outlets
There is an additional 12 Volt power outlet
located on the left rear trim panel immediately
behind the second row left passenger seat.
Rear Panel Power Outlet
The outlet in the rear quarter panel near the
liftgate and the upper outlet in the instrument
panel are both controlled by the ignition switch.
Each of these outlets can support 160 Watts
(13 Amps). Do not exceed 160 Watts (13 Amps)
for each of these outlets.
The power outlets include tethered caps,
labeled with a key or battery symbol indicating
the power source. The power outlet, located on
the lower instrument panel, is powered directly
from the battery. Items plugged into this power
outlet may discharge the battery and/or prevent
the engine from starting.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
Only devices designed for use in this type of
outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt
outlet.
Do not touch with wet hands.
Close the lid when not in use and while
driving the vehicle.
If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
electric shock and failure.
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 76
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 77
Power Inverter — If Equipped
A 115 Volt, 150 Watt inverter outlet converts DC
current to AC current, and is located on the left
rear trim panel immediately behind the second
row left passenger seat.
Power Inverter Outlet
The power inverter switch is located on the
instrument panel below the climate controls.
To turn on the power outlet, push the switch
once. Push the switch a second time to turn the
power outlet off.
This outlet can power cellular phones,
electronics and other low power devices
requiring power up to 150 Watts. Certain
high-end video game consoles exceed this
power limit, as will most power tools.
The power inverter is designed with built-in
overload protection. If the power rating of
150 Watts is exceeded, the power inverter
shuts down. Once the electrical device has
been removed from the outlet, the inverter
should automatically reset. If the power rating
exceeds approximately 170 Watts, the power
inverter may have to be reset manually. To reset
the inverter manually push the power inverter
button off and on. To avoid overloading the
circuit, check the power ratings on electrical
devices prior to using the inverter.
CAUTION!
Many accessories that can be plugged in
draw power from the vehicle's battery, even
when not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.).
Eventually, if plugged in long enough, the
vehicle's battery will discharge sufficiently
to degrade battery life and/or prevent the
engine from starting.
Accessories that draw higher power (i.e.,
coolers, vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.), will
degrade the battery even more quickly.
Only use these intermittently and with
greater caution.
After the use of high power draw accesso-
ries, or long periods of the vehicle not being
started (with accessories still plugged in),
the vehicle must be driven a sufficient
length of time to allow the alternator to
recharge the vehicle's battery.
Power outlets are designed for accessory
plugs only. Do not hang any type of acces-
sory or accessory bracket from the plug.
Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
Do not insert any objects into the
receptacles.
Do not touch with wet hands.
Close the lid when not in use.
If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
electric shock and failure.
2
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 77
78 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Smoker's Package Kit — If Equipped
With the optional authorized dealer installed
Smoker's Package Kit, a removable ash
receiver is inserted into one of the two
cupholders in the center front instrument panel.
To install the ash receiver, align the receiver so
the thumb grip on the lid is facing rearward.
Push the ash receiver into either of the cup
wells to secure. Pull upward on the ash receiver
to remove for cleaning and/or storage.
The left rear trim panel cupholder is designed to
accommodate a second ash receiver, if desired.
Sunglass Storage Bin — If Equipped
At the front of the overhead console, a
compartment is provided for the storage of two
pairs of sunglasses.
From the closed position, push the door latch to
open the compartment.
Over Door Latch
The door will slowly rotate to the full open
position.
Full Open Position
From this position, the door can be fully closed
or, by rotating upward about 3/4 of the way and
releasing, positioned for conversation mirror
use.
Conversation Mirror Position
NOTE:
From the “conversation mirror” position, the
door can only be closed.
To return to the full open position, the door must
first be closed and then opened by pushing the
latch again to release.
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 78
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 79
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED
The crossbars on your vehicle are delivered
stowed within the roof rack side rails. If adding
cargo, deploy the crossbars. Distribute cargo
weight evenly on the roof rack crossbars, to
maximum of 150 lbs (68 kg). The roof rack does
not increase the total load carrying capacity of
the vehicle. Be sure the total load of cargo
inside the vehicle plus that on the external rack
does not exceed the maximum vehicle load
capacity.
Crossbar Stowed In Side Rail
The crossbars and side rails are designed to
carry weight on vehicles equipped with a
luggage rack. The load must not exceed 150 lbs
(68 kg), and should be uniformly distributed
over the luggage rack crossbars.
NOTE:
Crossbars are error-proofed and cannot be
deployed or stowed in the incorrect positions.
To help control wind noise, stow the cross-
bars in the side rails when they are not in use.
Deploying The Crossbars
To deploy the crossbars, completely loosen the
thumb screws at both ends of the crossbar and
lift the crossbar from its stowed position in the
side rail. Repeat with crossbar on the opposite
side.
Loosening Crossbars
Bend the crossbar supports at each end, taking
care to keep hand clear of pivoting joint. Slide
the thumb screw down.
Stowed Position
Deployed Position
Then, position the crossbars across the roof.
CAUTION!
Use care when removing and handling the
crossbars to prevent damage to the vehicle.
2
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 79
80 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
The crossbars are identical and can be placed
in any two of the three deploy positions.
Deploy Positions – Choose Two Of Three
Make sure the directional arrows on the
crossbars align with the directional arrows on
the side rails. Set the crossbars into the
deployed positions.
Crossbar To Side Rail Installation
Once the crossbars are set into position, tighten
the thumb screws completely.
Tightening Crossbar
Stowing The Crossbars
Reverse the procedure to stow the crossbars,
again, taking care to keep hand clear of pivoting
joint. Crossbars are identical and can be stowed
in either rail nest. Once the crossbars are
stowed, tighten the thumb screws completely.
NOTE:
Load should always be secured to crossbars
first, with rail tie down loops used as additional
securing points if needed. Tie loops are
intended as supplementary tie down points
only. Do not use ratcheting mechanisms with
the tie loops.
Rail Tie Loops
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 80
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 81
(Continued)
(Continued)
WARNING!
Cargo must be securely tied down before
driving your vehicle. Improperly secured loads
can fly off the vehicle, particularly at high
speeds, resulting in personal injury or
property damage. Follow the roof rack
cautions when carrying cargo on your roof
rack.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the roof of your
vehicle, DO NOT carry any loads on the roof
rack without the crossbars deployed. The
load should be secured and placed on top
of the crossbars, not directly on the roof. If
it is necessary to place the load on the roof,
place a blanket or other protective layer
between the load and the roof surface.
To avoid damage to the roof rack and
vehicle, do not exceed the maximum roof
rack load capacity of 150 lb (68 kg). Always
distribute heavy loads as evenly as possible
and secure the load appropriately.
Load should always be secured to cross
bars first, with tie down loops used as addi-
tional securing points if needed. Tie loops
are intended as supplementary tie down
points only. Do not use ratcheting mecha-
nisms with the tie loops. Check the straps
and thumb wheels frequently to be sure
that the load remains securely attached.
CAUTION! (Continued)
Long loads that extend over the windshield,
such as wood panels or surfboards, or
loads with large frontal area should be
secured to both the front and rear of the
vehicle.
Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners
carefully when carrying large or heavy loads
on the roof rack. Wind forces, due to
natural causes or nearby truck traffic, can
add sudden upward lift to a load. This is
especially true on large flat loads and may
result in damage to the cargo or your
vehicle.
CAUTION! (Continued)
2
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 81
82
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Base Instrument Cluster
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 82
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 83
Premium Instrument Cluster
3
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 83
84 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Instrument Cluster Descriptions
1. Tachometer
Indicates the engine speed in revolutions
per minute (RPM x 1000).
2. Instrument Cluster Display— If Equipped /
Odometer Display / Trip Odometer Display
Instrument Cluster Display— If Equipped
The instrument cluster display features a
driver interactive display that is located in the
instrument cluster. Refer to “Instrument
Cluster Display” in this section for further
information.
Odometer Display / Trip Odometer
Display
The odometer display shows the total
distance the vehicle has been driven.
This also displays Trip A and Trip B, DTE, MPG
or L/100km, Outside Air Temperature (OAT)
information to Base Cluster, use STEP and
RESET button (on steering wheel) to access
or reset the display.
Message Display Area (Base Instrument
Cluster)
When the appropriate conditions exist, the
following odometer messages will display:
door — Door Ajar
gATE — Liftgate Ajar
LoW tirE — Low Tire Pressure
gASCAP — Fuel Cap Fault
noFUSE — Fuse Fault
CHAngE OIL — Oil Change Required
LoCOOL — Low Coolant
3. Speedometer
Indicates vehicle speed.
4. Fuel Gauge
The gauge shows the level of fuel in the
fuel tank when the ignition switch is in
the ON/RUN position.
The fuel pump symbol points
to the side of the vehicle where
the fuel door is located.
5. Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge shows engine
coolant temperature. Any reading within
the normal range indicates that the
engine cooling system is operating
satisfactorily.
The gauge can indicate a higher
temperature when driving in hot weather
or up mountain grades. It should not be
allowed to exceed the upper limits of the
normal operating range.
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 84
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 85
NOTE:
The hard telltales will illuminate for a bulb check
when the ignition is first cycled.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
Your vehicle is equipped with an instrument
cluster display, which offers useful information
to the driver. With the ignition in the OFF
position (and the key removed, for vehicles with
mechanical key), opening/closing of a door will
activate the display for viewing, and display the
total miles or kilometers in the odometer. Your
instrument cluster display is designed to display
important information about your vehicle’s
systems and features. Using a driver interactive
display located on the instrument panel, your
instrument cluster display can show you how
systems are working and give you warnings
when they are not. The steering wheel mounted
controls allow you to scroll through and enter
the main menus and submenus. You can
access the specific information you want and
make selections and adjustments.
Instrument Cluster Display Location And
Controls
The vehicle’s instrument cluster is equipped
with an instrument cluster display, which offers
useful information to the driver. With the
ignition in the OFF position, opening/closing of
a door will activate the instrument cluster
display for viewing, and display the total miles
or kilometers in the odometer.
Instrument Cluster Display
WARNING!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system
could damage your vehicle. If the
temperature gauge reaches “H” pull over and
stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air
conditioner turned off until the gauge drops
back into the normal range and is no longer
red. If the gauge remains on the “H”, turn the
engine off immediately and call an authorized
dealer for service.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous.
You or others could be badly burned by steam
or boiling coolant. You may want to call an
authorized dealer for service if your vehicle
overheats. If you decide to look under the
hood yourself, see “Servicing And
Maintenance”.
1 – Instrument Cluster Display Controls
2 – Instrument Cluster Display Screen
3
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 85
86 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The instrument cluster display menu items
consists of the following:
Fuel Economy
Vehicle Speed
Trip Info
Tire Pressure
Vehicle Info
Messages
Units
System Setup (Personal Settings)
Turn Menu Off
The system allows the driver to select
information by pushing the following buttons
mounted on the steering wheel:
Instrument Cluster Display Steering Wheel Buttons
Up Button
Push and release the up button to
scroll upward through the main
menu items (Fuel Economy,
Vehicle Info, Tire PSI, Cruise,
Messages, Units, System Setup).
Down Button
Push and release the down button
to scroll downward through the
main menu items.
Right Button
The right button allows access to
information in instrument cluster
display submenus, selects some
feature settings, and resets some
instrument cluster display features. The
instrument cluster display prompts the driver
when the right button can be used by
displaying the right arrow graphic.
Once the right button has been selected for
the desired submenu list, follow the instru-
ment cluster display prompts to properly
select the desired submenu instrument
cluster display features.
BACK Button
Push and release the BACK button
to scroll back to a previous menu or
submenu.
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 86
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 87
Oil Life Reset
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil
change indicator system. The “Oil Change
Required” message will display for approxi-
mately 10 seconds after a single chime has
sounded, to indicate the next scheduled oil
change interval. The engine oil change indi-
cator system is duty cycle based, which
means the engine oil change interval may
fluctuate, dependent upon your personal
driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to
display each time the ignition is cycled to the
ON/RUN position.
To reset the oil change indicator after
performing the scheduled maintenance,
refer to the following procedure.
1. Turn the ignition to the ON/RUN position
(do not start the engine).
2. Fully press the accelerator pedal, slowly,
three times within 10 seconds.
3. Turn the ignition to the OFF/LOCK position.
NOTE:
If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator
system did not reset. If necessary, repeat this
procedure.
Instrument Cluster Display Menu Items
NOTE:
The instrument cluster display menu items
display in the center of the instrument cluster.
Menu items may vary depending on your vehicle
features.
Fuel Economy
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until “Fuel Economy” displays highlighted in the
instrument cluster display and push the right
arrow button. The following Fuel Economy
functions display in the instrument cluster
display:
Average Fuel Economy
(MPG, L/100 km or km/L)
Distance To Empty (mi or km)
Current Fuel Economy (MPG, L/100 km or
km/L)
Vehicle Speed
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until “Vehicle Speed” displays highlighted in the
instrument cluster display and push the right
arrow button. Push and release the right arrow
button to display the current speed in mph or
km/h. Pushing the right arrow button a second
time will toggle the unit of measure between
mph or km/h.
NOTE:
Changing the unit of measure in the Vehicle
Speed menu will not change the unit of
measure in the instrument cluster display.
Trip Info
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until “Trip Info” is highlighted in the instrument
cluster display and push the right button. Push
and release the up or down arrow button to
highlight one of the following functions:
Trip A
Trip B
Elapsed Time
Trip Reset
3
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 87
88 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Tire Pressure
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until “Tire PSI:” displays highlighted in the
instrument cluster display. Push and release
the right arrow button to view a graphic of the
vehicle with a tire pressure value at each corner
of the graphic.
Units
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until “Units” displays highlighted in the
instrument cluster display and push the right
arrow button. The instrument cluster display,
odometer, and navigation system (if equipped)
can be changed between English and Metric
units of measure. To make your selection, scroll
up or down until the preferred setting is
highlighted, then push and release the right
arrow button until a check-mark appears next to
the setting, showing that the setting has been
selected.
Vehicle Info (Customer Information Features)
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until “Vehicle Info” displays in the instrument
cluster display and push the right arrow button.
Push the up or down arrow button to scroll
through the available information displays.
Coolant Temperature
Displays the actual coolant temperature.
Oil Temperature
Displays the actual oil temperature.
Oil Pressure — If Equipped
Displays the actual oil pressure.
Transmission Temperature
Displays the actual transmission tempera-
ture.
Engine Hours
Displays the number of hours of engine
operation.
Messages
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until “Messages: XX” displays highlighted in the
instrument cluster display. If there is more than
one message, pushing the right arrow button
will display a stored warning message. Push
and release the up or down arrow button if there
is more than one message to cycle through the
remaining stored messages. If there are no
messages, pushing the right arrow button will
not change the display.
Compass/Outside Temperature Display
The compass readings indicate the direction
the vehicle is facing. The instrument cluster
display will display eight or fifteen compass
readings and the outside temperature.
NOTE:
The system will display the last known outside
temperature when starting the vehicle and may
need to be driven several minutes before the
updated temperature is displayed. Engine
temperature can also affect the displayed
temperature; therefore, temperature readings
are not updated when the vehicle is not moving.
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 88
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 89
Automatic Compass Calibration
This compass is self-calibrating, which
eliminates the need to set the compass
manually. When the vehicle is new, the
compass may appear erratic, and the
instrument cluster display will display “CAL”
until the compass is calibrated. You may also
calibrate the compass by completing one or
more 360–degree turns (in an area free from
large metal or metallic objects) until the “CAL”
message displayed in the instrument cluster
display turns off. The compass will now function
normally.
NOTE:
A good calibration requires a level surface and
an environment free from large metallic objects
such as buildings, bridges, underground cables,
railroad tracks, etc.
Manual Compass Calibration
If the compass appears erratic and the CAL
indicator does not appear in the instrument
cluster display, you must put the compass into
the Calibration Mode manually, as follows:
1. Turn ON the ignition switch.
2. Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the System Setup
(Customer-Programmable Features) menu
is reached, then push and release the right
arrow button.
3. Push and release the down button until
“Calibrate Compass” is displayed in the
instrument cluster display then push and
release the right button.
4. Push and release the right button to start
the calibration. The “CAL” indicator will be
displayed in the instrument cluster display.
5. Complete one or more 360–degree turns
(in an area free from large metal or metallic
objects) until the “CAL” indicator turns off.
The compass will now function normally.
Compass Variance
Compass Variance is the difference between
Magnetic North and Geographic North. To
compensate for the differences the variance
should be set for the zone where the vehicle is
driven, per the zone map. Once properly set, the
compass will automatically compensate for the
differences, and provide the most accurate
compass heading. For the most accurate
compass performance, the compass must be
set using the following steps.
NOTE:
Keep magnetic materials away from the top of
the instrument panel, such as iPod's, Mobile
Phones, Laptops and Radar Detectors. This is
where the compass module is located, and it
can cause interference with the compass
sensor, and it may give false readings.
Compass Variance Map
3
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 89
90 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
1. Turn the ignition switch ON.
2. Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Setup
(Customer-Programmable Features) menu
is reached, then push the right arrow
button.
3. Push and release the down arrow button
until the “Compass Variance” message is
displayed in the instrument cluster display,
then press the right arrow button. The last
variance zone number displays in the
instrument cluster display.
4. Push and release the right arrow button
until the proper variance zone is selected,
according to the map.
5. Push and release the RETURN button to
exit.
Turn Menu OFF
Select from Main Menu using the up or down
arrow button. Pushing the right arrow button
clears the menu display. Pushing any one of the
four Display control buttons will bring the menu
back.
Customer-Programmable Features
(System Setup)
Personal Settings allows you to set and recall
features when the transmission is in PARK. If
the transmission is out of PARK or the vehicle
begins moving, a warning message SYSTEM
SETUP NOT AVAILABLE VEHICLE NOT IN PARK
displays when you try to select “System Setup”
from the main menu.
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until "System Setup" is highlighted in the main
menu of the instrument cluster display. Then,
push and release the right arrow button to enter
the System Setup submenu. Push and release
the up or down arrow button to select a feature
form the following choices.
Language
When in this display you may select one of three
languages for all display screens, including the
trip functions and the navigation system (if
equipped). Push and release the up or down
arrow button while in this display and scroll
through the language choices.
Push and release the right arrow button to
select English, Spanish (Español), or French
(Français). Then, as you continue, the informa-
tion will display in the selected language.
Nav–Turn By Turn
When this feature is selected, the navigation
system utilizes voice commands, guiding you
through the drive route mile by mile,
turn-by-turn, until the final destination is
reached. To make your selection, push and
release the right arrow button until a
check-mark appears next to the feature
showing the system has been activated, or the
check-mark is removed showing the system has
been deactivated.
Auto Lock Doors
When selected, all doors will lock automatically
when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph
(24 km/h). To make your selection, push and
release the right arrow button until a
check-mark appears.
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 90
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 91
Auto Unlock Doors
When this feature is selected, all doors will
unlock when the vehicle is stopped and the
transmission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL
position and the driver's door is opened. To
make your selection, push and release the right
arrow button until a check-mark appears next to
the feature showing the system has been
activated, or the check-mark is removed
showing the system has been deactivated.
Remote Unlock Sequence
When Unlock Driver Door Only On 1st Press is
selected, only the driver’s side doors will unlock
on the first push of the key fob unlock button.
With Unlock Driver Door Only On 1st Press, you
must push the key fob unlock button twice to
unlock the passenger’s doors. When Unlock All
Doors On 1st Press is selected, all of the doors
will unlock on the first push of the key fob
unlock button. To make your selection, push
and release the right arrow button until a
check-mark appears next to the feature
showing the system has been activated or the
check-mark is removed showing the system has
been deactivated.
Remote Start Comfort Sys.
When this feature is selected and the remote
start is activated, the heated steering wheel
and driver heated seat features will automat-
ically turn on in cold weather. These features
will stay on through the duration of remote start
or until the key is cycled to ON/RUN position. To
make your selection, push and release the right
arrow button until a check-mark appears next to
the feature showing the system has been
activated or the check-mark is removed
showing the system has been deactivated.
Horn With Remote Lock
When this feature is selected, a short horn
sound will occur when the key fob lock button is
pushed. To make your selection, push and
release the right arrow button until a
check-mark appears next to the feature
showing the system has been activated or the
check-mark is removed showing the system has
been deactivated.
Flash Lamps With Lock
When selected, the front and rear turn signals
will flash when the doors are locked with the key
fob. To make your selection, push and release
the right arrow button until a check-mark
appears next to the feature showing the system
has been activated or the check-mark is
removed showing the system has been
deactivated.
Automatic High Beams — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the high beam
headlights will deactivate automatically under
certain conditions. To make your selection,
push and release the right arrow button until a
check-mark appears next to the feature
showing the system has been activated or the
check-mark is removed showing the system has
been deactivated.
3
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 91
92 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Headlamp Off Delay
When this feature is selected, the driver can
choose to have the headlights remain on for
0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when exiting the
vehicle. To make your selection, scroll up or
down until the preferred setting is highlighted,
then push and release the right arrow button
until a check-mark appears next to the setting,
showing that the setting has been selected.
Headlamps With Wipers
(Available With Auto Headlights Only)
When ON is selected, and the headlight switch
is in the AUTO position, the headlights will turn
on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers
are turned on. The headlights will also turn off
when the wipers are turned off if they were
turned on by this feature. To make your
selection, push and release the right arrow
button until a check-mark appears next to the
setting, showing that the setting has been
selected.
NOTE:
Turning the headlights on during the daytime
causes the instrument panel lights to dim. To
increase the brightness, refer to “Interior
Lights” in “Getting To Know Your Vehicle.”
Intermittent Wiper Options — If Equipped
When ON is selected, the system will automat-
ically activate the windshield wipers if it senses
moisture on the windshield. To make your
selection, push and release the right arrow
button until a check-mark appears next to the
feature showing the system has been activated
or the check-mark is removed showing the
system has been deactivated. When the system
is deactivated, the system reverts to the
standard intermittent wiper operation.
Key-Off Power Delay
When this feature is selected, the power
window switches, radio, Uconnect phone
(if equipped), DVD video system (if equipped),
power sunroof (if equipped), and power outlets
will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the
ignition switch is turned OFF. Opening either
front vehicle door will cancel this feature. To
make your selection, scroll up or down until the
preferred setting is highlighted, then push and
release the right arrow button until a
check-mark appears next to the setting,
showing that the setting has been selected.
Illuminated Approach
When this feature is selected, the headlights
will activate and remain on for up to 90 seconds
when the doors are unlocked with the key fob.
To make your selection, scroll up or down until
the preferred setting is highlighted, then push
and release the right arrow button until a
check-mark appears next to the setting,
showing that the setting has been selected.
Hill Start Assist (HSA) — If Equipped
When on is selected, the HSA system is active.
Refer to “Electronic Brake Control System” in
“Safety” for system function and operating
information. To make your selection, push and
release the right arrow button until “ON” or
“OFF” appears.
Flashers With Sliding Door
When this feature is selected, the signal lamps
activate when power or manual sliding doors
are in operation, signaling other drivers that
someone may be exiting or entering the vehicle.
To make your selection, push and release the
right arrow button until a check-mark appears
next to the feature showing the system has
been activated or the check-mark is removed,
showing the system has been deactivated.
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 92
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 93
Tilt Mirror In Reverse — If Equipped
When this feature is selected and the vehicle is
placed in a reverse gear, the driver's side mirror
will tilt downward to allow the driver to see into
the previous blind spot and avoid objects in
close proximity to the rear of the vehicle. To
make your selection, push and release the right
arrow button until a check-mark appears next to
the feature showing the system has been
activated, or the check-mark is removed
showing the system has been deactivated.
Blind Spot Alert — If Equipped
There are three selections when operating Blind
Spot Alert (“Blind Spot Alert Lights,” “Blind Spot
Alert Lights/CHM,” and “Blind Spot Alert Off”).
The Blind Spot Alert feature can be activated in
“Blind Spot Alert Lights” mode. When this mode
is selected, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM)
system is activated and will only show a visual
alert in the outside mirrors. The Blind Spot Alert
feature can be activated in “Blind Spot Alert
Lights/CHM” mode. In this mode, the Blind Spot
Monitor (BSM) will show a visual alert in the
outside mirrors as well as an audible alert when
the turn signal is on. When “Blind Spot Alert Off”
is selected, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM)
system is deactivated.
To make your selection, push and release the
right arrow button until a check-mark appears
next to the feature, showing the system has
been activated, or the check-mark is removed,
showing the system has been deactivated.
NOTE:
If your vehicle has experienced any damage in
the area where the sensor is located, even if the
fascia is not damaged, the sensor may have
become misaligned. Take your vehicle to an
authorized dealer to verify sensor alignment.
Having a sensor that is misaligned will result in
the BSM not operating to specification.
Calibrate Compass
Push the right arrow button to calibrate the
compass.
TRIP COMPUTER
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until “Trip Info” is highlighted in the instrument
cluster display and push the right button. Push
and release the up or down arrow button to
highlight one of the following functions.
Trip A
Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A
since the last reset.
Shows the elapsed time traveled for Trip A
since the last reset.
Trip B
Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B
since the last reset.
Shows the elapsed time traveled for Trip B
since the last reset.
Elapsed Time
Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the
last reset when the ignition switch is in the ACC
position. Elapsed time will increment when the
ignition switch is in the ON or START position.
To Reset A Trip Function
Reset will only occur while a resettable function
is selected (highlighted). Push and hold the right
arrow button to clear the resettable function
being displayed.
3
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 93
94 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES
The warning/indicator lights will illuminate in
the instrument panel together with a dedicated
message and/or acoustic signal when
applicable. These indications are indicative and
precautionary and as such must not be
considered as exhaustive and/or alternative to
the information contained in the Owner’s
Manual, which you are advised to read carefully
in all cases. Always refer to the information in
this chapter in the event of a failure indication.
All active telltales will display first if applicable.
The system check menu may appear different
based upon equipment options and current
vehicle status. Some telltales are optional and
may not appear.
Red Warning Lights
Air Bag Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate a fault with the air bag, and
will turn on for four to eight seconds
as a bulb check when the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN
position. This light will illuminate with a single
chime when a fault with the air bag has been
detected, it will stay on until the fault is cleared.
If the light is either not on during startup, stays
on, or turns on while driving, have the system
inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
Brake Warning Light
This warning light monitors various
brake functions, including brake fluid
level and parking brake application. If
the brake light turns on it may
indicate that the parking brake is applied, that
the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a
problem with the anti-lock brake system
reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake
has been disengaged, and the fluid level is at
the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it
indicates a possible brake hydraulic system
malfunction or that a problem with the Brake
Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock
Brake System (ABS) / Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) system. In this case, the light will
remain on until the condition has been
corrected. If the problem is related to the brake
booster, the ABS pump will run when applying
the brake, and a brake pedal pulsation may be
felt during each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve
braking capacity in the event of a failure to a
portion of the hydraulic system. A leak in either
half of the dual brake system is indicated by the
Brake Warning Light, which will turn on when
the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is
corrected.
NOTE:
The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level
conditions. The vehicle should have service
performed, and the brake fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is
necessary.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may
have failed. It will take longer to stop the
vehicle. You could have a collision. Have the
vehicle checked immediately.
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 94
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 95
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS) are also equipped with Electronic
Brake Force Distribution (EBD). In the event of
an EBD failure, the Brake Warning Light will turn
on along with the ABS Light. Immediate repair to
the ABS system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be
checked by turning the ignition switch from the
OFF position to the ON/RUN position. The light
should illuminate for approximately two
seconds. The light should then turn off unless
the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have
the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking
brake is applied with the ignition switch in the
ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake
application.
Battery Charge Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when
the battery is not charging properly. If
it stays on while the engine is running,
there may be a malfunction with the
charging system. Contact an authorized dealer
as soon as possible.
This indicates a possible problem with the
electrical system or a related component.
Door Open Warning Light — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when a
door is ajar/open and not fully closed.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a
single chime.
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning
Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate a problem with the Electronic
Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a
problem is detected while the vehicle
is running, the light will either stay on or flash
depending on the nature of the problem. Cycle
the ignition when the vehicle is safely and
completely stopped and the transmission is
placed in the PARK position. The light should
turn off. If the light remains on with the vehicle
running, your vehicle will usually be drivable;
however, see an authorized dealer for service
as soon as possible.
NOTE:
This light may turn on if the accelerator and
brake pedals are pressed at the same time.
If the light continues to flash when the vehicle is
running, immediate service is required and you
may experience reduced performance, an
elevated/rough idle, or engine stall and your
vehicle may require towing. The light will come
on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or
ACC/ON/RUN position and remain on briefly as
a bulb check. If the light does not come on
during starting, have the system checked by an
authorized dealer.
3
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 95
96 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light
This warning light warns of an
overheated engine condition. If the
engine coolant temperature is too
high, this indicator will illuminate and
a single chime will sound. If the temperature
reaches the upper limit, a continuous chime will
sound for four minutes or until the engine is
able to cool, whichever comes first.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over
and stop the vehicle. If the Air Conditioning
(A/C) system is on, turn it off. Also, shift the
transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle.
If the temperature reading does not return to
normal, turn the engine off immediately and call
for service.
Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in
“In Case Of Emergency” for further information.
Liftgate Open Warning Light
This indicator will turn when the
liftgate is open.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a
single chime.
Oil Pressure Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate low engine oil pressure. If the
light turns on while driving, stop the
vehicle, shut off the engine as soon as
possible, and contact an authorized dealer. A
chime will sound when this light turns on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is
corrected. This light does not indicate how
much oil is in the engine. The engine oil level
must be checked under the hood.
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
This warning light indicates when the
driver or passenger seat belt is
unbuckled. When the ignition is first
placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/
RUN position and if the driver’s seat belt is
unbuckled, a chime will sound and the light will
turn on. When driving, if the driver or front
passenger seat belt remains unbuckled, the
Seat Belt Reminder Light will flash or remain on
continuously and a chime will sound.
Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in
“Safety” for further information.
Transmission Temperature Warning Light — If
Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to
warn of a high transmission fluid
temperature. This may occur with
strenuous usage such as trailer
towing. If this light turns on, stop the vehicle and
run the engine at idle or slightly faster, with the
transmission in PARK or NEUTRAL, until the
light turns off. Once the light turns off, you may
continue to drive normally.
WARNING!
If you continue operating the vehicle when
the Transmission Temperature Warning Light
is illuminated you could cause the fluid to boil
over, come in contact with hot engine or
exhaust components and cause a fire.
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission
Temperature Warning Light illuminated will
eventually cause severe transmission
damage or transmission failure.
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 96
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 97
Vehicle Security Warning Light — If Equipped
This light will flash at a fast rate for
approximately 15 seconds when the
vehicle security alarm is arming, and
then will flash slowly until the vehicle
is disarmed.
Yellow Warning Lights
Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Warning Light
This warning light monitors the
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). The
light will turn on when the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/
RUN position and may stay on for as long as four
seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while
driving, then the Anti-Lock portion of the brake
system is not functioning and service is
required as soon as possible. However, the
conventional brake system will continue to
operate normally, assuming the Brake Warning
Light is not also on.
If the ABS light does not turn on when the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/
RUN position, have the brake system inspected
by an authorized dealer.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will indicate when
the Electronic Stability Control system
is Active. The “ESC Indicator Light” in
the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or
ACC/ON/RUN position, and when ESC is
activated. It should go out with the engine
running. If the “ESC Indicator Light” comes on
continuously with the engine running, a
malfunction has been detected in the ESC
system. If this warning light remains on after
several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been
driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds
greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see an
authorized dealer as soon as possible to have
the problem diagnosed and corrected.
The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” and the “ESC
Indicator Light” come on momentarily each
time the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or
ACC/ON/RUN position.
The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the
sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive.
This light will come on when the vehicle is in
an ESC event.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light indicates the
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is
off.
Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN or
ACC/ON/RUN, the ESC system will be on, even
if it was turned off previously.
Low Fuel Warning Light
When the fuel level reaches approxi-
mately 1.85 gal (7 L) this warning light
will turn on, and remain on until fuel is
added.
A single warning chime will sound with Low Fuel
Warning.
Low Washer Fluid Warning Light — If
Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when
the windshield washer fluid is low.
Refer to “Engine Compartment” in “Servicing
And Maintenance” for further information.
3
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 97
98 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Warning
Light (MIL)
The Engine Check/Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL) is a part of an
Onboard Diagnostic System called
OBD II that monitors engine and
automatic transmission control systems. This
warning light will illuminate when the ignition is
in the ON/RUN position before engine start. If
the bulb does not come on when turning the
ignition switch from OFF to ON/RUN, have the
condition checked promptly.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing
gas cap, poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate
the light after engine start. The vehicle should
be serviced if the light stays on through several
typical driving styles. In most situations, the
vehicle will drive normally and will not require
towing.
When the engine is running, the MIL may flash
to alert serious conditions that could lead to
immediate loss of power or severe catalytic
converter damage. The vehicle should be
serviced by an authorized dealer as soon as
possible if this occurs.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Warning Light
The warning light switches on and a
message is displayed to indicate that
the tire pressure is lower than the
recommended value and/or that slow
pressure loss is occurring. In these cases,
optimal tire duration and fuel consumption may
not be guaranteed.
Should one or more tires be in the condition
mentioned above, the display will show the
indications corresponding to each tire.
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as
referenced above, can reach higher
temperatures than in normal operating
conditions. This can cause a fire if you drive
slowly or park over flammable substances
such as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This
could result in death or serious injury to the
driver, occupants or others.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL) on could cause damage
to the vehicle control system. It also could
affect fuel economy and driveability. If the
MIL is flashing, severe catalytic converter
damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.
CAUTION!
Do not continue driving with one or more flat
tires as handling may be compromised. Stop
the vehicle, avoiding sharp braking and
steering. If a tire puncture occurs, repair
immediately using the dedicated tire repair
kit and contact an authorized dealer as soon
as possible.
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 98
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 99
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. If your
vehicle has tires of a different size than the size
indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label, you should determine the
proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire
pressure telltale when one or more of your tires
is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when
the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you
should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper
pressure. Driving on a significantly
under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat
and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and
may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping
ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s
responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,
even if under-inflation has not reached the level
to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire
pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when
the system is not operating properly. The TPMS
malfunction indicator is combined with the low
tire pressure telltale. When the system detects
a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approxi-
mately one minute and then remain contin-
uously illuminated. This sequence will continue
upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as
the malfunction exists. When the malfunction
indicator is illuminated, the system may not be
able to detect or signal low tire pressure as
intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a
variety of reasons, including the installation of
replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the
vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning
properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more tires or
wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow
the TPMS to continue to function properly.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures
and warning have been established for the
tire size equipped on your vehicle.
Undesirable system operation or sensor
damage may result when using replacement
equipment that is not of the same size, type,
and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire
sealants may cause the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become
inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire
sealant it is recommended that you take your
vehicle to an authorized dealer to have your
sensor function checked.
3
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 99
100 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
White Indicator Lights
Speed Control Ready Indicator Light
This light will turn on when the speed
control has been turned on, but not
set. Refer to “Speed Control — If
Equipped” in “Starting And Operating”
for further information.
Green Indicator Lights
Speed Control SET Indicator Light
This light will turn on when the speed
control is set. Refer to “Speed Control
— If Equipped” in “Starting And
Operating” for further information.
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
When the left or right turn signal is
activated, the turn signal indicator will
flash independently and the
corresponding exterior turn signal
lamps will flash. Turn signals can be activated
when the multifunction lever is moved down
(left) or up (right).
NOTE:
A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is
driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either
turn signal on.
Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if
either indicator flashes at a rapid rate.
Park/Headlight On Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate
when the park lights or headlights are
turned on.
Refer to “Exterior Lights” in “Getting To Know
Your Vehicle” for further information.
Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate
when the front fog lights are on.
Refer to “Exterior Lights” in “Getting
To Know Your Vehicle” for further
information.
Blue Indicator Lights
High Beam Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate to
indicate that the high beam
headlights are on. With the low beams
activated, push the multifunction
lever forward (toward the front of the vehicle) to
turn on the high beams. Pull the multifunction
lever rearward (toward the rear of the vehicle) to
turn off the high beams. If the high beams are
off, pull the lever toward you for a temporary
high beam on, "flash to pass" scenario.
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 100
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 101
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated
Onboard Diagnostic system called OBD II. This
system monitors the performance of the
emissions, engine, and automatic transmission
control systems. When these systems are
operating properly, your vehicle will provide
excellent performance and fuel economy, as
well as emissions well within current
government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the
OBD II system will turn on the Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL). It will also store diagnostic
codes and other information to assist your
service technician in making repairs. Although
your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see an authorized dealer for
service as soon as possible.
Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity
Your vehicle is required to have an Onboard
Diagnostic system (OBD II) and a connection
port to allow access to information related to
the performance of your emissions controls.
Authorized service technicians may need to
access this information to assist with the
diagnosis and service of your vehicle and
emissions system.
For further information, refer to “Cybersecurity”
in “Multimedia”.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the MIL on could
cause further damage to the emission
control system. It could also affect fuel
economy and driveability. The vehicle must
be serviced before any emissions tests can
be performed.
If the MIL is flashing while the vehicle is
running, severe catalytic converter damage
and power loss will soon occur. Immediate
service is required.
WARNING!
ONLY an authorized service technician
should connect equipment to the OBD II
connection port in order to read the VIN,
diagnose, or service your vehicle.
If unauthorized equipment is connected to
the OBD II connection port, such as a
driver-behavior tracking device, it may:
Be possible that vehicle systems,
including safety related systems, could
be impaired or a loss of vehicle control
could occur that may result in an
accident involving serious injury or
death.
Access, or allow others to access,
information stored in your vehicle
systems, including personal
information.
3
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 101
102 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND
MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement
to pass an inspection of your vehicle's
emissions control system. Failure to pass could
prevent vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection
and Maintenance (I/M), this check
verifies the “Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not
on when the engine is running, and that the
OBD II system is ready for testing.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The
OBD II system may not be ready if your vehicle
was recently serviced, recently had a depleted
battery or a battery replacement. If the OBD II
system should be determined not ready for the
I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test,
which you can use prior to going to the test
station. To check if your vehicle's OBD II system
is ready, you must do the following:
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position,
but do not crank or start the engine.
NOTE:
If you crank or start the engine, you will have to
start this test over.
2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to
the ON position, you will see the
“Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” symbol
come on as part of a normal bulb check.
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two
things will happen:
The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds
and then return to being fully illuminated
until you turn OFF the ignition or start the
engine. This means that your vehicle's
OBD II system is not ready and you should
not proceed to the I/M station.
The MIL will not flash at all and will remain
fully illuminated until you place the ignition
in the off position or start the engine. This
means that your vehicle's OBD II system is
ready and you can proceed to the I/M
station.
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should
see an authorized dealer or repair facility. If your
vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery
failure or replacement, you may need to do
nothing more than drive your vehicle as you
normally would in order for your OBD II system
to update. A recheck with the above test routine
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
Regardless of whether your vehicle's OBD II
system is ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated
during normal vehicle operation you should
have your vehicle serviced before going to the
I/M station. The I/M station can fail your vehicle
because the MIL is on with the engine running.
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 102
103
(Continued)
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides
increased vehicle stability and brake
performance under most braking conditions.
The system automatically prevents wheel lock,
and enhances vehicle control during braking.
The ABS performs a self-check cycle to ensure
that the ABS is working properly each time the
vehicle is started and driven. During this
self-check, you may hear a slight clicking sound
as well as some related motor noises.
ABS is activated during braking when the
system detects one or more wheels begin to
lock. Road conditions such as ice, snow, gravel,
bumps, railroad tracks, loose debris, or panic
stops may increase the likelihood of ABS
activation(s).
You also may experience the following when
ABS activates:
The ABS motor noise (it may continue to run
for a short time after the stop)
The clicking sound of solenoid valves
Brake pedal pulsations
A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end of
the stop
These are all normal characteristics of ABS.
ABS is designed to function with the Original
Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) tires. Modifi-
cation may result in degraded ABS
performance.
WARNING!
The ABS contains sophisticated electronic
equipment that may be susceptible to inter-
ference caused by improperly installed or
high output radio transmitting equipment.
This interference can cause possible loss of
anti-lock braking capability. Installation of
such equipment should be performed by
qualified professionals.
Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will
diminish their effectiveness and may lead
to a collision. Pumping makes the stopping
distance longer. Just press firmly on your
brake pedal when you need to slow down or
stop.
The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of
physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can
it increase braking or steering efficiency
beyond that afforded by the condition of the
vehicle brakes and tires or the traction
afforded.
The ABS cannot prevent collisions,
including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, following another vehicle
too closely, or hydroplaning.
The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle
must never be exploited in a reckless or
dangerous manner that could jeopardize
the user’s safety or the safety of others.
WARNING! (Continued)
4
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 103
104 SAFETY
Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light
The yellow “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” will
turn on when the ignition is placed in the ON/
RUN mode and may stay on for as long as four
seconds.
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” remains
on or comes on while driving, it indicates that
the anti-lock portion of the brake system is not
functioning and that service is required.
However, the conventional brake system will
continue to operate normally if the “Anti-Lock
Brake Warning Light” is on.
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” is on, the
brake system should be serviced as soon as
possible to restore the benefits of anti-lock
brakes. If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light”
does not come on when the ignition is placed in
the ON/RUN mode, have the light repaired as
soon as possible.
Electronic Brake Control (EBC) System
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced
Electronic Brake Control (EBC) system. This
system includes Electronic Brake Force Distri-
bution (EBD), Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS),
Brake Assist System (BAS), Hill Start Assist
(HSA), Traction Control System (TCS), Electronic
Stability Control (ESC), and Electronic Roll
Mitigation (ERM). These systems work together
to enhance both vehicle stability and control in
various driving conditions.
Your vehicle may also be equipped with Trailer
Sway Control (TSC).
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The Brake Assist System (BAS) is designed to
optimize the vehicle’s braking capability during
emergency braking maneuvers. The system
detects an emergency braking situation by
sensing the rate and amount of brake
application and then applies optimum pressure
to the brakes. This can help reduce braking
distances. The BAS complements the Anti-Lock
Brake System (ABS). Applying the brakes very
quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To
receive the benefit of the system, you must
apply continuous braking pressure during the
stopping sequence, (do not “pump” the brakes).
Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless
braking is no longer desired. Once the brake
pedal is released, the BAS is deactivated.
Brake System Warning Light
The red “Brake System Warning Light” will turn
on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
mode and may stay on for as long as four
seconds.
If the “Brake System Warning Light” remains on
or comes on while driving, it indicates that the
brake system is not functioning properly and
that immediate service is required. If the “Brake
System Warning Light” does not come on when
the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode,
have the light repaired as soon as possible.
WARNING!
The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot
prevent the natural laws of physics from
acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the
traction afforded by prevailing road
conditions. BAS cannot prevent collisions,
including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery
surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities of
a BAS-equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner,
which could jeopardize the user's safety or
the safety of others.
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 104
SAFETY 105
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
The Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
function manages the distribution of the
braking torque between the front and rear axles
by limiting braking pressure to the rear axle.
This is done to prevent overslip of the rear
wheels to avoid vehicle instability, and to
prevent the rear axle from entering ABS before
the front axle.
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
The Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) system
anticipates the potential for wheel lift by
monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and
the speed of the vehicle. When ERM determines
that the rate of change of the steering wheel
angle and vehicle’s speed are sufficient to
potentially cause wheel lift, it then applies the
appropriate brake and may also reduce engine
power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will
occur. ERM can only reduce the chance of
wheel lift occurring during severe or evasive
driving maneuvers; it cannot prevent wheel lift
due to other factors, such as road conditions,
leaving the roadway, or striking objects or other
vehicles.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
This system enhances directional control and
stability of the vehicle under various driving
conditions. ESC corrects for oversteering or
understeering of the vehicle by applying the
brake of the appropriate wheel(s) to assist in
counteracting the oversteer or understeer
condition. Engine power may also be reduced to
help the vehicle maintain the desired path.
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine
the vehicle path intended by the driver and
compares it to the actual path of the vehicle.
When the actual path does not match the
intended path, ESC applies the brake of the
appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the
oversteer or understeer condition.
Oversteer — when the vehicle is turning more
than appropriate for the steering wheel posi-
tion.
Understeer — when the vehicle is turning less
than appropriate for the steering wheel
position.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” located in the instrument cluster will start
to flash as soon as the ESC system becomes
active. The “ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light” also flashes when the TCS is
active. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light” begins to flash during
acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and
apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure to
adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing
road conditions.
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road
conditions and driving conditions, influence
the chance that wheel lift or rollover may
occur. ERM cannot prevent all wheel lift or
rollovers, especially those that involve leaving
the roadway or striking objects or other
vehicles. The capabilities of an
ERM-equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner
which could jeopardize the user's safety or
the safety of others.
4
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 105
106 SAFETY
(Continued)
ESC Operating Modes
NOTE:
Depending upon model and mode of operation,
the ESC system may have multiple operating
modes.
ESC On
This is the normal operating mode for the ESC.
Whenever the vehicle is started, the ESC system
will be in this mode. This mode should be used
for most driving conditions. Alternate ESC
modes should only be used for specific reasons
as noted in the following paragraphs.
Partial Off
The “Partial Off” mode is intended for times
when a more spirited driving experience is
desired. This mode may modify TCS and ESC
thresholds for activation, which allows for more
wheel spin than normally allowed. This mode
may be useful if the vehicle becomes stuck.
WARNING!
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot
prevent the natural laws of physics from
acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
the traction afforded by prevailing road
conditions. ESC cannot prevent accidents,
including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery
surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also cannot
prevent accidents resulting from loss of
vehicle control due to inappropriate driver
input for the conditions. Only a safe, atten-
tive, and skillful driver can prevent acci-
dents. The capabilities of an ESC equipped
vehicle must never be exploited in a reck-
less or dangerous manner which could
jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly
maintain your vehicle, may change the
handling characteristics of your vehicle,
and may negatively affect the performance
of the ESC system. Changes to the steering
system, suspension, braking system, tire
type and size or wheel size may adversely
affect ESC performance. Improperly
inflated and unevenly worn tires may also
degrade ESC performance. Any vehicle
modification or poor vehicle maintenance
that reduces the effectiveness of the ESC
system can increase the risk of loss of
vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal
injury and death.
WARNING! (Continued)
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 106
SAFETY 107
To enter the “Partial Off” mode, momentarily
push the “ESC OFF” switch and the “ESC OFF
Indicator Light” will illuminate. To turn the ESC
on again, momentarily push the “ESC OFF”
switch and the “ESC OFF Indicator Light” will
turn off.
NOTE:
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot
prevent the natural laws of physics from acting
on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction
afforded by prevailing road conditions. ESC
cannot prevent all accidents, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving
on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC
also cannot prevent collisions.
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
And ESC OFF Indicator Light
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light” in the instrument
cluster will come on when the ignition
is placed in the ON mode. It should go
out with the engine running. If the “ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” comes
on continuously with the engine running, a
malfunction has been detected in the ESC
system. If this light remains on after several
ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven
several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater
than 30 mph (48 km/h), see an authorized
dealer as soon as possible to have the problem
diagnosed and corrected.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” (located in the instrument cluster) starts
to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and
the ESC system becomes active. The “ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also
flashes when TCS is active. If the “ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” begins
to flash during acceleration, ease up on the
accelerator and apply as little throttle as
possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and
driving to the prevailing road conditions.
NOTE:
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” and the “ESC OFF Indicator Light”
come on momentarily each time the ignition
is placed in the ON position.
Each time the ignition is placed in the ON
position, the ESC system will be on even if it
was turned off previously.
The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the
sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive
following the maneuver that caused the ESC
activation.
WARNING!
When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS func-
tionality of ESC, (except for the limited slip
feature described in the TCS section), has
been disabled and the “ESC OFF Indicator
Light” will be illuminated. When in “Partial
Off” mode, the engine power reduction
feature of TCS is disabled, and the
enhanced vehicle stability offered by the
ESC system is reduced.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) is disabled when
the ESC system is in the “Partial Off” mode.
4
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 107
108 SAFETY
The “ESC OFF Indicator Light”
indicates the customer has elected to
have the Electronic Stability Control
(ESC) in a reduced mode.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
The Hill Start Assist (HSA) system is designed to
mitigate roll back from a complete stop while on
an incline. If the driver releases the brake while
stopped on an incline, HSA will continue to hold
the brake pressure for a short period. If the
driver does not apply the throttle before this
time expires, the system will release brake
pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill as
normal.
The following conditions must be met in order
for HSA to activate:
The feature must be enabled.
The vehicle must be stopped.
The park brake must be off.
The driver door must be closed.
The vehicle must be on a sufficient grade.
The gear selection must match vehicle uphill
direction (i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in
forward gear; vehicle backing uphill is in
REVERSE gear).
HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all
forward gears. The system will not activate if
the transmission is in PARK or NEUTRAL. For
vehicles equipped with a manual transmis-
sion, if the clutch is pressed, HSA will remain
active.
Towing With HSA
HSA will also provide assistance to mitigate roll
back while towing a trailer.
WARNING!
There may be situations where the Hill Start
Assist (HSA) will not activate and slight rolling
may occur, such as on minor hills or with a
loaded vehicle, or while pulling a trailer. HSA
is not a substitute for active driving
involvement. It is always the driver’s
responsibility to be attentive to distance to
other vehicles, people, and objects, and most
importantly brake operation to ensure safe
operation of the vehicle under all road
conditions. Your complete attention is always
required while driving to maintain safe control
of your vehicle. Failure to follow these
warnings can result in a collision or serious
personal injury.
WARNING!
If you use a trailer brake controller with your
trailer, the trailer brakes may be activated
and deactivated with the brake switch. If
so, there may not be enough brake pres-
sure to hold both the vehicle and the trailer
on a hill when the brake pedal is released.
In order to avoid rolling down an incline
while resuming acceleration, manually acti-
vate the trailer brake or apply more vehicle
brake pressure prior to releasing the brake
pedal.
HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply
the parking brake fully when exiting your
vehicle. Also, be certain to place the trans-
mission in PARK.
Failure to follow these warnings can result
in a collision or serious personal injury.
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 108
SAFETY 109
Disabling And Enabling HSA
This feature can be turned on or turned off. To
change the current setting, proceed as follows:
For vehicles equipped with the instrument
cluster display, refer to “Instrument Cluster
Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
For vehicles not equipped with the instrument
cluster display, perform the following steps:
1. Center the steering wheel (front wheels
pointing straight forward).
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Start the engine.
5. Rotate the steering wheel slightly more than
one-half turn to the left.
6. Push the “ESC OFF” button located in the
lower switch bank below the climate control
four times within 20 seconds. The “ESC OFF
Indicator Light” should turn on and turn off
two times.
7. Rotate the steering wheel back to center
and then an additional slightly more than
one-half turn to the right.
8. Place the ignition switch to the OFF position
and then back to the ON position. If the
sequence was completed properly, the
“ESC OFF Indicator Light” will blink several
times to confirm HSA is disabled.
9. Repeat these steps if you want to return this
feature to its previous setting.
Traction Control System (TCS)
The Traction Control System (TCS) monitors the
amount of wheel spin of each of the driven
wheels. If wheel spin is detected, the TCS may
apply brake pressure to the spinning wheel(s)
and/or reduce vehicle power to provide
enhanced acceleration and stability. A feature
of the TCS, Brake Limited Differential (BLD),
functions similar to a limited slip differential
and controls the wheel spin across a driven
axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning
faster than the other, the system will apply the
brake of the spinning wheel. This will allow more
vehicle torque to be applied to the wheel that is
not spinning. BLD may remain enabled even if
TCS and ESC are in a reduced mode.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) uses sensors in the
vehicle to recognize an excessively swaying
trailer and will take the appropriate actions to
attempt to stop the sway. TSC will become
active automatically once an excessively
swaying trailer is recognized. Note that TSC
cannot stop all trailers from swaying. Always
use caution when towing a trailer and follow the
trailer tongue weight recommendations. Refer
to “Trailer Towing” in “Starting And Operating”
for further information. When TSC is
functioning, the “ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light” will flash, the engine power may
be reduced and you may feel the brakes being
applied to individual wheels to attempt to stop
the trailer from swaying. TSC is disabled when
the ESC system is in the “Partial Off” mode.
WARNING!
If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle
down, stop at the nearest safe location, and
adjust the trailer load to eliminate trailer
sway.
4
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 109
110 SAFETY
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) — If Equipped
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system uses
two radar sensors, located inside the rear
bumper fascia, to detect highway licensable
vehicles (automobiles, trucks, motorcycles,
etc.) that enter the blind spot zones from the
rear/front/side of the vehicle.
Rear Detection Zones
When the vehicle is started, the BSM warning
light will momentarily illuminate in both outside
rear view mirrors to let the driver know that the
system is operational.
The BSM system sensors operate when the
vehicle is in any forward gear or REVERSE.
BSM Warning Light
The BSM detection zone covers approximately
one lane width on both sides of the vehicle 12 ft
(3.8 m). The zone length starts at the outside
rear view mirror and extends approximately
10 ft (3 m) beyond the rear bumper of the
vehicle. The BSM system monitors the
detection zones on both sides of the vehicle
when the vehicle speed reaches approximately
6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and will alert the
driver of vehicles in these areas.
NOTE:
The BSM system DOES NOT alert the driver
about rapidly approaching vehicles that are
outside the detection zones.
The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT
change if your vehicle is towing a trailer.
Therefore, visually verify the adjacent lane is
clear for both your vehicle and trailer before
making a lane change. If the trailer or other
object (i.e., bicycle, sports equipment)
extends beyond the side of your vehicle, this
may result in the BSM warning light
remaining illuminated the entire time the
vehicle is in a forward gear.
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system may
experience drop outs (blinking on and off) of
the side mirror Warning Indicator lamps
when a motorcycle or any small object
remains at the side of the vehicle for
extended periods of time (more than a couple
of seconds).
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 110
SAFETY 111
The area on the rear fascia where the radar
sensors are located must remain free of snow,
ice, and dirt/road contamination so that the
BSM system can function properly. Do not block
the area of the rear fascia where the radar
sensors are located with foreign objects
(bumper stickers, bicycle racks, etc.).
Sensor Location
The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in
the detection zones by illuminating the BSM
warning light located in the outside mirrors in
addition to sounding an audible (chime) alert
and reducing the radio volume. Refer to “Modes
Of Operation” in this section for further
information.
The BSM system monitors the detection zone
from three different entry points (side, rear,
front) while driving to see if an alert is
necessary. The BSM system will issue an alert
during these types of zone entries.
Entering From The Side
Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes
from either side of the vehicle.
Side Monitoring
Entering From The Rear
Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle
on either side and enter the rear detection zone
with a relative speed of less than 31 mph
(50 km/h).
Rear Monitoring
4
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 111
112 SAFETY
Overtaking Traffic
If you pass another vehicle slowly (with a
relative speed of less than 15 mph (24 km/h))
and the vehicle remains in the blind spot for
approximately 1.5 seconds, the warning light
will be illuminated. If the difference in speed
between the two vehicles is greater than
15 mph (24 km/h), the warning light will not
illuminate.
Overtaking/Approaching
The BSM system is designed not to issue an
alert on stationary objects such as guardrails,
posts, walls, foliage, berms, etc. However,
occasionally the system may alert on such
objects. This is normal operation and your
vehicle does not require service.
Overtaking/Passing
The BSM system will not alert you of objects that
are traveling in the opposite direction of the
vehicle in adjacent lanes.
Opposing Traffic
WARNING!
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an
aid to help detect objects in the blind spot
zones. The BSM system is not designed to
detect pedestrians, bicyclists, or animals.
Even if your vehicle is equipped with the BSM
system, always check your vehicle’s mirrors,
glance over your shoulder, and use your turn
signal before changing lanes. Failure to do so
can result in serious injury or death.
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 112
SAFETY 113
Rear Cross Path (RCP)
The Rear Cross Path (RCP) feature is intended
to aid the driver when backing out of parking
spaces where their vision of oncoming vehicles
may be blocked. Proceed slowly and cautiously
out of the parking space until the rear end of the
vehicle is exposed. The RCP system will then
have a clear view of the cross traffic and if an
oncoming vehicle is detected, alert the driver.
RCP Detection Zones
RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both
sides of the vehicle, for objects that are moving
toward the side of the vehicle with a minimum
speed of approximately 3 mph (5 km/h), to
objects moving a maximum of approximately
20 mph (32 km/h), such as in parking lot
situations.
NOTE:
In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can
be obscured by vehicles parked on either side.
If the sensors are blocked by other structures or
vehicles, the system will not be able to alert the
driver.
When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE,
the driver is alerted using both the visual and
audible alarms, including reducing the radio
volume.
Modes Of Operation
Modes Of Operation With Instrument Cluster
Display
Three selectable modes of operation are
available in the instrument cluster display.
Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
WARNING!
Rear Cross Path Detection (RCP) is not a back
up aid system. It is intended to be used to
help a driver detect an oncoming vehicle in a
parking lot situation. Drivers must be careful
when backing up, even when using RCP.
Always check carefully behind your vehicle,
look behind you, and be sure to check for
pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,
obstructions, and blind spots before backing
up. Failure to do so can result in serious
injury or death.
4
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 113
114 SAFETY
Blind Spot Alert Lights Only
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the
BSM system will provide a visual alert in the
appropriate side view mirror based on a
detected object. However, when the system is
operating in RCP, the system will respond with
both visual and audible alerts when a detected
object is present. Whenever an audible alert is
requested, the radio volume is reduced.
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
When operating in Blind Spot Alert
Lights/Chime mode, the BSM system will
provide a visual alert in the appropriate side
view mirror based on a detected object. If the
turn signal is then activated, and it corresponds
to an alert present on that side of the vehicle, an
audible chime will also be sounded. Whenever
a turn signal and detected object are present on
the same side at the same time, both the visual
and audio alerts will be issued. In addition to the
audible alert the radio (if on) volume will be
reduced.
NOTE:
Whenever an audible alert is requested by
the BSM system, the radio volume is
reduced.
If the hazard flashers are on, the system will
request the appropriate visual alert only.
When the system is in RCP, the system shall
respond with both visual and audible alerts
when a detected object is present. Whenever
an audible alert is requested, the radio volume
is reduced. Turn/hazard signal status is
ignored; the RCP state always requests the
chime.
Blind Spot Alert Off
When the BSM system is turned off there will be
no visual or audible alerts from either the BSM
or RCP systems.
NOTE:
The BSM system will store the current operating
mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each time
the vehicle is started the previously stored
mode will be recalled and used.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Innovation, Science and
Economic Development Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic
Development applicables aux appareils radio
exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée
aux deux conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de
brouillage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en compro-
mettre le fonctionnement.
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 114
SAFETY 115
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar
cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s authority to
operate the equipment.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
will warn the driver of a low tire pressure based
on the vehicle recommended cold placard
pressure.
NOTE:
The TPMS Warning Light will illuminate in the
instrument cluster and a chime will sound when
tire pressure is low in one or more of the four
active road tires. When this occurs you must
increase the tire pressure to the recommended
cold placard pressure in order for the TPMS
Warning Light to turn off.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by
approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F
(6.5°C). This means that when the outside
temperature decreases, the tire pressure will
decrease. Tire pressure should always be set
based on cold inflation tire pressure. This is
defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle
has not been driven for at least three hours, or
driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a three
hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure
must not exceed the maximum inflation
pressure molded into the tire sidewall. Refer to
“Tires” in “Servicing and Maintenance” for
information on how to properly inflate the
vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will also
increase as the vehicle is driven. This is normal
and there should be no adjustment for this
increased pressure.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire
pressure if the tire pressure falls below the
low-pressure warning limit for any reason,
including low temperature effects and natural
pressure loss through the tire.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low
tire pressure as long as the condition exists,
and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at
or above the recommended cold placard
pressure. Once the low tire pressure warning
(TPMS Warning Light) illuminates, you must
increase the tire pressure to the recommended
cold placard pressure in order for the TPMS
Warning Light to turn off.
The system will automatically update and the
TPMS Warning Light will turn off once the
system receives the updated tire pressures. The
vehicle may need to be driven for up to
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order
for the TPMS to receive this information.
For example, your vehicle may have a
recommended cold (parked for more than three
hours) placard pressure of 33 psi (227 kPa). If
the ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C) and
the measured tire pressure is 28 psi (193 kPa),
a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will
decrease the tire pressure to approximately
24 psi (165 kPa). This tire pressure is low
enough to turn on the “TPMS Warning Light.”
Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure
to rise to approximately 28 psi (193 kPa), but
the TPMS Warning Light will still be on. In this
situation, the TPMS Warning Light will turn off
only after the tires are inflated to the vehicle’s
recommended cold placard pressure value.
4
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 115
116 SAFETY
(Continued)
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may
need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi
(28 kPa) above the recommended cold placard
pressure in order to turn the TPMS Warning
Light off.
NOTE:
The TPMS is not intended to replace normal
tire care and maintenance, or to provide
warning of a tire failure or condition.
The TPMS should not be used as a tire pres-
sure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure.
Driving on a significantly underinflated tire
causes the tire to overheat and can lead to
tire failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel
efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsi-
bility to maintain correct tire pressure using
an accurate tire pressure gauge, even if
underinflation has not reached the level to
trigger illumination of the TPMS Warning
Light.
Seasonal temperature changes will affect
tire pressure, and the TPMS will monitor the
actual tire pressure in the tire.
System Operation
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
uses wireless technology with wheel
rim-mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire
pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire
pressure readings to the Receiver Module.
NOTE:
It is particularly important for you to check the
tire pressure in all of your tires regularly and to
maintain the proper pressure.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the orig-
inal equipment tires and wheels. TPMS
pressures and warning have been estab-
lished for the tire size equipped on your
vehicle. Undesirable system operation or
sensor damage may result when using
replacement equipment that is not of the
same size, type, and/or style. The TPM
sensor is not designed for use on after-
market wheels and may contribute to a
poor overall system performance or sensor
damage. Customers are encouraged to use
OEM wheels to assure proper TPM feature
operation.
Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause
the Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After
using an aftermarket tire sealant it is
recommended that you take your vehicle to
your authorized dealer to have your sensor
function checked.
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pres-
sure always reinstall the valve stem cap.
This will prevent moisture and dirt from
entering the valve stem, which could
damage the TPMS sensor.
CAUTION! (Continued)
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 116
SAFETY 117
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
consists of the following components:
Receiver Module
Four Tire Pressure Monitoring sensors
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning
Light
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Tire Pressure
Warnings
The TPMS Warning Light will
illuminate in the instrument cluster, a
“LOW TIRE PRESSURE” message will
display in the instrument cluster, and
an audible chime will be activated when one or
more of the four active road tire pressures are
low. Should this occur, you should stop as soon
as possible, check the inflation pressure of
each tire on your vehicle, and inflate each tire to
the vehicle's recommended cold tire placard
pressure value (located on the placard label on
the driver's-side B-Pillar).
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may
need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi
(28 kPa) above the recommended cold placard
pressure in order to turn the TPMS Warning
Light off.
The system will automatically update and the
TPMS Warning Light will extinguish once the
updated tire pressures have been received.
NOTE:
The vehicle may need to be driven for up to
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) to receive
this information.
Service TPMS
The TPMS Warning Light will flash on and off for
75 seconds, and remain on solid when a system
fault is detected. The system fault will also
sound a chime. If the ignition switch is cycled,
this sequence will repeat, providing the system
fault still exists. The TPMS Warning Light will
turn off when the fault condition no longer
exists. A system fault can occur with any of the
following scenarios:
Jamming due to electronic devices or driving
next to facilities emitting the same radio
frequencies as the TPMS sensors.
Installing some form of aftermarket window
tinting that affects radio wave signals.
Accumulation of excessive snow and/or ice
around the wheels or wheel housings.
Using tire chains on the vehicle.
Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS
sensors.
Vehicles With Compact Spare
The compact spare tire (if equipped) does not
have a TPMS sensor. Therefore the TPMS will
not monitor the pressure in the compact
spare tire.
If you install the compact spare tire in place
of a road tire that has a pressure below the
low-pressure warning limit, upon the next
ignition switch cycle, a chime will sound, a
“LOW TIRE PRESSURE” message will be
displayed and the TPMS Warning Light will
turn on.
After driving for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h), the TPMS Warning Light
will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then
remain on solid.
For each subsequent ignition switch cycle, a
chime will sound, the TPMS Warning Light will
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then
remain on solid.
4
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 117
118 SAFETY
Once you repair or replace the original road
tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of
the compact spare tire, the TPMS will auto-
matically update, and the TPMS Warning
Light will turn off as long as no tire pressure
is below the low-pressure warning limit in any
of the four active road tires.
TPMS Deactivation — If Equipped
The TPMS can be deactivated if replacing all
four wheel and tire assemblies (road tires) with
wheel and tire assemblies that do not have
TPMS sensors, such as when installing winter
wheel and tire assemblies on your vehicle.
To deactivate the TPMS, first, replace all four
wheel and tire assemblies (road tires) with tires
not equipped with Tire Pressure Monitoring
(TPM) sensors. Then, drive the vehicle for
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h). The
TPMS will chime, the TPMS Warning Light will
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain
on.
Beginning with the next ignition cycle, the TPMS
will no longer chime or flash the TPMS Warning
Light.
To reactivate the TPMS, replace all four wheel
and tire assemblies (road tires) with tires
equipped with TPM sensors. Then, drive the
vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h). The TPMS will chime, the TPMS
Warning Light will flash on and off for
75 seconds and then turn off.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Innovation, Science and
Economic Development Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic
Development applicables aux appareils radio
exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée
aux deux conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de
brouillage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en compro-
mettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar
cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s authority to
operate the equipment.
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 118
SAFETY 119
(Continued)
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Some of the most important safety features in
your vehicle are the restraint systems:
Occupant Restraint Systems Features
Seat Belt Systems
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air
Bags
Supplemental Active Head Restraints
Child Restraints
Some of the safety features described in this
section may be standard equipment on some
models, or may be optional equipment on
others. If you are not sure, ask an authorized
dealer.
Important Safety Precautions
Please pay close attention to the information in
this section. It tells you how to use your restraint
system properly, to keep you and your
passengers as safe as possible.
Here are some simple steps you can take to
minimize the risk of harm from a deploying air
bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should
always ride buckled up in the rear seat of a
vehicle with a rear seat.
2. A child who is not big enough to wear the
vehicle seat belt properly (Refer to “Child
Restraints” in this section for further
information) must be secured in the
appropriate child restraint or
belt-positioning booster seat in a rear
seating position.
3. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a
rear-facing child restraint) must ride in the
front passenger seat, move the seat as far
back as possible and use the proper child
restraint (Refer to “Child Restraints” in this
section for further information).
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder
belt behind them or under their arm.
5. You should read the instructions provided
with your child restraint to make sure that
you are using it properly.
6. All occupants should always wear their lap
and shoulder belts properly.
7. The driver and front passenger seats should
be moved back as far as practical to allow
the front air bags room to inflate.
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If
your vehicle has side air bags, and
deployment occurs, the side air bags will
inflate forcefully into the space between
occupants and the door and occupants
could be injured.
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to
be modified to accommodate a disabled
person, refer to the “Customer Assistance”
section for customer service contact
information.
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious
injury to a child 12 years or younger,
including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
4
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 119
120 SAFETY
Seat Belt Systems
Buckle up even though you are an excellent
driver, even on short trips. Someone on the road
may be a poor driver and could cause a collision
that includes you. This can happen far away
from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives,
and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries
in a collision. Some of the worst injuries happen
when people are thrown from the vehicle. Seat
belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the
risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the
vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should be
belted at all times.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert)
Driver and Passenger BeltAlert (if equipped)
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the
driver and outboard front seat passenger
(if equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) to buckle their seat belts. The
BeltAlert feature is active whenever the ignition
switch is in the START or ON/RUN position.
Initial Indication
If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition
switch is first in the START or ON/RUN position,
a chime will signal for a few seconds. If the
driver or outboard front seat passenger
(if equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) is unbuckled when the ignition switch
is first in the START or ON/RUN position the
Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and
remain on until both outboard front seat belts
are buckled. The outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert is not active when an outboard front
passenger seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert Warning Sequence
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated
when the vehicle is moving above a specified
vehicle speed range and the driver or outboard
front seat passenger is unbuckled (if equipped
with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert)
(the outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is
not active when the outboard front passenger
seat is unoccupied). The BeltAlert warning
sequence starts by blinking the Seat Belt
Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent
chime. Once the BeltAlert warning sequence
has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder Light
will remain on until the seat belts are buckled.
The BeltAlert warning sequence may repeat
based on vehicle speed until the driver and
occupied outboard front seat passenger seat
belts are buckled. The driver should instruct all
occupants to buckle their seat belts.
Change of Status
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger
(if equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) unbuckles their seat belt while the
vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert warning
sequence will begin until the seat belts are
buckled again.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in
the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a
rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If
the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do
not transport a rear-facing child restraint in
that vehicle.
WARNING! (Continued)
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 120
SAFETY 121
(Continued)
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is
not active when the outboard front passenger
seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert may be triggered
when an animal or other items are placed on
the outboard front passenger seat or when the
seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is
recommended that pets be restrained in the
rear seat (if equipped) in pet harnesses or pet
carriers that are secured by seat belts, and
cargo is properly stowed.
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by an
authorized dealer. FCA US LLC does not
recommend deactivating BeltAlert.
NOTE:
If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver
or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped
with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) is
unbuckled the Seat Belt Reminder Light will
turn on and remain on until the driver and
outboard front seat passenger seat belts are
buckled.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are
equipped with lap/shoulder belts.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only
during very sudden stops or collisions. This
feature allows the shoulder part of the seat belt
to move freely with you under normal
conditions. However, in a collision the seat belt
will lock and reduce your risk of striking the
inside of the vehicle or being thrown out of the
vehicle.
WARNING!
Relying on the air bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The air
bags work with your seat belt to restrain you
properly. In some collisions, the air bags
won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat
belt even though you have air bags.
In a collision, you and your passengers can
suffer much greater injuries if you are not
properly buckled up. You can strike the inte-
rior of your vehicle or other passengers, or
you can be thrown out of the vehicle. Always
be sure you and others in your vehicle are
buckled up properly.
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,
people riding in these areas are more likely
to be seriously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of
your vehicle that is not equipped with seats
and seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly. Occupants,
including the driver, should always wear
their seat belts whether or not an air bag is
also provided at their seating position to
minimize the risk of severe injury or death
in the event of a crash.
Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could
make your injuries in a collision much
worse. You might suffer internal injuries, or
you could even slide out of the seat belt.
Follow these instructions to wear your seat
belt safely and to keep your passengers
safe, too.
Two people should never be belted into a
single seat belt. People belted together can
crash into one another in a collision, hurting
one another badly. Never use a lap/
shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one
person, no matter what their size.
WARNING! (Continued)
4
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 121
122 SAFETY
(Continued)
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit
back and adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back
of the front seat, and next to your arm in the
rear seat (for vehicles equipped with a rear
seat). Grasp the latch plate and pull out the
seat belt. Slide the latch plate up the
webbing as far as necessary to allow the
seat belt to go around your lap.
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
WARNING!
A lap belt worn too high can increase the
risk of injury in a collision. The seat belt
forces won’t be at the strong hip and pelvic
bones, but across your abdomen. Always
wear the lap part of your seat belt as low as
possible and keep it snug.
A twisted seat belt may not protect you
properly. In a collision, it could even cut into
you. Be sure the seat belt is flat against
your body, without twists. If you can’t
straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take it
to an authorized dealer immediately and
have it fixed.
A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong
buckle will not protect you properly. The lap
portion could ride too high on your body,
possibly causing internal injuries. Always
buckle your seat belt into the buckle
nearest you.
A seat belt that is too loose will not protect
you properly. In a sudden stop, you could
move too far forward, increasing the possi-
bility of injury. Wear your seat belt snugly.
A seat belt that is worn under your arm is
dangerous. Your body could strike the
inside surfaces of the vehicle in a collision,
increasing head and neck injury. A seat belt
worn under the arm can cause internal inju-
ries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the seat belt over your
shoulder so that your strongest bones will
take the force in a collision.
A shoulder belt placed behind you will not
protect you from injury during a collision.
You are more likely to hit your head in a
collision if you do not wear your shoulder
belt. The lap and shoulder belt are meant to
be used together.
A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in
a collision and leave you with no protection.
Inspect the seat belt system periodically,
checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immedi-
ately. Do not disassemble or modify the
seat belt system. Seat belt assemblies
must be replaced after a collision.
WARNING! (Continued)
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 122
SAFETY 123
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit,
insert the latch plate into the buckle until
you hear a “click.”
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and
lies low across your hips, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt
portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To
loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the
latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug
seat belt reduces the risk of sliding under
the seat belt in a collision.
Positioning The Lap Belt
5. Position the shoulder belt across the
shoulder and chest with minimal, if any
slack so that it is comfortable and not
resting on your neck. The retractor will
withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
6. To release the seat belt, push the red button
on the buckle. The seat belt will automat-
ically retract to its stowed position. If
necessary, slide the latch plate down the
webbing to allow the seat belt to retract
fully.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted
lap/shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as
possible to the anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above
the latch plate, grasp and twist the seat belt
webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that
begins immediately above the latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded
webbing. The folded webbing must enter
the slot at the top of the latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it
clears the folded webbing and the seat belt
is no longer twisted.
4
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 123
124 SAFETY
(Continued)
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the front and second row outboard seats the
shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or
downward to position the seat belt away from
your neck. Push or squeeze the anchorage
button to release the anchorage, and move it up
or down to the position that serves you best.
Adjustable Anchorage
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you
will prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a
lower position, and if you are taller than
average, you will prefer the shoulder belt
anchorage in a higher position. After you
release the anchorage button, try to move it up
or down to make sure that it is locked in
position.
NOTE:
The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage
is equipped with an Easy Up feature. This
feature allows the shoulder belt anchorage to
be adjusted in the upward position without
pushing or squeezing the release button. To
verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched,
pull downward on the shoulder belt anchorage
until it is locked into position.
Second Row Center (If Equipped) and Third
Row Center Seat Belt Operating Instructions
The second row center (if equipped) and third
row center seat belts feature a seat belt with a
mini-latch plate and buckle, which allows the
seat belt to detach from the lower anchor when
the seat is folded. The mini-latch plate and
regular latch plate can then be stored out of the
way in the headliner for added convenience to
open up utilization of the storage areas behind
the front seats when the seat is not occupied.
WARNING!
Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could
make your injuries in a collision much
worse. You might suffer internal injuries, or
you could even slide out of the seat belt.
Follow these instructions to wear your seat
belt safely and to keep your passengers
safe, too.
Position the shoulder belt across the
shoulder and chest with minimal, if any
slack so that it is comfortable and not
resting on your neck. The retractor will with-
draw any slack in the shoulder belt.
Misadjustment of the seat belt could
reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt
in a crash.
Always make all seat belt height adjust-
ments when the vehicle is stationary.
WARNING! (Continued)
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 124
SAFETY 125
1. Remove the mini-latch plate and regular
latch plate from its stowed position in the
headliner slightly behind the second or
third row seat.
Mini-Latch Stowage
2. Grasp the mini-latch plate and pull the seat
belt over the seat.
Mini-Latch Stowage
3. Route the shoulder belt to the inside of the
left head restraint.
Connect Second Row Mini-Latch To Buckle
4. When the seat belt is long enough to fit,
insert the mini-latch plate into the
mini-buckle until you hear a “click.”
Second Row Mini-Latch And Buckle Connected
5. Sit back in seat. Slide the regular latch plate
up the webbing as far as necessary to allow
the seat belt to go around your lap.
Rear Center Seat Belt Buckled
6. When the seat belt is long enough to fit,
insert the latch plate into the buckle until
you hear a “click.”
Rear Center Seat Belt Buckled
4
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 125
126 SAFETY
(Continued)
7. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and
lies low across your hips, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt
portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To
loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, pull on
the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces the
risk of sliding under the seat belt in a
collision.
8. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so
that it is comfortable and not resting on your
neck. The retractor will withdraw any slack
in the seat belt.
9. To release the seat belt, push the red button
on the buckle.
10. To disengage the mini-latch plate from the
mini-buckle for storage, insert the regular
latch plate into the center red slot on the
mini-buckle. The seat belt will automatically
retract to its stowed position. If necessary,
slide the latch plate down the webbing to
allow the seat belt to retract fully. Insert the
mini-latch plate and regular latch plate into
its stowed position.
Detaching Mini-Buckle With Seat Belt Tongue
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly,
even when the webbing is fully extended and
the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage
(if equipped) is in its lowest position, an
authorized dealer can provide you with a Seat
Belt Extender. The Seat Belt Extender should be
used only if the existing seat belt is not long
enough. When the Seat Belt Extender is not
required for a different occupant, it must be
removed.
WARNING!
If the mini-latch plate and mini-buckle are
not properly connected when the seat belt
is used by an occupant, the seat belt will
not be able to provide proper restraint and
will increase the risk of injury in a collision.
When reattaching the mini-latch plate and
mini-buckle, ensure the seat belt webbing
is not twisted. If the webbing is twisted,
follow the preceding procedure to detach
the mini-latch plate and mini-buckle,
untwist the webbing, and reattach the
mini-latch plate and mini-buckle.
WARNING!
ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physi-
cally required in order to properly fit the
original seat belt system. DO NOT USE the
Seat Belt Extender if, when worn, the
distance between the front edge of the
Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of
the occupant’s body is LESS than 6 inches.
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 126
SAFETY 127
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat belts must be worn by all occupants
including pregnant women: the risk of injury in
the event of an accident is reduced for the
mother and the unborn child if they are wearing
a seat belt.
Position the lap belt snug and low below the
abdomen and across the strong bones of the
hips. Place the shoulder belt across the chest
and away from the neck. Never place the
shoulder belt behind the back or under the arm.
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped
with pretensioning devices that are designed to
remove slack from the seat belt in the event of
a collision. These devices may improve the
performance of the seat belt by removing slack
from the seat belt early in a collision. Preten-
sioners work for all size occupants, including
those in child restraints.
NOTE:
These devices are not a substitute for proper
seat belt placement by the occupant. The seat
belt still must be worn snugly and positioned
properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the
air bags, the pretensioners are single use items.
A deployed pretensioner or a deployed air bag
must be replaced immediately.
Energy Management Feature
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped
with an Energy Management feature that may
help further reduce the risk of injury in the event
of a collision. The seat belt system has a
retractor assembly that is designed to release
webbing in a controlled manner.
Using a Seat Belt Extender when not
needed can increase the risk of serious
injury or death in a collision. Only use the
Seat Belt Extender when the lap belt is not
long enough and only use in the recom-
mended seating positions. Remove and
store the Seat Belt Extender when not
needed.
WARNING! (Continued)
4
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 127
128 SAFETY
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors
(ALR) (If Equipped)
The seat belts in the passenger seating
positions may be equipped with a Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) which is
used to secure a child restraint system. For
additional information, refer to “Installing Child
Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under
the “Child Restraints” section of this manual.
The figure below illustrates the locking feature
for each seating position.
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(2nd Row Bench Seat )
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(2nd Row Stow ‘n Go Seating)
If the passenger seating position is equipped
with an ALR and is being used for normal usage,
only pull the seat belt webbing out far enough to
comfortably wrap around the occupant’s
mid-section so as to not activate the ALR. If the
ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking sound
as the seat belt retracts. Allow the webbing to
retract completely in this case and then
carefully pull out only the amount of webbing
necessary to comfortably wrap around the
occupant’s mid-section. Slide the latch plate
into the buckle until you hear a "click."
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is
automatically pre-locked. The seat belt will still
retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt.
Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a
child restraint is installed in a seating position
that has a seat belt with this feature. Children
12 years old and under should always be
properly restrained in the rear seat of a vehicle
with a rear seat.
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious
injury to a child 12 years or younger,
including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in
the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a
rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If
the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do
not transport a rear-facing child restraint in
that vehicle.
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 128
SAFETY 129
(Continued)
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder
belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull
downward until the entire seat belt is
extracted.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat
belt retracts, you will hear a clicking sound.
This indicates the seat belt is now in the
Automatic Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt
and allow it to retract completely to disengage
the Automatic Locking Mode and activate the
vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode.
Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR)
These head restraints are passive, deployable
components, and vehicles with this equipment
cannot be readily identified by any markings,
only through visual inspection of the head
restraint. The head restraint will be split in two
halves, with the front half being soft foam and
trim, the back half being decorative plastic.
How The Active Head Restraints (AHR) Work
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
determines whether the severity or type of rear
impact will require the Active Head Restraints
(AHR) to deploy. If a rear impact requires
deployment, both the driver and front
passenger seat AHRs will be deployed.
When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the
front half of the head restraint extends forward
to minimize the gap between the back of the
occupant’s head and the AHR. This system is
designed to help prevent or reduce the extent of
injuries to the driver and front passenger in
certain types of rear impacts.
NOTE:
The Active Head Restraints (AHR) may or may
not deploy in the event of a front or side impact.
However, if during a front impact, a secondary
rear impact occurs, the AHR may deploy based
on the severity and type of the impact.
WARNING!
The seat belt assembly must be replaced if
the switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) feature or any other seat belt function
is not working properly when checked
according to the procedures in the Service
Manual.
Failure to replace the seat belt assembly
could increase the risk of injury in
collisions.
Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to
restrain occupants who are wearing the
seat belt or children who are using booster
seats. The locked mode is only used to
install rear-facing or forward-facing child
restraints that have a harness for
restraining the child.
WARNING! (Continued)
4
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 129
130 SAFETY
Active Head Restraint (AHR) Components:
Active Head Restraint (AHR) Components
NOTE:
For more information on properly adjusting and
positioning the head restraint, refer to “Head
Restraints” in “Getting To Know Your Vehicle.”
Resetting Active Head Restraints (AHR)
Active Head Restraint (AHR) Deployed
If the Active Head Restraints are triggered
during a collision, the front half of the head
restraint will be extended forward and
separated from the rear half of the head
restraint (See Image). Do not drive your vehicle
after the AHRs have deployed. The head
restraint must be reset into the original position
to best protect the occupant for all types of
collisions.
1 — Head Restraint Front Half
(Soft Foam And Trim)
2 — Head Restraint Back Half
(Decorative Plastic Rear Cover)
3 — Head Restraint Guide Tubes
4 — Seat Back
WARNING!
All occupants, including the driver, should
not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s
seat until the head restraints are placed in
their proper positions in order to minimize
the risk of neck injury in the event of a
collision.
Do not place items over the top of the
Active Head Restraint, such as coats, seat
covers or portable DVD players. These
items may interfere with the operation of
the Active Head Restraint in the event of a
collision and could result in serious injury or
death.
Active Head Restraints may be deployed if
they are struck by an object such as a hand,
foot or loose cargo. To avoid accidental
deployment of the Active Head Restraint,
ensure that all cargo is secured, as loose
cargo could contact the Active Head
Restraint during sudden stops. Failure to
follow this warning could cause personal
injury if the Active Head Restraint is
deployed.
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 130
SAFETY 131
An authorized FCA US LLC dealer must reset the
AHRs on the driver’s and front passenger’s seat
before driving. Personally attempting to reset
the AHRs may result in damage to the AHRs that
could impair their function.
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS)
Some of the safety features described in this
section may be standard equipment on some
models, or may be optional equipment on
others. If you are not sure, ask an authorized
dealer.
The air bag system must be ready to protect you
in a collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller
(ORC) monitors the internal circuits and
interconnecting wiring associated with the
electrical Air Bag System Components.
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following
Air Bag System Components:
Air Bag System Components
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Air Bag Warning Light
Steering Wheel and Column
Instrument Panel
Knee Impact Bolsters
Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Knee Air Bags
Front and Side Impact Sensors
Seat Belt Pretensioners
Seat Track Position Sensors
Air Bag Warning Light
The Occupant Restraint Controller
(ORC) monitors the readiness of the
electronic parts of the air bag system
whenever the ignition switch is in the
START or ON/RUN position. If the ignition switch
is in the OFF position or in the ACC position, the
air bag system is not on and the air bags will not
inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply
system that may deploy the air bag system even
if the battery loses power or it becomes discon-
nected prior to deployment.
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in
the instrument panel for approximately four to
eight seconds for a self-check when the ignition
switch is first in the ON/RUN position. After the
self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will turn
off. If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part
of the system, it turns on the Air Bag Warning
Light, either momentarily or continuously. A
single chime will sound to alert you if the light
comes on again after initial startup.
WARNING!
Deployed AHRs are not able to best protect
you in all types of collisions. Have deployed
AHRs reset by an authorized dealer
immediately.
4
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 131
132 SAFETY
(Continued)
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will
illuminate the instrument panel Air Bag Warning
Light if a malfunction is detected that could
affect the air bag system. The diagnostics also
record the nature of the malfunction. While the
air bag system is designed to be maintenance
free, if any of the following occurs, have an
authorized dealer service the air bag system
immediately.
The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on
during the four to eight seconds when the
ignition switch is first in the ON/RUN position.
The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after
the four to eight-second interval.
The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermit-
tently or remains on while driving.
NOTE:
If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant
Restraint Controller (ORC) may also be
disabled. In this condition the air bags may not
be ready to inflate for your protection. Have an
authorized dealer service the air bag system
immediately.
Front Air Bags
This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder
belts for both the driver and front passenger.
The front air bags are a supplement to the seat
belt restraint systems. The driver front air bag is
mounted in the center of the steering wheel.
The passenger front air bag is mounted in the
instrument panel, above the glove
compartment. The words “SRS AIRBAG” or
“AIRBAG” are embossed on the air bag covers.
Front Air Bag/Knee Impact Bolster Locations
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your
instrument panel could mean you won’t have
the air bag system to protect you in a
collision. If the light does not come on as a
bulb check when the ignition is first turned
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it
comes on as you drive, have an authorized
dealer service the air bag system
immediately.
1 — Driver And Passenger Front Air Bags
2 — Passenger Knee Impact Bolster
3 — Driver Knee Impact Bolster/Supplemental
Driver Knee Air Bag
WARNING!
Being too close to the steering wheel or
instrument panel during front air bag
deployment could cause serious injury,
including death. Air bags need room to
inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending
your arms to reach the steering wheel or
instrument panel.
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 132
SAFETY 133
(Continued)
Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has
multistage driver and front passenger air bags.
This system provides output appropriate to the
severity and type of collision as determined by
the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), which
may receive information from the front impact
sensors (if equipped) or other system
components.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately
during an impact that requires air bag
deployment. A low energy output is used in less
severe collisions. A higher energy output is used
for more severe collisions.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver
and/or front passenger seat belt buckle switch
that detects whether the driver or front
passenger seat belt is buckled. The seat belt
buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of
the Advanced Front Air Bags.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or
front passenger seat track position sensors that
may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced
Front Air Bags based upon seat position.
Front Air Bag Operation
Front Air Bags are designed to provide
additional protection by supplementing the seat
belts. Front air bags are not expected to reduce
the risk of injury in rear, side, or rollover
collisions. The front air bags will not deploy in all
frontal collisions, including some that may
produce substantial vehicle damage — for
example, some pole collisions, truck
underrides, and angle offset collisions.
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious
injury to a child 12 years or younger,
including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in
the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a
rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If
the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do
not transport a rear-facing child restraint in
that vehicle.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
No objects should be placed over or near
the air bag on the instrument panel or
steering wheel because any such objects
could cause harm if the vehicle is in a colli-
sion severe enough to cause the air bag to
inflate.
Do not put anything on or around the air
bag covers or attempt to open them manu-
ally. You may damage the air bags and you
could be injured because the air bags may
no longer be functional. The protective
covers for the air bag cushions are
designed to open only when the air bags
are inflating.
Relying on the air bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The air
bags work with your seat belt to restrain you
properly. In some collisions, air bags won’t
deploy at all. Always wear your seat belts
even though you have air bags.
WARNING! (Continued)
4
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 133
134 SAFETY
On the other hand, depending on the type and
location of impact, front air bags may deploy in
crashes with little vehicle front-end damage but
that produce a severe initial deceleration.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle
deceleration over time, vehicle speed and
damage by themselves are not good indicators
of whether or not an air bag should have
deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in
all collisions, and also are needed to help keep
you in position, away from an inflating air bag.
When the ORC detects a collision requiring the
front air bags, it signals the inflator units. A large
quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate
the front air bags.
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the
upper passenger side of the instrument panel
separate and fold out of the way as the air bags
inflate to their full size. The front air bags fully
inflate in less time than it takes to blink your
eyes. The front air bags then quickly deflate
while helping to restrain the driver and front
passenger.
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the
knees of the driver and front passenger, and
position the front occupants for improved
interaction with the front air bags.
Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental
Driver Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument
panel below the steering column. The Supple-
mental Driver Knee Air Bag provides enhanced
protection during a frontal impact by working
together with the seat belts, pretensioners, and
front air bags.
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags
(SABs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental
Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs).
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags
(SABs) are located in the outboard side of the
front seats. The SABs are marked with “SRS
AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” on a label or on the seat
trim on the outboard side of the seats.
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of
occupant injury during certain side impacts, in
addition to the injury reduction potential
provided by the seat belts and body structure.
Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag
WARNING!
Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee
impact bolsters in any way.
Do not mount any accessories to the knee
impact bolsters such as alarm lights,
stereos, citizen band radios, etc.
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 134
SAFETY 135
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on
the outboard side of the seatback’s trim cover.
The inflating SAB deploys through the seat
seam into the space between the occupant and
the door. The SAB moves at a very high speed
and with such a high force that it could injure
occupants if they are not seated properly, or if
items are positioned in the area where the SAB
inflates. Children are at an even greater risk of
injury from a deploying air bag.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental
Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs).
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs) are located above the side windows.
The trim covering the SABICs is labeled “SRS
AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG.”
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)
Label Location
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head and
other injuries to front and rear seat outboard
occupants in certain side impacts, in addition to
the injury reduction potential provided by the
seat belts and body structure.
The SABIC deploys downward, covering the side
windows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside
edge of the headliner out of the way and covers
the window. The SABICs inflate with enough
force to injure occupants if they are not belted
and seated properly, or if items are positioned
in the area where the SABICs inflate. Children
are at an even greater risk of injury from a
deploying air bag.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial
or complete ejection of vehicle occupants
through side windows in certain side impact
events.
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place
objects between you and the Side Air Bags;
the performance could be adversely affected
and/or objects could be pushed into you,
causing serious injury.
4
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 135
136 SAFETY
Side Impacts
The Side Air Bags are designed to activate in
certain side impacts. The Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) determines whether the
deployment of the Side Air Bags in a particular
impact event is appropriate, based on the
severity and type of collision. The side impact
sensors aid the ORC in determining the
appropriate response to impact events.
The system is calibrated to deploy the Side Air
Bags on the impact side of the vehicle during
impacts that require Side Air Bag occupant
protection. In side impacts, the Side Air Bags
deploy independently; a left side impact deploys
the left Side Air Bags only and a right-side
impact deploys the right Side Air Bags only.
Vehicle damage by itself is not a good indicator
of whether or not Side Air Bags should have
deployed.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side
collisions, including some collisions at certain
angles, or some side collisions that do not
impact the area of the passenger compartment.
The Side Air Bags may deploy during angled or
offset frontal collisions where the front air bags
deploy.
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt
restraint system. Side Air Bags deploy in less
time than it takes to blink your eyes.
WARNING!
Do not mount equipment, or stack luggage
or other cargo up high enough to block the
deployment of the SABICs. The trim
covering above the side windows where the
SABIC and its deployment path are located
should remain free from any obstructions.
In order for the SABICs to work as intended,
do not install any accessory items in your
vehicle which could alter the roof. Do not
add an aftermarket sunroof to your vehicle.
Do not add roof racks that require perma-
nent attachments (bolts or screws) for
installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill
into the roof of the vehicle for any reason.
WARNING!
Occupants, including children, who are up
against or very close to Side Air Bags can be
seriously injured or killed. Occupants,
including children, should never lean on or
sleep against the door, side windows, or
area where the side air bags inflate, even if
they are in an infant or child restraint.
Seat belts (and child restraints where
appropriate) are necessary for your protec-
tion in all collisions. They also help keep
you in position, away from an inflating Side
Air Bag. To get the best protection from the
Side Air Bags, occupants must wear their
seat belts properly and sit upright with their
backs against the seats. Children must be
properly restrained in a child restraint or
booster seat that is appropriate for the size
of the child.
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 136
SAFETY 137
NOTE:
Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim, but they will open during air bag
deployment.
Rollover Events
Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners are
designed to activate in certain rollover events.
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
determines whether deployment in a particular
rollover event is appropriate, based on the
severity and type of collision. Vehicle damage by
itself is not a good indicator of whether or not
Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners
should have deployed.
The Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners
will not deploy in all rollover events. The rollover
sensing system determines if a rollover event
may be in progress and whether deployment is
appropriate. In the event the vehicle
experiences a rollover or near rollover event,
and deployment is appropriate, the rollover
sensing system will deploy the side air bags and
seat belt pretensioners on both sides of the
vehicle.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial
or complete ejection of vehicle occupants
through side windows in certain rollover or side
impact events.
Air Bag System Components
NOTE:
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
monitors the internal circuits and intercon-
necting wiring associated with electrical Air Bag
System Components listed below:
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Air Bag Warning Light
Steering Wheel and Column
Instrument Panel
Knee Impact Bolsters
Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Knee Air Bags
Front and Side Impact Sensors
Seat Belt Pretensioners
Seat Track Position Sensors
WARNING!
Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not
lean against the door or window. Sit upright
in the center of the seat.
Being too close to the Side Air Bags during
deployment could cause you to be severely
injured or killed.
Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could
lead to more severe injuries in a collision.
The Side Air Bags work with your seat belt
to restrain you properly. In some collisions,
Side Air Bags won’t deploy at all. Always
wear your seat belt even though you have
Side Air Bags.
4
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 137
138 SAFETY
If A Deployment Occurs
The front air bags are designed to deflate
immediately after deployment.
NOTE:
Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
collisions. This does not mean something is
wrong with the air bag system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the air
bags, any or all of the following may occur:
The air bag material may sometimes cause
abrasions and/or skin reddening to the occu-
pants as the air bags deploy and unfold. The
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or
those you might get sliding along a carpet or
gymnasium floor. They are not caused by
contact with chemicals. They are not perma-
nent and normally heal quickly. However, if
you haven’t healed significantly within a few
days, or if you have any blistering, see your
doctor immediately.
As the air bags deflate, you may see some
smoke-like particles. The particles are a
normal by-product of the process that gener-
ates the non-toxic gas used for air bag infla-
tion. These airborne particles may irritate the
skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or
eye irritation, rinse the area with cool water.
For nose or throat irritation, move to fresh air.
If the irritation continues, see your doctor. If
these particles settle on your clothing, follow
the garment manufacturer’s instructions for
cleaning.
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have
deployed. If you are involved in another
collision, the air bags will not be in place to
protect you.
NOTE:
Air bag covers may not be obvious in the inte-
rior trim, but they will open during air bag
deployment.
After any collision, the vehicle should be
taken to an authorized dealer immediately.
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact, if the communication
network remains intact, and the power remains
intact, depending on the nature of the event,
the ORC will determine whether to have the
Enhanced Accident Response System perform
the following functions:
Cut off fuel to the engine (if equipped)
Cut off battery power to the electric motor (if
equipped)
Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has
power
Turn on the interior lights, which remain on
as long as the battery has power or for
15 minutes from the intervention of the
Enhanced Accident Response System
Unlock the power door locks
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt
pretensioners cannot protect you in another
collision. Have the air bags, seat belt
pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor
assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer
immediately. Also, have the Occupant
Restraint Controller System serviced as well.
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 138
SAFETY 139
(Continued)
Your vehicle may also be designed to perform
any of these other functions in response to the
Enhanced Accident Response System:
Turn off the Fuel Filter Heater, Turn off the
HVAC Blower Motor, Close the HVAC Circula-
tion Door
Cut off battery power to the:
Engine
Electric Motor (if equipped)
Electric power steering
Brake booster
Electric park brake
Automatic transmission gear selector
Horn
Front wiper
Headlamp washer pump
NOTE:
After an accident, remember to cycle the
ignition to the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position and
remove the key from the ignition switch to avoid
draining the battery. Carefully check the vehicle
for fuel leaks in the engine compartment and on
the ground near the engine compartment and
fuel tank before resetting the system and
starting the engine. If there are no fuel leaks or
damage to the vehicle electrical devices (e.g.
headlights) after an accident, reset the system
by following the procedure described below. If
you have any doubt, contact an authorized
dealer.
Enhanced Accident Response System Reset
Procedure
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident
Response System functions after an event, the
ignition switch must be changed from ignition
START or ON/RUN to ignition OFF. Carefully
check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine
compartment and on the ground near the
engine compartment and fuel tank before
resetting the system and starting the engine.
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING!
Modifications to any part of the air bag
system could cause it to fail when you need
it. You could be injured if the air bag system
is not there to protect you. Do not modify
the components or wiring, including adding
any kind of badges or stickers to the
steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper
passenger side of the instrument panel. Do
not modify the front bumper, vehicle body
structure, or add aftermarket side steps or
running boards.
It is dangerous to try to repair any part of
the air bag system yourself. Be sure to tell
anyone who works on your vehicle that it
has an air bag system.
4
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 139
140 SAFETY
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data
recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is
to record, in certain crash or near crash-like
situations, such as an air bag deployment or
hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in
understanding how a vehicle’s systems
performed.
The EDR is designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short
period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The
EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such
data as:
How various systems in your vehicle were
operating;
Whether or not the driver and passenger
safety belts were buckled/fastened;
How far (if at all) the driver was depressing
the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better
understanding of the circumstances in which
crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE:
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are
recorded by the EDR under normal driving
conditions and no personal data (e.g., name,
gender, age, and crash location) are recorded.
However, other parties, such as law
enforcement, could combine the EDR data with
the type of personally identifying data routinely
acquired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special
equipment is required, and access to the
vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the
vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as
law enforcement, that have the special
equipment, can read the information if they
have access to the vehicle or the EDR.
Do not attempt to modify any part of your
air bag system. The air bag may inflate acci-
dentally or may not function properly if
modifications are made. Take your vehicle
to an authorized dealer for any air bag
system service. If your seat, including your
trim cover and cushion, needs to be
serviced in any way (including removal or
loosening/tightening of seat attachment
bolts), take the vehicle to an authorized
dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat
accessories may be used. If it is necessary
to modify the air bag system for persons
with disabilities, contact an authorized
dealer.
WARNING! (Continued)
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 140
SAFETY 141
Child Restraints
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up
at all times, including babies and children. Every
state in the United States, and every Canadian
province, requires that small children ride in
proper restraint systems. This is the law, and
you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years or younger should ride
properly buckled up in a rear seat, if available.
According to crash statistics, children are safer
when properly restrained in the rear seats
rather than in the front.
There are different sizes and types of restraints
for children from newborn size to the child
almost large enough for an adult safety belt.
Always check the child seat Owner’s Manual to
make sure you have the correct seat for your
child. Carefully read and follow all the
instructions and warnings in the child restraint
Owner’s Manual and on all the labels attached
to the child restraint.
Before buying any restraint system, make sure
that it has a label certifying that it meets all
applicable Safety Standards. You should also
make sure that you can install it in the vehicle
where you will use it.
NOTE:
For additional information, refer to http://
www.nhtsa.gov/parents-and-caregivers or
call: 1–888–327–4236
Canadian residents should refer to Transport
Canada’s website for additional information:
http://www.tc.gc.ca/eng/motorvehicle-
safety/safedrivers-childsafety-index-53.html
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can
become a projectile inside the vehicle. The
force required to hold even an infant on your
lap could become so great that you could not
hold the child, no matter how strong you are.
The child and others could be badly injured or
killed. Any child riding in your vehicle should
be in a proper restraint for the child’s size.
4
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 141
142 SAFETY
(Continued)
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Infant And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride
rear-facing in the vehicle until they are two years
old or until they reach either the height or
weight limit of their rear-facing child restraint.
Two types of child restraints can be used
rear-facing: infant carriers and convertible child
seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children from
birth until they reach the weight or height limit of
the infant carrier. Convertible child seats can be
used either rear-facing or forward-facing in the
vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a
higher weight limit in the rear-facing direction
than infant carriers do, so they can be used
rear-facing by children who have outgrown their
infant carrier but are still less than at least two
years old. Children should remain rear-facing
until they reach the highest weight or height
allowed by their convertible child seat.
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint
Infants and Toddlers
Children who are two years old or younger and
who have not reached the height or weight limits
of their child restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child
Restraint, facing rearward in a rear seat of the
vehicle
Small Children
Children who are at least two years old or who
have outgrown the height or weight limit of their
rear-facing child restraint
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a five-point
Harness, facing forward in a rear seat of the
vehicle
Larger Children
Children who have outgrown their forward-facing
child restraint, but are too small to properly fit
the vehicle’s seat belt
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle
seat belt, seated in a rear seat of the vehicle
Children Too Large for Child Restraints
Children 12 years old or younger, who have
outgrown the height or weight limit of their
booster seat
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in a rear seat of the
vehicle
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious
injury to a child 12 years or younger,
including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 142
SAFETY 143
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have
outgrown their rear-facing convertible child seat
can ride forward-facing in the vehicle.
Forward-facing child seats and convertible child
seats used in the forward-facing direction are
for children who are over two years old or who
have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height
limit of their rear-facing convertible child seat.
Children should remain in a forward-facing child
seat with a harness for as long as possible, up
to the highest weight or height allowed by the
child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use
a belt-positioning booster seat until the
vehicle’s seat belts fit properly. If the child
cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle’s
seat cushion while the child’s back is against
the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning
booster seat. The child and belt-positioning
booster seat are held in the vehicle by the
seat belt.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in
the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a
rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If
the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do
not transport a rear-facing child restraint in
that vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not install a rear-facing car seat using a
rear support leg in this vehicle. The floor of
this vehicle is not designed to manage the
crash forces of this type of car seat. In a
crash, the support leg may not function as it
was designed by the car seat manufacturer,
and your child may be more severely injured
as a result.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Improper installation can lead to failure of
an infant or child restraint. It could come
loose in a collision. The child could be badly
injured or killed. Follow the child restraint
manufacturer’s directions exactly when
installing an infant or child restraint.
After a child restraint is installed in the
vehicle, do not move the vehicle seat
forward or rearward because it can loosen
the child restraint attachments. Remove
the child restraint before adjusting the
vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat
has been adjusted, reinstall the child
restraint.
When your child restraint is not in use,
secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or
LATCH anchorages, or remove it from the
vehicle. Do not leave it loose in the vehicle.
In a sudden stop or accident, it could strike
the occupants or seatbacks and cause
serious personal injury.
4
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 143
144 SAFETY
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the
shoulder belt comfortably, and whose legs are
long enough to bend over the front of the seat
when their back is against the seatback, should
use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this simple
5-step test to decide whether the child can use
the vehicle’s seat belt alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against
the back of the vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over
the front of the vehicle seat – while the child
is still sitting all the way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s
shoulder between the neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible,
touching the child’s thighs and not the
stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the
whole trip?
If the answer to any of these questions was “no,
” then the child still needs to use a booster seat
in this vehicle. If the child is using the lap/
shoulder belt, check seat belt fit periodically
and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched.
A child’s squirming or slouching can move the
belt out of position. If the shoulder belt contacts
the face or neck, move the child closer to the
center of the vehicle, or use a booster seat to
position the seat belt on the child correctly.
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt
under an arm or behind their back. In a crash,
the shoulder belt will not protect a child
properly, which may result in serious injury or
death. A child must always wear both the lap
and shoulder portions of the seat belt
correctly.
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 144
SAFETY 145
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Restraint Type
Combined Weight of
the Child + Child
Restraint
Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below
LATCH – Lower
Anchors Only
Seat Belt Only
LATCH – Lower
Anchors + Top
Tether Anchor
Seat Belt + Top
Tether Anchor
Rear-Facing Child
Restraint
Up to 65 lbs (29.5 kg) X X
Rear-Facing Child
Restraint
More than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X
Forward-Facing Child
Restraint
Up to 65 lbs (29.5 kg) X X
Forward-Facing Child
Restraint
More than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X
4
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 145
146 SAFETY
Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren
(LATCH) Restraint System
LATCH Label
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint
anchorage system called LATCH, which stands
for Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The
LATCH system has three vehicle anchor points
for installing LATCH-equipped child seats. There
are two lower anchorages located at the back of
the seat cushion where it meets the seatback
and one top tether anchorage located behind
the seating position. These anchorages are
used to install LATCH-equipped child seats
without using the vehicle’s seat belts. Some
seating positions may have a top tether
anchorage but no lower anchorages.
In these seating positions, the seat belt must be
used with the top tether anchorage to install the
child restraint. Please see the following table for
more information.
LATCH Positions For Installing Child
Restraints In This Vehicle
2nd Row Bench Seat – LATCH Positions
2nd Row Stow ‘n Go Seating
Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 Anchorages Per
Seating Position)
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 Anchorages Per
Seating Position)
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 146
SAFETY 147
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight
of the child restraint) for using the LATCH
anchorage system to attach the child restraint?
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Use the LATCH anchorage system until the
combined weight of the child and the child
restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt
and tether anchor instead of the LATCH system
once the combined weight is more than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg).
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt be
used together to attach a rear-facing or
forward-facing child restraint?
No
Do not use the seat belt when you use the
LATCH anchorage system to attach a rear-facing
or forward-facing child restraint.
Booster seats may be attached to the LATCH
anchorages if allowed by the booster seat
manufacturer. See your booster seat owner’s
manual for more information.
Can two child restraints be attached using a
common lower LATCH anchorage?
No
Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or
more child restraints. If the center position does
not have dedicated LATCH lower anchorages,
use the seat belt to install a child seat in the
center position next to a child seat using the
LATCH anchorages in an outboard position.
4
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 147
148 SAFETY
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the
back of the front passenger seat?
Yes
The child seat may touch the back of the front
passenger seat if the child restraint
manufacturer also allows contact. See your
child restraint owner’s manual for more
information.
Can the rear head restraints be removed? Yes
The 2nd row bench seating head restraints are
removable if they interfere with the installation
of the child restraint. The 2nd row stow n’ go
head restraints are not removable. The 3rd row
center head restraint is removable in all
vehicles, but the 3rd row outboard head
restraints are not removable. Refer to “Head
Restraints” in “Getting To Know Your Vehicle” for
further information.
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 148
SAFETY 149
NOTE:
If the folding, non-adjustable head restraint
interferes with the installation of the child
restraint, the head restraint may be folded and
the child seat installed in front of it.
Car Seat With Head Restraint Folded
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars
that are found at the rear of the seat
cushion where it meets the seatback.
They are just visible when you lean
into the rear seat to install the child restraint.
You will easily feel them if you run your finger
along the gap between the seatback and seat
cushion.
2nd Row Bench Seat LATCH Lower Anchorages
2nd Row Stow n’ Go Seat LATCH Lower Anchorages
3rd Row 60/40 Seat LATCH Lower Anchorages
WARNING!
Always make sure the head restraint is in its
upright position when the seat is to be used
by an occupant who is not in a child restraint.
Sitting in a seat with the head restraint in its
lowered position could result in serious injury
or death in a collision.
1 – Folded Headrest
2 – Child Restraint
4
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 149
150 SAFETY
Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages
Bench Seating
There are tether strap anchorages
located behind the second row
seating positions and the third row
center seating position. The tether anchorages
are located on the back of the seat, near the
floor.
Tether Strap Anchorages
(Second Row Bench Anchorage Shown)
Stow n’ Go Seating
There are tether strap anchorages located
behind the second row seating positions and
the third row center seating position. The tether
anchorages are located on the back of the seat,
near the floor.
Tether Strap Anchorages
(Third Row 60/40 Anchorage Shown)
Tether Strap Anchorages
(Second Row Captains Chair Anchorage Shown)
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 150
SAFETY 151
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will
be equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap
on each side. Each will have a hook or
connector to attach to the lower anchorage and
a way to tighten the connection to the
anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and
some rear-facing child restraints will also be
equipped with a tether strap. The tether strap
will have a hook at the end to attach to the top
tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap
after it is attached to the anchorage.
Center Seat LATCH
If a child restraint installed in the center
position blocks the seat belt webbing or buckle
for the outboard position, do not use that
outboard position. If a child seat in the center
position blocks the outboard LATCH anchors or
seat belt, do not install a child seat in that
outboard position.
Always follow the directions of the child
restraint manufacturer when installing your
child restraint. Not all child restraint systems
will be installed as described here.
To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child
Restraint
If the selected seating position has a
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
seat belt, stow the seat belt, following the
instructions below. See the section “Installing
Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt” to
check what type of seat belt each seating
position has.
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps
and on the tether strap of the child seat so
that you can more easily attach the hooks
or connectors to the vehicle anchorages.
2. Place the child seat between the lower
anchorages for that seating position. If the
second row seat can be reclined, you may
recline the seat and/or raise the head
restraint (if adjustable) to get a better fit. If
the rear seat can be moved forward and
rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to
move it to its rear-most position to make
room for the child seat. You may also move
the front seat forward to allow more room
for the child seat.
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the
child restraint to the lower anchorages in
the selected seating position.
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap,
connect it to the top tether anchorage. See
the section “Installing Child Restraints
Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for
directions to attach a tether anchor.
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the
child restraint rearward and downward into
the seat. Remove slack in the straps
according to the child restraint
manufacturer’s instructions.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed
tightly by pulling back and forth on the child
seat at the belt path. It should not move
more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any
direction.
WARNING!
Never use the same lower anchorage to
attach more than one child restraint. Please
refer to “To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child
Restraint” for typical installation instructions.
4
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 151
152 SAFETY
How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR
(ALR) Seat Belt:
When using the LATCH attaching system to
install a child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts
that are not being used by other occupants or
being used to secure child restraints. An unused
belt could injure a child if they play with it and
accidentally lock the seat belt retractor. Before
installing a child restraint using the LATCH
system, buckle the seat belt behind the child
restraint and out of the child’s reach.
If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child
restraint installation, instead of buckling it
behind the child restraint, route the seat belt
through the child restraint belt path and then
buckle it. Do not lock the seat belt. Remind all
children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not
toys and that they should not play with them.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle
Seat Belt
Child restraint systems are designed to be
secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap
belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt.
WARNING!
Improper installation of a child restraint to
the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of
the restraint. The child could be badly
injured or killed. Follow the child restraint
manufacturer’s directions exactly when
installing an infant or child restraint.
Child restraint anchorages are designed to
withstand only those loads imposed by
correctly-fitted child restraints. Under no
circumstances are they to be used for adult
seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching other
items or equipment to the vehicle.
WARNING!
Improper installation or failure to properly
secure a child restraint can lead to failure
of the restraint. The child could be badly
injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant
or child restraint.
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 152
SAFETY 153
The seat belts in the passenger seating
positions are equipped with either a Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) or a cinching
latch plate or both. Both types of seat belts are
designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt
tight around the child restraint so that it is not
necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR
retractor can be “switched” into a locked mode
by pulling all of the webbing out of the retractor
and then letting the webbing retract back into
the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will make a
clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back
into the retractor. Refer to the “Automatic
Locking Mode” description in “Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR)” under
“Occupant Restraint Systems” for additional
information on ALR. The cinching latch plate is
designed to hold the lap portion of the seat belt
tight when webbing is pulled tight and straight
through a child restraint’s belt path.
Please see the table below and the following
sections for more information.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing
Child Restraints In This Vehicle
Second Row Bench Seating
Second Row Stow n’ Go Seating
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Cinch — Cinching Latch Plate
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Cinch — Cinching Latch Plate
4
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 153
154 SAFETY
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
What is the weight limit (child’s
weight + weight of the child
restraint) for using the Tether
Anchor with the seat belt to attach
a forward facing child restraint?
Weight limit of the Child Restraint
Always use the tether anchor when
using the seat belt to install a
forward facing child restraint, up to
the recommended weight limit of
the child restraint.
Can the rear-facing child restraint
touch the back of the front
passenger seat?
Yes
Contact between the front
passenger seat and the child
restraint is allowed, if the child
restraint manufacturer also allows
contact.
Can the rear head restraints be
removed?
Yes
The 2nd row bench seating head
restraints are removable if they
interfere with the installation of the
child restraint. The 2nd row stow n’
go head restraints are not
removable. The 3rd row center
head restraint is removable in all
vehicles, but the 3rd row outboard
head restraints are not removable.
Refer to “Head Restraints” in
“Getting To Know Your Vehicle” for
further information.
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 154
SAFETY 155
NOTE:
If the folding, non-adjustable head restraint
interferes with the installation of the child
restraint, the head restraint may be folded and
the child seat installed in front of it.
Car Seat With Head Restraint Folded
Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR):
Child restraint systems are designed to be
secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap
belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt.
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to
tighten the seat belt against the
belt path of the child restraint?
Yes – Cinching Latch Plate
No – ALR
In positions with cinching latch
plates (CINCH), the buckle stalk
may be twisted up to 3 full turns.
Do not twist the buckle stalk in a
seating position with an ALR
retractor.
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
WARNING!
Always make sure the head restraint is in its
upright position when the seat is to be used
by an occupant who is not in a child restraint.
Sitting in a seat with the head restraint in its
lowered position could result in serious injury
or death in a collision.
1 – Folded Headrest
2 – Child Restraint
WARNING!
Improper installation or failure to properly
secure a child restraint can lead to failure
of the restraint. The child could be badly
injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant
or child restraint.
4
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 155
156 SAFETY
1. Place the child seat in the center of the
seating position. For some second row
seats, you may need to recline the seat
and/or raise the head restraint (if
adjustable) to get a better fit. If the rear
seat can be moved forward and rearward
in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its
rear-most position to make room for the
child seat. You may also move the front
seat forward to allow more room for the
child seat.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from
the retractor to pass it through the belt path
of the child restraint. Do not twist the belt
webbing in the belt path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you
hear a “click.”
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion
tight against the child seat.
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the
shoulder part of the belt until you have
pulled all the seat belt webbing out of the
retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract
back into the retractor. As the webbing
retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This
means the seat belt is now in the Automatic
Locking mode.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor.
If it is locked, you should not be able to pull
out any webbing. If the retractor is not
locked, repeat step 5.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to
tighten the lap portion around the child
restraint while you push the child restraint
rearward and downward into the vehicle
seat.
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap
and the seating position has a top tether
anchorage, connect the tether strap to the
anchorage and tighten the tether strap. See
the section “Installing Child Restraints
Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for
directions to attach a tether anchor.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed
tightly by pulling back and forth on the child
seat at the belt path. It should not move
more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any
direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so
check the belt occasionally, and pull it tight if
necessary.
Installing A Child Restraint With A Cinching
Latch Plate (CINCH) — If Equipped:
Child restraint systems are designed to be
secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap
belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt.
WARNING!
Improper installation or failure to properly
secure a child restraint can lead to failure
of the restraint. The child could be badly
injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant
or child restraint.
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 156
SAFETY 157
1. Place the child seat in the center of the
seating position. If the second row seat can
be reclined, you may recline the seat
and/or raise the head restraint
(if adjustable) to get a better fit. If the rear
seat can be moved forward and rearward
in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its
rear-most position to make room for the
child seat. You may also move the front
seat forward to allow more room for the
child seat.
2. Next, pull enough of the seat belt webbing
from the retractor to pass it through the belt
path of the child restraint. Do not twist the
belt webbing in the belt path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you
hear a “click.”
4. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to
tighten the lap portion around the child
restraint while you push the child restraint
rearward and downward into the vehicle
seat.
5. If the child restraint has a top tether strap
and the seating position has a top tether
anchorage, connect the tether strap to the
anchorage and tighten the tether strap. See
the section “Installing Child Restraints
Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for
directions to attach a tether anchor.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed
tightly by pulling back and forth on the child
seat at the belt path. It should not move
more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any
direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so
check the belt occasionally, and pull it tight if
necessary.
If the buckle or the cinching latch plate is too
close to the belt path opening of the child
restraint, you may have trouble tightening the
seat belt. If this happens, disconnect the latch
plate from the buckle and twist the short
buckle-end belt up to three full turns to shorten
it. Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the
release button facing out, away from the child
restraint. Repeat steps 4 to 6, above, to
complete the installation of the child restraint.
If the belt still cannot be tightened after you
shorten the buckle, disconnect the latch plate
from the buckle, turn the buckle around one
half turn, and insert the latch plate into the
buckle again. If you still cannot make the child
restraint installation tight, try a different seating
position.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top
Tether Anchorage
WARNING!
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing
car seat to any location in front of the car
seat, including the seat frame or a tether
anchorage. Only attach the tether strap of a
rear-facing car seat to the tether anchorage
that is approved for that seating position,
located behind the top of the vehicle seat.
See the section “Lower Anchors and Tethers
for CHildren (LATCH) Restraint System” for the
location of approved tether anchorages in
your vehicle.
4
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 157
158 SAFETY
1. Look behind the seating position where
you plan to install the child restraint to find
the tether anchorage. You may need to
move the seat forward to provide better
access to the tether anchorage. If there is
no top tether anchorage for that seating
position, move the child restraint to
another position in the vehicle if one is
available.
Rear Seat Tether Strap Mounting
(Second Row Bench Anchorage Shown)
Rear Seat Tether Strap Mounting
(Second Row Captains Chair Anchorage Shown)
Tether Strap Anchorages
(Third Row 60/40 Anchorage Shown)
2. Route the tether strap to provide the most
direct path for the strap between the anchor
and the child seat. If your vehicle is
equipped with adjustable rear head
restraints, raise the head restraint, and
where possible, route the tether strap under
the head restraint and between the two
posts. If not possible, lower the head
restraint and pass the tether strap around
the outboard side of the head restraint.
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child
restraint to the top tether anchorage as
shown in the diagram.
4. Remove slack in the tether strap according
to the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions.
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 158
SAFETY 159
Transporting Pets
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm
your pet. An unrestrained pet will be thrown
about and possibly injured, or injure a
passenger during panic braking or in a collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat (if
equipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers that
are secured by seat belts.
SAFETY TIPS
Transporting Passengers
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE
CARGO AREA.
Exhaust Gas
WARNING!
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could
lead to increased head motion and
possible injury to the child. Use only the
anchorage position directly behind the child
seat to secure a child restraint top tether
strap.
If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear
seat, make sure the tether strap does not
slip into the opening between the seat-
backs as you remove slack in the strap.
WARNING!
Do not leave children or animals inside
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior
heat build-up may cause serious injury or
death.
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo
area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a
collision, people riding in these areas are
more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of
your vehicle that is not equipped with seats
and seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly.
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you
unconscious and can eventually poison you.
To avoid breathing (CO), follow these safety
tips:
Do not run the engine in a closed garage or
in confined areas any longer than needed
to move your vehicle in or out of the area.
If you are required to drive with the trunk/
liftgate/rear doors open, make sure that all
windows are closed and the climate control
BLOWER switch is set at high speed. DO
NOT use the recirculation mode.
If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle
with the engine running, adjust your
heating or cooling controls to force outside
air into the vehicle. Set the blower at high
speed.
4
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 159
160 SAFETY
(Continued)
The best protection against carbon monoxide
entry into the vehicle body is a properly
maintained engine exhaust system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of
the exhaust system, when exhaust fumes can
be detected inside the vehicle, or when the
underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged,
have a competent mechanic inspect the
complete exhaust system and adjacent body
areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or
mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose
connections could permit exhaust fumes to
seep into the passenger compartment. In
addition, inspect the exhaust system each time
the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil
change. Replace as required.
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the seat belt system periodically,
checking for cuts, frays, and loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately.
Do not disassemble or modify the system.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced
after a collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must
be replaced after a collision if they have been
damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing,
etc.). If there is any question regarding seat belt
or retractor condition, replace the seat belt.
Air Bag Warning Light
The Air Bag warning light will turn on for four
to eight seconds as a bulb check when the
ignition switch is first turned to ON/RUN. If the
light is either not on during starting, stays on, or
turns on while driving, have the system
inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as
possible. After the bulb check, this light will
illuminate with a single chime when a fault with
the Air Bag System has been detected. It will
stay on until the fault is removed. If the light
comes on intermittently or remains on while
driving, have an authorized dealer service the
vehicle immediately.
Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in
“Safety” for further information.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode
and place the blower control on high speed. You
should be able to feel the air directed against
the windshield. See an authorized dealer for
service if your defroster is inoperable.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit your
vehicle. Only use a floor mat that does not
interfere with the operation of the accelerator,
brake or clutch pedals. Only use a floor mat that
is securely attached using the floor mat
fasteners so it cannot slip out of position and
interfere with the accelerator, brake or clutch
pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle
in other ways.
WARNING!
An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or
stacked floor mat, or damaged floor mat
fasteners may cause your floor mat to
interfere with the accelerator, brake, or clutch
pedals and cause a loss of vehicle control. To
prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:
ALWAYS securely attach your floor mat
using the floor mat fasteners. DO NOT
install your floor mat upside down or turn
your floor mat over. Lightly pull to confirm
mat is secured using the floor mat
fasteners on a regular basis.
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 160
SAFETY 161
(Continued)
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and
uneven wear patterns. Check for stones, nails,
glass, or other objects lodged in the tread or
sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts and cracks.
Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges.
Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the
tires (including spare) for proper cold inflation
pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake
lights and exterior lights while you work the
controls. Check turn signal and high beam
indicator lights on the instrument panel.
Door Latches
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under the vehicle after overnight
parking for fuel, coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks.
Also, if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel, or
brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause
should be located and corrected immediately.
ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING FLOOR
MAT FROM THE VEHICLE before
installing any other floor mat. NEVER install
or stack an additional floor mat on top of an
existing floor mat.
ONLY install floor mats designed to fit your
vehicle. NEVER install a floor mat that
cannot be properly attached and secured to
your vehicle. If a floor mat needs to be
replaced, only use a FCA approved floor
mat for the specific make, model, and year
of your vehicle.
ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on the
driver’s side floor area. To check for inter-
ference, with the vehicle properly parked
with the engine off, fully depress the accel-
erator, the brake, and the clutch pedal (if
present) to check for interference. If your
floor mat interferes with the operation of
any pedal, or is not secure to the floor,
remove the floor mat from the vehicle and
place the floor mat in your trunk.
ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat on
the passenger’s side floor area.
WARNING! (Continued)
ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or
slide into the driver’s side floor area when
the vehicle is moving. Objects can become
trapped under accelerator, brake, or clutch
pedals and could cause a loss of vehicle
control.
NEVER place any objects under the floor
mat (e.g., towels, keys, etc.). These objects
could change the position of the floor mat
and may cause interference with the accel-
erator, brake, or clutch pedals.
If the vehicle carpet has been removed and
re-installed, always properly attach carpet
to the floor and check the floor mat
fasteners are secure to the vehicle carpet.
Fully depress each pedal to check for inter-
ference with the accelerator, brake, or
clutch pedals then re-install the floor mats.
It is recommended to only use mild soap
and water to clean your floor mats. After
cleaning, always check your floor mat has
been properly installed and is secured to
your vehicle using the floor mat fasteners
by lightly pulling mat.
WARNING! (Continued)
4
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 161
162
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat,
adjust both inside and outside mirrors, and
fasten your seat belts.
Start the engine with the gear selector in the
NEUTRAL or PARK position. Apply the brake
before shifting to any driving range.
Normal Starting
1. Do not press the accelerator.
2. Use the fob with Integrated Key to briefly
turn the ignition switch to the START
position and release it as soon as the
starter engages. The starter motor will
continue to run, and it will disengage
automatically when the engine is running.
3. If the engine fails to start, the starter will
disengage automatically in 10 seconds. If
this occurs, turn the ignition switch to the
OFF position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then
repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure
(Steps 1–3 above).
NOTE:
This vehicle is equipped with a transmission
shift interlocking system. The brake pedal must
be pressed to shift out of PARK.
WARNING!
When exiting the vehicle, always remove
the key fob from the vehicle and lock your
vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-
tended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the transmission gear
selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to chil-
dren, and do not leave the ignition in the
ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
Do not leave children or animals inside
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior
heat build-up may cause serious injury or
death.
WARNING! (Continued)
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 162
STARTING AND OPERATING 163
(Continued)
Cold Weather Operation
(Below –22°F Or −30°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these
temperatures, use of an externally powered
electric engine block heater (available from an
authorized dealer) is recommended.
After Starting — Warming Up The Engine
The idle speed is controlled automatically and it
will decrease as the engine warms up.
If Engine Fails To Start
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms the engine, and
permits quicker starts in cold weather. Connect
the cord to a standard 110-115 Volt AC
electrical outlet with a grounded, three-wire
extension cord.
The engine block heater must be plugged in at
least one hour to have an adequate warming
effect on the engine.
The engine block heater cord is routed under
the hood on the driver's side of the vehicle. It
has a removable cap that is located on the
driver side of the Integrated Power Module.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the
engine and drivetrain (transmission and axle) in
your vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles
(500 km). After the initial 60 miles (100 km),
speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are
desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration
within the limits of local traffic laws contributes
to a good break-in. Wide-open throttle
acceleration in low gear can be detrimental and
should be avoided.
WARNING!
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid
into the throttle body air inlet opening in an
attempt to start the vehicle. This could
result in flash fire causing serious personal
injury.
Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle
to get it started. Vehicles equipped with an
automatic transmission cannot be started
this way. Unburned fuel could enter the
catalytic converter and once the engine has
started, ignite and damage the converter
and vehicle.
If the vehicle has a discharged battery,
booster cables may be used to obtain a
start from a booster battery or the battery in
another vehicle. This type of start can be
dangerous if done improperly. Refer to
“Jump Starting Procedure” in “In Case Of
Emergency” for further information.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the engine block
heater cord before driving. Damage to the
110-115 Volt electrical cord could cause
electrocution.
5
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 163
164 STARTING AND OPERATING
The engine oil installed in the engine at the
factory is a high-quality energy conserving type
lubricant. Oil changes should be consistent with
anticipated climate conditions under which
vehicle operations will occur. For the
recommended viscosity and quality grades,
refer to “Dealer Service” in “Servicing And
Maintenance”.
NOTE:
A new engine may consume some oil during its
first few thousand miles (kilometers) of
operation. This should be considered a normal
part of the break-in and not interpreted as a
problem.
PARK BRAKE
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the
parking brake is fully applied and place the gear
selector in the PARK position.
The foot operated parking brake is positioned
below the lower left corner of the instrument
panel. To apply the park brake, firmly push the
park brake pedal fully. To release the parking
brake, press the park brake pedal a second
time and let your foot up as you feel the brake
disengage.
Parking Brake
When the parking brake is applied with the
ignition switch in the ON position, the “Brake
Warning Light” in the instrument cluster will
illuminate.
NOTE:
When the parking brake is applied and the
automatic transmission is placed in gear, the
“Brake Warning Light” will flash. If vehicle
speed is detected, a chime will sound to alert
the driver. Fully release the parking brake
before attempting to move the vehicle.
This light only shows that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake
application.
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the
front wheels toward the curb on a downhill
grade and away from the curb on an uphill
grade. For vehicles equipped with an automatic
transmission, apply the parking brake before
placing the gear selector in PARK, otherwise the
load on the transmission locking mechanism
may make it difficult to move the gear selector
out of PARK. The parking brake should always
be applied whenever the driver is not in the
vehicle.
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight
Mineral Oil in the engine or damage may
result.
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 164
STARTING AND OPERATING 165
(Continued)
(Continued)
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
WARNING!
When exiting the vehicle, always remove
the key fob from the ignition and lock your
vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-
tended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle (or in a location accessible to chil-
dren), and do not leave the ignition in the
ACC or ON/ RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
Be sure the parking brake is fully disen-
gaged before driving; failure to do so can
lead to brake failure and a collision.
Always fully apply the parking brake when
leaving your vehicle, or it may roll and
cause damage or injury. Also be certain to
leave the transmission in PARK. Failure to
do so may allow the vehicle to roll and
cause damage or injury.
CAUTION!
If the Brake System Warning Light remains on
with the parking brake released, a brake
system malfunction is indicated. Have the
brake system serviced by an authorized
dealer immediately.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or
NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing
the brake pedal, the vehicle could accel-
erate quickly forward or in reverse. You
could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear
when the engine is idling normally and your
foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
Unintended movement of a vehicle could
injure those in or near the vehicle. As with
all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle
while the engine is running. Before exiting a
vehicle, always come to a complete stop,
then apply the parking brake, shift the
transmission into PARK, turn the engine
OFF, and remove the key fob. When the
ignition is in the LOCK/OFF (key removal)
position, the transmission is locked in
PARK, securing the vehicle against
unwanted movement.
5
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 165
166 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
NOTE:
You must press and hold the brake pedal while
shifting out of PARK.
Key Ignition Park Interlock
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park
Interlock which requires the transmission to be
in PARK before the ignition can be turned to the
LOCK/OFF (key removal) position. The key fob
can only be removed from the ignition when the
ignition is in the LOCK/OFF position, and the
transmission is locked in PARK whenever the
ignition is in the LOCK/OFF position.
NOTE:
If a malfunction occurs, the system will trap the
key fob in the ignition to warn you that this
safety feature is inoperable. The engine can be
started and stopped but the key fob cannot be
removed until you obtain service.
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake
Transmission Shift Interlock (BTSI) system that
holds the transmission gear selector in PARK
unless the brakes are applied. To shift the
transmission out of PARK, the ignition must be
in the ON/RUN mode (engine running or not)
and the brake pedal must be pressed.
When leaving the vehicle, always make
sure the ignition is in the OFF mode,
remove the key fob from the vehicle, and
lock the vehicle.
Never use the PARK position as a substi-
tute for the parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when exiting the vehicle
to guard against vehicle movement and
possible injury or damage.
Your vehicle could move and injure you and
others if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to
move the gear selector out of PARK with the
brake pedal released. Make sure the trans-
mission is in PARK before exiting the
vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-
tended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the transmission gear
selector.
WARNING! (Continued)
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle (or in a location accessible to chil-
dren), and do not leave the ignition in the
ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only
after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is
above idle speed.
Before shifting into any gear, make sure
your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
WARNING! (Continued)
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 166
STARTING AND OPERATING 167
Fuel Economy (ECON) Mode
The Fuel Economy (ECON) mode can improve
the vehicle's overall fuel economy during
normal driving conditions. Push the “econ”
switch in the center stack of the instrument
panel and a green light will indicate the ECON
mode is engaged.
Fuel Economy Mode Switch
When the Fuel Economy (ECON) Mode is
enabled, the vehicle control systems will
change the following:
The transmission will upshift sooner and
downshift later.
The transmission will skip select gears during
shifts to allow the engine to operate at lower
speeds.
The torque converter clutch may engage at
lower engine speeds and remain on longer.
The engine idle speed will be lower.
The overall driving performance will be more
conservative.
Some ECON mode functions may be tempo-
rarily inhibited based on temperature and
other factors.
Six-Speed Automatic Transmission
The transmission gear position display (located
in the instrument cluster) indicates the
transmission gear range. You must press the
brake pedal to move the gear selector out of
PARK refer to “Brake/Transmission Shift
Interlock System” in this section. To drive, move
the gear selector from PARK or NEUTRAL to the
DRIVE position.
The electronically-controlled transmission
provides a precise shift schedule. The
transmission electronics are self-calibrating;
therefore, the first few shifts on a new vehicle
may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
condition, and precision shifts will develop
within a few hundred miles (kilometers).
Gear Selector
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE
when the accelerator pedal is released and the
vehicle is stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on
the brake pedal when shifting between these
gears.
The transmission gear selector has only PARK,
REVERSE, NEUTRAL, and DRIVE shift positions.
Manual downshifts can be made using the
Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control refer
to “Electronic Range Select (ERS) Operation” in
this section for further information. Moving the
gear selector to the left or right (–/+) while in
the DRIVE position will select the highest
available transmission gear, and will display
that gear in the instrument cluster as 1, 2, 3,
etc.
5
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 167
168 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
(Continued)
Gear Ranges
Do not depress the accelerator pedal when
shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another
gear range.
NOTE:
After selecting any gear range, wait a moment
to allow the selected gear to engage before
accelerating. This is especially important when
the engine is cold.
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by
locking the transmission. The engine can be
started in this range. Never attempt to use
PARK while the vehicle is in motion. Apply the
parking brake when exiting the vehicle in this
range.
When parking on a level surface, you may shift
the transmission into PARK first, and then apply
the parking brake.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake
before shifting the transmission to PARK,
otherwise the load on the transmission locking
mechanism may make it difficult to move the
gear selector out of PARK. As an added
precaution, turn the front wheels toward the
curb on a downhill grade, and away from the
curb on an uphill grade.
When exiting the vehicle, always:
Apply the parking brake.
Shift the transmission into PARK.
Turn the engine off.
Remove the key fob.
WARNING!
It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or
NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing
the brake pedal, the vehicle could accel-
erate quickly forward or in reverse. You
could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear
when the engine is idling normally and your
foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
Unintended movement of a vehicle could
injure those in or near the vehicle. As with
all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle
while the engine is running. Before exiting a
vehicle, always come to a complete stop,
then apply the parking brake, shift the
transmission into PARK, turn the engine
OFF, and remove the key fob. When the
ignition is in the LOCK/OFF (key removal)
position, the transmission is locked in
PARK, securing the vehicle against
unwanted movement.
When leaving the vehicle, always make
sure the ignition is in the OFF mode,
remove the key fob from the vehicle, and
lock the vehicle.
Never use the PARK position as a substi-
tute for the parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when exiting the vehicle
to guard against vehicle movement and
possible injury or damage.
WARNING! (Continued)
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 168
STARTING AND OPERATING 169
The following indicators should be used to
ensure that you have properly engaged the
transmission into the PARK position:
When shifting into PARK, firmly move the
gear selector all the way forward and to the
left until it stops and is fully seated.
Look at the transmission gear position
display and verify that it indicates the PARK
position (P).
With brake pedal released, verify that the
gear selector will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward.
Shift into REVERSE only after the vehicle has
come to a complete stop.
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for
prolonged periods with the engine running. The
engine may be started in this range. Apply the
parking brake and shift the transmission into
PARK if you must exit the vehicle.
Your vehicle could move and injure you and
others if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to
move the gear selector out of PARK with the
brake pedal released. Make sure the trans-
mission is in PARK before exiting the
vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-
tended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the transmission gear
selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle (or in a location accessible to chil-
dren), and do not leave the ignition in the
ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION!
Before moving the transmission gear
selector out of PARK, you must turn the igni-
tion to the ON/RUN mode, and also press
the brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the
gear selector could result.
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range,
as this can damage the drivetrain.
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off
the ignition to coast down a hill. These are
unsafe practices that limit your response to
changing traffic or road conditions. You might
lose control of the vehicle and have a
collision.
5
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 169
170 STARTING AND OPERATING
DRIVE (D)
This range should be used for most city and
highway driving. It provides the smoothest
upshifts and downshifts, and the best fuel
economy. The transmission automatically
upshifts through all forward gears. The DRIVE
position provides optimum driving character-
istics under all normal operating conditions.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs
(such as when operating the vehicle under
heavy loading conditions, in hilly terrain,
traveling into strong head winds, or while towing
a heavy trailer), use the Electronic Range Select
(ERS) shift control refer to "Electronic Range
Select (ERS) Operation" in this section for
further information to select a lower gear range.
Under these conditions, using a lower gear
range will improve performance and extend
transmission life by reducing excessive shifting
and heat buildup.
During cold temperatures, transmission
operation may be modified depending on
engine and transmission temperature as well
as vehicle speed. This feature improves warm
up time of the engine and transmission to
achieve maximum efficiency. Engagement of
the torque converter clutch is inhibited until the
transmission fluid is warm refer to the “Note”
under “Torque Converter Clutch” in this section.
During extremely cold temperatures (-16°F
[-27°C] or below), operation may briefly be
limited to third gear only. Normal operation will
resume once the transmission temperature has
risen to a suitable level.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored electron-
ically for abnormal conditions. If a condition is
detected that could result in transmission
damage, Transmission Limp Home Mode is
activated. In this mode, the transmission
remains in THIRD gear regardless of which
forward gear is selected. PARK, REVERSE, and
NEUTRAL will continue to operate. The
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be
illuminated. Limp Home Mode allows the
vehicle to be driven to an authorized dealer for
service without damaging the transmission.
In the event of a momentary problem, the
transmission can be reset to regain all forward
gears by performing the following steps:
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
3. Turn the ignition OFF.
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the
problem is no longer detected, the
transmission will return to normal
operation.
NOTE:
Even if the transmission can be reset, we
recommend that you visit an authorized dealer
at your earliest possible convenience. An
authorized dealer has diagnostic equipment to
assess the condition of your transmission.
If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized
dealer service is required.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any
other reason with the transmission in
NEUTRAL can cause severe transmission
damage. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in
“Starting And Operating” and “Towing A
Disabled Vehicle” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 170
STARTING AND OPERATING 171
Electronic Range Select (ERS) Operation
The Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control
allows the driver to limit the highest available
gear when the transmission is in DRIVE. For
example, if you set the transmission gear limit
to 4 (FOURTH gear), the transmission will not
shift above FOURTH gear (except to prevent
engine overspeed), but will shift through the
lower gears normally.
You can switch between DRIVE and ERS mode
at any vehicle speed. When the gear selector is
in the DRIVE position, the transmission will
operate automatically, shifting between all
available gears. Tapping the gear selector to the
left (-) will activate ERS mode, display the
current gear in the instrument cluster, and set
that gear as the top available gear. Once in ERS
mode, tapping the gear selector to the left (-) or
right (+) will change the top available gear.
To exit ERS mode, simply hold the gear selector
to the right (+) until the gear limit display
disappears from the instrument cluster.
NOTE:
To select the proper gear position for maximum deceleration (engine braking), tap the gear selector to the left (-) repeatedly as the vehicle slows. The
transmission will shift to the range from which the vehicle can best be slowed down.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine
braking on a slippery surface. The drive
wheels could lose their grip and the vehicle
could skid, causing a collision or personal
injury.
Transmission Gear Position Display 1 2 3 4 5 6 D
Actual Gear(s) Allowed 1 1–2 1–3 1–4 1–5 1–6 1–6
5
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 171
172 STARTING AND OPERATING
Overdrive Operation
The automatic transmission includes an
electronically controlled Overdrive (SIXTH gear).
The transmission will automatically shift into
Overdrive if the following conditions are
present:
The gear selector is in the DRIVE position.
The transmission fluid has reached an
adequate temperature.
The engine coolant has reached an adequate
temperature.
The vehicle speed is sufficiently high.
The driver is not heavily pressing the
accelerator.
Torque Converter Clutch
A feature designed to improve fuel economy
has been included in the automatic
transmission on your vehicle. A clutch within the
torque converter engages automatically at
calibrated speeds. This may result in a slightly
different feeling or response during normal
operation in the upper gears. When the vehicle
speed drops or during some accelerations, the
clutch automatically disengages.
NOTE:
The torque converter clutch will not engage until
the transmission fluid and engine coolant are
warm [usually after 1 to 3 miles (2 to 5 km) of
driving]. Because the engine speed is higher
when the torque converter clutch is not
engaged, it may seem as if the transmission is
not shifting into Overdrive when cold. This is
normal. Using the Electronic Range Select (ERS)
shift control, when the transmission is
sufficiently warm, will demonstrate that the
transmission is able to shift into and out of
Overdrive.
POWER STEERING
The standard Power Steering system will give
you good vehicle response and increased ease
of maneuverability in tight spaces. The system
will provide mechanical steering capability if
power assist is lost.
If for some reason the power assist is
interrupted, it will still be possible to steer your
vehicle. Under these conditions, you will
observe a substantial increase in steering
effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and
during parking maneuvers.
NOTE:
Increased noise levels at the end of the
steering wheel travel are considered normal
and do not indicate that there is a problem
with the power steering system.
Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the
power steering pump may make noise for a
short amount of time. This is due to the cold,
thick fluid in the steering system. This noise
should be considered normal, and it does not
in any way damage the steering system.
CAUTION!
Prolonged operation of the steering system at
the end of the steering wheel travel will
increase the steering fluid temperature and it
should be avoided when possible. Damage to
the power steering pump may occur.
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 172
STARTING AND OPERATING 173
Power Steering Fluid Check
Checking the power steering fluid level at a
defined service interval is not required. The fluid
should only be checked if a leak is suspected,
abnormal noises are apparent, and/or the
system is not functioning as anticipated.
Coordinate inspection efforts through an
authorized dealer.
If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper
indicated level. With a clean cloth, wipe any
spilled fluid from all surfaces. Refer to “Fluids
And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications”
for the correct fluid type.
SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
When engaged, the Speed Control takes over
accelerator operations at speeds greater than
25 mph (40 km/h).
The Speed Control buttons are located on the
right side of the steering wheel.
Speed Control Buttons
NOTE:
In order to ensure proper operation, the Speed
Control System has been designed to shut down
if multiple Speed Control functions are operated
at the same time. If this occurs, the Speed
Control System can be reactivated by pushing
the Speed Control on/off button and resetting
the desired vehicle set speed.
WARNING!
Fluid level should be checked on a level
surface and with the engine off to prevent
injury from moving parts and to ensure
accurate fluid level reading. Do not overfill.
Use only manufacturer's recommended
power steering fluid.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your power
steering system as the chemicals can
damage your power steering components.
Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
1 — On/Off
2 — RES (+)
3 — SET (-)
4 — CANCEL
WARNING!
Speed Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed.
Your vehicle could go too fast for the
conditions, and you could lose control and
have an accident. Do not use Speed Control
in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding,
icy, snow-covered or slippery.
5
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 173
174 STARTING AND OPERATING
To Activate
Push the on/off button. The Cruise Indicator
Light in the instrument cluster display will
illuminate. To turn the system off, push the
on/off button a second time. The Cruise
Indicator Light will turn off. The system should
be turned off when not in use.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Speed Control on. When the vehicle
has reached the desired speed, push the SET (-)
button and release. Release the accelerator
and the vehicle will operate at the selected
speed.
NOTE:
The vehicle should be traveling at a steady
speed and on level ground before pushing the
SET (-) button.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
When the Speed Control is set, you can increase
speed by pushing the RES (+) button.
The driver’s preferred units can be selected
through the instrument panel settings (if
equipped). Refer to “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel” for more information. The
speed increment shown is dependent on the
chosen speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric
(km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
Pushing the RES (+) button once will result in
a 1 mph increase in set speed. Each subse-
quent tap of the button results in an increase
of 1 mph.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to increase until the
button is released, then the new set speed
will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
Pushing the RES (+) button once will result in
a 1 km/h increase in set speed. Each subse-
quent tap of the button results in an increase
of 1 km/h.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to increase until the
button is released, then the new set speed
will be established.
To Decrease Speed
When the Speed Control is set, you can
decrease speed by pushing the SET (-) button.
The driver’s preferred units can be selected
through the instrument panel settings (if
equipped). Refer to “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel” for more information. The
speed decrement shown is dependent on the
chosen speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric
(km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in
a 1 mph decrease in set speed. Each subse-
quent tap of the button results in a decrease
of 1 mph.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to decrease until the
button is released, then the new set speed
will be established.
WARNING!
Leaving the Speed Control system on when
not in use is dangerous. You could
accidentally set the system or cause it to go
faster than you want. You could lose control
and have an accident. Always leave the
system off when you are not using it.
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 174
STARTING AND OPERATING 175
Metric Speed (km/h)
Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in
a 1 km/h decrease in set speed. Each subse-
quent tap of the button results in a decrease
of 1 km/h.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to decrease until the
button is released, then the new set speed
will be established.
To Accelerate For Passing
Press the accelerator as you would normally.
When the pedal is released, the vehicle will
return to the set speed.
Using Speed Control On Hills
The transmission may downshift on hills to
maintain the vehicle set speed.
NOTE:
The Speed Control system maintains speed up
and down hills. A slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal.
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may
occur so it may be preferable to drive without
Speed Control.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES
(+) button and release. Resume can be used at
any speed above 20 mph (32 km/h).
To Deactivate
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the
CANCEL button, or normal brake pressure while
slowing the vehicle will deactivate the Speed
Control without erasing the set speed from
memory.
Pushing the on/off button, or placing the
ignition in the OFF position, erases the set
speed from memory.
PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST — IF
EQUIPPED
The ParkSense Rear Park Assist system
provides visual and audible indications of the
distance between the rear fascia and a
detected obstacle when backing up (e.g. during
a parking maneuver).
Refer to “ParkSense System Usage
Precautions” in this section for limitations of
this system and recommendations.
ParkSense will retain the last system state
(enabled or disabled) from the last ignition cycle
when the ignition is changed to the ON/RUN
position.
ParkSense can be active only when the gear
selector is in REVERSE. If ParkSense is enabled
at this gear selector position, the system will
remain active until the vehicle speed is
increased to approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or
above. The system will become active again if
the vehicle speed is decreased to speeds less
than approximately 6 mph (9 km/h).
WARNING!
Speed Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed.
Your vehicle could go too fast for the
conditions, and you could lose control and
have an accident. Do not use Speed Control
in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding,
icy, snow-covered or slippery.
5
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 175
176 STARTING AND OPERATING
ParkSense Sensors
The four ParkSense sensors, located in the rear
fascia/bumper, monitor the area behind the
vehicle that is within the sensors’ field of view.
The sensors can detect obstacles from approxi-
mately 12 inches (30 cm) up to 79 inches
(200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the
horizontal direction, depending on the location,
type and orientation of the obstacle.
ParkSense Warning Display
The ParkSense Warning Display is located in the
instrument cluster display. It provides both
visual and audible warnings to indicate the
distance between the rear fascia/bumper and
the detected obstacle.
The ParkSense Warning screen will only be
displayed if Sound and Display is selected from
the Customer-Programmable Features section
of the instrument cluster display. Refer to
“Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
ParkSense Warning Display
ParkSense Display
When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the warning
display will turn on indicating the system status.
Park Assist System On
Park Assist System Off
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by
showing three solid arcs and will produce a
one-half second tone. As the vehicle moves
closer to the object the instrument cluster
display will show fewer arcs and the sound tone
will change from slow, to fast, to continuous.
Slow Tone
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 176
STARTING AND OPERATING 177
Fast Tone Continuous Tone
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the
instrument cluster display shows one flashing
arc and sounds a continuous tone. The
following chart shows the warning alert
operation when the system is detecting an
obstacle:
NOTE:
ParkSense will reduce the radio volume, if on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.
WARNING ALERTS
Rear Distance
(inches/cm)
Greater than 79 inches
(200 cm)
79-39 inches
(200-100 cm)
39-25 inches
(100-65 cm)
25-12 inches
(65-30 cm)
Less than 12 inches
(30 cm)
Audible Alert Chime None
Single 1/2 Second
Tone
Slow Fast Continuous
Arcs
None 3 Solid (Continuous) 3 Slow Flashing 2 Slow Flashing 1 Slow Flashing
Radio Volume Reduced No Yes Yes Yes Yes
5
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 177
178 STARTING AND OPERATING
Enabling/Disabling ParkSense
ParkSense can be enabled and disabled
through the Customer-Programmable Features
section of the instrument cluster display. The
available choices are: Off, Sound Only, or Sound
and Display.
When ParkSense is disabled, the instrument
cluster will display the “PARK ASSIST SYSTEM
OFF” message for approximately five seconds.
When the gear selector is moved to REVERSE
and the system is disabled, the instrument
cluster display will display the “PARK ASSIST
SYSTEM OFF” message for as long as the
vehicle is in REVERSE.
Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist
System
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense
Rear Park Assist System has detected a faulted
condition, the instrument cluster will actuate a
single chime, once per ignition cycle, and it will
display the “SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM”
message. When the gear selector is moved to
REVERSE and the system has detected a
faulted condition, the instrument cluster display
will display the “SERVICE PARK ASSIST
SYSTEM” message for as long as the vehicle is
in REVERSE. Under this condition, ParkSense
will not operate.
Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
If “SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM” appears in
the instrument cluster display after making sure
the rear fascia/bumper is free from snow, ice,
mud, dirt and debris, see an authorized dealer.
Cleaning The ParkSense System
Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car
wash soap and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or
hard cloths. Do not scratch or poke the sensors.
Otherwise, you could damage the sensors.
ParkSense System Usage Precautions
NOTE:
Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow,
ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep the Park-
Sense system operating properly.
Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibra-
tions could affect the performance of Park-
Sense.
When you turn ParkSense off, the instrument
cluster will display “PARKSENSE OFF.”
Furthermore, once you turn ParkSense off, it
remains off until you turn it on again, even if
you cycle the ignition.
When you move the gear selector to the
REVERSE position and ParkSense is turned
off, the instrument cluster display will display
“PARKSENSE OFF” message for as long as
the vehicle is in REVERSE.
ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume
of the radio when it is sounding a tone.
Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly,
taking care not to scratch or damage them.
The sensors must not be covered with ice,
snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris. Failure to do
so can result in the system not working prop-
erly. The ParkSense system might not detect
an obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it
could provide a false indication that an
obstacle is behind the fascia/bumper.
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 178
STARTING AND OPERATING 179
(Continued)
(Continued)
Use the ParkSense switch to turn the Park-
Sense system off if objects such as bicycle
carriers, trailer hitches, etc. are placed within
12 inches (30 cm) from the rear fascia/
bumper. Failure to do so can result in the
system misinterpreting a close object as a
sensor problem, causing the “PARKSENSE
UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED” message
to be displayed in the instrument cluster
display.
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA
Your vehicle is equipped with the ParkView Rear
Back Up Camera that allows you to see an
on-screen image of the rear surroundings of
your vehicle whenever the gear selector is put
into REVERSE. The image will be displayed on
the touchscreen or if equipped, in the rearview
mirror. If the image is displayed in the Uconnect
screen, a caution note to “check entire
surroundings” across the top of the screen.
After five seconds this note will disappear. The
ParkView Rear Back Up Camera is located on
the rear of the vehicle, above the rear license
plate.
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up
even when using ParkSense. Always check
carefully behind your vehicle, look behind
you, and be sure to check for pedestrians,
animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and
blind spots before backing up. You are
responsible for safety and must continue to
pay attention to your surroundings. Failure
to do so can result in serious injury or
death.
Before using ParkSense, it is strongly
recommended that the ball mount and
hitch ball assembly is disconnected from
the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for
towing. Failure to do so can result in injury
or damage to vehicles or obstacles
because the hitch ball will be much closer
to the obstacle than the rear fascia when
the loudspeaker sounds the continuous
tone. Also, the sensors could detect the ball
mount and hitch ball assembly, depending
on its size and shape, giving a false indica-
tion that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
CAUTION!
ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is
unable to recognize every obstacle,
including small obstacles. Parking curbs
might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above or
below the sensors will not be detected
when they are in close proximity.
WARNING! (Continued)
The vehicle must be driven slowly when
using ParkSense in order to be able to stop
in time when an obstacle is detected. It is
recommended that the driver looks over
his/her shoulder when using ParkSense.
CAUTION! (Continued)
5
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 179
180 STARTING AND OPERATING
Manual Activation Of The Rear View Camera:
1. Press the "Controls" button located on the
bottom of the Uconnect display.
2. Press the "Backup Camera" button to turn
the Rear View Camera system on.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE, the
rear camera mode is exited and the last
selected touchscreen appears again.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE
(with Camera delay turned on), the rear Camera
image will be displayed for up to 10 seconds
after shifting to another gear, unless the vehicle
speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the
transmission is shifted into PARK, the ignition is
placed in the OFF position, or the touchscreen
button “X” to disable display of the Rear View
Camera image is pressed.
NOTE:
The programmable features of the ParkView
Rear Backup Camera can be selected through
the touchscreen. Refer to your Uconnect
Owner’s Manual Supplement for further
information.
When displayed, static grid lines will illustrate
the width of the vehicle while a dashed
center-line will indicate the center of the vehicle
to assist with aligning to a hitch/receiver. The
static grid lines will show separate zones that
will help indicate the distance to the rear of the
vehicle. The following table shows the
approximate distances for each zone:
NOTE:
If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance
builds up on the camera lens, clean the lens,
rinse with water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do
not cover the lens.
Zone
Distance To The Rear
Of The Vehicle
Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
Yellow 1 ft - 3 ft (30 cm - 1 m)
Green
3 ft or greater
(1 m or greater)
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up
even when using the ParkView Rear Back Up
Camera. Always check carefully behind your
vehicle, and be sure to check for pedestrians,
animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or blind
spots before backing up. You are responsible
for the safety of your surroundings and must
continue to pay attention while backing up.
Failure to do so can result in serious injury or
death.
CAUTION!
To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should
only be used as a parking aid. The ParkView
camera is unable to view every obstacle or
object in your drive path.
To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must
be driven slowly when using ParkView to be
able to stop in time when an obstacle is
seen. It is recommended that the driver
look frequently over his/her shoulder when
using ParkView.
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 180
STARTING AND OPERATING 181
REFUELING THE VEHICLE
The gas cap is located behind the fuel filler door
on the driver’s side of the vehicle. If the gas cap
is lost or damaged, be sure the replacement
cap is for use with this vehicle.
Fuel Filler Cap
NOTE:
The driver's side sliding door cannot be opened
while the fuel door is open. This feature
operates only when the sliding door is fully
closed prior to opening the fuel door.
NOTE:
When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the
fuel tank is full.
Tighten the fuel filler cap until you hear a
“clicking” sound. This is an indication that the
fuel filler cap is properly tightened.
If the gas cap is not tightened properly, the
MIL may come on. Be sure the gas cap is
tightened every time the vehicle is refueled.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that
the fuel filler cap is loose, improperly installed,
or damaged, a ”gASCAP” message will display in
the odometer or a “Check Gascap” message will
display in the instrument cluster. If this occurs,
tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the
Trip Odometer button to turn off the message. If
the problem continues, the message will appear
the next time the vehicle is started.
A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel
filler cap may also turn on the MIL.
CAUTION!
Damage to the fuel system or emissions
control system could result from using an
improper fuel tank filler tube cap. A poorly
fitting cap could let impurities into the fuel
system and may cause the “Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL)” to turn on, due to fuel
vapors escaping from the system.
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not
“top off” the fuel tank after filling.
WARNING!
Never have any smoking materials lit in or
near the vehicle when the gas cap is
removed or the tank is being filled.
Never add fuel when the engine is running.
This is in violation of most state and federal
fire regulations and may cause the MIL to
turn on.
A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into
a portable container that is inside of a
vehicle. You could be burned. Always place
gas containers on the ground while filling.
5
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 181
182 STARTING AND OPERATING
VEHICLE LOADING
Certification Label
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration regulations, your vehicle has a
certification label affixed to the driver's side
door or pillar.
This label contains the month and year of
manufacture, Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR), Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) front
and rear, and Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN). A Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is
included on this label and indicates the Month,
Day and Hour of manufacture. The bar code
that appears on the bottom of the label is your
VIN.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your
vehicle including driver, passengers, vehicle,
options and cargo. The label also specifies
maximum capacities of front and rear axle
systems (GAWR). Total load must be limited so
GVWR and front and rear GAWR are not
exceeded.
Payload
The payload of a vehicle is defined as the
allowable load weight a truck can carry,
including the weight of the driver, all
passengers, options and cargo.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on
the front and rear axles. The load must be
distributed in the cargo area so that the GAWR
of each axle is not exceeded.
Each axle GAWR is determined by the
components in the system with the lowest load
carrying capacity (axle, springs, tires or wheels).
Heavier axles or suspension components
sometimes specified by purchasers for
increased durability does not necessarily
increase the vehicle's GVWR.
Tire Size
The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label
represents the actual tire size on your vehicle.
Replacement tires must be equal to the load
capacity of this tire size.
Rim Size
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire
size listed.
Inflation Pressure
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your
vehicle for all loading conditions up to full
GAWR.
Curb Weight
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the
total weight of the vehicle with all fluids,
including vehicle fuel, at full capacity
conditions, and with no occupants or cargo
loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb
weight values are determined by weighing your
vehicle on a commercial scale before any
occupants or cargo are added.
Loading
The actual total weight and the weight of the
front and rear of your vehicle at the ground can
best be determined by weighing it when it is
loaded and ready for operation.
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 182
STARTING AND OPERATING 183
The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a
commercial scale to ensure that the GVWR has
not been exceeded. The weight on the front and
rear of the vehicle should then be determined
separately to be sure that the load is properly
distributed over the front and rear axle.
Weighing the vehicle may show that the GAWR
of either the front or rear axles has been
exceeded but the total load is within the
specified GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted
from front to rear or rear to front as appropriate
until the specified weight limitations are met.
Store the heavier items down low and be sure
that the weight is distributed equally. Stow all
loose items securely before driving.
Improper weight distributions can have an
adverse effect on the way your vehicle steers
and handles and the way the brakes operate.
TRAILER TOWING
In this section you will find safety tips and
information on limits to the type of towing you
can reasonably do with your vehicle. Before
towing a trailer, carefully review this information
to tow your load as efficiently and safely as
possible.
To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty
coverage, follow the requirements and
recommendations in this manual concerning
vehicles used for trailer towing.
Common Towing Definitions
The following trailer towing related definitions
will assist you in understanding the following
information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your
vehicle. This includes driver, passengers, cargo
and tongue weight. The total load must be
limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR.
Refer to “Vehicle Loading” in “Starting And
Operating” for further information.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the
weight of all cargo, consumables and
equipment (permanent or temporary) loaded in
or on the trailer in its "loaded and ready for
operation" condition.
The recommended way to measure GTW is to
put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale.
The entire weight of the trailer must be
supported by the scale.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front
and rear axles. Distribute the load over the front
and rear axles evenly. Make sure that you do
not exceed either front or rear GAWR. Refer to
“Vehicle Loading” in “Starting And Operating”
for further information.
CAUTION!
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWR.
If you do, parts on your vehicle can break, or
it can change the way your vehicle handles.
This could cause you to lose control. Also
overloading can shorten the life of your
vehicle.
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the
maximum front or rear GAWR. A dangerous
driving condition can result if either rating is
exceeded. You could lose control of the
vehicle and have a collision.
5
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 183
184 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tongue Weight (TW)
The tongue weight is the downward force
exerted on the hitch ball by the trailer. You must
consider this as part of the load on your vehicle.
Trailer Frontal Area
The frontal area is the maximum height
multiplied by the maximum width of the front of
a trailer.
Trailer Sway Control
The Trailer Sway Control can be a mechanical
telescoping link that can be installed between
the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue that
typically provides adjustable friction associated
with the telescoping motion to dampen any
unwanted trailer swaying motions while
traveling.
If equipped, the electronic Trailer Sway Control
(TSC) recognizes a swaying trailer and automat-
ically applies individual wheel brakes and/or
reduces engine power to attempt to eliminate
the trailer sway.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer
tongue weight, just as if it were luggage located
at a hitch ball or some other connecting point of
the vehicle. These kinds of hitches are the most
popular on the market today and they are
commonly used to tow small and medium sized
trailers.
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing system works by applying
leverage through spring (load) bars. They are
typically used for heavier loads to distribute
trailer tongue weight to the tow vehicle's front
axle and the trailer axle(s). When used in
accordance with the manufacturer's directions,
it provides for a more level ride, offering more
consistent steering and brake control thereby
enhancing towing safety. The addition of a
friction/hydraulic sway control also dampens
sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and
contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer
stability.
Trailer sway control and a weight distributing
(load equalizing) hitch are recommended for
heavier Tongue Weights (TW) and may be
required depending on vehicle and trailer
configuration/loading to comply with Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR) requirements.
Trailer Hitch Classification
The following chart provides the industry
standard for the maximum trailer weight a given
trailer hitch class can tow and should be used to
assist you in selecting the correct trailer hitch
for your intended towing condition.
WARNING!
An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing
Hitch system may reduce handling,
stability, braking performance, and could
result in a collision.
Weight Distributing Systems may not be
compatible with Surge Brake Couplers.
Consult with your hitch and trailer manufac-
turer or a reputable Recreational Vehicle
dealer for additional information.
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 184
STARTING AND OPERATING 185
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class
Max. Trailer Hitch
Industry
Standards
Class I - Light Duty
2,000 lbs
(907 kg)
Class II - Medium Duty
3,500 lbs
(1,587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty
5,000 lbs
(2,267 kg)
Class IV - Extra Heavy Duty
10,000 lbs
(4,535 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given
drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle.
5
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 185
186 STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)
The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain:
NOTE:
The trailer tongue weight must be considered as
part of the combined weight of occupants and
cargo, and should never exceed the weight
referenced on the Tire and Loading Information
placard. Refer to “Tire Safety Information” in
“Servicing and Maintenance” for further
information.
Trailer And Tongue Weight
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight
stamped on your bumper or trailer hitch.
Weight Distribution
Engine/Transmission
GCWR (Gross Combined
Weight Rating)
Frontal Area
Max. GTW (Gross Trailer
Weight)
Max. Tongue Weight
3.6L/Automatic
8,750 lbs (3,968 kg) 40 sq ft (3.72 sq m)
Up to 2 persons & Luggage
3,600 lbs (1 632 kg)*
360 lbs (163 kg)
8,750 lbs (3,968 kg) 40 sq ft (3.72 sq m)
3 to 5 persons & Luggage
3,450 lbs (1 565 kg)*
345 lbs (156 kg)
8,750 lbs (3,968 kg) 40 sq ft (3.72 sq m)
6 to 7 persons & Luggage
3,000 lbs (1 360 kg)*
300 lbs (136 kg)
*Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
CAUTION!
Always load a trailer with 60% of the weight in
the front of the trailer. This places 10% of the
GTW on the tow hitch of your vehicle. Loads
balanced over the wheels or heavier in the
rear can cause the trailer to sway severely
side to side which will cause loss of control of
the vehicle and trailer. Failure to load trailers
heavier in front is the cause of many trailer
collisions.
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 186
STARTING AND OPERATING 187
(Continued)
Consider the following items when computing
the weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
The tongue weight of the trailer.
The weight of any other type of cargo or
equipment put in or on your vehicle.
The weight of the driver and all passengers.
NOTE:
Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also,
additional factory-installed options or
dealer-installed options must be considered as
part of the total load on your vehicle. Refer to
the “Tire And Loading Information” placard for
the maximum combined weight of occupants
and cargo for your vehicle.
Towing Requirements
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle
drivetrain components, the following guidelines
are recommended.
Perform the maintenance listed in the
“Scheduled Servicing”. Refer to “Scheduled
Servicing” in “Servicing And Maintenance” for
the proper maintenance intervals. When towing
a trailer, never exceed the GAWR or GCWR
ratings.
CAUTION!
Do not tow a trailer at all during the first
500 miles (805 km) the new vehicle is
driven. The engine, axle or other parts could
be damaged.
Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km)
that a trailer is towed, do not drive over
50 mph (80 km/h) and do not make starts
at full throttle. This helps the engine and
other parts of the vehicle wear in at the
heavier loads.
WARNING!
Make certain that the load is secured in the
trailer and will not shift during travel. When
trailering cargo that is not fully secured,
dynamic load shifts can occur that may be
difficult for the driver to control. You could
lose control of your vehicle and have a
collision.
When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do
not overload your vehicle or trailer. Over-
loading can cause a loss of control, poor
performance or damage to brakes, axle,
engine, transmission, steering, suspension,
chassis structure or tires.
Safety chains must always be used
between your vehicle and trailer. Always
connect the chains to the hook retainers of
the vehicle hitch. Cross the chains under
the trailer tongue and allow enough slack
for turning corners.
5
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 187
188 STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing Requirements — Tires
Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a
compact spare tire.
Do not drive more than 50 mph (80 km/h)
when towing while using a full size spare tire.
Proper tire inflation pressures are essential
to the safe and satisfactory operation of your
vehicle. Refer to “Tires” in “Servicing And
Maintenance” for proper tire inflation
procedures.
Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation
pressures before trailer usage.
Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire
damage before towing a trailer. Refer to
“Tires” in “Servicing And Maintenance” for
the proper inspection procedure.
When replacing tires, refer to “Tires” in
“Servicing And Maintenance” for the proper
tire replacement procedures. Replacing tires
with a higher load carrying capacity will not
increase the vehicle's GVWR and GAWR
limits.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake
system or vacuum system of your vehicle
with that of the trailer. This could cause inad-
equate braking and possible personal injury.
An electronically actuated trailer brake
controller is required when towing a trailer
with electronically actuated brakes. When
towing a trailer equipped with a hydraulic
surge actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required.
Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers
over 1,000 lbs (453 kg) and required for
trailers in excess of 2,000 lbs (907 kg).
Vehicles with trailers should not be parked
on a grade. When parking, apply the
parking brake on the tow vehicle. Put the
tow vehicle transmission in PARK. For
four-wheel drive vehicles, make sure the
transfer case is not in NEUTRAL. Always,
block or "chock" the trailer wheels.
GCWR must not be exceeded.
Total weight must be distributed between
the tow vehicle and the trailer such that the
following four ratings are not exceeded:
GVWR
GTW
GAWR
Tongue weight rating for the trailer
hitch utilized.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Do not connect trailer brakes to your
vehicle's hydraulic brake lines. It can over-
load your brake system and cause it to fail.
You might not have brakes when you need
them and could have an accident.
Towing any trailer will increase your stop-
ping distance. When towing, you should
allow for additional space between your
vehicle and the vehicle in front of you.
Failure to do so could result in an accident.
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 188
STARTING AND OPERATING 189
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And
Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the
trailer size, stoplights and turn signals on the
trailer are required for motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and
seven-pin wiring harness. Use a factory
approved trailer harness and connector.
NOTE:
Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicle’s
wiring harness.
The electrical connections are all complete to
the vehicle but you must mate the harness to a
trailer connector. Refer to the following
illustrations.
NOTE:
Disconnect trailer wiring connector from the
vehicle before launching a boat (or any other
device plugged into vehicle’s electrical
connect) into water.
Be sure to reconnect once clear from water
area.
Four-Pin Connector
Seven-Pin Connector
Towing Tips
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning,
stopping, and backing up the trailer in an area
located away from heavy traffic.
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs
(453 kg) loaded, it should have its own
brakes and they should be of adequate
capacity. Failure to do this could lead to
accelerated brake lining wear, higher brake
pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.
1 — Female Pins
2 — Male Pin
3 — Ground
4 — Park
5 — Left Stop/Turn
6 — Right Stop/Turn
1 — Battery
2 — Backup Lamps
3 — Right Stop/Turn
4 — Electric Brakes
5 — Ground
6 — Left Stop/Turn
7 — Running Lamps
5
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 189
190 STARTING AND OPERATING
Automatic Transmission
The DRIVE range can be selected when towing.
However, if frequent shifting occurs while in
DRIVE, use the Electronic Range Select (ERS)
shift control to manually select a lower gear
range.
NOTE:
Using a lower gear range while operating the
vehicle under heavy loading conditions, will
improve performance and extend transmission
life by reducing excessive shifting and heat
buildup. This action will also provide better
engine braking.
If you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than
45 minutes of continuous operation, then
change the transmission fluid and filter as
specified for "police, taxi, fleet, or frequent
trailer towing." Refer to the “Maintenance Plan”
for the proper maintenance intervals.
Electronic Range Select (ERS)
When using the ERS shift control, select the
highest gear that allows for adequate perfor-
mance and avoids frequent downshifts. For
example, choose “4” if the desired speed can
be maintained. Choose “3” or “2” if needed
to maintain the desired speed.
To prevent excess heat generation, avoid
continuous driving at high RPM. Reduce
vehicle speed as necessary to avoid
extended driving at high RPM. Return to a
higher gear range or vehicle speed when
grade and road conditions allow.
Speed Control — If Equipped
Do not use on hilly terrain or with heavy
loads.
When using the Speed Control, if you experi-
ence speed drops greater than 10 mph
(16 km/h), disengage until you can get back
to cruising speed.
Use Speed Control in flat terrain and with
light loads to maximize fuel efficiency.
Cooling System
To reduce potential for engine and transmission
overheating, take the following actions:
City Driving
In city traffic — while stopped, place the trans-
mission in NEUTRAL, but do not increase
engine idle speed.
Highway Driving
Reduce speed.
Temporarily turn off air conditioning.
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 190
STARTING AND OPERATING 191
(Continued)
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
NOTE:
When towing your vehicle, always follow applicable state and provincial laws. Contact state and provincial Highway Safety offices for additional details.
Recreational Towing — All Models
Recreational towing is allowed ONLY if the front
wheels are OFF the ground. This may be
accomplished using a tow dolly or vehicle
trailer. If using a tow dolly, follow this procedure:
1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle,
following the dolly manufacturer's
instructions.
2. Drive the front wheels onto the tow dolly.
3. Firmly apply the parking brake. Place the
transmission in PARK.
4. Properly secure the front wheels to the
dolly, following the dolly manufacturer's
instructions.
5. Release the parking brake.
Towing Condition Wheels OFF The Ground
All
Models
Flat Tow
NONE
NOT
ALLOWED
Dolly Tow
Front OK
Rear
NOT
ALLOWED
On Trailer ALL
BEST
METHOD
CAUTION!
DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the
drivetrain will result. If this vehicle requires
towing, make sure the drive wheels are OFF
the ground.
5
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 191
192 STARTING AND OPERATING
DRIVING TIPS
Driving On Slippery Surfaces
Information in this section will aid in safe
controlled launches in adverse conditions.
Acceleration
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or
other slippery surfaces may cause the driving
wheels to pull erratically to the right or left. This
phenomenon occurs when there is a difference
in the surface traction under the front (driving)
wheels.
Traction
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is
possible for a wedge of water to build up
between the tire and road surface. This is
hydroplaning and may cause partial or
complete loss of vehicle control and stopping
ability. To reduce this possibility, the following
precautions should be observed:
Slow down during rainstorms or when the
roads are slushy.
Slow down if the road has standing water or
puddles.
Replace the tires when tread wear indicators
first become visible.
Keep tires properly inflated.
Maintain sufficient distance between your
vehicle and the vehicle in front of you to avoid
a collision in a sudden stop.
Driving Through Water
Driving through water more than a few
inches/centimeters deep will require extra
caution to ensure safety and prevent damage to
your vehicle.
Flowing/Rising Water
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
requirements can cause severe transmis-
sion damage. Damage from improper
towing is not covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Do not use a bumper mounted clamp-on
tow bar on your vehicle. The bumper face
bar will be damaged.
CAUTION! (Continued)
WARNING!
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is
dangerous. Unequal traction can cause
sudden pulling of the front wheels. You could
lose control of the vehicle and possibly have a
collision. Accelerate slowly and carefully
whenever there is likely to be poor traction
(ice, snow, wet, mud, loose sand, etc.).
WARNING!
Do not drive on or across a road or path
where water is flowing and/or rising (as in
storm run-off). Flowing water can wear away
the road or path's surface and cause your
vehicle to sink into deeper water.
Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can
carry your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to
follow this warning may result in injuries that
are serious or fatal to you, your passengers,
and others around you.
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 192
STARTING AND OPERATING 193
(Continued)
Shallow Standing Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving
through shallow standing water, consider the
following Warnings and Cautions before doing so.
WARNING!
Driving through standing water limits your
vehicle’s traction capabilities. Do not
exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving
through standing water.
Driving through standing water limits your
vehicle’s braking capabilities, which
increases stopping distances. Therefore,
after driving through standing water, drive
slowly and lightly press on the brake pedal
several times to dry the brakes.
Failure to follow these warnings may result
in injuries that are serious or fatal to you,
your passengers, and others around you.
CAUTION!
Always check the depth of the standing
water before driving through it. Never drive
through standing water that is deeper than
the bottom of the tire rims mounted on the
vehicle.
Determine the condition of the road or the
path that is under water and if there are any
obstacles in the way before driving through
the standing water.
Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when
driving through standing water. This will
minimize wave effects.
Driving through standing water may cause
damage to your vehicle’s drivetrain compo-
nents. Always inspect your vehicle’s fluids
(i.e., engine oil, transmission, axle, etc.) for
signs of contamination (i.e., fluid that is
milky or foamy in appearance) after driving
through standing water. Do not continue to
operate the vehicle if any fluid appears
contaminated, as this may result in further
damage. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine
can cause it to lock up and stall out, and
cause serious internal damage to the
engine. Such damage is not covered by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION! (Continued)
5
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 193
194
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
The Hazard Warning Flashers switch is located
in the lower center area of the instrument
panel.
Push the switch to turn on the Hazard
Warning Flashers. When the switch is
activated, all directional turn signals
will flash on and off to warn oncoming
traffic of an emergency. Push the switch a
second time to turn off the Hazard Warning
Flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it
should not be used when the vehicle is in
motion. Use it when your vehicle is disabled and
it is creating a safety hazard for other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek
assistance, the Hazard Warning Flashers will
continue to operate even though the ignition is
placed in the OFF position.
NOTE:
With extended use, the Hazard Warning
Flashers may wear down your battery.
BULB REPLACEMENT
Replacement Bulbs
Interior Bulbs
Bulb Name Bulb Number
Center & Rear Dome Lamp 578
Center & Rear Reading Lamps 578
Front Door Courtesy Lamp 578
Front Header Reading Lamps – If Equipped 578
Instrument Cluster Lamps PC74
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 194
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 195
NOTE:
For lighted switches, see an authorized dealer for replacement instructions.
NOTE:
All of the interior bulbs are glass wedge base or glass cartridge types. Aluminum base bulbs are not approved and should not be used for replacement.
Liftgate Lamp(s) 578
Overhead Console Reading Lamps PC579
Removable Console Lamp – If Equipped 194
Visor Vanity Lamps 6501966
Exterior Bulbs
Bulb Name Bulb Number
Headlamp H11LL
Fog Lamp – If Equipped PSX24W
Front Side Marker, Park/Turn Signal 3757A or PY27/7W
Rear Tail, Stop, Turn Signal Lamp LED (Serviced at an Authorized Dealer)
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp LED (Serviced at an Authorized Dealer)
Backup Lamp 3157
License 168
Interior Bulbs
Bulb Name Bulb Number
6
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 195
196 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Replacing Exterior Bulbs
Headlamps
1. Raise the hood to access the rear of the
headlamp housing.
2. Slide the red lock tab rearward on the
connector, then depress the tab and
remove the connector from the bulb.
3. Twist the headlamp bulb and pull the bulb
from the headlamp housing.
4. Install the new headlamp bulb and twist
until locked into the headlamp housing.
5. Connect the wiring connector to bulb and
slide red lock tab forward.
Front Park/Turn Signal Lamps
1. Raise the hood to access the rear of the
headlamp housing.
2. Twist the turn signal socket and remove
from the headlamp housing, then pull the
bulb out.
3. Push the new bulb into the socket and
reinstall the socket by twisting until locked
into the headlamp housing.
Fog Lamps
NOTE:
Access to the fog lamp bulb is from the rear of
the fascia. On the left rear side of the fascia,
remove the push pin and lower the hinged
access door on the air dam.
1. From behind the bumper fascia, or the
access panel on the air dam, squeeze the
two tabs on the side of the bulb socket and
pull straight out from the fog lamp.
2. Disconnect the wire harness from the bulb.
3. Reconnect the wiring harness to the new
bulb and reinstall by inserting the new bulb
straight into the fog lamp until it locks into
place.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers.
Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb
life. If the bulb comes in contact with an oily
surface, clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers.
Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb
life. If the bulb comes in contact with an oily
surface, clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol.
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 196
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 197
Rear Tail, Stop, Turn Signal, Side Marker And
Backup Lamps
1. Raise the liftgate.
2. Remove the tail lamp assembly by removing
the two screws from the inboard side. Use a
fiber stick or similar tool to gently pry the
light on the outboard side to disengage the
two ball studs.
Tail Lamp Assembly Screws
NOTE:
If a screwdriver is used, make sure a soft
material is placed between the vehicle body
and tool so not to scratch the paint.
The PRY location is best closest to the studs
while dislodging them separately.
3. Twist the socket and remove from the lamp
assembly.
4. Pull the bulb to remove it from the socket.
5. Replace the bulb, reinstall the socket, and
reattach the lamp assembly.
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
The CHMSL uses LED lamps that are not
serviceable separately. The CHMSL must be
replaced as an assembly. See an authorized
dealer.
License Lamp
The license plate lamp is located under the
tailgate light bar and above the license plate.
1. Using a small screwdriver, press inward the
locking tab on the outboard side of the
lamp assembly and pull down on the lamp
assembly for removal.
2. Twist and remove the socket from the lamp
assembly and pull the bulb out to remove.
3. Push the bulb into the socket, twist the
socket into the lamp assembly and reinstall
the lamp assembly into place ensuring the
locking tab is secure.
FUSES
WARNING!
When replacing a blown fuse, always use
an appropriate replacement fuse with the
same amp rating as the original fuse. Never
replace a fuse with another fuse of higher
amp rating. Never replace a blown fuse with
metal wires or any other material. Do not
place a fuse inside a circuit breaker cavity
or vice versa. Failure to use proper fuses
may result in serious personal injury, fire
and/or property damage.
Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the
ignition is off and that all the other services
are switched off and/or disengaged.
If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an
authorized dealer.
If a general protection fuse for safety
systems (air bag system, braking system),
power unit systems (engine system, trans-
mission system) or steering system blows,
contact an authorized dealer.
6
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 197
198 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
General Information
The fuses protect electrical systems against
excessive current.
When a device does not work, you must check
the fuse element inside the blade fuse for a
break/melt.
Also, please be aware that when using power
outlets for extended periods of time with the
engine off may result in vehicle battery
discharge.
Blade Fuses
Totally Integrated Power Module (Fuses)
The Totally Integrated Power Module is located
in the engine compartment near the battery.
Refer to the applicable “Engine Compartment”
illustration in this section. This center contains
cartridge fuses and mini-fuses. A label that
identifies each component may be printed or
embossed on the inside of the cover.
Totally Integrated Power Module
The numbers inside the Totally Integrated
Power Module (TIPM) cover correspond to the
following table.
1 — Fuse Element
2 — Blade Fuse with a good/functional fuse ele-
ment.
3 — Blade fuse with a bad/not functional fuse el-
ement (blown fuse).
CAUTION!
When installing the Totally Integrated
Power Module cover, it is important to
ensure the cover is properly positioned and
fully latched. Failure to do so may allow
water to get into the Integrated Power
Module, and possibly result in a electrical
system failure.
When replacing a blown fuse, it is important
to use only a fuse having the correct
amperage rating. The use of a fuse with a
rating other than indicated may result in a
dangerous electrical system overload. If a
properly rated fuse continues to blow, it
indicates a problem in the circuit that must
be corrected.
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 198
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 199
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
J1 40 Amp Green – Power Folding Seat
J2 30 Amp Pink – Power Liftgate Module
J3 30 Amp Pink – Rear Door Module
J4 25 Amp Clear – Driver Door Node
J5 25 Amp Clear – Passenger Door Node
J6 40 Amp Green – Antilock Brakes Pump/Stability Control System
J7 30 Amp Pink – Antilock Brakes Valve/Stability Control System
J8
40 Amp Green
– Power Memory Seat – If Equipped
J9 – – Not Used
J10 30 Amp Pink – Headlamp Wash/Manifold Tuning Valve – If Equipped
J11 30 Amp Pink –
Power Sliding Door Module/Anti–Theft Module – If
Equipped
J12 30 Amp Pink – HVAC Rear Blower, Radiator Fan Motor
J13 60 Amp Yellow – Ignition Off Draw (IOD) – Main
J14 40 Amp Green – Rear Window Defogger
J15 40 Amp Green – Front Blower
J17 40 Amp Green – Starter Solenoid
J18 20 Amp Blue – Powertrain Control Module Trans Range
J19 60 Amp Yellow – Radiator Fan
J20 30 Amp Pink – Front Wiper LO/HI
6
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 199
200 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
J21 20 Amp Blue – Front/Rear Washer
J22 25 Amp Clear – Sunroof Module
M1 – 15 Amp Blue Rear Center Brake Lamp/Brake Switch
M2 – 20 Amp Yellow Front Fog Lamps
M3 – 20 Amp Yellow Vacuum Pump Motor
M5 – 25 Amp Clear Inverter
M6 – 20 Amp Yellow
Power Outlet #1 (ACC), Rain Sensor, Cigar Lighter
(Instrument Panel or with Console Rear)
M7 – 20 Amp Yellow
Power Outlet #2 (BATT/ACC SELECT) – Center Seat or with
Console Rear
M8 – 20 Amp Yellow Front Heated Seat — If Equipped
M9 – 20 Amp Yellow Rear Heated Seat — If Equipped
M10 – 15 Amp Blue
Ignition Off Draw — Video System, Satellite Radio, DVD,
Hands-Free Module, Universal Garage Door Opener, Vanity
Lamp, Streaming Video Module — If Equipped
M11 – 10 Amp Red Climate Control System
M12 – 30 Amp Green Amplifier/Radio
M13 – 20 Amp Yellow
Instrument Cluster, SIREN, Clock Module, Multifunction
Control Switch – If Equipped
M14 – 20 Amp Yellow Trailer Tow — If Equipped
M15 – 20 Amp Yellow
Rear View Mirror, Instrument Cluster, Multifunction Control
Switch, Tire Pressure Monitor
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 200
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 201
M16 – 10 Amp Red Airbag Module/Occupant Classification Module
M17 – 15 Amp Blue Left Tail/License/Park Lamp, Running Lamps
M18 – 15 Amp Blue Right Tail/Park/Run Lamp
M19 – 25 Amp Clear Powertrain
M20 – 15 Amp Blue
Instrument Cluster Interior Light, Switch Bank, Steering
Column Module, Switch Steering Wheel
M21 – 20 Amp Yellow Powertrain
M22 – 10 Amp Red Horn
M23 – 10 Amp Red Horn
M24 – 25 Amp Clear Rear Wiper
M25 – 20 Amp Yellow Fuel Pump
M26 – 10 Amp Red Power Mirror Switch, Driver Window Switch
M27
–
10 Amp Red Wireless Control Module, Keyless Entry Module
M28 – 10 Amp Red Powertrain, Transmission Control Module
M29 – 10 Amp Red Occupant Classification Module
M30 – 15 Amp Blue Diagnostic Feed
M31 – 20 Amp Yellow Back-Up Lamps
M32 – 10 Amp Red Airbag Module, THATCHUM — If Equipped
M33 – 10 Amp Red Powertrain
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
6
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 201
202 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
(Continued)
(Continued)
The power windows are fused by a 25 Amp circuit breaker located in the Totally Integrated Power Module.
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
M34 – 10 Amp Red
Park Assist, Heater Climate Control Module, Headlamp
Wash, Compass, Rear Camera, Door Lamps, Flashlight,
Relay Diesel Cabin Heater
M35 – 10 Amp Red Heated Mirrors
M36 – 20 Amp Yellow
Power Outlet #3 (Instrument Panel Or With Console
Center)
M37 – 10 Amp Red Antilock Brakes, Stability Control, Stop Lamp, Fuel Pump
M38 – 25 Amp Clear Door Lock/Unlock Motors, Liftgate Lock/Unlock Motors
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side
of the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull
far enough off the road to avoid the danger
of being hit when operating the jack or
changing the wheel.
Being under a jacked-up vehicle is
dangerous. The vehicle could slip off the
jack and fall on you. You could be crushed.
Never put any part of your body under a
vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service
center where it can be raised on a lift.
Never start or run the engine while the
vehicle is on a jack.
WARNING! (Continued)
The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires only. The jack should not be
used to lift the vehicle for service purposes.
The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level
surface only. Avoid ice or slippery areas.
WARNING! (Continued)
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 202
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 203
Jack Location
If equipped, the jack, jack handle and winch
handle tools are stowed behind the rear left
side trim panel in the rear cargo area. Turn the
two cover latches to release the cover.
Jack And Tool Cover
Jack And Tool Location
Spare Tire Tools
The tool pouch contains three pieces and can
be assembled into a spare tire hook; to remove
the compact spare tire/cover assembly from
under the vehicle, or a Winch T-handle; to raise/
lower the compact spare tire/cover assembly.
Assembled T-handle
Assembling The Spare Tire Hook
To Access Spare Tire Winch Drive Nut
To access the spare tire winch drive nut and
lower the spare tire, you will need to refer to one
of the following center console configurations.
1 — Spare Tire Hook/T-handle
2 — Extension 1
3 — Extension 2
1 — Spare Tire Hook/T-handle
2 — Extension 1
3 — Extension 2
6
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 203
204 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Super Console — If Equipped
For vehicles equipped with the Super Console,
the spare tire winch assembly drive nut is
located beneath the console.
Super Console
1. Pull the lower drawer out from the rear of
the floor console to gain clear access to the
tire winch drive nut.
Lower Storage Compartment Location
2. Open the front drawer to expose the storage
compartment.
3. Remove the liner from the consoles storage
compartment to access the spare tire winch
drive nut.
Removing Liner
Winch Drive Nut Location
Base Cargo Center Console — If Equipped
Pull the Winch Cover assembly plug and
retainer clip to access the winch drive nut.
Winch Cover Assembly Plug (If Equipped)
1 — Lower Drawer
2 — Front Drawer/Liner
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 204
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 205
Spare Tire Removal
The spare tire is stowed inside a protective
cover located under the center of the vehicle
between the front doors by means of a cable
winch mechanism. The “spare tire drive” nut is
located on the floor, under a plastic cap at the
front of the floor console or under front super
console forward bin liner.
Spare Tire Location
Spare Tire Removal Instructions
The spare tire is located under the vehicle
beneath the center console area.
Spare Tire And Cover
1. Assemble the spare tire tools into a
T-handle and place the square end over
the spare tire winch drive nut.
2. Rotate the nut to the left until the winch
mechanism stops turning freely. This will
allow enough slack in the cable to allow you
to pull the spare tire out from underneath
the vehicle.
3. To remove the compact spare tire/cover
assembly, assemble the winch T-handle
extensions to form a spare tire hook, and
pull the spare tire out from under the
vehicle.
Pulling Spare Tire
NOTE:
If either front tire is flat it may be necessary to
jack up the vehicle to remove the compact
spare tire/cover assembly from under the
vehicle.
CAUTION!
The winch mechanism is designed for use
with the winch T-handle only. Use of an air
wrench or other power tools is not
recommended and can damage the winch.
6
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 205
206 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
(Continued)
4. Stand the tire/cover assembly upright.
Squeeze the winch retaining tabs together
while simultaneously pushing them through
the hole in the cover and the steel rim. This
will free the winch cable from the spare tire.
Removing Wheel Spacer
Preparations For Jacking
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface.
Avoid ice or slippery areas.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Place the gear selector into PARK.
5. Turn OFF the ignition.
6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel
diagonally opposite the jacking position. For
example, if the driver’s front wheel is being
changed, block the passenger’s rear wheel.
Wheel Blocked
NOTE:
Passengers should not remain in the vehicle
when the vehicle is being raised or lifted.
Jacking Instructions
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of
the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far
enough off the road to avoid being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
WARNING!
Always park on a firm, level surface as far
from the edge of the roadway as possible
before raising the vehicle.
Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 206
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 207
Jack Warning Label
NOTE:
Refer to the “Compact Spare Tire” section of
“Tires” in “Servicing And Maintenance” for
information about the compact spare tire, its
use, and operation.
1. Loosen (but do not remove) the wheel lug
nuts by turning them to the left one turn
while the wheel is still on the ground.
2. There are two jack engagement locations
on each side of the vehicle body. These
locations are on the sill flange of the vehicle
body.
Jack Locations
Apply the parking brake firmly and shift an
automatic transmission to PARK; a manual
transmission to REVERSE.
Block the wheel diagonally opposite the
wheel to be raised.
Never start or run the engine with the
vehicle on a jack.
Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it
is on a jack.
Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a
jack. If you need to get under a raised
vehicle, take it to a service center where it
can be raised on a lift.
Only use the jack in the positions indicated
and for lifting this vehicle during a tire
change.
If working on or near a roadway, be
extremely careful of motor traffic.
To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated,
are securely stowed, spares must be
stowed with the valve stem facing the
ground.
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking
on locations other than those indicated in the
Jacking Instructions for this vehicle.
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking
on locations other than those indicated.
6
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 207
208 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Rear jack locations are between a pair of
down-facing tabs on the sill flange of the ve-
hicle side body.
Front Lifting Point
Front Jack Location
Rear Lifting Point
Rear Jack Location
NOTE:
In some situations the jack may need to be
placed on its side in order to be pushed under
the vehicle. Return the jack to its correct
orientation once it is under the vehicle.
3. Place the wrench on the jack screw and turn
to the right until the jack head is properly
engaged in the appropriate location. Do not
raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack
is securely engaged.
4. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw
to the right, using the swivel wrench. Raise
the vehicle only until the tire just clears the
surface and enough clearance is obtained
to install the compact spare tire. Minimum
tire lift provides maximum stability.
WARNING!
Being under a jacked-up vehicle is
dangerous. The vehicle could slip off the jack
and fall on you. You could be crushed. Never
get any part of your body under a vehicle that
is on a jack. If you need to get under a raised
vehicle, take it to a service center where it
can be raised on a lift.
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 208
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 209
5. Remove the wheel lug nuts. For vehicles
with wheel covers, remove the cover from
the wheel by hand by holding down the
wheel and pulling on convenient features
on the cover. Do not pry the wheel cover off.
Then pull the wheel off the hub.
6. Install the compact spare tire. Lightly
tighten all the lug nuts until the wheel sits
flush onto the hub and there is no play. The
nuts will have to be fully tightened once the
vehicle is lowered. Tightening an improperly
seated wheel under vehicle load can
damage the threads, cause vibration, and
undermine safety.
Mounting Compact Spare Tire
NOTE:
Do not install the wheel cover on the compact
spare.
7. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw
to the left.
8. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on
the wrench while at the end of the handle
for increased leverage. Tighten the lug nuts
in a star pattern until each nut has been
tightened twice. For correct lug nut torque
refer to “Wheel And Tire Torque Specifi-
cations” in “Technical Specifications”. If in
doubt about the correct tightness, have
them checked with a torque wrench by an
authorized dealer or at a service station.
9. Lower the jack to its fully-closed position.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can
make the vehicle less stable. It could slip off
the jack and hurt someone near it. Raise the
vehicle only enough to remove the tire.
CAUTION!
Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve
stem facing outward. The vehicle could be
damaged if the spare tire is mounted
incorrectly.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the
jack, do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until
the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to
follow this warning may result in serious
injury.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could endanger the
occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack
parts and the spare tire in the places
provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire repaired
or replaced immediately.
6
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 209
210 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
10. Place the deflated (flat) tire and compact
spare tire cover assembly in the rear cargo
area. Do not stow the deflated tire in the
compact spare tire location. Have the
full-sized tire repaired or replaced, as soon
as possible.
11. Stow the cable and wheel spacer before
driving the vehicle. Reassemble the winch
handle extensions to form a “T” and fit the
winch T-handle over the drive nut. Rotate
the nut to the right until the winch
mechanism clicks at least three times.
NOTE:
Refer to the “Spare Tire Tools” section for
instructions on assembling the T-handle.
12. Stow the jack, jack handle and winch
handle tools back in the stowage
compartment.
13. Check the compact spare tire pressure as
soon as possible. Correct the tire pressure,
as required.
Securing The Compact Spare Tire
1. Assemble the winch handle extensions to
form a T-handle and fit the winch T-handle
over the drive nut. Rotate the nut to the left
until the winch mechanism stops turning
freely. This will allow enough slack in the
cable to allow you to pull the wheel spacer
out from under the vehicle.
2. Assemble the winch handle extensions to
form the spare tire hook, and pull the wheel
spacer from under the vehicle.
3. Turn the compact spare tire so that the
valve stem is down, and place the tire into
the compact spare tire/cover assembly.
Slide the wheel spacer through the center of
the wheel and compact spare tire/cover
assembly, so that the two retainer tabs
snap out and engage the compact spare tire
cover on the opposite side.
WARNING!
A loose compact spare tire/cover assembly,
thrown forward in a collision or hard stop
could endanger the occupants of the vehicle.
Always stow the compact spare tire with the
cover assembly in the place provided.
CAUTION!
The winch mechanism is designed for use
with the winch T-handle only. Use of an air
wrench or other power tools is not
recommended and can damage the winch.
WARNING!
Verify that both retainer tabs of the wheel
spacer have been properly extended through
the center of the wheel and compact spare
tire/cover assembly. Failure to properly
engage both retainer tabs could result in loss
of the compact spare tire and cover
assembly, which will cause vehicle damage
and may cause loss of vehicle control and
serious personal injury.
CAUTION!
The compact spare tire/cover assembly must
be used when the compact spare tire is
stored. Failure to use this cover could
drastically reduce the life of the compact
spare tire.
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 210
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 211
4. Using the winch T-handle, rotate the drive
nut to the right until the compact spare
tire/cover assembly is drawn into place
against the underside of the vehicle.
5. Continue to rotate the nut to the right until
you hear the winch mechanism click three
times. It cannot be overtightened. Check
under the vehicle to ensure the compact
spare tire/cover assembly is positioned
correctly against the underside of the
vehicle.
Road Tire Installation
Vehicles Equipped With Wheel Covers
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
2. To ease the installation process for steel
wheels with wheel covers, install two lug
nuts on the mounting studs which are on
each side of the valve stem. Install the lug
nuts with the cone shaped end of the nut
toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug
nuts.
Tire And Wheel Cover Or Center Cap
3. Align the valve notch in the wheel cover with
the valve stem on the wheel. Install the
cover by hand, snapping the cover over the
two lug nuts. Do not use a hammer or
excessive force to install the cover.
4. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone
shaped end of the nut toward the wheel.
Lightly tighten all the lug nuts until the
wheel sits flush onto the hub and there is no
play. The nuts will have to be fully tightened
once the vehicle is lowered. Tightening an
improperly seated wheel under vehicle load
can damage the threads, cause vibration,
and undermine safety.
5. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning
the jack handle counterclockwise.
CAUTION!
The winch mechanism is designed
specifically to stow a compact spare tire only.
Do not attempt to use the winch to stow the
full size deflated tire, or any other full-size
tire, as the tire may not be held securely.
Vehicle damage may result.
1 — Valve Stem
2 — Valve Notch
3 — Wheel Lug Nut
4 — Wheel Cover
5 — Mounting Stud
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the
jack, do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until
the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to
follow this warning may result in serious
injury.
6
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 211
212 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
6. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on
the wrench while at the end of the handle
for increased leverage. Tighten the lug nuts
in a star pattern until each nut has been
tightened twice. Refer to “Wheel And Tire
Torque Specifications” in “Technical
Specifications” for proper wheel lug nut
torque. If in doubt about the correct
tightness, have them checked with a torque
wrench by an authorized dealer or at a
service station.
7. After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut
torque with a torque wrench to ensure that
all lug nuts are properly seated against the
wheel.
Vehicles Without Wheel Covers
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
2. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone
shaped end of the nut toward the wheel.
Lightly tighten all the lug nuts until the
wheel sits flush onto the hub and there is no
play. The nuts will have to be fully tightened
once the vehicle is lowered. Tightening an
improperly seated wheel under vehicle load
can damage the threads, cause vibration,
and undermine safety.
3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning
the jack handle counterclockwise.
4. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on
the wrench while at the end of the handle
for increased leverage. Tighten the lug nuts
in a star pattern until each nut has been
tightened twice. Refer to “Wheel And Tire
Torque Specifications” in the “Technical
Specifications” section for proper wheel lug
nut torque. If in doubt about the correct
tightness, have them checked with a torque
wrench by an authorized dealer or at a
service station.
5. After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut
torque with a torque wrench to ensure that
all lug nuts are properly seated against the
wheel.
TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Tire
Service Kit. Small punctures up to 1/4 inch
(6 mm) in the tire tread can be sealed with Tire
Service Kit. Foreign objects (e.g., screws or
nails) should not be removed from the tire. Tire
Service Kit can be used in outside temperatures
down to approximately -4°F (-20°C). This kit will
provide a temporary tire seal, allowing you to
drive your vehicle up to 100 miles (160 km)
with a maximum speed of 50 mph (80 km/h).
Tire Service Kit Storage
The Tire Service Kit is stowed behind the rear
left side trim panel in the rear cargo area.
Tire Service Kit Location
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the
jack, do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until
the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to
follow this warning may result in serious
injury.
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 212
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 213
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Turn the two rear left side trim panel latches
to release the trim panel.
Tire Service Kit
Tire Service Kit And Components And Operation
Tire Service Kit Components
Using The Mode Select Knob And Hoses
Your Tire Service Kit is equipped with the
following symbols to indicate the air or sealant
mode.
Selecting Air Mode
Push in the Mode Select Knob and
turn to this position for air pump
operation only.
Selecting Sealant Mode
Push in the Mode Select Knob and
turn to this position to inject the
Tire Service Kit Sealant and to inflate the tire.
Using The Power Button
Push and release the Power Button
once to turn On the Tire Service Kit.
Push and release the Power Button again to
turn Off the Tire Service Kit.
Using The Deflation Button
Push the Deflation Button to
reduce the air pressure in the tire if
it becomes over-inflated.
1 — Mode Select Knob
2 — Sealant/Air Hose
3 — Hose Accessories
4 — Sealant Bottle
5 — Power Plug
6 — Power Switch
7 — Deflation Button
8 — Pressure Gauge
6
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 213
214 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
(Continued)
(Continued)
Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions
Replace the Tire Service Kit Sealant Bottle
prior to the expiration date (printed at the
lower right hand corner on the bottle label) to
assure optimum operation of the system.
Refer to “Sealant Bottle Replacement” in this
section.
The Sealant Bottle is a one tire application
use and needs to be replaced after each use.
Always replace these components immedi-
ately at your original equipment vehicle
dealer.
When the Tire Service Kit sealant is in a liquid
form, clean water, and a damp cloth will
remove the material from the vehicle or tire
and wheel components. Once the sealant
dries, it can easily be peeled off and properly
discarded.
For optimum performance, make sure the
valve stem on the wheel is free of debris
before connecting the Tire Service Kit.
The Tire Service Kit Sealant is only intended
to seal punctures less than 1/4 inch (6 mm)
diameter in the tread/contact surface of your
vehicle’s tires.
The Tire Service Kit Sealant is not intended to
seal punctures on the tires' side walls.
You can use the Tire Service Kit air pump to
inflate bicycle tires. The kit also comes with
two needles, located in the Accessory
Storage Compartment (on the bottom of the
air pump) for inflating sport balls, rafts, or
similar inflatable items. However, use only
the Air Pump and make sure the Mode Select
Knob is in the Air Mode when inflating such
items to avoid injecting sealant into them.
Do not lift or carry the Tire Service Kit by the
hoses.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of
the vehicle closest to traffic. Pull far enough
off the road to avoid the danger of being hit
when using the Tire Service Kit.
Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the
vehicle under the following circumstances:
If the puncture in the tire tread is
approximately 1/4 inch (6 mm) or
larger.
If the tire has any sidewall damage.
If the tire has any damage from driving
with extremely low tire pressure.
If the tire has any damage from driving
on a flat tire.
If the wheel has any damage.
If you are unsure of the condition of the
tire or the wheel.
Keep Tire Service Kit away from open
flames or heat source.
A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could endanger the
occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the
Tire Service Kit in the place provided.
Failure to follow these warnings can result
in injuries that are serious or fatal to you,
your passengers, and others around you.
WARNING! (Continued)
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 214
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 215
Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit
Whenever You Stop To Use Tire Service Kit:
1. Pull over to a safe location and turn on the
vehicle’s Hazard Warning Flashers.
2. Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with
the deflated tire) is in a position that is near
to the ground. This will allow the Tire Service
Kit Hose to reach the valve stem and keep
the Tire Service Kit flat on the ground. This
will provide the best positioning of the kit
when injecting the sealant into the deflated
tire and running the air pump. Move the
vehicle as necessary to place the valve
stem in this position before proceeding.
3. Place the transmission in PARK and cycle
the ignition in the OFF position.
4. Apply the parking brake.
Setting Up To Use Tire Service Kit:
1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose and then remove
the cap from the fitting at the end of the
hose.
2. Place the Tire Service Kit flat on the ground
next to the deflated tire.
3. Remove the cap from the valve
stem and then screw the fitting at
the end of the Sealant Hose onto
the valve stem.
4. Uncoil the Power Plug and
insert the plug into the vehicle’s
12 Volt power outlet.
NOTE:
Do not remove foreign objects (e.g., screws or
nails) from the tire.
Injecting Tire Service Kit Sealant Into The
Deflated Tire:
1. Always start the vehicle before
turning ON the Tire Service Kit.
2. Ensure the Mode Select Knob
is to the Sealant Mode position.
3. After pushing the Power Button,
the sealant (white fluid) will flow
from the Sealant Bottle through
the Sealant Hose and into the tire.
NOTE:
Sealant may leak out through the puncture in
the tire.
Take care not to allow the contents of Tire
Service Kit to come in contact with hair,
eyes, or clothing. Tire Service Kit sealant is
harmful if inhaled, swallowed, or absorbed
through the skin. It causes skin, eye, and
respiratory irritation. Flush immediately
with plenty of water if there is any contact
with eyes or skin. Change clothing as soon
as possible, if there is any contact with
clothing.
Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains
latex. In case of an allergic reaction or rash,
consult a physician immediately. Keep Tire
Service Kit out of reach of children. If swal-
lowed, rinse mouth immediately with plenty
of water and drink plenty of water. Do not
induce vomiting! Consult a physician imme-
diately.
WARNING! (Continued)
6
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 215
216 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
If the sealant (white fluid) does not flow within
0 – 10 seconds through the Sealant Hose:
1. Push the Power Button to turn Off the Tire
Service Kit. Disconnect the Sealant Hose
from the valve stem. Make sure the valve
stem is free of debris. Reconnect the
Sealant Hose to the valve stem. Check that
the Mode Select Knob is in the Sealant
Mode position and not Air Mode. Push the
Power Button to turn On the Tire Service
Kit.
2. Connect the Power Plug to a different
12 Volt power outlet in your vehicle or
another vehicle, if available. Make sure the
vehicle is running before turning ON the Tire
Service Kit.
3. The Sealant Bottle may be empty due to
previous use. Call for assistance.
If the sealant (white fluid) does flow through the
Sealant Hose:
1. Continue to operate the pump
until sealant is no longer flowing
through hose (typically takes
30 - 70 seconds). As the sealant
flows through the Sealant Hose, the
Pressure Gauge can read as high as 70 psi
(4.8 Bar). The Pressure Gauge will
decrease quickly from approximately
70 psi (4.8 Bar) to the actual tire pressure
when the Sealant Bottle is empty.
2. The pump will start to inject air
into the tire immediately after the
Sealant Bottle is empty. Continue
to operate the pump and inflate
the tire to the cold tire inflation pressure
found on the tire and loading information
label located in the driver-side door
opening. Check the tire pressure by looking
at the Pressure Gauge.
If the tire does not inflate to at least 26 psi
(1.8 Bar) pressure within 15 minutes:
The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt
to drive the vehicle further. Call for
assistance.
If the tire inflates to the recommended pressure
or is at least 26 psi (1.8 Bar) pressure within
15 minutes:
NOTE:
If the tire becomes over-inflated, push the
Deflation Button to reduce the tire pressure to
the recommended inflation pressure before
continuing.
1. Push the Power Button to turn
off the Tire Service Kit.
2. Remove the speed limit label
from the Tire Service Kit and
place sticker on the steering
wheel.
3. Immediately disconnect the Sealant Hose
from the valve stem, reinstall the cap on the
fitting at the end of the hose, and place the
Tire Service Kit in the vehicle storage
location. Proceed to “Drive Vehicle.”
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 216
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 217
Drive Vehicle:
Immediately after injecting sealant
and inflating the tire, drive the vehicle
5 miles (8 km) or 10 minutes to
ensure distribution of the Tire Service
Kit Sealant within the tire. Do not exceed
50 mph (80 km/h).
After Driving:
Pull over to a safe location. Refer to “Whenever
You Stop To Use Tire Service Kit” in this section
before continuing.
1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose, and then remove
the cap from the fitting at the end of the
hose.
2. Place the Tire Service Kit flat on the ground
next to the deflated tire.
3. Remove the cap from the valve
stem, and then screw the fitting at
the end of the Sealant Hose onto
the valve stem.
4. Uncoil the Power Plug and
insert the plug into the vehicle's
12 Volt power outlet.
5. Uncoil the Hose and screw the
fitting at the end of the hose onto
the valve stem.
6. Turn the Mode Select Knob and
turn to the Air Mode position.
7. Check the pressure in the tire
by reading the Pressure Gauge.
If tire pressure is less than 19 psi (1.3 Bar):
The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to
drive the vehicle further. Call for assistance.
If the tire pressure is 19 psi (1.3 Bar) or higher:
1. Push the Power Button to turn
on Tire Service Kit and inflate the
tire to the cold tire inflation
pressure found on the tire and
loading information label located in the
driver-side door opening.
NOTE:
If the tire becomes over-inflated, push the
Deflation Button to reduce the tire pressure to
the recommended inflation pressure before
continuing.
2. Disconnect the Tire Service Kit from the
valve stem, reinstall the cap on the valve
stem and unplug from 12 Volt outlet.
3. Place the Tire Service Kit in its proper
storage area in the vehicle.
4. Have the tire inspected and repaired or
replaced at the earliest opportunity at an
authorized dealer or tire service center.
5. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the
steering wheel after the tire has been
repaired.
WARNING!
The Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat
tire repair. Have the tire inspected and
repaired or replaced after using the Tire
Service Kit. Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h)
until the tire is repaired or replaced. Failure to
follow this warning can result in injuries that
are serious or fatal to you, your passengers,
and others around you. Have the tire checked
as soon as possible at an authorized dealer.
6
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 217
218 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
6. Replace the Sealant Bottle at an authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
NOTE:
When having the tire serviced, advise the
authorized dealer or service center that the tire
has been sealed using the Tire Service Kit.
Sealant Bottle Replacement:
1. Unwrap the power cord.
2. Unwrap the hose.
Unwrap The Hose
3. Remove the bottle cover.
Remove The Bottle Cover
4. Rotate the bottle up beyond vertical to
release.
Rotate The Bottle Up
5. Pull the bottle away from the Compressor.
Remove The Bottle
NOTE:
For sealant bottle installation, follow these
steps reverse order.
Replacement sealant bottles are available at
authorized service centers.
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 218
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 219
(Continued)
JUMP STARTING
If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be
jump started using a set of jumper cables and a
battery in another vehicle or by using a portable
battery booster pack. Jump starting can be
dangerous if done improperly so please follow
the procedures in this section carefully.
NOTE:
When using a portable battery booster pack
follow the manufacturer’s operating
instructions and precautions.
Preparations For Jump Start
The battery in your vehicle is located on the left
side of the engine compartment.
Positive Battery Post
1. Apply the parking brake, shift the
automatic transmission into PARK and
turn the ignition to OFF/LOCK.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all
unnecessary electrical accessories.
3. If using another vehicle to jump start the
battery, park the vehicle within the jumper
cables reach, set the parking brake and
make sure the ignition is in the OFF/LOCK
position.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is
frozen. It could rupture or explode and cause
personal injury.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or
any other booster source with a system
voltage greater than 12 Volts or damage to
the battery, starter motor, alternator or
electrical system may occur.
WARNING!
Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan
whenever the hood is raised. It can start
anytime the ignition switch is ON. You can
be injured by moving fan blades.
Remove any metal jewelry such as rings,
watch bands and bracelets that could
make an inadvertent electrical contact. You
could be seriously injured.
Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can
burn your skin or eyes and generate
hydrogen gas which is flammable and
explosive. Keep open flames or sparks
away from the battery.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as
this could establish a ground connection and
personal injury could result.
WARNING! (Continued)
6
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 219
220 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Jump Starting Procedure
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Connect the positive
(+) end of the jumper
cable to the positive (+)
post of the
discharged vehicle.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+)
jumper cable to the positive (+) post of the
booster battery.
3. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper
cable to the negative (-) post of the booster
battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-)
jumper cable to a good engine ground
(exposed metal part of the discharged
vehicle’s engine) away from the battery and
the fuel injection system.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the
booster battery, let the engine idle for a few
minutes, and then start the engine in the
vehicle with the discharged battery.
6. Once the engine is started, remove the
jumper cables in the reverse sequence.
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative
(-)
end of the
jumper cable from the engine ground of
the vehicle with the discharged battery.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative
(-) jumper cable from the negative (-) post of
the booster battery.
3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the
jumper cable from the positive (+) post of
the booster battery.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive
(+) jumper cable from the positive (+) post
of the vehicle with the discharged battery.
If frequent jump starting is required to start your
vehicle, you should have the battery and
charging system inspected at an authorized
dealer.
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump starting procedure
could result in personal injury or property
damage due to battery explosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could
result in damage to the charging system of
the booster vehicle or the discharged vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the discharged battery.
The resulting electrical spark could cause the
battery to explode and could result in
personal injury. Only use the specific ground
point, do not use any other exposed metal
parts.
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 220
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 221
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
In any of the following situations, you can
reduce the potential for overheating your
engine by taking the appropriate action.
On the highways — slow down.
In city traffic — while stopped, place the trans-
mission in NEUTRAL, but do not increase
engine idle speed.
NOTE:
There are steps that you can take to slow down
an impending overheat condition:
If your Air Conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off.
The A/C system adds heat to the engine
cooling system and turning the A/C off can
help remove this heat.
You can also turn the temperature control to
maximum heat, the mode control to floor and
the blower control to high. This allows the
heater core to act as a supplement to the
radiator and aids in removing heat from the
engine cooling system.
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power
outlets draw power from the vehicle’s battery,
even when not in use (i.e., cellular devices,
etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long enough
without engine operation, the vehicle’s
battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade
battery life and/or prevent the engine from
starting.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If the temperature
gauge reads “H,” pull over and stop the
vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air
conditioner turned off until the pointer drops
back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on the “H” and you hear continuous
chimes, turn the engine off immediately and
call for service.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot
engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from
your radiator. If you see or hear steam coming
from under the hood, do not open the hood
until the radiator has had time to cool. Never
try to open a cooling system pressure cap
when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
6
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 221
222 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE
If a malfunction occurs and the gear selector
cannot be moved out of the PARK position, you
can use the following procedure to temporarily
move the gear selector:
1. Turn the engine off.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
3. Using a small screwdriver or similar tool,
remove the gear selector override access
cover (located near the top right of the gear
selector in the instrument panel).
Gear Selector Override Access Cover
4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the
brake pedal.
5. Insert the screwdriver or similar tool into the
access hole, and push and hold the override
release lever forward.
Access Hole
6. Move the gear selector to the NEUTRAL
position.
7. The vehicle may then be started in
NEUTRAL.
8. Reinstall the gear selector override access
cover.
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 222
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 223
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand, or
snow, it can often be moved using a rocking
motion. Turn the steering wheel right and left to
clear the area around the front wheels. Then,
shift back and forth between DRIVE and
REVERSE while gently pressing the accelerator.
Use the least amount of accelerator pedal
pressure that will maintain the rocking motion,
without spinning the wheels or racing the
engine.
Push the "ESC OFF" switch, to place
the Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
system in "ESC Partial OFF" mode,
before rocking the vehicle. Refer to
“Electronic Brake Control System” in “Safety”
for further information. Once the vehicle has
been freed, push the "ESC OFF" switch again to
restore "ESC ON" mode.
CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may
lead to transmission overheating and failure.
Allow the engine to idle with the transmission
in NEUTRAL for at least one minute after
every five rocking-motion cycles. This will
minimize overheating and reduce the risk of
transmission failure during prolonged efforts
to free a stuck vehicle.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces
generated by excessive wheel speeds may
cause damage, or even failure, of the axle
and tires. A tire could explode and injure
someone. Do not spin your vehicle's wheels
faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer
than 30 seconds continuously without
stopping when you are stuck and do not let
anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter
what the speed.
CAUTION!
When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting
between DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin
the wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h),
or drivetrain damage may result.
Revving the engine or spinning the wheels
too fast may lead to transmission over-
heating and failure. It can also damage the
tires. Do not spin the wheels above 30 mph
(48 km/h) while in gear (no transmission
shifting occurring).
6
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 223
224 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial towing service.
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to
prevent damage to your vehicle. Use only tow
bars and other equipment designed for this
purpose, following equipment manufacturer’s
instructions. Use of safety chains is mandatory.
Attach a tow bar or other towing device to main
structural members of the vehicle, not to
bumpers or associated brackets. State and
local laws regarding vehicles under tow must be
observed.
If you must use the accessories (wipers,
defrosters, etc.) while being towed, the ignition
must be in the ON/RUN mode, not the ACC
mode.
If the key fob is unavailable or the vehicle's
battery is discharged, refer to "Gear Selector
Override" in this section for instructions on
shifting the transmission out of PARK for
towing.
Towing Condition Wheels OFF The Ground ALL MODELS
Flat Tow NONE If transmission is operable:
Transmission in NEUTRAL
25 mph (40 km/h) max speed
15 miles (24 km) max distance
Wheel Lift Or Dolly Tow
Rear
Front OK
Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD
CAUTION!
Do not use sling type equipment when
towing. Vehicle damage may occur.
When securing the vehicle to a flatbed
truck, do not attach to front or rear suspen-
sion components. Damage to your vehicle
may result from improper towing.
Do not push or tow this vehicle with another
vehicle as damage to the bumper fascia
and transmission may result.
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 224
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 225
The manufacturer recommends towing your
vehicle with all four wheels OFF the ground
using a flatbed. If flatbed equipment is not
available, and the transmission is operable, the
vehicle may be flat towed (with all four wheels
ON the ground) under the following conditions:
The transmission must be in NEUTRAL.
The towing distance must not exceed
15 miles (24 km).
The towing speed must not exceed 25 mph
(40 km/h).
If the transmission is not operable, or the
vehicle must be towed faster than 25 mph
(40 km/h) or farther than 15 miles (24 km), it
must be towed with the front wheels OFF the
ground (using a flatbed truck, or wheel lift
equipment with the front wheels raised).
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS)
This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced
Accident Response System.
Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in
“Safety” for further information on the
Enhanced Accident Response System (EARS)
function.
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data
Recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is
to record data that will assist in understanding
how a vehicle’s systems performed under
certain crash or near crash-like situations, such
as an air bag deployment or hitting a road
obstacle.
Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in
“Safety” for further information on the Event
Data Recorder (EDR).
CAUTION!
Towing faster than 25 mph (40 km/h) or
farther than 15 miles (24 km) with front
wheels on the ground can cause severe
transmission damage. Damage from
improper towing is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
6
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 225
226
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING
This vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil
change indicator system. The oil change
indicator system will remind you that it is time to
take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil
change indicator message will illuminate. This
means that service is required for your vehicle.
Operating conditions such as frequent
short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or cold
ambient temperatures, and E85 fuel usage will
influence when the “Oil Change Required”
message is displayed. Severe Operating
Conditions can cause the change oil message
to illuminate as early as 3,500 miles
(5,600 km) since last reset. Have your vehicle
serviced as soon as possible, within the next
500 miles (805 km).
An authorized dealer will reset the oil change
indicator message after completing the
scheduled oil change. If a scheduled oil change
is performed by someone other than an
authorized dealer, the message can be reset by
referring to the steps described under
“Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
NOTE:
Under no circumstances should oil change
intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km),
12 months or 350 hours of engine run time,
whichever comes first. The 350 hours of engine
run or idle time is generally only a concern for
fleet customers.
Severe Duty All Models
Change engine oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) if
the vehicle is operated in a dusty and off road
environment or is operated predominately at
idle or only very low engine RPM. This type of
vehicle use is considered Severe Duty.
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
Check engine oil level.
Check windshield washer fluid level.
Check tire pressure and look for unusual
wear or damage. Rotate tires at the first sign
of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the
oil indicator system turns on.
Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir,
brake master cylinder, and power steering
and fill as needed.
Check function of all interior and exterior
lights.
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 226
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 227
Maintenance Plan
Required Maintenance Intervals.
Refer to the maintenance schedules on the following page for the required maintenance intervals.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System:
Change oil and filter.
Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on.
Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required.
Inspect the CV/Universal joints.
Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses and park brake.
Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses.
Inspect exhaust system.
Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or off-road conditions, replace engine air cleaner filter if necessary.
7
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 227
228 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Mileage or time passed (whichever
comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV/Universal joints. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Inspect front suspension, tie rod ends,
boot seals, and replace if necessary.
X X X X X X X
Inspect the brake linings, replace as
necessary.
X X X X X X X
Additional Maintenance
Replace engine air filter. X X X X X
Replace cabin/air conditioning filter. X X X X X X X
Replace spark plugs.
1
X
Flush and replace the engine coolant
at 10 years or 150,000 miles
(240,000 km) whichever comes first.
X X
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 228
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 229
Change automatic transmission fluid
and filter if using your vehicle for any of
the following: police, taxi, fleet, or
frequent trailer towing.
X X
Change automatic transmission fluid
and filter.
X
Inspect and replace PCV valve if
necessary.
X
1. The spark plug change interval is mileage based only, yearly intervals do not apply.
Mileage or time passed (whichever
comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
7
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 229
230 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or
around a motor vehicle. Do only service
work for which you have the knowledge and
the right equipment. If you have any doubt
about your ability to perform a service job,
take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
Failure to properly inspect and maintain
your vehicle could result in a component
malfunction and effect vehicle handling
and performance. This could cause an
accident.
WARNING! (Continued)
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 230
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 231
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
Engine Compartment — 3.6L
1 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter Cover 6 — Battery
2 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir Cap 7 — Totally Integrated Power Module (Fuses)
3 — Coolant Pressure Cap 8 — Engine Coolant Reservoir Cap
4 — Engine Oil Fill 9 — Engine Oil Dipstick
5 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Cap 10 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
7
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 231
232 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Checking Oil Level
To ensure proper engine lubrication, the engine
oil must be maintained at the correct level.
Check the oil level at regular intervals, such as
every fuel stop. The best time to check the
engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully
warmed engine is shut off.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level
ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level
readings. Maintain the oil level within the SAFE
crosshatch marking on the dipstick. Adding one
quart of oil when the reading is at the bottom of
the mark will result in reading the top of the
mark on these engines.
Adding Washer Fluid
The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers
and the rear window washer is shared. It is
located in the engine compartment and should
be checked at regular intervals.
Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent
(not radiator antifreeze) and operate the system
for a few seconds to flush out any residual
water.
The washer fluid reservoir will hold a full gallon
of fluid when the Low Washer Fluid Light
illuminates.
After the engine has warmed, operate the
defroster for a few minutes to reduce the
possibility of smearing or freezing the fluid on
the cold windshield. Mopar All Weather
Windshield Washer Solution or equivalent, used
with water as directed on the container, aids
cleaning action, reduces the freezing point to
avoid line clogging, and is not harmful to paint
or trim.
Maintenance-Free Battery
Your vehicle is equipped with a
maintenance-free battery. You will never have
to add water, nor is periodic maintenance
required.
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil
aeration, or loss of oil pressure. This could
damage your engine.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer
solvents are flammable. They could ignite and
burn you. Care must be exercised when filling
or working around the washer solution.
WARNING!
Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and
can burn or even blind you. Do not allow
battery fluid to contact your eyes, skin, or
clothing. Do not lean over a battery when
attaching clamps. If acid splashes in eyes
or on skin, flush the area immediately with
large amounts of water. Refer to “Jump
Starting Procedure” in “In Case Of Emer-
gency” for further information.
Battery gas is flammable and explosive.
Keep flame or sparks away from the
battery. Do not use a booster battery or any
other booster source with an output greater
than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable clamps to
touch each other.
Battery posts, terminals, and related acces-
sories contain lead and lead compounds.
Wash hands after handling.
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 232
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 233
Pressure Washing
DEALER SERVICE
An authorized dealer has the qualified service
personnel, special tools, and equipment to
perform all service operations in an expert
manner. Service Manuals are available which
include detailed service information for your
vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
attempting any procedure yourself.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems may void your warranty and could
result in civil penalties being assessed against
you.
Engine Oil
Change Engine Oil
The oil change indicator system will remind you
that it is time to take your vehicle in for
scheduled maintenance. Refer to the
“Maintenance Plan” for further information.
NOTE:
Under no circumstances should oil change
intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km),
12 months or 350 hours of engine run time,
whichever comes first. The 350 hours of engine
run or idle time is generally only a concern for
fleet customers.
Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection
under all types of operating conditions, the
manufacturer only recommends engine oils
that are API Certified and meet the
requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS-6395.
CAUTION!
It is essential when replacing the cables on
the battery that the positive cable is
attached to the positive post and the nega-
tive cable is attached to the negative post.
Battery posts are marked positive (+) and
negative (-) and are identified on the battery
case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
terminal posts and free of corrosion.
If a “fast charger” is used while the battery
is in the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle
battery cables before connecting the
charger to the battery. Do not use a “fast
charger” to provide starting voltage.
CAUTION!
Cleaning the engine compartment with a high
pressure washer is not recommended.
Precautions have been taken to safeguard all
parts and connections however, the
pressures generated by these machines is
such that complete protection against water
ingress cannot be guaranteed.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or
around a motor vehicle. Only do service work
for which you have the knowledge and the
proper equipment. If you have any doubt
about your ability to perform a service job,
take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
7
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 233
234 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
Identification Symbol
This symbol means that the oil has
been certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API). The
manufacturer only recommends API
Certified engine oils.
This symbol certifies 0W-20, 5W-20, 0W-30,
5W-30 and 10W-30 engine oils.
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) — 3.6L
Engine
Mopar SAE 5W-20 engine oil approved to FCA
Material Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil,
Shell Helix or equivalent is recommended for all
operating temperatures. This engine oil
improves low temperature starting and vehicle
fuel economy.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the
recommended engine oil viscosity for your
engine. For information on engine oil filler cap
location, refer to the “Engine Compartment”
illustration in this section.
NOTE:
Mopar SAE 5W-30 engine oil approved to FCA
Material Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil,
Shell Helix or equivalent may be used when SAE
5W-20 engine oil meeting MS-6395 is not
available.
Lubricants which do not have both the engine
oil certification mark and the correct SAE
viscosity grade number should not be used.
Synthetic Engine Oils
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the
recommended oil quality requirements are met,
and the recommended maintenance intervals
for oil and filter changes are followed.
Synthetic engine oils which do not have both the
engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE
viscosity grade number should not be used.
Materials Added To Engine Oil
The manufacturer strongly recommends
against the addition of any additives (other than
leak detection dyes) to the engine oil. Engine oil
is an engineered product and its performance
may be impaired by supplemental additives.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used
engine oil and oil filters from your vehicle. Used
oil and oil filters, indiscriminately discarded, can
present a problem to the environment. Contact
an authorized dealer, service station or govern-
mental agency for advice on how and where
used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in
your area.
Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a
new filter at every engine oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
This manufacturer's engines have a full-flow
type disposable oil filter. Use a filter of this type
for replacement. The quality of replacement
filters varies considerably. Only high quality
filters should be used to assure most efficient
service. Mopar engine oil filters are high quality
oil filters and are recommended.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil
as the chemicals can damage your engine.
Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 234
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 235
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” in this section
for the proper maintenance intervals.
NOTE:
Be sure to follow the “Severe Duty Conditions”
maintenance interval if applicable.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner
filters varies considerably. Only high quality
filters should be used to ensure most efficient
service. Mopar engine air cleaner filters are a
high quality filter and are recommended.
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air
conditioner should be checked and serviced by
an authorized dealer at the start of each warm
season. This service should include cleaning of
the condenser fins and a performance test.
Drive belt tension should also be checked at
this time.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R-134a
— If Equipped
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a
hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) that is an
ozone-friendly substance. The manufacturer
recommends that air conditioning service be
performed by an authorized dealer or other
service facilities using recovery and recycling
equipment.
NOTE:
Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
PAG compressor oil and refrigerants.
A/C Air Filter
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” in the
“Scheduled Servicing” chapter for the proper
maintenance intervals.
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses,
etc.) can provide a measure of protection in
the case of engine backfire. Do not remove
the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses,
etc.) unless such removal is necessary for
repair or maintenance. Make sure that no
one is near the engine compartment before
starting the vehicle with the air induction
system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) removed.
Failure to do so can result in serious personal
injury.
WARNING!
Use only refrigerants and compressor lubri-
cants approved by the manufacturer for
your air conditioning system. Some unap-
proved refrigerants are flammable and can
explode, injuring you. Other unapproved
refrigerants or lubricants can cause the
system to fail, requiring costly repairs.
Refer to Warranty Information Book, for
further warranty information.
The air conditioning system contains refrig-
erant under high pressure. To avoid risk of
personal injury or damage to the system,
adding refrigerant or any repair requiring
lines to be disconnected should be done by
an experienced technician.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air
conditioning system as the chemicals can
damage your air conditioning components.
Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
7
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 235
236 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
The A/C air filter is located in the fresh air inlet
behind the glove compartment. Perform the
following procedure to replace the filter:
1. Open the glove compartment and remove
all contents.
2. Push in on the sides of the glove
compartment, remove tether and lower the
door.
3. Pivot the glove compartment downward.
4. Disengage the two retaining tabs that
secure the filter cover to the HVAC housing,
and remove the cover.
A/C Air Filter Replacement
5. Remove the A/C air filter by pulling it
straight out of the housing.
6. Install the A/C air filter with the arrow on the
filter pointing toward the floor. When
installing the filter cover, make sure the
retaining tabs fully engage the cover.
7. Rotate the glove compartment door back
into position and reinstall tether.
Accessory Drive Belt Inspection
WARNING!
Do not remove the cabin air filter while the
vehicle is running, or while the ignition is in
the ACC or ON/RUN mode. With the cabin air
filter removed and the blower operating, the
blower can contact hands and may propel dirt
and debris into your eyes, resulting in
personal injury.
CAUTION!
The cabin air filter is identified with an arrow
to indicate airflow direction through the filter.
Failure to properly install the filter will result
in the need to replace it more often.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to inspect an accessory
drive belt with vehicle running.
When working near the radiator cooling fan,
disconnect the fan motor lead. The fan is
temperature controlled and can start at any
time regardless of ignition mode. You could
be injured by the moving fan blades.
You can be badly injured working on or
around a motor vehicle. Only do service
work for which you have the knowledge and
the proper equipment. If you have any
doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a compe-
tent mechanic.
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 236
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 237
When inspecting accessory drive belts, small
cracks that run across ribbed surface of belt
from rib to rib, are considered normal. These
are not a reason to replace belt. However,
cracks running along a rib (not across) are not
normal. Any belt with cracks running along a rib
must be replaced. Also have the belt replaced if
it has excessive wear, frayed cords or severe
glazing.
Accessory Belt (Serpentine Belt)
Conditions that would require replacement:
Rib chunking (one or more ribs has sepa-
rated from belt body)
Rib or belt wear
Longitudinal belt cracking (cracks between
two ribs)
Belt slips
“Groove jumping" (belt does not maintain
correct position on pulley)
Belt broken (note: identify and correct
problem before new belt is installed)
Noise (objectionable squeal, squeak, or
rumble is heard or felt while drive belt is in
operation)
Some conditions can be caused by a faulty
component such as a belt pulley. Belt pulleys
should be carefully inspected for damage and
proper alignment.
Belt replacement on some models requires the
use of special tools, we recommend having your
vehicle serviced at an authorized dealer.
Body Lubrication
Locks and all body pivot points, including such
items as seat tracks, door hinge pivot points
and rollers, liftgate, tailgate, decklid, sliding
doors and hood hinges, should be lubricated
periodically with a lithium based grease, such
as Mopar Spray White Lube to ensure quiet,
easy operation and to protect against rust and
wear. Prior to the application of any lubricant,
the parts concerned should be wiped clean to
remove dust and grit; after lubricating, excess
oil and grease should be removed. Particular
attention should also be given to hood latching
components to ensure proper function. When
performing other underhood services, the hood
latch, release mechanism and safety catch
should be cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated
twice a year, preferably in the Autumn and
Spring. Apply a small amount of a high quality
lubricant, such as Mopar Lock Cylinder
Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
7
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 237
238 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
(Continued)
Windshield Wiper Blades
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and
the windshield periodically with a sponge or soft
cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will
remove accumulations of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long
periods may cause deterioration of the wiper
blades. Always use washer fluid when using the
wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry
windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or
ice from the windshield. Keep the blade rubber
out of contact with petroleum products such as
engine oil, gasoline, etc.
NOTE:
Life expectancy of wiper blades varies
depending on geographical area and frequency
of use. Poor performance of blades may be
present with chattering, marks, water lines or
wet spots. If any of these conditions are
present, clean the wiper blades or replace as
necessary.
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide
entry into the vehicle body is a properly
maintained engine exhaust system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the
exhaust system; or if the exhaust fumes can be
detected inside the vehicle; or when the
underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have an authorized technician inspect the
complete exhaust system and adjacent body
areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or
mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose
connections could permit exhaust fumes to
seep into the passenger compartment. In
addition, have the exhaust system inspected
each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or
oil change. Replace as required.
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They
contain carbon monoxide (CO), which is
colorless and odorless. Breathing it can
make you unconscious and can eventually
poison you. To avoid breathing CO, refer to
“Safety Tips” in “Safety” for further
information.
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you
park over materials that can burn. Such
materials might be grass or leaves coming
into contact with your exhaust system. Do
not park or operate your vehicle in areas
where your exhaust system can contact
anything that can burn.
CAUTION!
The catalytic converter requires the use of
unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will
destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as
an emissions control device and may seri-
ously reduce engine performance and
cause serious damage to the engine.
WARNING! (Continued)
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 238
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 239
Under normal operating conditions, the
catalytic converter will not require
maintenance. However, it is important to keep
the engine properly tuned to ensure proper
catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
damage.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being
assessed against you.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunc-
tioning engine operation, a scorching odor may
suggest severe and abnormal catalyst
overheating. If this occurs, stop the vehicle, turn
off the engine and allow it to cool. Service,
including a tune-up to manufacturer's specifi-
cations, should be obtained immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter
damage:
Do not interrupt the ignition when the trans-
mission is in gear and the vehicle is in
motion.
Do not try to start the vehicle by pushing or
towing the vehicle.
Do not idle the engine with any ignition
components disconnected or removed, such
as when diagnostic testing, or for prolonged
periods during very rough idle or malfunc-
tioning operating conditions.
Cooling System
Damage to the catalytic converter can
result if your vehicle is not kept in proper
operating condition. In the event of engine
malfunction, particularly involving engine
misfire or other apparent loss of perfor-
mance, have your vehicle serviced
promptly. Continued operation of your
vehicle with a severe malfunction could
cause the converter to overheat, resulting
in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
CAUTION! (Continued)
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot
engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from
your radiator. If you see or hear steam
coming from under the hood, do not open
the hood until the radiator has had time to
cool. Never open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is
hot.
Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry
away from the radiator cooling fan when
the hood is raised. The fan starts automati-
cally and may start at any time, whether the
engine is running or not.
When working near the radiator cooling fan,
disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the
ignition to the OFF mode. The fan is
temperature controlled and can start at any
time the ignition is in the ON mode.
7
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 239
240 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Engine Coolant Checks
Check the engine coolant (antifreeze)
protection every 12 months (before the onset of
freezing weather, where applicable). If the
engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty, the system
should be drained, flushed, and refilled with
fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) by
an authorized dealer. Check the front of the
A/C condenser for any accumulation of bugs,
leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently spraying
water from a garden hose vertically down the
face of the condenser.
Check the engine cooling system hoses for
brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, and
tightness of the connection at the coolant
recovery bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire
system for leaks. DO NOT REMOVE THE
COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE COOLING
SYSTEM IS HOT.
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill
NOTE:
Some vehicles require special tools to add
coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems
properly could lead to severe internal engine
damage. If any coolant is needed to be added to
the system please contact an authorized
dealer.
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or
contains visible sediment, have an authorized
dealer clean and flush with OAT coolant
(antifreeze) (conforming to MS.90032).
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” in this section
for the proper maintenance intervals.
Selection Of Coolant
Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical
Specifications” for further information.
NOTE:
Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other
than specified Organic Additive Technology
(OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result
in engine damage and may decrease corro-
sion protection. Organic Additive Technology
(OAT) engine coolant is different and should
not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive
Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (anti-
freeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant
(antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine coolant
(antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling
system in an emergency, the cooling system
will need to be drained, flushed, and refilled
with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon
as possible.
Do not use water alone or alcohol-based
engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not
use additional rust inhibitors or antirust prod-
ucts, as they may not be compatible with the
radiator engine coolant and may plug the
radiator.
This vehicle has not been designed for use
with propylene glycol-based engine coolant
(antifreeze). Use of propylene glycolbased
engine coolant (antifreeze) is not
recommended.
Some vehicles require special tools to add
coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems
properly could lead to severe internal engine
damage. If any coolant is needed to be added
to the system please contact an authorized
dealer.
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved
engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to
MS.90032) that allows extended maintenance
intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can
be used up to ten years or 150,000 miles
(240,000 km) before replacement.
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 240
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 241
To prevent reducing this extended maintenance
period, it is important that you use the same
engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to
MS.90032) throughout the life of your vehicle.
Please review these recommendations for
using Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine
coolant (antifreeze) that meets the
requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS.90032. When adding engine coolant
(antifreeze):
We recommend using Mopar
Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile
(240,000 km) Formula OAT (Organic Additive
Technology) that meets the requirements of
FCA Material Standard MS.90032.
Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine
coolant that meets the requirements of FCA
Material Standard MS.90032 and distilled
water. Use higher concentrations (not to
exceed 70%) if temperatures below −34°F
(−37°C) are anticipated. Please contact an
authorized dealer for assistance.
Use only high purity water such as distilled or
deionized water when mixing the water/
engine coolant (antifreeze) solution. The use
of lower quality water will reduce the amount
of corrosion protection in the engine cooling
system.
NOTE:
It is the owner's responsibility to maintain the
proper level of protection against freezing
according to the temperatures occurring in
the area where the vehicle is operated.
Some vehicles require special tools to add
coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems
properly could lead to severe internal engine
damage. If any coolant is needed to be added
to the system, please contact a local autho-
rized dealer.
Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is
not recommended and can result in cooling
system damage. If HOAT and OAT coolant are
mixed in an emergency, have a authorized
dealer drain, flush, and refill with OAT coolant
(conforming to MS.90032) as soon as
possible.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss
of engine coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure
that engine coolant (antifreeze) will return to
the radiator from the coolant expansion bottle/
recovery tank if so equipped.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if
there is any accumulation of foreign material on
the sealing surfaces.
WARNING!
Do not open hot engine cooling system.
Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when
the engine is overheated. Do not loosen or
remove the cap to cool an overheated
engine. Heat causes pressure to build up in
the cooling system. To prevent scalding or
injury, do not remove the pressure cap
while the system is hot or under pressure.
Do not use a pressure cap other than the
one specified for your vehicle. Personal
injury or engine damage may result.
7
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 241
242 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Disposal Of Used Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based coolant (antifreeze)
is a regulated substance requiring proper
disposal. Check with your local authorities to
determine the disposal rules for your
community. To prevent ingestion by animals or
children, do not store ethylene glycol-based
coolant in open containers or allow it to remain
in puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child
or pet, seek emergency assistance
immediately. Clean up any ground spills
immediately.
Points To Remember
NOTE:
When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor
coming from the front of the engine
compartment. This is normally a result of
moisture from rain, snow, or high humidity
accumulating on the radiator and being
vaporized when the thermostat opens, allowing
hot engine coolant (antifreeze) to enter the
radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment
shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks,
the vehicle may be safely driven. The vapor will
soon dissipate.
Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator
and in the coolant expansion bottle. If engine
coolant (antifreeze) needs to be added, the
contents of the coolant expansion bottle
must also be protected against freezing.
If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) addi-
tions are required, the cooling system should
be pressure tested for leaks.
Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concen-
tration at a minimum of 50% OAT coolant
(conforming to MS.90032) and distilled
water for proper corrosion protection of your
engine which contains aluminum
components.
Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle
overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your
vehicle is equipped with air conditioning,
keep the front of the condenser clean.
Do not change the thermostat for Summer or
Winter operation. If replacement is ever
necessary, install ONLY the correct type ther-
mostat. Other designs may result in unsatis-
factory engine coolant (antifreeze)
performance, poor gas mileage, and
increased emissions.
Brake System
In order to ensure brake system performance,
all brake system components should be
inspected periodically. Refer to the
“Maintenance Plan” in this section for the
proper maintenance intervals.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure
and possibly a collision. Driving with your foot
resting or riding on the brake pedal can result
in abnormally high brake temperatures,
excessive lining wear, and possible brake
damage. You would not have your full braking
capacity in an emergency.
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 242
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 243
(Continued)
Master Cylinder — Brake Fluid Level Check
The fluid level in the master cylinder should be
checked when performing underhood services,
or immediately if the “Brake System Warning
Light” indicates system failure.
Clean the top of the master cylinder area before
removing the cap. Add fluid to bring the level up
to the top of the “FULL” mark on the side of the
master cylinder reservoir.
Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because
it may cause leaking in the system.
Add enough fluid to bring the level up to the
requirements described on the brake fluid
reservoir. With disc brakes, fluid level can be
expected to fall as the brake pads wear.
However, low fluid level may be caused by a
leak and a checkup may be needed.
Use only manufacturer's recommended brake
fluid. Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in
“Technical Specifications” for further
information.
Automatic Transmission
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important to use the proper transmission
fluid to ensure optimum transmission
performance and life. Use only the
manufacturer's specified transmission fluid.
Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical
Specifications” for fluid specifications. It is
important to maintain the transmission fluid at
the correct level using the recommended fluid.
No chemical flushes should be used in any
transmission; only the approved lubricant
should be used.
WARNING!
Use only manufacturer's recommended
brake fluid. Refer to “Fluids And Lubri-
cants” in “Technical Specifications” for
further information. Using the wrong type of
brake fluid can severely damage your brake
system and/or impair its performance. The
proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle is
also identified on the original factory
installed hydraulic master cylinder
reservoir.
To avoid contamination from foreign matter
or moisture, use only new brake fluid or
fluid that has been in a tightly closed
container. Keep the master cylinder reser-
voir cap secured at all times. Brake fluid in
a open container absorbs moisture from
the air resulting in a lower boiling point. This
may cause it to boil unexpectedly during
hard or prolonged braking, resulting in
sudden brake failure. This could result in a
collision.
Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can
result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine
parts, causing the brake fluid to catch fire.
Brake fluid can also damage painted and
vinyl surfaces, care should be taken to
avoid its contact with these surfaces.
Do not allow petroleum based fluid to
contaminate the brake fluid. Brake seal
components could be damaged, causing
partial or complete brake failure. This could
result in a collision.
WARNING! (Continued)
7
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 243
244 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Special Additives
The manufacturer strongly recommends
against using any special additives in the
transmission. Automatic Transmission Fluid
(ATF) is an engineered product and its
performance may be impaired by supplemental
additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid
additives to the transmission. The only
exception to this policy is the use of special dyes
for diagnosing fluid leaks. Avoid using
transmission sealers as they may adversely
affect seals.
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does
not require adjustment under normal operating
conditions. Routine fluid level checks are not
required, therefore the transmission fill tube is
capped and no dipstick is provided. An
authorized dealer can check your transmission
fluid level using a special service dipstick. If you
notice fluid leakage or transmission
malfunction, visit an authorized dealer
immediately to have the transmission fluid level
checked. Operating the vehicle with an
improper fluid level can cause severe
transmission damage.
Fluid And Filter Changes
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” in this section
for the proper maintenance intervals.
In addition, change the fluid and filter if the fluid
becomes contaminated (with water, etc.), or if
the transmission is disassembled for any
reason.
RAISING THE VEHICLE
In the case where it is necessary to raise the
vehicle, go to an authorized dealer or service
station.
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the
manufacturer’s recommended fluid may
cause deterioration in transmission shift
quality and/or torque converter shudder, and
will require more frequent fluid and filter
changes. Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in
“Technical Specifications” for fluid
specifications.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your
transmission as the chemicals can damage
your transmission components. Such damage
is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit an
authorized dealer immediately. Severe
transmission damage may occur. An
authorized dealer has the proper tools to
adjust the fluid level accurately.
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 244
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 245
TIRES
Tire Safety Information
Tire safety information will cover aspects of the
following information: Tire Markings, Tire Identi-
fication Numbers, Tire Terminology and
Definitions, Tire Pressures, and Tire Loading.
Tire Markings
Tire Markings
NOTE:
P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on
US design standards. P-Metric tires have the
letter “P” molded into the sidewall preceding
the size designation.
Example: P215/65R15 95H.
European — Metric tire sizing is based on
European design standards. Tires designed
to this standard have the tire size molded
into the sidewall beginning with the section
width. The letter "P" is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based
on US design standards. The size designation
for LT-Metric tires is the same as for P-Metric
tires except for the letters “LT” that are
molded into the sidewall preceding the size
designation.
Example: LT235/85R16.
Temporary spare tires are designed for
temporary emergency use only. Temporary
high pressure compact spare tires have the
letter “T” or “S” molded into the sidewall
preceding the size designation.
Example: T145/80D18 103M.
High flotation tire sizing is based on US
design standards and it begins with the tire
diameter molded into the sidewall.
Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
1 — US DOT Safety Standards Code
(TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description
4 — Maximum Load
5 — Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Traction and Tempera-
ture Grades
7
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 245
246 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on US design standards, or
"....blank...." = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on US design standards, or
T or S = Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
"R" means radial construction, or
"D" means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 246
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 247
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire; however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with white sidewalls will have the full TIN,
including the date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the
vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire.
H = Speed Symbol
A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions
The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle
loading, road conditions, and posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:
XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
LL = Light load tire or
C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
EXAMPLE:
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the US Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
7
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 247
248 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Terminology And Definitions
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
01 means the year 2001
Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example:
031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
Term Definition
B-Pillar The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door.
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been
driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a
minimum of three hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI
(pounds per square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
Maximum Inflation Pressure
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure
for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Vehicle manufacturer's recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire
placard.
Tire Placard
A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity,
the original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
EXAMPLE:
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 248
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 249
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
NOTE:
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed
on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of
the driver's side door.
Check the inflation pressure of each tire,
including the spare tire (if equipped), at least
monthly and inflate to the recommended
pressure for your vehicle.
Example Tire Placard Location (Door)
Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar)
Tire And Loading Information Placard
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information
about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in
the vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front,
rear, and spare tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not
exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on
your vehicle. You will not exceed the tire's load
carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading
conditions, tire size, and cold tire inflation
pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
Information placard in “Vehicle Loading” in the
“Starting And Operating” section of this manual.
NOTE:
Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front
and rear axles must not be exceeded.
7
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 249
250 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
For further information on GAWRs, vehicle
loading, and trailer towing, refer to “Vehicle
Loading” in the “Starting And Operating”
section of this manual.
To determine the maximum loading conditions
of your vehicle, locate the statement “The
combined weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on the
Tire and Loading Information placard. The
combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage
and trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should
never exceed the weight referenced here.
Steps For Determining Correct Load
Limit—
(1) Locate the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should
never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your
vehicle's placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will be
riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the
driver and passengers from XXX kg or
XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and luggage
load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will
be five 150 lb passengers in your
vehicle, the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.
(1400-750 (5x150) = 650 lbs.)
(5) Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on the
vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and luggage
load capacity calculated in Step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,
load from your trailer will be transferred
to your vehicle. Consult this manual to
determine how this reduces the
available cargo and luggage load
capacity of your vehicle.
Metric Example For Load Limit
For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg
and there will be five 68 kg passengers in your
vehicle, the amount of available cargo and
luggage load capacity is 295 kg (635-340
(5x68) = 295 kg) as shown in step 4.
NOTE:
If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load
from your trailer will be transferred to your
vehicle. The following table shows examples
on how to calculate total load, cargo/
luggage, and towing capacities of your
vehicle with varying seating configurations
and number and size of occupants. This table
is for illustration purposes only and may not
be accurate for the seating and load carry
capacity of your vehicle.
For the following example, the combined
weight of occupants and cargo should never
exceed 865 lbs (392 kg).
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 250
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 251
7
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 251
252 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tires — General Information
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the
safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle.
Four primary areas are affected by improper tire
pressure:
Safety
Fuel Economy
Tread Wear
Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability
Safety Both underinflation and overinflation affect the
stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling
of sluggish response or over responsiveness in
the steering.
NOTE:
Unequal tire pressures from side to side may
cause erratic and unpredictable steering
response.
Unequal tire pressure from side to side may
cause the vehicle to drift left or right.
Fuel Economy
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling
resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption.
Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause
abnormal wear patterns and reduced tread life,
resulting in the need for earlier tire
replacement.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a
comfortable ride. Overinflation produces a
jarring and uncomfortable ride.
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous.
Overloading can cause tire failure, affect
vehicle handling, and increase your stopping
distance. Use tires of the recommended load
capacity for your vehicle. Never overload
them.
WARNING!
Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and
can cause collisions.
Underinflation increases tire flexing and
can result in overheating and tire failure.
Overinflation reduces a tire's ability to
cushion shock. Objects on the road and
chuckholes can cause damage that result
in tire failure.
Overinflated or underinflated tires can
affect vehicle handling and can fail
suddenly, resulting in loss of vehicle
control.
Unequal tire pressures can cause steering
problems. You could lose control of your
vehicle.
Unequal tire pressures from one side of the
vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle
to drift to the right or left.
Always drive with each tire inflated to the
recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 252
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 253
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed
on the driver's side B-Pillar or rear edge of the
driver's side door.
At least once a month:
Check and adjust tire pressure with a good
quality pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not
make a visual judgement when determining
proper inflation. Tires may look properly
inflated even when they are under-inflated.
Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible
damage.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are
always “cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire
inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure
after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km)
after sitting for a minimum of three hours. The
cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the
maximum inflation pressure molded into the
tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a
wide range of outdoor temperatures, as tire
pressures vary with temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi
(7 kPa) per 12°F (7°C) of air temperature
change. Keep this in mind when checking tire
pressure inside a garage, especially in the
Winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C)
and the outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then
the cold tire inflation pressure should be
increased by 3 psi (21 kPa), which equals 1 psi
(7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this outside
temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi
(13 to 40 kPa) during operation. DO NOT reduce
this normal pressure build up or your tire
pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe
speeds and within posted speed limits. Where
speed limits or conditions are such that the
vehicle can be driven at high speeds,
maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is
very important. Increased tire pressure and
reduced vehicle loading may be required for
high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to an
authorized tire dealer or original equipment
vehicle dealer for recommended safe operating
speeds, loading and cold tire inflation
pressures.
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the
valve stem, which could damage the valve
stem.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under
maximum load is dangerous. The added
strain on your tires could cause them to fail.
You could have a serious collision. Do not
drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum
capacity at continuous speeds above 75 mph
(120 km/h).
7
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 253
254 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Radial Ply Tires
Tire Repair
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be
repaired if it meets the following criteria:
The tire has not been driven on when flat.
The damage is only on the tread section of
your tire (sidewall damage is not repairable).
The puncture is no greater than a ¼ of an
inch (6 mm).
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs
and additional information.
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that
have experienced a loss of pressure should be
replaced immediately with another Run Flat tire
of identical size and service description (Load
Index and Speed Symbol). Replace the tire
pressure sensor as well as it is not designed to
be reused.
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive
50 miles (80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a
rapid loss of inflation pressure. This rapid loss
of inflation is referred to as the Run Flat mode.
A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire inflation
pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a
Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it has
limited driving capabilities and needs to be
replaced immediately. A Run Flat tire is not
repairable. When a run flat tire is changed after
driving with underinflated tire condition, please
replace the TPM sensor as it is not designed to
be reused when driven under run flat mode
14 psi (96 kPa) condition.
NOTE:
TPM Sensor must be replaced after driving the
vehicle on a flat tire condition.
It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded
at full capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in
the run flat mode.
See the tire pressure monitoring section for
more information.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice
conditions, do not spin your vehicle's wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than
30 seconds continuously without stopping.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “In Case Of
Emergency” for further information.
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of
tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to
handle poorly. The instability could cause a
collision. Always use radial ply tires in sets of
four. Never combine them with other types of
tires.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces
generated by excessive wheel speeds may
cause tire damage or failure. A tire could
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your
vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph
(48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds
continuously when you are stuck, and do not
let anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter
what the speed.
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 254
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 255
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original
equipment tires to help you in determining
when your tires should be replaced.
Tire Tread
These indicators are molded into the bottom of
the tread grooves. They will appear as bands
when the tread depth becomes a 1/16 of an
inch (1.6 mm). When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the tire should be
replaced.
Refer to “Replacement Tires” in this section for
further information.
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon
varying factors including, but not limited to:
Driving style.
Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation
pressures can cause uneven wear patterns
to develop across the tire tread. These
abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life,
resulting in the need for earlier tire replace-
ment.
Distance driven.
Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of
V or higher, and Summer tires typically have
a reduced tread life. Rotation of these tires
per the vehicle scheduled maintenance is
highly recommended.
NOTE:
Wheel valve stem must be replaced as well
when installing new tires due to wear and tear
in existing tires.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with
as little exposure to light as possible. Protect
tires from contact with oil, grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance
of many characteristics. They should be
inspected regularly for wear and correct cold
tire inflation pressures. The manufacturer
strongly recommends that you use tires
equivalent to the originals in size, quality and
performance when replacement is needed.
Refer to the paragraph on “Tread Wear
Indicators” in this section. Refer to the Tire and
Loading Information placard or the Vehicle
Certification Label for the size designation of
your tire. The Load Index and Speed Symbol for
your tire will be found on the original equipment
tire sidewall.
See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the
“Tire Safety Information” section of this manual
for more information relating to the Load Index
and Speed Symbol of a tire.
1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced
after six years, regardless of the remaining
tread. Failure to follow this warning can result
in sudden tire failure. You could lose control
and have a collision resulting in serious injury
or death.
7
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 255
256 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
It is recommended to replace the two front tires
or two rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire
can seriously affect your vehicle’s handling. If
you ever replace a wheel, make sure that the
wheel’s specifications match those of the
original wheels.
It is recommended you contact an authorized
tire dealer or original equipment dealer with any
questions you may have on tire specifications or
capability. Failure to use equivalent
replacement tires may adversely affect the
safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
Tire Types
All Season Tires — If Equipped
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons
(Spring, Summer, Autumn, and Winter). Traction
levels may vary between different all season
tires. All season tires can be identified by the
M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on the tire
sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four;
failure to do so may adversely affect the safety
and handling of your vehicle.
Summer Or Three Season Tires — If Equipped
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and
dry conditions, and are not intended to be
driven in snow or on ice. If your vehicle is
equipped with Summer tires, be aware these
tires are not designed for Winter or cold driving
conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle
when ambient temperatures are less than 40°F
(5°C) or if roads are covered with ice or snow.
For more information, contact an authorized
dealer.
Summer tires do not contain the all season
designation or mountain/snowflake symbol on
the tire sidewall. Use Summer tires only in sets
of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the
safety and handling of your vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating, or
speed rating other than that specified for
your vehicle. Some combinations of unap-
proved tires and wheels may change
suspension dimensions and performance
characteristics, resulting in changes to
steering, handling, and braking of your
vehicle. This can cause unpredictable
handling and stress to steering and
suspension components. You could lose
control and have a collision resulting in
serious injury or death. Use only the tire and
wheel sizes with load ratings approved for
your vehicle.
Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally
equipped on your vehicle. Using a tire with
a smaller load index could result in tire
overloading and failure. You could lose
control and have a collision.
Failure to equip your vehicle with tires
having adequate speed capability can
result in sudden tire failure and loss of
vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a
different size may result in false speedometer
and odometer readings.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice
conditions. You could lose vehicle control,
resulting in severe injury or death. Driving too
fast for conditions also creates the possibility
of loss of vehicle control.
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 256
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 257
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of
snow tires during the Winter. Snow tires can be
identified by a “mountain/snowflake” symbol
on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires
equivalent in size and type to the
original equipment tires. Use snow
tires only in sets of four; failure to do
so may adversely affect the safety and handling
of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings
than what was originally equipped with your
vehicle and should not be operated at
sustained speeds over 75 mph (120 km/h). For
speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to
original equipment or an authorized tire dealer
for recommended safe operating speeds,
loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
While studded tires improve performance on
ice, skid and traction capability on wet or dry
surfaces may be poorer than that of
non-studded tires. Some states prohibit
studded tires; therefore, local laws should be
checked before using these tire types.
Spare Tires — If Equipped
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit
instead of a spare tire, please refer to
“Tire Service Kit” in “In Case Of Emergency” for
further information.
Refer to the “Towing Requirements - Tires” in
“Starting And Operating” for restrictions when
towing with a spare tire designated for
temporary emergency use.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire
And Wheel — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire
and wheel equivalent in look and function to the
original equipment tire and wheel found on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle. This spare tire
may be used in the tire rotation for your vehicle.
If your vehicle has this option, refer to an
authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire
rotation pattern.
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency
use only. You can identify if your vehicle is
equipped with a compact spare by looking at
the spare tire description on the Tire and
Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of
the tire. Compact spare tire descriptions begin
with the letter “T” or “S” preceding the size
designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original
equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced)
and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first
opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount
a conventional tire on the compact spare wheel,
since the wheel is designed specifically for the
compact spare tire. Do not install more than
one compact spare tire and wheel on the
vehicle at any given time.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do
not take your vehicle through an automatic
car wash with a compact or limited use
temporary spare installed. Damage to the
vehicle may result.
7
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 257
258 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Collapsible Spare Tire — If Equipped
The collapsible spare is for temporary
emergency use only. You can identify if your
vehicle is equipped with a collapsible spare by
looking at the spare tire description on the Tire
and Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of
the tire.
Collapsible spare tire description example:
165/80-17 101P.
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original
equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced)
and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first
opportunity.
Inflate collapsible tire only after the wheel is
properly installed to the vehicle. Inflate the
collapsible tire using the electric air pump
before lowering the vehicle.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount
a conventional tire on the collapsible spare
wheel, since the wheel is designed specifically
for the collapsible spare tire.
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
The full size spare is for temporary emergency
use only. This tire may look like the originally
equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. This spare tire may have
limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the temporary use full
size spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is
not the same as your original equipment tire,
replace (or repair) the original equipment tire
and reinstall on the vehicle at the first
opportunity.
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited use spare tire is for temporary
emergency use only. This tire is identified by a
label located on the limited use spare wheel.
This label contains the driving limitations for
this spare. This tire may look like the original
equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited
use spare tire affects vehicle handling. Since it
is not the same as your original equipment tire,
replace (or repair) the original equipment tire
and reinstall on the vehicle at the first
opportunity.
WARNING!
Compact and collapsible spares are for
temporary emergency use only. With these
spares, do not drive more than 50 mph
(80 km/h). Temporary use spares have
limited tread life. When the tread is worn to
the tread wear indicators, the temporary use
spare tire needs to be replaced. Be sure to
follow the warnings, which apply to your
spare. Failure to do so could result in spare
tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
WARNING!
Compact and Collapsible spares are for
temporary emergency use only. With these
spares, do not drive more than 50 mph
(80 km/h). Temporary use spares have
limited tread life. When the tread is worn to
the tread wear indicators, the temporary use
spare tire needs to be replaced. Be sure to
follow the warnings, which apply to your
spare. Failure to do so could result in spare
tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 258
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 259
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum
and chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned
regularly using mild (neutral Ph) soap and water
to maintain their luster and to prevent
corrosion. Wash wheels with the same soap
solution recommended for the body of the
vehicle and remember to always wash when the
surfaces are not hot to the touch.
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration
caused by salt, sodium chloride, magnesium
chloride, calcium chloride, etc., and other road
chemicals used to melt ice or control dust on
dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and mild
soap to wipe away promptly. Do not use harsh
chemicals or a stiff brush. They can damage the
wheel’s protective coating that helps keep them
from corroding and tarnishing.
When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including
excessive brake dust, care must be taken in the
selection of tire and wheel cleaning chemicals
and equipment to prevent damage to the
wheels. Mopar Wheel Treatment or Mopar
Chrome Cleaner or their equivalent is
recommended or select a non-abrasive,
non-acidic cleaner for aluminum or chrome
wheels.
NOTE:
If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for
an extended period after cleaning the wheels
with wheel cleaner, drive your vehicle and apply
the brakes to remove the water droplets from
the brake components. This activity will remove
the red rust on the brake rotors and prevent
vehicle vibration when braking.
WARNING!
Limited use spares are for emergency use
only. Installation of this limited use spare tire
affects vehicle handling. With this tire, do not
drive more than the speed listed on the
limited use spare wheel. Keep inflated to the
cold tire inflation pressures listed on your Tire
and Loading Information Placard located on
the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of
the driver’s side door. Replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire at the first opportunity
and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do
so could result in loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Avoid products or automatic car washes that
use acidic solutions or strong alkaline
additives or harsh brushes. Many aftermarket
wheel cleaners and automatic car washes
may damage the wheel's protective finish.
Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap,
Mopar Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is
recommended.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle
brush, metal polishes or oven cleaner. These
products may damage the wheel's protective
finish. Such damage is not covered by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car wash
soap, Mopar Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is
recommended.
7
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 259
260 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
Dark Vapor Chrome, Black Satin Chrome, or
Low Gloss Clear Coat Wheels
Tire Chains and Traction Devices
Use of traction devices require sufficient
tire-to-body clearance. Due to limited clearance,
the following traction devices are
recommended. Follow these recommendations
to guard against damage.
Traction device must be of proper size for the
tire, as recommended by the traction device
manufacturer.
No other tire sizes are recommended for use
with a tire chain or traction device.
Install on front tires only.
For a 225/65R17 tire, use of a Peerless
Super Z6 low profile traction device or equiv-
alent is recommended.
CAUTION!
If your vehicle is equipped with these
specialty wheels, DO NOT USE wheel
cleaners, abrasives, or polishing compounds.
They will permanently damage this finish and
such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. HAND WASH ONLY
USING MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT
CLOTH. Used on a regular basis; this is all that
is required to maintain this finish.
WARNING!
Using tires of different size and type
(M+S, Snow) between front and rear axles
can cause unpredictable handling. You could
lose control and have a collision.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires,
observe the following precautions:
Because of restricted traction device clear-
ance between tires and other suspension
components, it is important that only trac-
tion devices in good condition are used.
Broken devices can cause serious damage.
Stop the vehicle immediately if noise
occurs that could indicate device breakage.
Remove the damaged parts of the device
before further use.
Install device as tightly as possible and
then retighten after driving about ½ mile
(0.8 km). Autosock traction devices do not
require retightening.
Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and
large bumps, especially with a loaded
vehicle.
Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry
pavement.
Observe the traction device manufacturer’s
instructions on the method of installation,
operating speed, and conditions for use.
Always use the suggested operating speed
of the device manufacturer’s if it is less
than 30 mph (48 km/h).
Do not use traction devices on a compact
spare tire.
CAUTION! (Continued)
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 260
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 261
Tire Rotation Recommendations
The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle
operate at different loads and perform different
steering, driving, and braking functions. For
these reasons, they wear at unequal rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation
of tires. The benefits of rotation are especially
worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such
as those on all season type tires. Rotation will
increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow
and wet traction levels, and contribute to a
smooth, quiet ride.
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” for the proper
maintenance intervals. The reasons for any
rapid or unusual wear should be corrected prior
to rotation being performed.
The suggested rotation method is the “forward
cross” shown in the following diagram. This
rotation pattern does not apply to some
directional tires that must not be reversed.
Tire Rotation (Forward Cross)
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories
were established by the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration.
The specific grade rating assigned by the
tire's manufacturer in each category is
shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
All passenger vehicle tires must conform
to Federal safety requirements in
addition to these grades.
Treadwear
The Treadwear grade is a comparative
rating, based on the wear rate of the tire
when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would
wear one and one-half times as well on
the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of
their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to
variations in driving habits, service
practices, and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These grades
represent the tire's ability to stop on wet
pavement, as measured under
controlled conditions on specified
government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance.
7
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 261
262 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Temperature Grades
The Temperature grades are A (the
highest), B, and C, representing the tire's
resistance to the generation of heat and
its ability to dissipate heat, when tested
under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause
the material of the tire to degenerate
and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire
failure. The grade C corresponds to a
level of performance, which all
passenger vehicle tires must meet
under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance
on the laboratory test wheel, than the
minimum required by law.
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more
than 21 days, you may want to take steps to
protect your battery. You may do the following:
Remove the 60 Amp cartridge in the Totally
Integrated Power Module (TIPM) labeled Igni-
tion-Off Draw (IOD).
Or, disconnect the negative cable from the
battery.
Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out
of service for two weeks or more, run the air
conditioning system at idle for about five
minutes in the fresh air and high blower
setting. This will ensure adequate system
lubrication to minimize the possibility of
compressor damage when the system is
started again.
BODYWORK
Protection From Atmospheric Agents
Vehicle body care requirements vary according
to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals
that make roads passable in snow and ice and
those that are sprayed on trees and road
surfaces during other seasons are highly
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside
parking, which exposes your vehicle to airborne
contaminants, road surfaces on which the
vehicle is operated, extreme hot or cold weather
and other extreme conditions will have an
adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and
underbody protection.
The following maintenance recommendations
will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from
the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction
characteristics.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated
and not overloaded. Excessive speed,
under-inflation, or excessive loading, either
separately or in combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 262
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 263
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or
removal of paint and protective coatings from
your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
Stone and gravel impact.
Insects, tree sap and tar.
Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
Body And Underbody Maintenance
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights
and fog lights that are lighter and less
susceptible to stone breakage than glass
headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and
therefore different lens cleaning procedures
must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the
lenses and reducing light output, avoid wiping
with a dry cloth. To remove road dirt, wash with
a mild soap solution followed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components,
solvents, steel wool or other aggressive
material to clean the lenses.
Preserving The Bodywork
Washing
Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash
your vehicle in the shade using Mopar Car
Wash, or a mild car wash soap, and rinse the
panels completely with clear water.
If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have
accumulated on your vehicle, use Mopar
Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover to
remove.
Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as
Mopar Cleaner Wax to remove road film,
stains and to protect your paint finish. Take
care never to scratch the paint.
Avoid using abrasive compounds and power
buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin
out the paint finish.
CAUTION!
Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning
materials such as steel wool or scouring
powder that will scratch metal and painted
surfaces.
Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi
(8,274 kPa) can result in damage or
removal of paint and decals.
7
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 263
264 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Special Care
If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you
drive near the ocean, hose off the undercar-
riage at least once a month.
It is important that the drain holes in the
lower edges of the doors, rocker panels, and
trunk be kept clear and open.
If you detect any stone chips or scratches in
the paint, touch them up immediately. The
cost of such repairs is considered the respon-
sibility of the owner.
If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision
or similar cause that destroys the paint and
protective coating, have your vehicle repaired
as soon as possible. The cost of such repairs
is considered the responsibility of the owner.
If you carry special cargo such as chemicals,
fertilizers, de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such
materials are well packaged and sealed.
If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads,
consider mud or stone shields behind each
wheel.
Use Mopar Touch Up Paint on scratches as
soon as possible. An authorized dealer has
touch up paint to match the color of your
vehicle.
INTERIORS
Seats And Fabric Parts
Use Mopar Total Clean to clean fabric
upholstery and carpeting.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with
chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will
weaken the fabric. Sun damage can also
weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap
solution or lukewarm water. Do not remove the
belts from the vehicle to wash them. Dry with a
soft cloth.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn
or if the buckles do not work properly.
Plastic And Coated Parts
Use Mopar Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning
purposes. Many are potentially flammable,
and if used in closed areas they may cause
respiratory harm.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a
collision and leave you with no protection.
Inspect the belt system periodically, checking
for cuts, frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts
must be replaced immediately. Do not
disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a collision
if they have been damaged (i.e., bent
retractor, torn webbing, etc.).
CAUTION!
Direct contact of air fresheners, insect
repellents, suntan lotions, or hand sani-
tizers to the plastic, painted, or decorated
surfaces of the interior may cause perma-
nent damage. Wipe away immediately.
Damage caused by these type of products
may not be covered by your New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 264
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 265
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this
vehicle are molded in clear plastic. When
cleaning the lenses, care must be taken to
avoid scratching the plastic.
1. Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap
solution may be used, but do not use high
alcohol content or abrasive cleaners. If
soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
cloth.
2. Dry with a soft cloth.
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a
regular basis with Mopar Glass Cleaner, or any
commercial household-type glass cleaner.
Never use an abrasive type cleaner. Use caution
when cleaning the inside rear window equipped
with electric defrosters or windows equipped
with radio antennas. Do not use scrapers or
other sharp instruments that may scratch the
elements.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray
cleaner on the towel or cloth that you are using.
Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror.
Cleaning The Instrument Panel Cupholders
Removal
Pull the flexible liner from the cupholder drawer
starting at one edge to ease removal.
Cleaning
The liner is top shelf dishwasher safe, or you
may follow the cleaning procedure below.
Soak the liner in a mixture of medium hot tap
water and one teaspoon of mild liquid dish
soap. Let soak for approximately 30 minutes.
After 30 minutes, pull the liner from the water
and dip it back into the water about six times.
This will loosen any remaining debris. Rinse the
liner thoroughly under warm running water.
Shake the excess water from the liner and dry
the outer surfaces with a clean soft cloth.
Installation
Place the liner into the cupholder drawer and
push the liner into place so that the retention
tabs seat into the corresponding openings in
the drawer.
7
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 265
266
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
IDENTIFICATION DATA
Vehicle Identification Number
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found
on the left front corner of the instrument panel,
visible through the windshield.
Windshield VIN Location
NOTE:
It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
BRAKE SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic
brake systems. If either of the two hydraulic
systems loses normal capability, the remaining
system will still function. However, there will be
some loss of overall braking effectiveness. You
may notice increased pedal travel during
application, greater pedal force required to slow
or stop, and potential activation of the Brake
Warning Light.
In the event power assist is lost for any reason
(i.e., repeated brake applications with the
engine off) the brakes will still function.
However, the effort required to brake the
vehicle will be much greater than that required
with the power system operating.
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to
ensure that the wheel is properly mounted to
the vehicle. Any time a wheel has been removed
and reinstalled on the vehicle, the lug nuts/
bolts should be torqued using a properly
calibrated torque wrench using a high quality six
sided (hex) deep wall socket.
Torque Specifications
**Use only authorized dealer recommended
lug nuts/bolts and clean or remove any dirt or
oil before tightening.
Lug Nut/Bolt
Torque
**Lug Nut/
Bolt Size
Lug Nut/Bolt
Socket Size
100 Ft-Lbs
(135 N·m)
M12 x 1.5 19 mm
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 266
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 267
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to
mounting the tire and remove any corrosion or
loose particles.
Wheel Mounting Surface
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until
each nut/bolt has been tightened twice. Ensure
that the socket is fully engaged on the lug
nut/bolt (do not insert it halfway).
Torque Patterns
After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut/bolt
torque to be sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are
properly seated against the wheel.
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
3.6L Engine
This engine is designed to meet all
emissions regulations and provide
excellent fuel economy and
performance when using high-quality
unleaded “Regular” gasoline having an octane
rating of 87 as specified by the
(R+M)/2 method. The use of higher octane
“Premium” gasoline will not provide any benefit
over “Regular” gasoline in these engines.
While operating on gasoline with an octane
number of 87, hearing a light knocking sound
from the engine is not a cause for concern.
However, if the engine is heard making a heavy
knocking sound, see your dealer immediately.
Use of gasoline with an octane number lower
than 87 can cause engine failure and may void
or not be covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the
jack, do not tighten the lug nuts/bolts fully
until the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to
follow this warning may result in personal
injury.
8
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 267
268 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such
as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you
experience these symptoms, try another brand
of gasoline before considering service for the
vehicle.
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of
cleaner burning gasoline referred to as
“Reformulated Gasoline”. Reformulated
gasoline contains oxygenates and are specif-
ically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and
improve air quality.
The use of reformulated gasoline is
recommended. Properly blended reformulated
gasoline will provide improved performance
and durability of engine and fuel system
components.
Materials Added To Fuel
Besides using unleaded gasoline with the
proper octane rating, gasolines that contain
detergents, corrosion and stability additives are
recommended. Using gasolines that have these
additives will help improve fuel economy,
reduce emissions, and maintain vehicle
performance.
Designated TOP TIER Detergent
Gasoline contains a higher level of
detergents to further aide in
minimizing engine and fuel system
deposits. When available, the usage of TOP
TIER Detergent Gasoline is recommended.
Visit www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP TIER
Detergent Gasoline Retailers.
Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning
agents should be avoided. Many of these
materials intended for gum and varnish
removal may contain active solvents or similar
ingredients. These can harm fuel system gasket
and diaphragm materials.
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline
with oxygenates such as ethanol.
Problems that result from using gasoline
containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15) or
gasoline containing methanol are not the
responsibility of the manufacturer and may void
or not be covered under New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use E-85, gasoline containing
methanol, or gasoline containing more than
15% ethanol (E-15). Use of these blends may
result in starting and drivability problems,
damage critical fuel system components,
cause emissions to exceed the applicable
standard, and/or cause the Malfunction
Indicator Light to illuminate. Please observe
pump labels as they should clearly
communicate if a fuel contains greater than
15% ethanol (E-15).
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 268
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 269
Do Not Use E-85 In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible
with gasoline containing up to 15% ethanol
(E-15). Use of gasoline with higher ethanol
content may void the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with
E-85 fuel, the engine will have some or all of
these symptoms:
Operate in a lean mode.
OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on.
Poor engine performance.
Poor cold start and cold drivability.
Increased risk for fuel system component
corrosion.
CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications
Modifications that allow the engine to run on
Compressed Natural Gas (CNG) or Liquid
Propane (LP) may result in damage to the
engine, emissions, and fuel system
components. Problems that result from running
CNG or LP are not the responsibility of the
manufacturer and may void or not be covered
under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
MMT In Gasoline
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl
(MMT) is a manganese-containing metallic
additive that is blended into some gasoline to
increase octane. Gasoline blended with MMT
provides no performance advantage beyond
gasoline of the same octane number without
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces
spark plug life and reduces emissions system
performance in some vehicles. The
manufacturer recommends that gasoline
without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT
content of gasoline may not be indicated on the
gasoline pump; therefore, you should ask your
gasoline retailer whether the gasoline contains
MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal and
California reformulated gasoline.
8
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 269
270 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
(Continued)
Fuel System Cautions
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with the emissions
control system can result in civil penalties being
assessed against you.
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your
vehicle’s performance:
The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by
Federal law. Using leaded gasoline can
impair engine performance and damage
the emissions control system.
An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or igni-
tion malfunctions can cause the catalytic
converter to overheat. If you notice a
pungent burning odor or some light smoke,
your engine may be out of tune or malfunc-
tioning and may require immediate service.
Contact an authorized dealer for service
assistance.
The use of fuel additives, which are now
being sold as octane enhancers, is not
recommended. Most of these products
contain high concentrations of methanol.
Fuel system damage or vehicle perfor-
mance problems resulting from the use of
such fuels or additives is not the responsi-
bility of the manufacturer and may void or
not be covered under the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
CAUTION! (Continued)
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is
deadly. Follow the precautions below to
prevent carbon monoxide poisoning:
Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain
carbon monoxide, a colorless and odorless
gas, which can kill. Never run the engine in
a closed area, such as a garage, and never
sit in a parked vehicle with the engine
running for an extended period. If the
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the
engine running for more than a short
period, adjust the ventilation system to
force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.
Guard against carbon monoxide with
proper maintenance. Have the exhaust
system inspected every time the vehicle is
raised. Have any abnormal conditions
repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with
all side windows fully open.
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 270
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 271
FLUID CAPACITIES
US Metric
Fuel (Approximate) 20 Gallons 76 Liters
Engine Oil with Filter
3.6L Engine
(SAE 5W-20, API Certified).
6 Quarts 5.6 Liters
Cooling System *
3.6L Engine (Mopar Antifreeze/
Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000
Mile (240,000 km) Formula or
equivalent) meeting the
requirements of FCA Material
Standard MS.90032.
13.4 Quarts 12.6 Liters
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level. Add 2.9 Quarts (2.8 Liters) if equipped with a rear heater.
8
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 271
272 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
Engine
Component Fluid, Lubricant, Or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant
We recommend you use Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km) Formula OAT (Organic
Additive Technology) meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032.
Engine Oil
We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of FCA Material
Standard MS-6395 such as Mopar, Pennzoil, and Pennzoil Gold Semi-Synthetic. Refer to your engine oil filler
cap for correct SAE grade.
Engine Oil Filter We recommend you use Mopar Engine Oil Filters.
Spark Plugs We recommend you use Mopar Spark Plugs.
Fuel Selection – 3.6L Engine 87 Octane (R+M)/2, 0-15% Ethanol.
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 272
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 273
(Continued)
(Continued)
CAUTION!
Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other
than specified Organic Additive Technology
(OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may
result in engine damage and may decrease
corrosion protection. Organic Additive Tech-
nology (OAT) engine coolant is different and
should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic
Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant
(antifreeze) or any “globally compatible”
coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the
cooling system in an emergency, the
cooling system will need to be drained,
flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT coolant
(conforming to MS.90032), by an autho-
rized dealer as soon as possible.
Do not use water alone or alcohol-based
engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do
not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust
products, as they may not be compatible
with the radiator engine coolant and may
plug the radiator.
CAUTION! (Continued)
This vehicle has not been designed for use
with propylene glycol-based engine coolant
(antifreeze). Use of propylene glycol-based
engine coolant (antifreeze) is not
recommended.
CAUTION! (Continued)
8
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 273
274 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Chassis
Component Fluid, Lubricant, Or Genuine Part
Automatic Transmission
Use only ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid meeting the requirements
of FCA Material Standard MS-9602. Failure to use ATF+4 fluid may affect
the function or performance of your transmission. We recommend Mopar
ATF+4 Fluid.
Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use Mopar DOT 3, SAE J1703.
Power Steering Reservoir
We recommend you use Mopar Power Steering Fluid +4, Mopar ATF+4
Automatic Transmission Fluid meeting the requirements of FCA Material
Standard MS-9602.
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 274
275
MULTIMEDIA
CYBERSECURITY
Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and
may be equipped with both wired and wireless
networks. These networks allow your vehicle to
send and receive information. This information
allows systems and features in your vehicle to
function properly.
Your vehicle may be equipped with certain
security features to reduce the risk of
unauthorized and unlawful access to vehicle
systems and wireless communications. Vehicle
software technology continues to evolve over
time and FCA US LLC, working with its suppliers,
evaluates and takes appropriate steps as
needed. Similar to a computer or other devices,
your vehicle may require software updates to
improve the usability and performance of your
systems or to reduce the potential risk of
unauthorized and unlawful access to your
vehicle systems.
The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to
your vehicle systems may still exist, even if the
most recent version of vehicle software (such as
Uconnect software) is installed.
NOTE:
FCA or your dealer may contact you directly
regarding software updates.
To help further improve vehicle security and
minimize the potential risk of a security
breach, vehicle owners should:
Routinely check www.driveu-
connect.com/support/
software-update.html (US Residents) or
www.driveuconnect.ca (Canadian
Residents) to learn about available
Uconnect software updates.
Only connect and use trusted media
devices (e.g. personal mobile phones,
USBs, CDs).
Privacy of any wireless and wired communi-
cations cannot be assured. Third parties may
unlawfully intercept information and private
communications without your consent. For
further information, refer to “Onboard
Diagnostic System (OBD II) Cybersecurity” in
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel”.
WARNING!
It is not possible to know or to predict all of
the possible outcomes if your vehicle’s
systems are breached. It may be possible
that vehicle systems, including safety
related systems, could be impaired or a
loss of vehicle control could occur that may
result in an accident involving serious injury
or death.
ONLY insert media (e.g., USB, SD card, or
CD) into your vehicle if it came from a
trusted source. Media of unknown origin
could possibly contain malicious software,
and if installed in your vehicle, it may
increase the possibility for vehicle systems
to be breached.
As always, if you experience unusual
vehicle behavior, take your vehicle to your
nearest authorized dealer immediately.
9
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 275
276 MULTIMEDIA
SAFETY AND GENERAL INFORMATION
Safety Guidelines
Ensure that all persons read this manual
carefully before using the system. It contains
instructions on how to use the system in a safe
and effective manner.
Do NOT attach any object to the touchscreen.
Doing so can result in damage to the
touchscreen.
Please read and follow these safety
precautions. Failure to do so may result in injury
or property damage.
Glance at the screen only when safe to do so.
If prolonged viewing of the screen is required,
park in a safe location and set the parking
brake.
Stop use immediately if a problem occurs.
Failure to do so may cause injury or damage
to the product. Return it to an authorized
dealer for repair.
Ensure the volume level of the system is set
to a level that still allows you to hear outside
traffic and emergency vehicles.
Safe Usage Of The Uconnect System
Read all instructions in this manual carefully
before using your system to ensure proper
usage.
The Uconnect system is a sophisticated elec-
tronic device. Do not let young children use
the system.
Permanent hearing loss may occur if you play
your music or the system at loud volumes.
Exercise caution when setting the volume on
the system.
Keep drinks, rain and other sources of mois-
ture away from the system. Besides damage
to the system, moisture can cause electric
shocks as with any electronic device.
NOTE:
Many features of this system are speed
dependent. For your own safety, it is not
possible to use some of the touchscreen
features while the vehicle is in motion.
Exposure To Radio Frequency Radiation
The internal wireless radio operates within
guidelines found in radio frequency safety
standards and recommendations, which reflect
the consensus of the scientific community. The
radio manufacturer believes the internal
wireless radio is safe for use by consumers. The
level of energy emitted is far less than the
electromagnetic energy emitted by wireless
devices such as mobile phones. However, the
use of wireless radios may be restricted in some
situations or environments, such as aboard
airplanes. If you are unsure of restrictions, you
are encouraged to ask for authorization before
turning on the wireless radio.
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
steering wheel. You have full responsibility
and assume all risks related to the use of the
Uconnect features and applications in this
vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is safe to
do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 276
MULTIMEDIA 277
Care And Maintenance
Touchscreen
Do not press the touchscreen with any hard
or sharp objects (pen, USB stick, jewelry,
etc.), which could scratch the touchscreen
surface!
Do not spray any liquid or caustic chemicals
directly on the screen! Use a clean and dry
microfiber lens cleaning cloth in order to
clean the touchscreen.
If necessary, use a lint-free cloth dampened
with a cleaning solution, such as isopropyl
alcohol or an isopropyl alcohol and water
solution ratio of 50:50. Be sure to follow the
solvent manufacturer's precautions and
directions.
RADIO 430/430 NAV
General Handling
User Interface Elements
Power to operate the radio is supplied through
the ignition switch, which must be in the ON/
RUN, ACC, or in ACC Delay mode in order to
operate the radio.
1 — Voice Recognition
Push the Voice Recognition (VR)
button located on the faceplate and
wait for the confirmation beep before
you say a voice command.
2 — Load
To open or close the display, push the Load
button on the faceplate.
After opening the display, it takes a few seconds
to eject a CD/DVD, if one is in the slot.
When inserting a disc, make sure the label is
facing up.
The display closes after inserting the disc.
NOTE:
It may take several seconds to recognize the
type of inserted disc (CD, DVD, MP3, etc.).
3 — Menu
Push the Menu button on the faceplate to
access the system settings menu.
NOTE:
Push the Menu button on the faceplate in an
active mode to change mode specific settings.
4 — Audio
Push the Audio button located on the faceplate
to access the speaker balance/fade and tone
controls.
9
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 277
278 MULTIMEDIA
5 — My Files
Push the My Files button on the faceplate to
manage your music and picture files on the
internal storage drive.
6 — USB Connector
Connect a supported device into the USB
Connector to play music and to copy music and
picture files to the internal hard disk drive.
NOTE:
Refer to “USB Connector” in the “Remote
Devices” section of this chapter for further
information.
7 — AUX Input (Audio Jack)
Connect an external audio device into the AUX
Input (e.g., MP3 player, video game) to play the
device audio through the car audio system.
8 — On/Off Volume
It is also possible to set the unit in standby
mode while driving by pushing the On/Off
Volume rotary knob.
NOTE:
If the ignition is switched OFF with the radio in
standby mode, the radio memorizes the
standby state when the ignition is switched to
ON/RUN again. Push the On/Off Volume rotary
knob to switch the radio On. The radio software
is always working when the ignition is switched
to ON/RUN, even if the radio is in standby
mode. It is still possible to eject the CD and to
display the time if the unit is switched Off.
9 — Media
Push the Media button located on the faceplate
to change to a Media mode or to toggle between
Media modes:
HDD (Hard Disk Drive)
CD/DVD
AUX
NOTE:
If you are viewing the NAV screen (Radio
430 Nav only), pushing the Media button will
return you to the Media mode screen.
10 — Radio
Push the Radio button located on the faceplate
to change to a Radio mode or to toggle between
Radio modes:
AM
FM
SAT (If Equipped)
NOTE:
If you are viewing the NAV screen (Radio
430 Nav only), pushing the Radio button will
return you to the Radio mode screen.
11 — Uconnect Phone
Push the Uconnect Phone button
located on the faceplate to either
activate the Uconnect system or to
cancel an active phone call.
Audio Settings
Volume
Use the ON/OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust
the volume of the currently playing audio
source. While you adjust the volume, the name
of the audio source and a volume indicator is
displayed in the lower left corner of the display.
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 278
MULTIMEDIA 279
Audio Control Menu
Push the Audio button located on the faceplate
on the right side of the radio.
Use either of the Arrow buttons or the cross-hair
on the screen to change the Balance and Fade.
The Center button resets the settings. Push the
Equalizer button to change tone settings.
Use either the Arrow buttons or the sliders on
the screen to adjust Bass, Mid, and/or Treble.
Getting Started
Change The Language
The radio will conform to the vehicle language
set in the instrument cluster display.
If you change the language in the radio, the
vehicle will change the language for all display
information.
To change the language with the radio:
1. Push the Menu button on the right side of
the radio.
2. Then press the System Setup button to get
to the System Setup menu.
3. Press the Language Setup button and
select a language.
4. Press the Save button to activate the new
language selection.
Set The Time — Radio 430
1. Press the Time Display button in the lower
left corner of the screen.
2. Adjust the hours and minutes using the Up
and Down buttons.
3. Press the Set Time Zone button to change to
the desired time zone.
4. Press the Daylight Savings button to switch
Daylight Savings on or off.
9
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 279
280 MULTIMEDIA
Set The Time — Radio 430 NAV
1. Press the Time Display button in the lower
left corner of the screen.
The time is automatically set by the GPS sys-
tem for the time zone selected. The radio
default is GPS time, where the vehicle time
is automatically set by the GPS system. If
the vehicle is not able to receive the GPS
signals, the vehicle time is only updated
when the GPS satellite signals are being re-
ceived (which requires the vehicle to be out-
side with a clear view to the sky).
2. It is possible to set the time manually
(ahead or behind actual GPS time), by
pressing the User Time button.
3. Press the Daylight Savings button to switch
Daylight Savings on or off.
Store Radio Presets
1. Push the Radio button to display AM, FM,
or SAT.
2. Select the radio band by pressing either the
AM, FM, or SAT buttons.
3. Either press the Seek Up/Down buttons or
press the Scan button, Direct Tune button
or the Left/Right arrows to change the
currently playing station.
4. Press and hold one of the Presets buttons in
the list to the right until you hear a confir-
mation beep (approximately two seconds).
You can use the Page button to scroll
through the list of presets.
NOTE:
If the preset list is not displayed, press the
Presets button located in the bottom line of the
screen.
You can use the Full Screen button to toggle
between full and split-screen mode. Long preset
names are displayed in full-screen mode.
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 280
MULTIMEDIA 281
Radio Mode
Overview
The radio is equipped with three different
tuners:
FM 87.7 MHz - 107.9 MHz (RBDS capable)
AM 530 kHz - 1710 kHz
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio (if equipped)
Push the Radio button. The different tuner
modes can be selected by pressing the tabs on
the radio touchscreen.
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio
With over 130 channels, SiriusXM® Satellite
Radio brings you more of what you love. Get 69
channels of 100% commercial-free music, plus
all of your favorite sports, news, talk and
entertainment. Hear every NFL® game, every
NASCAR® race, college sports and more. The
biggest and most compelling names in talk with
Howard Stern and Martha Stewart,
laugh-out-loud comedy, plus kids' programming,
wold-class news, local traffic and weather. All of
this with crystal clear, coast-to-coast coverage.
Everything worth listening to is now on
SiriusXM®. A one-year SiriusXM® Satellite
Radio subscription is included.
SiriusXM® and all related marks and logos are
trademarks of SiriusXM® Radio Inc. and its
subsidiaries. SiriusXM® Radio requires a
subscription, sold separately after trial
subscription included with vehicle purchase.
Prices and programming are provided by
SiriusXM® and are subject to change.
Subscriptions governed by Terms & Conditions
available at www.siriusxm.com. SiriusXM®
Radio US service only available to those at least
18 years of age in the 48 contiguous United
States, D.C., and PR. Service available in
Canada; see www.siriusxm.ca.
To receive satellite radio, the vehicle needs to
be outside with a clear view to the sky. If the
screen shows Acquiring Signal, you might have
to change the vehicle position to receive a
signal. In most cases, the satellite radio does
not receive a signal in underground parking
garages or tunnels.
Station Presets
There are 12 station presets available for
storing the radio stations in each tuner range.
To store the desired station, press and hold one
of the station Presets buttons for two seconds
and you will see the highlighted button change
from green to beige. You will also see the radio
station stored in the highlighted button and you
will hear a confirmation beep when the station
is saved. Pressing the Presets buttons in SAT
mode changes the information shown in the list
between the Channel Name, name of the Artist
currently playing on the channel and name of
the Song currently playing on the channel.
9
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 281
282 MULTIMEDIA
Change A Channel Or Frequency
Press the Seek/Tune Down Arrow button to
quickly seek down to the next available station
or channel.
Press and hold the Seek/Tune Down Arrow
button to tune down until the button is
released.
Press the Seek/Tune Up Arrow button to
quickly seek up to the next available station or
channel.
Press and hold the Seek/Tune Up Arrow button
to tune up until the button is released.
Select the Direct Tune button to enter a
frequency or a channel number, and confirm
your selection by pressing the GO button. If
there are no more numbers required to enter
the frequency or channel number, the radio
automatically tunes to the selection without
pressing the GO button.
Select “Scan” for a five-second preview of each
listenable station in the frequency band. Press
the Scan button again to stop the scan function
and to select a radio station.
Radio Broadcast Data System (RBDS)
This radio system is capable of receiving RBDS
signals in the FM band. RBDS is a technology
used for transmitting textual information about
the music type, song and artist for FM band
music. This information is shown on the display.
NOTE:
Not all radio stations support RBDS.
The RBDS information is displayed below the
frequency reading of the currently playing radio
station.
Radio Text Information
Press the Info button on the
touchscreen to display additional
information about the current audio
program in the right half of the screen.
Press the Info button a second time to hide this
information.
Music Type (Program Type Filter)
Program Type (PTY) is only available in FM and
SAT mode. Radio stations are grouped
according to their program (e.g., Soft Rock,
Rhythm & Blues, etc.).
In SAT mode, the Music Browse
button allows you to browse through
all of the SiriusXM® channels and
genres.
You can use the Back button to switch
to the previous menu.
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 282
MULTIMEDIA 283
Favorite Songs & Artists
The SAT mode Favorites list allows you to tag
particular artists or songs so you will be notified
each time that artist or song is playing on
another SiriusXM® channel.
To tag an artist or song, press the
Favorites button while the song is
playing.
NOTE:
Not all SiriusXM® stations allow a song or artist
to be tagged.
When one of your favorite artists or songs
begins playing on another SiriusXM® channel a
message appears (depending on the Song
Alerts setting) that allows you to tune to the
station where your favorite is playing.
The Song Alerts setting is accessed in the SAT
Menu, Favorites screen.
Any time a favorite artist or song is playing, the
Favorite icon appears in the bottom bar.
If you have set up favorite sports teams and one
of those teams has a game being broadcast on
SiriusXM®, the Favorite Sport icon appears in
the bottom bar anytime the game starts or when
there is a score update.
When you are in SAT mode, you can change your
Song and Game Alert settings by pushing the
MENU button on the faceplate then pressing
the Favorites button on the touchscreen.
Replay Mode
While you are in SAT mode, you can replay over
30 minutes of the current SiriusXM® channel
(when the channel is changed, this audio buffer
is erased). Press the Replay button to listen to
the stored audio.
You can press the touchscreen controls to
pause and rewind audio playback, press the
Scan button to preview each of the tracks
stored in the buffer, or select a track from the
list.
The time displayed below the bar indicates how
much time is present between the current
buffer play position and the live broadcast.
Press the Live button to return to the current
audio being broadcast on the SiriusXM®
channel.
Radio Settings
AM/FM Menu
There are no specific settings for this mode.
SAT Menu
While in SAT Mode, push the Menu button to
display the SAT Menu.
9
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 283
284 MULTIMEDIA
Channel Lock
Select Channel Lock to enable and/or disable
desired channels. The Seek and Scan function
will then only display channels without parental
lock.
Favorites
When Song Alerts is checked, you will be
notified every time one of your favorite artists or
songs begins playing. To turn off these notifi-
cations, turn off the Song Alerts check mark.
When Game Alerts is checked, you will be
notified every time one of your favorite teams
begins playing a game being broadcast on
SiriusXM® and/or when the score of the game
changes. The settings you make under Favorite
Teams determine which alerts you receive.
To disable all sports notifications, turn off the
Game Alerts check mark.
Favorite Songs & Artists
When an individual song or artist is checked,
you will receive alerts when that song or artist is
playing (depending on the Song Alerts setting).
If you do not want to receive alerts for a
particular song or artist but you want to keep
that item in the list, turn off the check mark next
to the item.
To permanently remove the song or artist from
the list, press the Delete button next to the item.
Favorite Teams
To view which teams will create game or score
alerts, select the Teams tab.
To set or change the favorite team, press the
button for the sport and select a new team from
the list.
To change the alert types you will receive for
each team (depending on the Game Alerts
setting), select the Alerts tab. Pressing the
button next to the team changes the alert type
between None (no alerts), Game (alert when the
game broadcast begins), Scores (alert each
time the game score is updated), or All (both
game start and score alerts).
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 284
MULTIMEDIA 285
Re-Subscribe To SiriusXM® Satellite Radio
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a
free limited time subscription to SiriusXM®
Satellite Radio with your radio. Following
expiration of the free services, it will be
necessary to access the information on the
Subscription Information screen to
re-subscribe.
Press the Subscription button on the
touchscreen to access the Subscription
Information screen.
Write down the SiriusXM® ID numbers for your
receiver. To reactivate your service, either call
the number listed on the screen or visit the
provider online.
NOTE:
SiriusXM® Travel Link is a separate
subscription only available on the
Radio 430 Nav.
Display Settings
Push the Menu button on the faceplate, and
press the Display Setting button on the
touchscreen to access the Display Settings
menu.
Select the Daytime Colors button to switch to
manual daytime mode and to adjust the
brightness of the display using daytime colors.
Select the Nighttime Colors button to switch to
manual nighttime mode and to adjust the
brightness of the display using nighttime colors.
Select the Auto Color button to switch to
automatic daytime/nighttime mode and to
control the brightness of the display using the
light switch of the vehicle.
Press the Up or Down arrows to adjust the
Brightness.
Press the Done button to save your settings and
to return to the AM/FM/SAT Menu.
Screen Off
To turn off the screen (so only the clock is
shown, and audio is still heard through the
vehicle’s speakers), push the Menu button on
the faceplate and press the Screen Off button
on the touchscreen.
Once the Screen Off is active, push any button
on the faceplate or press the touchscreen
display to deactivate it.
9
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 285
286 MULTIMEDIA
View Settings
Push the Menu button on the faceplate and
press the Default View button on the
touchscreen to enable the default view mode,
where the vehicle brand logo is displayed in the
right half of the screen.
Press the Picture View button to enable the
picture view mode, where a picture can be
displayed on the right half of the radio screen.
Refer to “Hard Disk Drive Mode (HDD)” in this
section for further information.
ParkView Rear Backup Camera — If Equipped
When equipped with ParkView, the radio display
shows the rear view camera picture when the
shift lever is in the REVERSE position.
If available, you can disable the ParkView Rear
Backup Camera feature by pushing the Menu
button on the faceplate, then pressing the
System Setup button on the touchscreen and
turning off the Backup Camera option.
ParkView Camera Delay
The Rear Backup Camera display will remain on
the screen for a period of 10 seconds or up to
8 mph (12.8 km/h).
This feature can be enabled or disabled when
the ParkView Rear Backup Camera is enabled.
Media Mode
Disc Mode
Overview
The radio is equipped with a CD/DVD player.
To activate Disc Mode push the Media button
located on the faceplate and select the Disc
button.
Disc Requirements
The radio is capable of playing compact discs
(CD), recordable compact discs (CD-R and
CD+R), rewritable compact discs (CD-RW and
CD+RW), recordable DVD-R, DVD+R, DVD-RW,
and DVD+RW compact discs.
CAUTION!
This disc player will accept a 4 3/4 inch
(12 cm) disc only. The use of other sized discs
may damage the disc player mechanism.
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 286
MULTIMEDIA 287
Your radio will play the following formats:
MP3, WMA, AAC, M4A, CD Audio, DVD Audio,
and DVD Video.
Do not insert anything other than the supported
CD/DVD formats.
SACD (SACD layer), VCD DualDisc, SVCD, VCD
format on DVD MPEG-4 are not supported.
A complete list of supported CD/DVD formats is
available at DriveUconnect.com (US Residents)
or DriveUconnect.ca (Canadian Residents).
Inserting A Disc
1. Push the Load button once.
2. After the screen opens, with the printed side
upward, insert the disc into the disc slot of
the radio. The radio pulls the disc automat-
ically and closes the flip screen. The radio
selects the appropriate mode after the disc
is recognized and starts playing the first
track. The display shows “Reading...” during
this process.
NOTE:
A faulty CD is NOT automatically ejected. Use
only standard size discs. Discs that have
been modified with an adhesive label should
not be used in the CD/DVD player.
On Data CDs with a large number of songs it
may take several seconds to read, play and
display information for all songs on the disc.
Recording your own CD on a home computer
at a lower write speed will result in a more
consistent quality.
High definition content and media
(e.g, HD-DVD, Blu-Ray™) is not supported.
If the user does not remove an ejected CD
within approximately 10 seconds the CD will
reload.
Removing A Disc
1. Push the Load button.
2. After the display opens the disc is ejected
and can be removed.
NOTE:
If the disc is not removed within approximately
10 seconds, the unit pulls it back into the slot
(park position). The disc may be ejected when
the ignition is OFF.
3. Push the Load button to close the display. If
you do not push the Load button or insert a
new disc, the display will close 30 seconds
after the display was opened.
Selecting Disc Mode
Activate Disc Mode by pushing the Media
button located on the faceplate. The disc mode
can be selected by pressing the Disc button on
the touchscreen.
NOTE:
When a disc is inserted, the appropriate mode
is automatically selected once the disc is
recognized.
Scan Search
Press the Scan button.
The first few seconds of each individual track
will be played in succession.
Press the Stop Scan button to stop the scan
function.
9
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 287
288 MULTIMEDIA
Change A Track
Press the Forward Arrow button to select the
next track on the disc.
Press and hold the Forward Arrow button to
fast forward through the track.
Press the Back Arrow button to select the
start of the current track (while the track is
playing) or the previous track (if the current
track has just started).
Press and hold the Back Arrow button to fast
rewind through the track.
Press the Pause button to pause the playback
of the disc.
Press the Play button to resume playback of the
disc.
Displaying The Elapsed Title Time
The elapsed title time of the currently playing
track displays in the left center of the screen.
Select Title From List
Press the Tracks button to display a list of the
titles of the currently playing disc. Select the
desired track you wish to play.
Press the Tracks button a second time to hide
the list.
Disc Info
Press the Info button to display the
cover art (if available) and track title.
Press the Info button a second time to
display the track title, artist, album,
and genre.
Press the Info button to close the Info panel.
Gracenote® End User License Agreement
This application or device contains software
from Gracenote®, Inc. of Emeryville, California
(“Gracenote®”). The software from Gracenote®
(the “Gracenote® Software”) enables this
application to perform disc and/or file identifi-
cation and obtain music-related information,
including name, artist, track, and title
information (“Gracenote® Data”) from online
servers or embedded databases (collectively,
“Gracenote® Servers”) and to perform other
functions. You may use Gracenote® Data only
by means of the intended End-User functions of
this application or device.
You agree that you will use Gracenote® Data,
the Gracenote® Software, and Gracenote®
Servers for your own personal non-commercial
use only. You agree not to assign, copy, transfer
or transmit the Gracenote® Software or any
Gracenote® Data to any third party. YOU AGREE
NOT TO USE OR EXPLOIT GRACENOTE DATA,
THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, OR GRACENOTE
SERVERS, EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PERMITTED
HEREIN.
You agree that your non-exclusive license to use
the Gracenote® Data, the Gracenote®
Software, and Gracenote® Servers will
terminate if you violate these restrictions. If your
license terminates, you agree to cease any and
all use of the Gracenote® Data, the
Gracenote® Software, and Gracenote®
Servers. Gracenote® reserves all rights in
Gracenote® Data, the Gracenote® Software,
and the Gracenote® Servers, including all
ownership rights. Under no circumstances will
Gracenote® become liable for any payment to
you for any information that you provide. You
agree that Gracenote®, Inc. may enforce its
rights under this Agreement against you directly
in its own name.
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 288
MULTIMEDIA 289
The Gracenote® service uses a unique
identifier to track queries for statistical
purposes. The purpose of a randomly assigned
numeric identifier is to allow the Gracenote®
service to count queries without knowing
anything about who you are. For more
information, see the web page for the
Gracenote® Privacy Policy for the Gracenote®
service.
The Gracenote® Software and each item of
Gracenote® Data are licensed to you “AS IS.”
Gracenote® makes no representations or
warranties, express or implied, regarding the
accuracy of any Gracenote® Data from in the
Gracenote® Servers. Gracenote® reserves the
right to delete data from the Gracenote®
Servers or to change data categories for any
cause that Gracenote® deems sufficient. No
warranty is made that the Gracenote® Software
or Gracenote® Servers are error-free or that
functioning of Gracenote® Software or
Gracenote® Servers will be uninterrupted.
Gracenote® is not obligated to provide you with
new enhanced or additional data types or
categories that Gracenote® may provide in the
future and is free to discontinue its services at
any time.
GRACENOTE DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE, AND
NON-INFRINGEMENT. GRACENOTE DOES NOT
WARRANT THE RESULTS THAT WILL BE
OBTAINED BY YOUR USE OF THE GRACENOTE
SOFTWARE OR ANY GRACENOTE SERVER. IN
NO CASE WILL GRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANY
CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES OR
FOR ANY LOST PROFITS OR LOST REVENUES.
© Gracenote®, Inc. 2010
Portions of the content is copyright ©Muze or its
providers.
NOTE:
Visit DriveUconnect.com (U.S. Residents) or
DriveUconnect.ca (Canadian Residents) for
update information.
Copy Disc To Hard-Drive
Press the Copy button to copy the
current disc to the Hard Disc Drive.
Disc Menu
While in disc mode with inserted audio disc,
push the Menu button to access the Disc Menu.
Press the Random button to play the titles on
the disc in random order. Press the Random
button a second time to turn Random off.
Press the Repeat Folder button to repeat all
songs in the currently playing folder (MP3/WMA
disc only). Press the Repeat Folder button a
second time to stop the repeat mode.
Playing A MP3/WMA Disc
1. Push the Load button once.
2. With the printed side upwards, insert the
disc into the disc slot of the radio. The radio
pulls the disc automatically and closes the
flip screen. The radio selects the
appropriate mode after the disc is
recognized, and starts playing the first
track. The display shows “Reading...” during
this process.
A MP3/WMA disc may contain audio files in
a folder structure. The folder, if any, is
shown in the list view.
Press the Tracks button if the list is not dis-
played.
9
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 289
290 MULTIMEDIA
3. Press a button with a folder symbol to open
a folder.
4. Press the Folder Up button to close a folder.
Playing A Video DVD
NOTE:
Viewing a DVD video on the radio screen is not
available in all states, the vehicle must be
stopped and the shifter must be in the PARK
position for vehicles with an automatic
transmission. In vehicles with a manual
transmission the parking brake must be
engaged.
First insert a video DVD.
The playback starts automatically after the DVD
video is recognized by the disc drive.
Press the Chapters button to display a list of
available chapters or tracks. Press a Chapter or
Track button in the list to start playback from
the selected section.
Press the View Video button to view the video on
the screen.
DVD MENU Controls
If you insert a DVD video disc that contains a top
menu, a menu may appear.
Press the Cursor Arrow buttons to select the title
you want to view, then press the Enter button to
start playback.
Press the DVD Move button to move
the controls to the right part of the
screen.
Press the Close button to close the
DVD MENU Controls.
DVD Playback Controls
In video playback mode, press anywhere on the
touchscreen to show the DVD Playback
Controls.
To pause playback, press the Pause button.
To stop playback, press the Stop button.
Press the Fast Reverse (double left arrows)
button during playback to fast reverse playback.
Press the Fast Forward (double right arrows)
button during playback to fast forward
playback.
Press the Next button to locate succeeding
chapters or tracks.
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 290
MULTIMEDIA 291
Press the PREV button to start playback from
the beginning of the current chapter or track.
When you press the button twice in quick
succession, playback starts from the beginning
of the preceding chapter or track.
DISC Menu
While in Disc Mode, with inserted video DVD,
press the Menu button to access the Disc
Menu.
Press the Disc Setup button to access the Disc
Setup menu.
In the Disc Setup menu, you may select Menu
Language, Audio Language, Subtitle, Camera
Angle, Aspect Ratio, and Brightness settings by
pressing the corresponding button. Some of the
buttons are disabled if the inserted disc does
not support the functionality.
Disc Skipping
Skipping is typically caused by a damaged
(scratched) disc. This will result in a 10-second
jump forward until the damaged area is passed.
Temperature Protection
If the temperature of the disc reader during
operation becomes too high, a pop-up message
informs the user of an over temperature
situation. The unit switches to radio mode until
the disc reader temperature has dropped to a
normal level.
Hard Disk Drive Mode (HDD)
The HDD mode gives you access to the audio
files on the internal hard disk drive. It functions
similar to a CD player, with the exception that
the internal HDD can hold more tracks. It can
hold approximately 6,700 four-minute
CD-quality songs (depending on the file size of
the encoded files).
Before using the HDD mode, you will need to
copy tracks to the internal hard drive.
The files will be stored on the internal hard disk
drive and can be used in the HDD mode.
Copy Audio Disc To Hard-Drive
Copy an audio disc to the Hard Disk Drive using
the following procedure:
1. Insert a disc.
2. Press the Copy button to copy music tracks
of the inserted disc to the Hard Disk
Drive.
9
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 291
292 MULTIMEDIA
After a short pause, the copy process begins
and the audio resumes playback from the start
of the track. The copy process continues in the
background while the audio plays. The progress
is shown in the display. Even if you change to
another mode (radio, AUX, etc.) or turn the radio
Off (ignition ON/RUN), the copy process will
continue in the background.
It is also possible to listen to radio modes during
this process. Copying time is greater than 4x the
normal playback rate.
NOTE:
When copying CD-Audio to HDD, audio files are
converted from CD-Audio to AAC. If available,
the artist name, album name, cover art, track
names and genres are stored with the tracks on
the HDD. DVD-Audio cannot be copied to the
HDD. If the CD-Audio disc is not recognized by
the Gracenote® Music Recognition Service, you
can rip the CD-Audio disc on your
internet-equipped computer first, then copy the
resulting compressed audio files to a USB
memory stick. Then insert the USB memory
stick in the radio and copy the audio files to the
HDD mode.
Copy WMA/MP3 Files To Hard-Drive
MP3 and WMA formatted compressed audio
files from a disc or via USB (e.g., USB stick) can
be copied to the Hard Disc Drive.
It is recommended to sort music files into
folders.
Songs located in the root level (top level) of the
disc or USB device are saved on the Hard Disk
Drive in a root folder. Songs that are stored in
folders on the disc or USB devices are saved to
the same folder name on the Hard Disk Drive.
Only folders that contain song files are copied to
the Hard Disk Drive.
For the example above, the list on the HDD will
show the following:
Disc_Root_Level Songs (Playlist 1)
Song 1.mp3 (First song in playlist 1)
Song 2.mp3 (Second song in playlist 1)
Song 3.wma (Third song in playlist 1)
My Playlist Folder 1 (Playlist 2)
01 Song.mp3 (First song in playlist 2)
02 Song.mp3 (Second song in playlist 2)
03 Song.mp3 (Third song in playlist 2)
Copying Complete Disc
You can copy a complete music disc using the
following procedure:
1. Insert a disc with MP3/WMA files.
2. Press the Copy button to copy music files of
the inserted disc to the hard disk drive.
The copy progress is shown in the display.
You can continue listening to any audio source
during the copy process.
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 292
MULTIMEDIA 293
Selective Song Copying From Disc
You can select specific songs on a WMA/MP3
disc using the following procedure:
1. Push the My Files button located on the
faceplate.
2. Select “My Music”.
3. Press the Add Music Files to HDD button.
4. Press the From Disc button in the next
screen.
5. Select the folders or titles you would like to
copy.
A red check mark indicates the selected
songs and/or folders. Press the check All
button to select all files and folders at once.
6. Press the Save button to start the copy
process.
The copy process is shown on the display. It is
possible to listen to radio modes during this
process.
If you unplug or eject the media before the
copying process is finished, the process will be
interrupted. You may restart the copying
process by repeating the steps above.
Copying From USB
1. Insert a USB device.
2. Select “My Music”.
9
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 293
294 MULTIMEDIA
3. Press the Add Music Files to HDD button.
4. Press the Front USB button in the next
screen.
5. Select the folders or titles you would like to
copy.
A red check mark indicates the selected
songs and/or folders. Press the All button to
select all files and folders at once.
6. Press the Save button to start the copy
process.
Playing Audio Files From The Hard Disk Drive
You can play songs directly from the internal
hard disk drive.
1. Press the Browse button to
select an available category.
2. The radio can sort the files by artist, album,
song title, genre or folder name. You can
also create links to your favorite songs,
artists, albums, genres, or folders.
3. For this example, press the Artists button.
4. Press the button for the desired artist to list
all songs by the artist. Press the All
button to play all songs by artist sorted in
alphabetical order.
5. Press the List button to toggle the list
contents between all songs by the artist and
the albums that feature the artist.
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 294
MULTIMEDIA 295
Change A Track
Press the Forward Arrow button to select the
next track on the disc.
Press and hold the Forward Arrow button to
fast forward through the track.
Press the Back Arrow button to select the
start of the current track (while the track is
playing) or the previous track (if the current
track has just started).
Press and hold the Back Arrow button to fast
rewind through the track.
Press the Pause button to pause the playback
of the disc.
Press the Play button to resume playback of the
disc.
Tagging Favorite HDD Songs
When a song is playing that you want
to add to the Favorite Songs list, press
the Favorites button.
To view the Favorite Songs list, press
the Browse button, then press the Favorites
button, next press the Favorite Songs button.
Press the All button on the touchscreen to
play all favorite songs from the top of the list.
Displaying The Elapsed Time
The elapsed time of the current playing track is
displayed in the left center of the screen.
HDD Menu
While in HDD mode, push the Menu button
located on the faceplate to access the HDD
Menu.
Random Playback
The random play function plays random tracks
from the hard disk drive. Press the Random
button to switch the random play function on or
off.
A red check mark indicates the random play
function is active.
Repeat Track
The repeat track function repeats the currently
played track. Press the Rpt. TRK button to
switch the repeat track function on or off.
A red check mark indicates the repeat track
function is active.
Favorite Playlists On The Hard Disk Drive
You may save links to favorite
playlists in the Favorite Playlists list.
1. While in the HDD mode, press the Browse
button to access the Browse Categories
menu.
2. Press the Favorites button to display a list of
favorite playlists.
9
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 295
296 MULTIMEDIA
3. Press one of the Add Favorites buttons.
4. Select the type of favorite (Artist, Album,
Genre or Folder).
For this example, press the Genres button.
A link to the selected playlist is now saved in the
Favorite Playlists list.
NOTE:
Depending on the type of Favorite you define,
the contents of the favorite playlist may change
as you add tracks to and remove tracks from
the Hard Disk Drive. Deleting a favorite playlist
does not remove any files from the hard drive.
You may now edit the list by pressing the Edit
button or exit the list by pressing the Exit button.
Editing Track Info On The Hard Disk Drive
While a track is playing, press the Edit Info
button to edit the tag information for the track.
You can change the artist name, track name,
album name, album track number, genre, and
folder name for the track.
To edit an item, press the Change or Order
button next to the tag item you want to edit. To
enter new data for the tag, select an item from
the list or press the New button to type in a new
name. For track reordering, use the buttons
to move the track to the correct position.
If you change tag information that affects how
your HDD playback is sorted, playback may
pause briefly and restart from the top of the list.
Editing Folder Names On The Hard Disk Drive
1. Push the My Files button.
2. Select “My Music”.
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 296
MULTIMEDIA 297
3. Press the Rename HDD Folders button.
4. Press the folder you want to rename.
5. Spell the name of the folder, then press the
Save button.
Deleting Tracks From The Hard Disk Drive
1. Push the Menu button located on the
faceplate.
2. Press the My Music button.
3. Press the Delete Music Files from HDD
button.
4. Select the folder from which you want to
delete tracks.
5. Select the tracks you want to delete by
pressing the track to turn on the red check
mark. If you want to delete all tracks from
the folder, press the Check All button.
6. After you have selected all of the tracks to
delete, press the Delete button to
permanently remove the files from the Hard
Disk Drive.
Deleting All Files From The Hard Disk Drive
1. Push the Menu button located on the
faceplate.
2. Press the System Setup button on the
touchscreen to access the System Setup
menu.
3. Press the Manage HDD button to access the
Manage HDD menu.
This menu displays the available space on the
Hard Disk Drive and allows you to delete
pictures and music files.
9
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 297
298 MULTIMEDIA
Importing Pictures
It is possible to import display pictures to the
internal Hard Disk Drive. The pictures can be
displayed on the right half of the radio screen.
In the default mode, the vehicle brand logo is
displayed in the right half of the screen. Push
the Menu button on the right side of the radio to
access one of the setting menus.
It is recommended to change the picture
dimensions on a PC or Digital Camera to 240 by
158 pixels before the import.
NOTE:
USB devices (e.g., camera memory USB
adaptors, etc.) must comply with the MSD
(Mass Storage Device) standard. This USB
terminal can provide power to the inserted
device. The device's current limitation must be
less or equal to 500mA.
1. Push the My Files button located on the
faceplate to go to the Manage My Files
screen.
2. Insert either a CD or a USB Stick containing
your pictures.
3. Press the My Pictures button to get an
overview of the images currently stored on
the Hard Disk Drive.
The radio can store 23 user pictures.
4. Press the Add button to view the pictures
stored on the CD or USB memory stick.
NOTE:
Depending on the file size of each picture on the
CD or USB memory stick, loading the images in
the screen may take time.
5. Select the type of media inserted.
6. Use the Page Up or Down buttons to page
through a list of pictures and press the
picture you would like to import.
7. Select which pictures you want to copy. The
red check mark indicates a picture file to
copy.
The imported picture is now available in the
Manage My Pictures screen.
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 298
MULTIMEDIA 299
8. Press the Save button to copy the selected
pictures to the Hard Disk Drive.
9. Select this picture by pressing the “Set as
Picture View” button. A check mark
indicates the currently used picture.
Use the PREV or NEXT button to step
through the list of available pictures.
Press the Delete button to delete the pic-
ture from the hard disk drive.
10. Push the Menu button twice and then press
the Picture View button to enable the
picture view.
The picture is now displayed on the right half of
the screen.
Remote Devices
License Agreement
Dolby Digital License Agreement
Manufactured under license from Dolby Labora-
tories.
Dolby, MLP Lossless and the double-D are
trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
Rovi Corporation License Agreement
This product incorporates copyright protection
technology that is protected by US patents and
other intellectual property rights. Use of this
copyright protection technology must be
authorized by Rovi Corporation, and is intended
for home and other limited viewing uses only
unless otherwise authorized by Rovi
Corporation. Reverse engineering or
disassembly is prohibited.
USB Connector
It is possible to copy audio files or pictures files
to the radio Hard Disk Drive, or play audio files
directly from the USB device just like a music
disc. The USB connector is covered by a small
cover, which protects the connector from dust
or damage.
NOTE:
USB devices (e.g., camera memory USB
adaptors, etc.) must comply with the MSD
(Mass Storage Device) standard. This USB
terminal can provide power to the inserted
device. The current draw from these devices
must be limited to 500mA or less.
The transfer speed for this USB connector is
approximately two megabytes per second.
MP3 player devices cannot be controlled
through the USB connector. Some player
devices save music files in other formats, which
cannot be played in this radio. Some
copy-protected music (e.g., downloads from the
internet) cannot be played on this radio.
9
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 299
300 MULTIMEDIA
Compatible Devices
Please see your authorized dealer or visit
DriveUconnect.com (US Residents) or DriveU-
connect.ca (Canadian Residents) for supported
devices.
NOTE:
Some MP3 Players do not allow songs to be
copied into other devices.
How To Open The Cover
1. Place your finger under the pull arrow.
2. Pull forward.
NOTE:
The flap is attached and should not be
removed! Do not pull off of the frame. Do not
use a tool (e.g., screw-driver, nail file, etc.) to
open the flap, as this could cause damage to
the face of the radio.
How To Close The Cover
1. Using your thumb and index finger, grasp
the flap. Notice the hooks (1), which must
first be inserted into the frame.
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 300
MULTIMEDIA 301
2. Insert the top hooks (1) into the frame first.
3. Then push on the bottom of the flap to
secure in place.
Audio Jack (AUX) Mode
The Audio Jack connector allows you to connect
the headset output of an audio device (e.g.,
MP3 player) to the radio. The audio of the
connected device will then be played through
the radio sound system.
Connect a 3.5 mm stereo mini-jack cable as
shown above (not provided with the radio) to the
Audio Jack connector on the radio and to the
earphone connector of your audio device.
The display will switch automatically to the AUX
mode when a 3.5 mm stereo mini-jack cable
has been connected. The radio screen will
revert back to the last tuner mode when the
cable is unplugged.
To change radio modes while the cable is
connected to the unit, push the Media button
located on the faceplate to display the AUX tab.
Press the AUX tab to return to the AUX mode.
Adjust the volume with the On/Off Volume
rotary knob or with the volume of the attached
device.
The control of the external device (e.g.,
selecting playlists, play, fast forward, etc.)
cannot be provided by the radio; use the device
controls instead.
NOTE:
Inserting of a mono jack will result in improper
audio playback.
USB Port — If Equipped
The USB Port in the center console or upper
glove box (depending on the vehicle) gives you
access to the audio files on the external USB
device through the AUX Mode. It functions as a
remote control for the currently connected
audio devices mobile digital device, and you can
play audio from the audio device through the
vehicle's speaker system.
Before using the AUX mode, you will need to
connect your audio device to the USB port.
NOTE:
The files will not be stored on the internal
hard disk drive and cannot be used in the
HDD mode.
It is recommended you use the latest avail-
able software for your iPod®/iPhone® and
iTunes®.
CAUTION!
Never force any connector into the ports of
your radio. Make sure your connectors are
the identical shape and size before you
connect.
9
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 301
302 MULTIMEDIA
Playing Audio Files From The Audio Device
You can play songs directly from the external
USB device.
Press the Tracks button to display a list view.
Press the button with the desired list item to
select and play the item.
Press the Info button to display the
track information, press the button a
second time to close the display.
Press the Browse button to browse by
categories.
Select An External USB Category
The radio can sort the files by playlists, by song
names, by artists, by composers, by genres, by
albums, by podcasts or by audio books, if
available on your device.
Press the Artists button for this example.
Press a button with the desired artist's name to
play songs from this artist.
Press the Play All button to play songs from all
available artists.
Press the Page Up/Down buttons to navigate
through the list of artists.
Using Voice Command
You can list Artists, Playlists, Albums, Songs,
Podcasts, Genres, Composers, and Audio
Books in the main page by using Voice
Command.
To list categories, press the Voice Recognition
(VR) button and wait for the confirmation
beep and say list Album (or any other category).
List Jump
If you encounter a very long list, it may be
helpful to press the A<>Z button to go to the List
Jump menu.
For this example, we entered the first letter of
the desired artist.
Press the GO button to jump to the desired
artist.
Press a button with the desired artist's name to
play songs from this artist.
Change A Track
Press the Forward Arrow button to select the
next track on the disc.
Press and hold the Forward Arrow button to
fast forward through the track.
Press the Back Arrow button to select the
start of the current track (while the track is
playing) or the previous track (if the current
track has just started).
Press and hold the Back Arrow button to fast
rewind through the track.
Pause
Press the Pause button to pause the playback.
Play
Press the Play button to start the playback.
Displaying The Elapsed Title Time
The elapsed title time of the currently playing
track is displayed on the left side of the screen.
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 302
MULTIMEDIA 303
Scan Search
Press the Scan button.
The first few seconds of each individual track
will be played in succession for 10 seconds
each.
Press the Stop Scan button to stop the scan
function.
Track Info
Press the Info button.
Information on the currently playing
track, if available, will be displayed on
the right half of the touchscreen.
AUX Menu
While in AUX mode, push the Menu button on
the faceplate to access the AUX Menu.
Random Playback
The random playback function plays random
tracks from the audio device. Press the Random
button to switch the random play function on or
off.
A red check mark indicates the random play
function is active.
Repeat Track
The repeat track function repeats the currently
played track. Press the Rpt. TRK button to
switch the repeat track function on or off.
A red check mark indicates the repeat track
function is active.
Bluetooth® Streaming Audio (BTSA)
Music can be streamed from your cellular
phone through Uconnect Phone (if equipped)
and played through the vehicle’s sound system.
Controlling BTSA Using The Radio
To enter BTSA mode, push the Media button
located on the faceplate then press the Aux
button located on the touchscreen, or push the
Voice Recognition button (if equipped) and
after the confirmation beep, say
“Bluetooth Streaming Audio.”
Play Mode
When switching to BTSA mode, some audio
devices will start playing music directly through
the vehicle’s sound system. However, some
devices require the music to be initiated on the
device before it will stream through Uconnect
Phone (if equipped).
Selecting A Different Audio Device
1. Push the Uconnect Phone button .
2. After the “Ready” prompt and the following
beep, say “Setup,” then “Select Audio
Devices.”
3. You can say the name of the Audio Device to
select or say “List Audio Devices” to have
Uconnect Phone list the available devices.
9
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 303
304 MULTIMEDIA
You can also select a different audio device in
the Select Aux Device screen. Press the icon to
enter the Select Aux Device screen. The
currently playing device is highlighted, you can
push and select a different device.
Uconnect Phone— If Equipped
Uconnect Phone is a voice-activated,
hands-free, in-vehicle communications system.
Uconnect Phone allows you to dial a phone
number with your mobile phone* using simple
voice commands (e.g., “Call” … “Mike” …
“Work” or “Dial” … “248-555-1212”). Your
mobile phone's audio is transmitted through
your vehicle's audio system; the system
automatically mutes your radio when using the
Uconnect Phone.
NOTE:
Uconnect Phone requires a mobile phone
equipped with the Bluetooth® “Hands-Free
Profile,” Version 0.96 or higher. See the
Uconnect website for supported phones.
For Uconnect customer support:
US residents - visit UconnectPhone.com or
call 1-877-855-8400 (24 hours a day 7 days
a week).
Canadian Residents - visit Uconnect-
Phone.com or call 1-800-465-2001 (English)
or 1-800-387-9983 (French).
Mon. – Fri., 8:00 am – 8:00 pm, ET
Sat., 9:00 am – 5:00 pm, ET
Sun., Closed
Uconnect Phone allows you to transfer calls
between the system and your mobile phone as
you enter or exit your vehicle and enables you to
mute the system's microphone for private
conversation.
The Uconnect Phone is driven through your
Bluetooth® “Hands-Free Profile” mobile phone.
Uconnect features Bluetooth® technology - the
global standard that enables different
electronic devices to connect to each other
without wires or a docking station, so Uconnect
Phone works no matter where you stow your
mobile phone (be it your purse, pocket, or
briefcase), as long as your phone is turned on
and has been paired to the vehicle's Uconnect
Phone. The Uconnect Phone allows up to seven
mobile phones to be linked to the system. Only
one linked (or paired) mobile phone can be
used with the system at a time. The system is
available in English, Spanish, or French
languages.
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
wheel. You have full responsibility and
assume all risks related to the use of the
Uconnect features and applications in this
vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is safe to
do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 304
MULTIMEDIA 305
Uconnect Phone Button
The radio or steering wheel controls (if
equipped) contain the two control buttons
(Uconnect Phone button and Voice
Command button) that enables you to
access the system. When you push the button
you hear the word Uconnect followed by a BEEP.
The beep is your signal to give a command.
NOTE:
The driver side upper windshield trim contains
the microphone for the Uconnect Phone.
Voice Command Button
Actual button location may vary with the radio.
The individual buttons are described in the
“Operation” section.
The Uconnect Phone can be used with any
Hands-Free Profile certified Bluetooth® mobile
phone. See the Uconnect website for supported
phones. Refer to your mobile service provider or
the phone manufacturer for details.
The Uconnect Phone is fully integrated with the
vehicle's audio system. The volume of the
Uconnect Phone can be adjusted either from
the radio volume control knob or from the
steering wheel radio control (right switch), if
equipped.
The Uconnect display will be used for visual
prompts from the Uconnect Phone such as
“CELL” or caller ID on certain radios.
Operation
Voice commands can be used to operate the
Uconnect Phone and to navigate through the
Uconnect Phone menu structure. Voice
commands are required after most Uconnect
Phone prompts. You will be prompted for a
specific command and then guided through the
available options.
Prior to giving a voice command, wait for the
beep, which follows the “Ready” prompt or
another prompt.
For certain operations, compound
commands can be used. For example,
instead of saying “Setup” and then “Phone
Pairing,” the following compound command
can be said: “Setup Phone Pairing.”
For each feature explanation in this section,
only the compound form of the voice
command is given. You can also break the
commands into parts and say each part of
the command when you are asked for it. For
example, you can use the compound form
voice command “Phonebook New Entry,” or
you can break the compound form command
into two voice commands: “Phonebook” and
“New Entry.” Please remember, the Uconnect
Phone works best when you talk in a normal
conversational tone, as if speaking to
someone sitting a few feet/meters away from
you.
Help Command
If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you
want to know your options at any prompt, say
“Help” following the beep. The Uconnect Phone
will play all the options at any prompt if you ask
for help.
WARNING!
Any voice commanded system should be
used only in safe driving conditions following
all applicable laws. Your attention should be
focused on safely operating the vehicle.
Failure to do so may result in a collision
causing serious injury or death.
9
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 305
306 MULTIMEDIA
To activate the Uconnect Phone from idle,
simply push the Phone button and follow the
audible prompts for directions. All Uconnect
Phone sessions begin with a push of the Phone
button on the faceplate.
Cancel Command
At any prompt, after the beep, you can say
“Cancel” and you will be returned to the main
menu. However, in a few instances the system
will take you back to the previous menu.
Pair (Link) Uconnect Phone To A Mobile
Phone
To begin using your Uconnect Phone, you must
pair your compatible Bluetooth®-enabled
mobile phone.
To complete the pairing process, you will need
to reference your mobile phone Owner's
Manual. The Uconnect website may also
provide detailed instructions for pairing.
The following are general phone to Uconnect
Phone pairing instructions:
Push the Phone button to begin.
After the “Ready” prompt and the following
beep, say “Setup Phone Pairing.”
When prompted, after the beep, say “Pair a
Phone” and follow the audible prompts.
You will be asked to say a four-digit Personal
Identification Number (PIN), which you will
later need to enter into your mobile phone.
You can enter any four-digit PIN. You will not
need to remember this PIN after the initial
pairing process.
For identification purposes, you will be
prompted to give the Uconnect Phone a
name for your mobile phone. Each mobile
phone that is paired should be given a unique
phone name.
You will then be asked to give your mobile
phone a priority level between one and
seven, with one being the highest priority.
You can pair up to seven mobile phones to
your Uconnect Phone. However, at any given
time, only one mobile phone can be in use,
connected to your Uconnect System. The
priority allows the Uconnect Phone to know
which mobile phone to use if multiple mobile
phones are in the vehicle at the same time.
For example, if priority three and priority five
phones are present in the vehicle, the
Uconnect Phone will use the priority three
mobile phone when you make a call. You can
select to use a lower priority mobile phone at
any time (refer to “Advanced Phone Connec-
tivity” in this section).
NOTE:
Software updates on your phone or the
Uconnect system may interfere with the
Bluetooth® connection. If this happens, simply
repeat the pairing process. However, first, make
sure to delete the device from the list of phones
on your Uconnect system. Next, be sure to
remove Uconnect from the list of devices in your
phone’s Bluetooth® settings.
Dial By Saying A Number
Push the Phone button to begin.
After the “Ready” prompt and the following
beep, say “Dial.”
The system will prompt you to say the number
you want to call.
For example, you can say “234-567-8901.”
The Uconnect Phone will confirm the phone
number and then dial. The number will
appear in the display of certain radios.
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 306
MULTIMEDIA 307
Call By Saying A Name
Push the Phone button to begin.
After the “Ready” prompt and the following
beep, say “Call.”
The system will prompt you to say the name
of the person you want to call.
After the “Ready” prompt and the following
beep, say the name of the person you want to
call. For example, you can say “John Doe,”
where John Doe is a previously stored name
entry in the Uconnect phonebook or down-
loaded phonebook. To learn how to store a
name in the phonebook, refer to “Add Names
To Your Uconnect Phonebook”, in this
section.
The Uconnect system will confirm the name
and then dial the corresponding phone
number, which may appear in the display of
certain radios.
Phonebook Download – Automatic
Phonebook Transfer From Mobile Phone
If equipped and specifically supported by your
phone, Uconnect Phone automatically
downloads names (text names) and number
entries from your mobile phone’s phonebook.
Specific Bluetooth® Phones with Phone Book
Access Profile may support this feature. See
Uconnect website for supported phones.
To call a name from downloaded (or
Uconnect) Phonebook, follow the procedure
in “Call by Saying a Name” section.
Automatic download and update, if
supported, begins as soon as the Bluetooth®
wireless phone connection is made to the
Uconnect Phone, for example, after you start
the vehicle.
A maximum of 1,000 entries per phone will
be downloaded and updated every time a
phone is connected to the Uconnect Phone.
Depending on the maximum number of
entries downloaded, there may be a short
delay before the latest downloaded names
can be used. Until then, if available, the
previous downloaded phonebook is available
for use.
Only the phonebook of the currently
connected mobile phone is accessible.
Only the mobile phone’s phonebook is down-
loaded. SIM card phonebook is not part of
the Mobile phonebook.
This downloaded phonebook cannot be
edited or deleted on the Uconnect Phone.
These can only be edited on the mobile
phone. The changes are transferred and
updated to Uconnect Phone on the next
phone connection.
Add Names To Your Uconnect Phonebook
NOTE:
Adding names to the Uconnect Phonebook is
recommended when the vehicle is not in
motion.
Push the Phone button to begin.
After the “Ready” prompt and the following
beep, say “Phonebook New Entry.”
When prompted, say the name of the new
entry. Use of long names helps the Voice
Command system, and it is recommended.
For example, say “Robert Smith” or “Robert”
instead of “Bob.”
9
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 307
308 MULTIMEDIA
When prompted, enter the number designa-
tion (e.g., “Home,” “Work,” “Mobile,” or
“Other”). This will allow you to store multiple
numbers for each phonebook entry, if
desired.
When prompted, recite the phone number for
the phonebook entry that you are adding.
After you are finished adding an entry into the
phonebook, you will be given the opportunity to
add more phone numbers to the current entry
or to return to the main menu.
The Uconnect Phone will allow you to enter up to
32 names in the phonebook with each name
having up to four associated phone numbers
and designations. Each language has a
separate 32-name phonebook accessible only
in that language. In addition, if equipped and
supported by your phone, Uconnect Phone
automatically downloads your mobile phone’s
phonebook.
Edit Uconnect Phonebook Entries
Push the Phone button to begin.
After the “Ready” prompt and the following
beep, say “Phonebook Edit.”
You will then be asked for the name of the
phonebook entry that you wish to edit.
Next, choose the number designation (home,
work, mobile, or other) that you wish to edit.
When prompted, recite the new phone
number for the phonebook entry that you are
editing.
After you are finished editing an entry in the
phonebook, you will be given the opportunity to
edit another entry in the phonebook, call the
number you just edited, or return to the main
menu.
NOTE:
Editing names in the phonebook is recom-
mended when the vehicle is not in motion.
Automatic downloaded phonebook entries
cannot be deleted or edited.
“Phonebook Edit” can be used to add another
phone number to a name entry that already
exists in the phonebook. For example, the entry
John Doe may have a mobile and a home
number, but you can add “John Doe's” work
number later using the “Phonebook Edit”
feature.
Delete Uconnect Phonebook Entry
NOTE:
Editing phonebook entries is recommended
when the vehicle is not in motion.
To delete a Uconnect phonebook entry using
Voice Commands:
1. Push the Phone button to begin.
2. After the “Ready” prompt and the following
beep, say “Phonebook Delete.”
3. After you enter the Phonebook Delete
menu, you will then be asked for the name
of the entry that you wish to delete. You can
either say the name of a phonebook entry
that you wish to delete, or you can say “List
Names” to hear a list of the entries in the
phonebook from which you choose. To
select one of the entries from the list, push
the Voice Command button while the
Uconnect Phone is playing the desired entry
and say “Delete.”
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 308
MULTIMEDIA 309
4. After you enter the name, the Uconnect
Phone will ask you which designation you
wish to delete: home, work, mobile, other, or
all. Say the designation you wish to delete.
Note that only the phonebook entry in the
current language is deleted.
NOTE:
Automatic downloaded phonebook entries
cannot be deleted or edited.
Delete/Erase “All” Uconnect Phonebook
Entries
NOTE:
ONLY the phonebook in the current language
is deleted.
Automatic downloaded phonebook entries
cannot be deleted or edited.
To delete or erase all Uconnect phonebook
entries using Voice Command:
1. Push the Phone button to begin.
2. After the “Ready” prompt and the following
beep, say “Phonebook Erase All.”
The Uconnect Phone will ask you to verify
that you wish to delete all the entries
from the phonebook.
3. After confirmation, the phonebook entries
will be deleted.
List All Names In The Uconnect Phonebook
Push the Phone button to begin.
After the “Ready” prompt and the following
beep, say “Phonebook List Names.”
The Uconnect Phone will play the names of
all the phonebook entries, including the
downloaded phonebook entries, if available.
To call one of the names in the list, push the
Voice Recognition button during the
playing of the desired name, and say “Call.”
NOTE:
The user can also exercise “Edit” or “Delete”
operations at this point.
The Uconnect Phone will then prompt you as
to the number designation you wish to call.
The selected number will be dialed.
Phone Call Features
The following features can be accessed through
the Uconnect Phone if the feature(s) are
available on your mobile service plan. For
example, if your mobile service plan provides
three-way calling, this feature can be accessed
through the Uconnect Phone. Check with your
mobile service provider for the features that you
have.
Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call — No Call
Currently In Progress
When you receive a call on your mobile phone,
the Uconnect Phone will interrupt the vehicle
audio system, if on, and will ask if you would like
to answer the call. Push the Phone button to
accept the call. To reject the call, push and hold
the Phone button until you hear a single
beep, indicating that the incoming call was
rejected.
9
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 309
310 MULTIMEDIA
Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call — Call
Currently In Progress
If a call is currently in progress and you have
another incoming call, you will hear the same
network tones for call waiting that you normally
hear when using your mobile phone. Push the
Phone button to place the current call on
hold and answer the incoming call.
NOTE:
The Uconnect Phone compatible phones in the
market today do not support rejecting an
incoming call when another call is in progress.
Therefore, the user can only answer an
incoming call or ignore it.
Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In
Progress
To make a second call while you are currently on
a call, push the Voice Recognition button
and say “Dial” or “Call” followed by the phone
number or phonebook entry you wish to call.
The first call will be on hold while the second call
is in progress. To go back to the first call, refer
to “Toggling Between Calls” in this section. To
combine two calls, refer to “Conference Call” in
this section.
Place/Retrieve A Call From Hold
To put a call on hold, push the Phone button
until you hear a single beep. This indicates that
the call is on hold. To bring the call back from
hold, push and hold the Phone button until
you hear a single beep.
Toggling Between Calls
If two calls are in progress (one active and one
on hold), push the Phone button until you
hear a single beep, indicating that the active
and hold status of the two calls have switched.
Only one call can be placed on hold at a time.
Conference Call
When two calls are in progress (one active and
one on hold):
1. Push and hold the Phone button until
you hear a double beep, indicating that the
two calls have been joined into one
conference call.
Three-Way Calling
To initiate three-way calling, push the Voice
Recognition button while a call is in
progress, and make a second phone call, as
described under “Making a Second Call While
Current Call is in Progress.” After the second
call has established, push and hold the Phone
button until you hear a double beep,
indicating that the two calls have been joined
into one conference call.
Call Termination
To end a call in progress:
1. Momentarily push the Phone button .
Only the active call(s) will be terminated
and if there is a call on hold, it will
become the new active call. If the active
call is terminated by the phone far end, a
call on hold may not become active
automatically. This is cell
phone-dependent.
2. To bring the call back from hold, push and
hold the Phone button until you hear a
single beep.
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 310
MULTIMEDIA 311
Redial
To redial the last number called from your
mobile phone using Voice Command:
1. Push the Phone button to begin.
2. After the “Ready” prompt and the following
beep, say “Redial.”
The Uconnect Phone will call the last
number that was dialed from your mobile
phone.
NOTE:
This may not be the last number dialed from the
Uconnect Phone.
Call Continuation
Call continuation is the progression of a phone
call on the Uconnect Phone after the vehicle
ignition has been switched to OFF. Call contin-
uation functionality available on the vehicle can
be any one of three types:
1. After the ignition is switched to OFF, a call
can continue on the Uconnect Phone either
until the call ends, or until the vehicle
battery condition dictates cessation of the
call on the Uconnect Phone and transfer of
the call to the mobile phone.
2. After the ignition is cycled to OFF, a call can
continue on the Uconnect Phone for a
certain duration, after which the call is
automatically transferred from the
Uconnect Phone to the mobile phone.
3. An active call is automatically transferred to
the mobile phone after the ignition is cycled
to OFF.
Uconnect Phone Features
Language Selection
To change the language that the Uconnect
Phone is using:
Push the Phone button to begin.
After the “Ready” prompt and the following
beep, say the name of the language you wish
to switch to / English, Spanish, or French.
Continue to follow the system prompts to
complete the language selection.
After selecting one of the languages, all
prompts and voice commands will be in that
language.
NOTE:
After every Uconnect Phone language change
operation, only the language-specific 32-name
phonebook is usable. The paired phone name is
not language-specific and usable across all
languages.
Emergency Assistance
If you are in an emergency and the mobile
phone is reachable:
Pick up the phone and manually dial the
emergency number for your area.
If the phone is not reachable and the Uconnect
Phone is operational, you may reach the
emergency number as follows:
Push the Phone button to begin.
After the “Ready” prompt and the following
beep, say “Emergency” and the Uconnect
Phone will instruct the paired mobile phone
to call the emergency number.
9
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 311
312 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE:
The emergency number dialed is based on
the country where the vehicle is purchased
(911 for the US and Canada and 060 for
Mexico). The number dialed may not be appli-
cable with the available mobile service and
area.
If supported, this number may be program-
mable on some systems. To do this, push the
Phone button and say “Setup,” followed
by “Emergency.”
The Uconnect Phone does slightly lower your
chances of successfully making a phone call.
Roadside Assistance/Towing Assistance
If you need roadside assistance:
Push the Phone button to begin.
After the “Ready” prompt and the following
beep, say “Towing Assistance”.
NOTE:
You should program the desired Towing
Assistance phone number using the Voice
Command system. To do this, push the Phone
button and say “Setup,” followed by “Towing
Assistance.” When prompted say
1-800-521-2779 for U.S., 1-800-363-4869 for
Canada, 55-14-3454 for Mexico City and
1-800-712-3040 for outside Mexico City in
Mexico.
Paging
To learn how to page, refer to “Working With
Automated Systems.” Paging works properly
except for pagers of certain companies, which
time out a little too soon to work properly with
the Uconnect Phone.
Voice Mail Calling
To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to
“Working With Automated Systems.”
Working With Automated Systems
This method is used in instances where one
generally has to press numbers on the mobile
phone keypad while navigating through an
automated telephone system.
You can use your Uconnect Phone to access a
voice mail system or an automated service,
such as a paging service or automated
customer service line. Some services require
immediate response selection. In some
instances, that may be too quick for use of the
Uconnect Phone.
When calling a number with your Uconnect
Phone that normally requires you to enter in a
touch-tone sequence on your mobile phone
keypad, you can push the Voice Recognition
button and say the sequence you wish to
enter, followed by the word “Send.” For
example, if required to enter your PIN followed
with a pound, (3 7 4 6 #), you can push the
Voice Recognition button and say, “3 7 4 6 #
Send.” Saying a number, or sequence of
numbers, followed by “Send,” is also to be used
for navigating through an automated customer
service center menu structure, and to leave a
number on a pager.
WARNING!
To use your Uconnect Phone System in an
emergency, your mobile phone must be:
Turned on.
Paired to the Uconnect System.
Have network coverage.
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 312
MULTIMEDIA 313
You can also send stored Uconnect Phonebook
entries as tones for fast and easy access to
voice mail and pager entries. To use this
feature, dial the number you wish to call and
then push the Voice Command button and
say, “Send.” The system will prompt you to enter
the name or number and say the name of the
phonebook entry you wish to send. The
Uconnect Phone will then send the
corresponding phone number associated with
the phonebook entry, as tones over the phone.
NOTE:
You may not hear all of the tones due to
mobile phone network configurations. This is
normal.
Some paging and voice mail systems have
system time out settings that are too short
and may not allow the use of this feature.
Barge In – Overriding Prompts
The “Voice Command” button can be used
when you wish to skip part of a prompt and
issue your voice command immediately. For
example, if a prompt is asking “Would you like
to pair a phone, clear a...,” you could push the
Voice Recognition button and say, “Pair a
Phone” to select that option without having to
listen to the rest of the voice prompt.
Turning Confirmation Prompts On/Off
Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the
system from confirming your choices (e.g., the
Uconnect Phone will not repeat a phone
number before you dial it).
To turn confirmation prompts on or off using
Voice Command:
1. Push the Phone button to begin.
2. After the “Ready” prompt and the following
beep, say:
“Setup Confirmations Prompts On” or
“Setup Confirmations Prompts Off”
Phone And Network Status Indicators
If available on the radio and/or on a premium
display such as the instrument panel cluster,
and supported by your mobile phone, the
Uconnect Phone will provide notification to
inform you of your phone and network status
when you are attempting to make a phone call
using Uconnect Phone. The status is given for
roaming, network signal strength, phone battery
strength, etc.
Dialing Using The Mobile Phone Keypad
You can dial a phone number with your mobile
phone keypad and still use the Uconnect Phone
(while dialing via the mobile phone keypad, the
user must exercise caution and take precau-
tionary safety measures). By dialing a number
with your paired Bluetooth® mobile phone, the
audio will be played through your vehicles audio
system. The Uconnect Phone will work the same
as if you dial the number using Voice Command.
NOTE:
Certain brands of mobile phones do not send
the dial ring to the Uconnect Phone to play it on
the vehicle audio system, so you will not hear it.
Under this situation, after successfully dialing a
number the user may feel that the call did not
go through even though the call is in progress.
Once your call is answered, you will hear the
audio.
9
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 313
314 MULTIMEDIA
Mute/Unmute (Mute ON/OFF)
When you mute the Uconnect Phone, you will
still be able to hear the conversation coming
from the other party, but the other party will not
be able to hear you. To mute the Uconnect
Phone:
Push the Voice Recognition button .
Following the beep, say “Mute.”
To unmute the Uconnect Phone:
Push the Voice Recognition button .
Following the beep, say “Mute off.”
Advanced Phone Connectivity
Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone
The Uconnect Phone allows ongoing calls to be
transferred from your mobile phone to the
Uconnect Phone without terminating the call. To
transfer an ongoing call from your Uconnect
Phone paired mobile phone to the Uconnect
Phone or vice versa, push the Voice Recognition
button and say “Transfer Call.”
Connect Or Disconnect Link Between The
Uconnect Phone And Mobile Phone
Your mobile phone can be paired with many
different electronic devices, but can only be
actively "connected" with one electronic device
at a time.
If you would like to connect or disconnect the
Bluetooth® connection between a Uconnect
Phone paired mobile phone and the Uconnect
Phone, follow the instructions described in your
mobile phone user manual.
List Paired Mobile Phone Names
Push the Phone button to begin.
After the “Ready” prompt and the following
beep, say “Setup Phone Pairing”.
When prompted, say “List Phones”.
The Uconnect Phone will play the phone
names of all paired mobile phones in order
from the highest to the lowest priority. To
“Select” or “Delete” a paired phone being
announced, push the Voice Command
button and say “Select” or “Delete”. Also, see
the next two sections for an alternate way to
“Select” or “Delete” a paired phone.
Select Another Mobile Phone
This feature allows you to select and start using
another phone paired with the Uconnect Phone.
Push the Phone button to begin.
After the “Ready” prompt and the following
beep, say “Setup Select Phone” and follow
the prompts.
You can also push the Voice Recognition
button at any time while the list is being
played, and then choose the phone that you
wish to select.
The selected phone will be used for the next
phone call. If the selected phone is not avail-
able, the Uconnect Phone will return to using
the highest priority phone present in or near
30 ft (9 m) of the vehicle.
Delete Uconnect Phone Paired Mobile Phones
Push the Phone button to begin.
After the “Ready” prompt and the following
beep, say “Setup Phone Pairing”.
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 314
MULTIMEDIA 315
At the next prompt, say “Delete” and follow
the prompts.
You can also push the Voice Recognition
button at any time while the list is being
played, and then choose the phone you wish
to delete.
Things You Should Know About Your
Uconnect Phone
Uconnect Phone Tutorial
To hear a brief tutorial of the system features,
push the Phone button and say “Uconnect
Tutorial.”
Voice Training
For users experiencing difficulty with the system
recognizing their voice commands or numbers,
the Uconnect Phone Voice Training feature may
be used. To enter this training mode, follow one
of the two following procedures:
From outside the Uconnect Phone mode
(e.g., from radio mode), push and hold the
Voice Recognition button for five seconds
until the session begins, or,
Push the Voice Recognition button and
say the “Voice Training,” “System Training,”
or “Start Voice Training” command.
You can either push the Uconnect Phone button
to restore the factory setting or repeat the
words and phrases when prompted by the
Uconnect Phone. For best results, the Voice
Training session should be completed when the
vehicle is parked with the engine running, all
windows closed, and the blower fan switched
off.
This procedure may be repeated with a new
user. The system will adapt to the last trained
voice only.
Reset
To Reset all settings using Voice Command:
1. Push the Phone button .
2. After the “Ready” prompt and the following
beep, say “Setup,” then “Reset.”
This will delete all phone pairing, phone
book entries, and other settings in all
language modes. The System will prompt
you before resetting to factory settings.
Voice Command
For best performance:
Adjust the rearview mirror to provide at least
1/2-inch (1 cm) gap between the overhead
console (if equipped) and the mirror.
Always wait for the beep before speaking.
Speak normally without pausing, just as you
would speak to a person sitting a few feet/
meters away from you.
Make sure that no one other than you is
speaking during a Voice Command period.
Performance is maximized under:
Low-to-medium blower setting
Low-to-medium vehicle speed
Low road noise
Smooth road surface
Fully closed windows
Dry weather condition
9
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 315
316 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE:
Even though the system is designed for users
speaking in North American English, French,
and Spanish accents, the system may not
always work for some.
When navigating through an automated
system such as voice mail, or when sending
a page, at the end of speaking the digit string,
make sure to say “Send.”
Storing names in the phonebook when the
vehicle is not in motion is recommended.
It is not recommended to store similar
sounding names in the Uconnect Phonebook.
Phonebook (Downloaded and Uconnect
Phone Local) name recognition rate is opti-
mized when the entries are not similar.
Numbers must be spoken in single digits.
“800” must be spoken “eight-zero-zero” not
“eight hundred.”
You can say “O” (letter “O”) for “0” (zero).
Even though international dialing for most
number combinations is supported, some
shortcut dialing number combinations may
not be supported.
Far End Audio Performance
Audio quality is maximized under:
Low-to-medium blower setting
Low-to-medium vehicle speed
Low road noise
Smooth road surface
Fully closed windows
Dry weather conditions
Operation from the driver's seat
Performance, such as audio clarity, echo,
and loudness to a large degree relies on the
phone and network, and not the Uconnect
Phone
Echo at the phone far end can sometimes be
reduced by lowering the in-vehicle audio
volume
Recent Calls
If your phone supports “Automatic Phonebook
Download,” Uconnect Phone can list your
Outgoing, Incoming and Missed Calls.
SMS
Uconnect Phone can read or send new
messages on your phone.
Read Messages:
If you receive a new text message while your
phone is connected to Uconnect Phone, an
announcement will be made to notify you that
you have a new text message. If you wish to
hear the new message:
1. Push the Phone button .
2. After the “Ready” prompt and the following
beep, say “SMS Read” or “Read Messages”.
Uconnect Phone will play the new text
message for you.
After reading a message, you can “Reply” or
“Forward” the message using Uconnect Phone.
Send Messages:
You can send messages using Uconnect Phone.
To send a new message:
1. Push the Phone button .
2. After the “Ready” prompt and the following
beep, say “SMS Send” or “Send Message”.
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 316
MULTIMEDIA 317
3. You can either say the message you wish to
send or say “List Messages.” There are 20
preset messages.
To send a message, push the Voice Command
button while the system is listing the
message and say “Send”.
Uconnect Phone will prompt you to say the
name or number of the person you wish to send
the message to.
List of Preset Messages:
1. Yes
2. No
3. Where are you?
4. I need more direction
5. L O L
6. Why
7. I love you
8. Call me
9. Call me later
10. Thanks
11. See You in 15 minutes
12. I am on my way
13. I’ll be late
14. Are you there yet?
15. Where are we meeting?
16. Can this wait?
17. Bye for now
18. When can we meet?
19. Send number to call
20. Start without me
Turn SMS Incoming Announcement ON/OFF
Turning the SMS Incoming Announcement Off
will stop the system from announcing the new
incoming messages.
1. Push the Phone button .
2. After the “Ready” prompt and the following
beep, say “Setup, SMS Incoming Message
Announcement,” you will then be given a
choice to change it.
Bluetooth® Communication Link
Mobile phones have been found to lose
connection to the Uconnect Phone. When this
happens, the connection can generally be
reestablished by switching the phone off/on.
Your mobile phone is recommended to remain
in Bluetooth® On mode.
Navigation — If Equipped
Safety Precautions And Important
Information
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
steering wheel. You have full responsibility
and assume all risks related to the use of
the Uconnect features and applications in
this vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is
safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in
an accident involving serious injury or
death.
ALWAYS follow the law! Failure to follow
traffic laws may result in serious injury or
death.
9
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 317
318 MULTIMEDIA
Warning
Read this information carefully before starting
to operate the navigation system and follow the
instructions in this manual. Neither the FCA US
LLC nor Garmin® shall be liable for problems or
accidents resulting from failure to observe the
instructions in this manual.
Failure to avoid the following potentially
hazardous situations could result in an accident
or collision resulting in death or serious injury.
Always drive safely. Only use the navigation
features in this vehicle when it is safe to do
so. You accept full responsibility for the use
of the features in this vehicle.
When navigating, carefully compare informa-
tion displayed on the navigation system to all
available navigation sources, including road
signs, road closures, road conditions, traffic
congestion, weather conditions, and other
factors that may affect safety while driving.
For safety, always resolve any discrepancies
before continuing navigation, and defer to
posted road signs and road conditions.
The navigation system is designed to provide
route suggestions. It is not a replacement for
driver attentiveness and good judgment. Do
not follow route suggestions if they suggest
an unsafe or illegal maneuver or would place
the vehicle in an unsafe situation.
Be careful of the ambient temperature. Using
the navigation system at extreme tempera-
tures can lead to malfunction or damage.
Also note that the unit can be damaged by
strong vibration, metal objects, or by water
getting inside the unit.
Caution
The navigation system is designed to provide
you with route suggestions. It does not reflect
road closures or road conditions, weather
conditions, or other factors that may affect
safety or timing while driving.
Use the navigation system only as a naviga-
tional aid. Do not attempt to use the navigation
system for any purpose requiring precise
measurement of direction, distance, location,
or topography.
The Global Positioning System (GPS) is
operated by the United States government,
which is solely responsible for its accuracy and
maintenance. The government system is
subject to changes that could affect the
accuracy and performance of all GPS
equipment, including the navigation system.
Notice
This navigation system can be used when the
ignition key is turned to ON/RUN or ACC. To
preserve the battery, however, it should be used
with the engine running whenever possible.
Using the navigation system for a long time with
the engine switched off can cause the battery to
run down.
Map Data Information
Garmin® uses a combination of governmental
and private data sources. Virtually all data
sources contain some inaccurate or incomplete
data. In some countries, complete and accurate
map information is either not available or is
prohibitively expensive.
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 318
MULTIMEDIA 319
Getting Started
To access the Navigation system on your Radio,
press the NAV button in the upper right corner
of the screen during any Radio or Media mode.
Setting Up Your System
When using your navigation system for the first
time, complete the following tasks:
1. Acquire satellites.
2. Understand the main menu.
Acquiring Satellites
The bars indicate satellite strength.
Go to an open area, away from tall buildings and
trees.
Acquiring satellite signals can take a few
minutes.
Main Menu
Using The On-Screen Buttons
Press and hold to quickly return to the
main menu.
Press and to see more choices.
Press and hold and to scroll faster.
Using The On-screen Keyboard
Press a character on the keyboard to enter a
letter or number.
Press “Space” to add a space.
Press to delete a character.
Press and hold to erase the entire entry.
Press to select the keyboard language
mode.
Press to enter special characters, such as
punctuation marks.
Finding A Point Of Interest
The detailed maps loaded in your navigation
system contain points of interest, such as
restaurants, hotels and auto services.
1. From the main menu, press
Where To? >
Points of Interest
.
2. Select a category.
3. If necessary, select a subcategory.
4. Select a destination.
5. Press Go!
1 — Press To Find A Destination
2 — Press To View The Map
3 — Press To Stop A Route
4 — Press To Detour A Route
5 — Press To Open The Menu Of Tools
6 — Press To Open The Menu Of Settings
9
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 319
320 MULTIMEDIA
Finding A Location By Spelling The Name
1. From the main menu, press
Where To? >
Points of Interest > Spell Name
.
2. Enter all or part of the name.
3. Press Done.
4. Select a destination.
5. Press Go!
Adding Points To The Active Route
1. While navigating a route, press to return
to the main menu.
2. From the main menu, press Where To?
3. Select a category.
4. If necessary, select a subcategory.
5. Select a destination.
6. Press Go!
7. Press Add as a Via Point.
Changing The Destination Of The Active Route
Before you can change destinations you must
be navigating a route.
1. Press to return to the main menu.
2. Press Where To?
3. Search for the location.
4. Press Go!
5. Press Set as a New Destination.
Taking A Detour
While navigating a route, you can use detours to
avoid obstacles ahead of you, such as
construction zones.
NOTE:
If the route you are currently taking is the only
reasonable option, the navigation system might
not calculate a detour.
1. While navigating a route, press .
2. From the main menu, press Detour.
Stopping The Route
1. While navigating a route, press .
2. From the main menu, press Stop.
Finding Locations
The Where To? menu provides several different
categories you can use to search for locations.
To perform a simple search, see the “Getting
Started” section.
Finding An Address
NOTE:
Depending on the version of the built-in map
data on your navigation system, the button
names, and the order of steps could be
different than the steps below.
1. From the main menu, press
Where To? >
Address
.
2. If necessary, change the state, the country,
or the province.
3. Press Spell City.
4. Enter the city/postal code.
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 320
MULTIMEDIA 321
NOTE:
If you are unsure of the city/postal code, press
Search All.
5. Press Done.
6. If necessary, select the city/postal code.
NOTE:
Not all map data provides postal code
searching.
7. Enter the number of the address.
8. Press Done.
9. Enter the street name.
10. Press Done.
11. If necessary, select the street.
12. If necessary, select the address.
Using The Go! Page
The Go! page opens when you select a location
to navigate to.
1. Press to call the selected location when
your device is connected to phone, or to
save the location to your favorites.
2. Press to switch between 2D and 3D view.
3. Press to rotate the view.
4. Press to view more information for the
location.
5. Press to zoom in and out.
6. Press to return to the previous page. Press
and hold to return to the main menu.
7. Press to create a turn-by-turn route to this
location.
Setting A Home Location
You can set your home location for the location
you return to most often.
1. From the main menu, press
Where To? >
Go Home
.
2. Select Enter My Address, Use My Current
Location or Recently Found.
Going Home
Before you can navigate to home you must set
a home location.
From the main menu, press Where To? > Go
Home.
Editing Your Home Location Information
1. From the main menu, press
Where To? >
Favorites > Home
.
2. Press > Edit.
3. Enter your changes.
4. Press Done.
9
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 321
322 MULTIMEDIA
Viewing A List Of Recently Found Locations
Your navigation system stores the last 50
locations you have found.
From the main menu, press Where To? >
Recently Found.
Clearing The List Of Recently Found Locations
From the main menu, press Where To? >
Recently Found > > Clear > Yes.
About Favorites
You can save locations in your Favorites so you
can quickly find them and create routes to
them. Your home location is also stored in
Favorites.
Saving Your Current Location To Favorites
1. From the map, press the vehicle icon.
2. Press Save.
3. Enter a name.
4. Press Done.
The location is saved in Favorites.
Saving Locations To Favorites
1. Search for the location.
2. From the Go! page, press > Save > OK.
Finding Favorites
1. From the main menu, press
Where To? >
Favorites
.
2. If necessary, select a category.
3. Select a saved location.
Editing Favorites
1. From the main menu, press
Where To? >
Favorites
.
2. Select a category.
3. Select a favorite.
4. Press the information box.
5. Press > Edit.
6. Select an option:
Name
Phone Number
Categories
Change Map Symbol
7. Edit the information.
8. Press Done.
Planning A Trip
You can use Trip Planner to create and save a
trip with multiple destinations.
1. From the main menu, press
Where To? >
Trip Planner
.
2. Press .
3. Press Select Start Location.
4. Search for a location.
5. Press Select.
6. Press to add an additional location.
7. Press Select.
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 322
MULTIMEDIA 323
8. Repeat steps four to six to add additional
locations to your trip.
9. Press Next.
10. Enter a name.
11. Press Done.
Editing A Saved Trip
1. From the main menu, press
Where To? >
Trip Planner
.
2. Select a saved trip.
3. Press
4. Select an option:
Press Rename Trip to edit the trip name.
Press Edit Destinations to add or delete
locations.
Press Delete Trip to delete the entire trip.
Press Optimize Order to arrange your trip
locations in the most efficient order.
Navigating To A Saved Trip
1. From the main menu, press
Where To? >
Trip Planner
.
2. Select a saved trip.
3. Press Go!
Using The Map Buttons
1. From the main menu, press
Where To? >
Browse Map
.
2. Press anywhere on the map.
Press and to zoom in and out.
Press to switch between 2D and 3D
views.
Press to rotate the view.
Browsing The Map By Pressing The Touch-
screen
Press an area on the map to select a location.
An information box appears next to the loca-
tion.
Press and drag the map to view different
parts of the map.
Press the map twice to zoom in and center on
a location.
Finding A Location Using The Map
1. From the main menu, press
Where To? >
Browse Map
.
2. Press a location.
An information box appears next to the loca-
tion.
3. Press the information box.
4. Select an option:
Press > Save.
5. Press Go!
9
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 323
324 MULTIMEDIA
Setting A Simulated Location
You can use the GPS simulator to select another
location, near which you can search for and
save points of interest. This may be helpful
when planning trips.
1. From the main menu, press
Tools >
Settings > System > GPS Simulator > On
.
2. From the main menu, press Where To? >
Browse Map.
3. Press an area on the map.
4. Press > Set Location.
Entering Coordinates
If you know the geographic coordinates of your
destination, you can use your navigation system
to navigate to the destination using the latitude
and longitude coordinates.
1. From the main menu, press
Where To? >
Coordinates
.
2. Press a field to enter the latitude and
longitude data.
3. Press View on Map.
4. Press Go!
Changing The Map Coordinate Format
1. From the Home Screen, press
Where To? >
Coordinates > > Format
.
2. Select a format.
About Map Pages
Viewing The Map While Navigating
NOTICE
In no event shall Garmin be liable for any
incidental, special, indirect, or consequential
damages, including, without limitation,
damages for any traffic fines or citations,
whether resulting from the use, misuse, or
inability to use the product or from defects in
the product. Some states do not allow the
exclusion of incidental or consequential
damages, so the above limitations may not
apply to you.
Your route is marked with a magenta line. A
checkered flag marks your destination.
As you travel, your navigation system guides you
to your destination with voice prompts, arrows
on the map, and directions at the top of the
map. If you depart from the original route, your
navigation system recalculates the route and
provides new directions.
A speed limit icon displaying the current speed
limit may appear as you travel on major
roadways.
Using The Navigation Map
1. Press to view the next turn.
The turn indicator also tells you which lane
you should be in to prepare for your next
maneuver, when available.
2. Press to view the turn list.
3. Press to zoom in and zoom out.
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 324
MULTIMEDIA 325
4. Press to view trip information.
5. Press to view information for the location.
6. Press to display a different data field.
7. Press to return to the main menu.
About myTrends
When the myTrends feature is enabled, your
estimated time of arrival for your frequent
destinations, like your workplace, automatically
appear in the navigation bar at the top of the
map.
When myTrends information appears in the
navigation bar, you can press the navigation bar
to view route options for the suggested
destination.
Enabling myTrends
From the main menu press Settings >
Navigation > myTrends > Enabled.
Viewing Trip Information
The trip information page displays your present
speed and provides statistics about your trip.
NOTE:
If you make frequent stops, leave the navigation
system turned on so it can accurately measure
elapsed time during the trip.
From the map, press the Speed field.
Resetting Trip Information
1. From the map, press the
Speed
field.
2. Press .
3. Select an option:
Press Reset Trip Mileage to reset the
information on the trip computer.
Press Reset Max. Speed to reset the
maximum speed.
Viewing The Turn List
When you are navigating a route, you can view
all of the turns for your entire route and the
distance between turns.
1. From the map, press the text bar on the top
of the map.
2. Select an option:
Select a turn on the list to view the next
turn.
Press > Map to view the entire route
on the map.
9
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 325
326 MULTIMEDIA
Viewing The Next Turn
Before you can view the next turn you must be
navigating a route.
The next turn shows the turn on the map and
the distance and time left before you reach the
turn.
Press the turn indicator in the top left corner of
the map.
Viewing The Junction View
Before you can view the junction view, you must
be navigating a route.
The junction view displays a view of some
upcoming junctions and in which lane you
should be driving.
Using The Tools
Viewing Current Location Information
Use the Where Am I? page to view information
about your current location. This feature is
helpful if you need to tell emergency personnel
your location.
From the main menu, press Tools > Where
Am I?
Finding Nearby Services
1. From the main menu, press
Tools > Where
Am I?
2. Press Hospitals, Police Stations or Fuel to
view the nearest locations in that category.
Using Help
From the main menu, press Tools > Help to view
information about using your navigation
system.
Searching Help Topics
From the main menu, press Tools > Help.
Using The World Clock
1. From the main menu, press
Tools > World
Clock
.
2. Press a city name.
3. Enter a new city name.
4. Press Done.
5. If necessary, select a city.
Viewing The World Map
From the main menu press Tools > World
Clock > .
Nighttime hours appear in the shaded area.
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 326
MULTIMEDIA 327
Using The Calculator
From the main menu press Tools > Calculator.
Using The Unit Converter
1. From the main menu press
Tools > Unit
Converter
.
2. Press the box with a unit of measurement
listed.
3. Select a unit of measurement.
4. Press Save.
Two units of measurement are listed.
5. Press a unit of measurement to change.
6. Select a unit of measurement.
7. Press Done.
8. Repeat steps five to six, if necessary.
9. Enter a value.
10. Press Done.
Setting Currency Conversion Rates Manually
You can update the currency conversion rates
manually so that you are always using the most
current rates.
1. From the main menu press
Tools > Unit
Converter
.
2. Press the box with a currency listed.
3. Select Currency.
4. Press Save.
5. Press a currency box.
6. Select the currency you want to update.
7. Repeat steps three to six to select a
currency to convert to, if necessary.
8. Press a box under a currency.
9. Enter a new value for the currency.
10. Press Done.
11. Repeat steps eight to nine, if necessary.
Customizing The Navigation System
1. From the main menu, press “Settings.”
2. Press a setting category.
3. Press the setting to change it.
System Settings
From the main menu press Settings > System.
GPS Simulator— stops the navigation system
from receiving a GPS signal, and saves
battery power.
About— displays the software version
number, the unit ID number and information
on several other software features.
9
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 327
328 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE:
You need this information when you update the
system software or purchase additional map
data.
Restoring The System Settings
From the main menu, press Settings > System
> > Restore.
Changing The Map Settings
From the main menu press Settings > Map.
Map Detail — sets the level of detail on the
map. More detail may result in slower map
drawing.
Map View — sets the perspective on the Map
page.
Map Theme — changes the color of the map
data.
Map Data Layout — changes the amount of
data visible on the map.
Vehicle — changes the icon to represent your
position on the map.
Trip Log
Show on Map — displays the path of your
travels on the map.
Clear Trip Log
Changing The Map Perspective
1. From the main menu press
Settings > Map
> Map View
.
2. Select an option:
PressTrack Up to display the map in two
dimensions (2-D), with your direction of
travel at the top.
Press North Up to display the map in 2-D
with North at the top.
Press 3-D to display the map in three
dimensions.
Route Preferences
From the main menu, press Settings >
Navigation > Route Preference.
The route calculation is based on road speeds
and vehicle acceleration data for a given route.
Faster Time — Calculates routes that are
faster to drive but can be longer in distance.
Shorter Distance — Calculates routes that are
shorter in distance but can take more time to
drive.
Prompted — Select the faster time and
shorter distance for your route.
Avoiding Road Features
1. From the main menu press
Settings >
Navigation > Avoidances
.
2. Select the road features to avoid on your
routes.
3. Press “Save.”
Restoring The Original Navigation Settings
From the main menu press Settings >
Navigation > > Restore.
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 328
MULTIMEDIA 329
Language Settings
From the main menu press Settings >
Language.
Voice Personality — sets the language for
voice prompts.
Keyboard — sets the language for your
keyboard.
Keyboard Layout — sets the keyboard layout.
Restoring The Original Language Settings
From the main menu press Settings >
Language > > Restore.
Restoring All Original Settings
From the main menu, press Settings > >
Restore > Yes.
Appendix
About GPS Satellite Signals
The navigation system must acquire satellite
signals in order to navigate.
When the navigation system has acquired
satellite signals, the signal strength bars on the
main menu are full . When it loses satellite
signals, the bars are clear .
For more information about GPS, go to
www.garmin.com/aboutGPS.
Updating The Software
To update the navigation system software, you
must have a USB mass storage device and an
Internet connection.
1. Go to
auto-update.garmin.com
.
2. Find your model and select Software
Updates > Download.
3. Read and accept the terms of the Software
License Agreement.
4. Follow the instructions on the Web site to
complete the installation of the software
update.
Updating The Map Data
To update the navigation system map, you must
have a USB mass storage device and an
Internet connection, or visit your local dealer for
assistance. A map update can be purchased
once a year.
1. Go to
auto-update.garmin.com
.
2. Select your vehicle from the drop-down lists.
3. Select Order Map Updates for your unit.
4. Follow the Web site instructions to update
your map.
CAUTION
Garmin and FCA US LLC are not responsible for
the accuracy of, or the consequences of using,
a safety camera database.
Safety camera information is available in some
locations. Go to http://www.garmin.com for
availability. For these locations, the navigation
system includes the locations of hundreds of
safety cameras. Your navigation system alerts
you when you are approaching a safety camera
and can warn you if you are driving too fast. The
data is updated at least weekly, so you always
have access to the most up-to-date information.
You can purchase a new region or extend an
existing subscription at any time. Each region
that you purchase has an expiration date.
9
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 329
330 MULTIMEDIA
Custom POIs (Points of Interest)
NOTE:
Custom POI files must be named “poi.gpi”. and
located on the USB storage device in a folder
named “POI” within a folder named “Garmin”
(Garmin/POI/).
You can manually load custom Points Of
Interest (POI) databases, available from various
companies on the Internet. Some custom POI
databases contain alert information for points
such as safety cameras and school zones. The
navigation system can notify you when you
approach one of these points. You are
responsible for ensuring that your use of safety
camera information is lawful in your area.
CAUTION
Garmin and FCA US LLC are not responsible for
the consequences of using custom POI
databases, or for the accuracy of custom POI
databases.
After downloading your POI database, use the
Garmin POI Loader to install the POIs onto a
USB mass storage device. Use the USB mass
storage device to load the POIs. The POI Loader
is available at garmin.com/products/poiloader.
Refer to the POI Loader Help file for more
information; click Help to open the Help file. The
file name can only be POI.gpi. No other file
name or extension should be used.
NOTE:
Each time you load custom POIs to the
navigation system, any other custom POIs
already saved in the system will be overwritten.
Finding Custom POIs
You can view a list of the custom POIs loaded in
your navigation system.
Press Where To? > Extras > Custom POIs.
Deleting Custom POIs
1. Press
Tools > My Data > Delete Custom
POI(s)
.
2. Press Yes to confirm.
NOTE:
All custom POIs will be deleted from your
navigation system.
Saving Trip Logs
Trip logs are recorded while you navigate a
route.
SiriusXM® Travel Link (Radio 430 NAV Only)
Now, in addition to delivering over 130
channels of the best sports, entertainment, talk
and 100% commercial-free music, SiriusXM®
now offers premium infotainment services that
work in conjunction with compatible navigation
systems.
To access SiriusXM® Travel Link, push the
Menu button then press the Travel Link button.
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 330
MULTIMEDIA 331
SiriusXM® Travel Link brings a wealth of useful
information into your vehicle and right to your
fingertips.
NOTE:
SiriusXM® Travel Link data services
subscription is separate from your SiriusXM®
Satellite Radio (audio) subscription.
Weather
View detailed current conditions at your
current location.
Check extended 12-hour and 5-day fore-
casts.
Store a favorite location for quick access to
weather conditions and forecasts.
Ski Info
View ski and snowboarding conditions at ski
resorts.
Store a favorite location for quick access to
snow conditions.
Fuel Prices
Check detailed price information for fuel
stations near your current location.
Sort the list of closest fuel stations by price,
distance or alphabetically.
Route to selected fuel station.
Store a favorite fuel station for quick access
to pricing.
Movie Listings
Check which movies are playing at theaters
near your current location.
Sort the list of theaters by distance or alpha-
betically.
Show movie titles, start times, ratings, run
length, and summaries.
Store a favorite theater for quick access to
schedules.
Sports Scores
View scores and upcoming events for all
major sports.
Store your favorite teams for quick access to
the scores and schedules.
9
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 331
332 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE:
SiriusXM® Travel Link data services
subscription is separate from your SiriusXM®
Satellite Radio (audio) subscription.
SiriusXM® and all related marks and logos are
trademarks of SiriusXM® Radio Inc. and its
subsidiaries. SiriusXM® Radio requires a
subscription, sold separately after trial
subscription included with vehicle purchase.
Prices and programming are provided by
SiriusXM® and are subject to change.
Subscriptions governed by Terms & Conditions
available at www.sirius.com/serviceterms.
SiriusXM® Radio U.S. service only available to
those at least 18 years of age in the 48
contiguous United States, D.C., & PR. Visit
www.sirius.com/TravelLink for more
information on SIRIUS Travel Link.
End-User License Agreement
Software License Agreement
BY USING THE NAVIGATION SYSTEM, YOU
AGREE TO BE BOUND BY THE TERMS AND
CONDITIONS OF THE FOLLOWING SOFTWARE
LICENSE AGREEMENT. PLEASE READ THIS
AGREEMENT CAREFULLY.
Garmin® Ltd. and its subsidiaries (“Garmin®”)
grant you a limited license to use the software
embedded in this device (the “Software”) in
binary executable form in the normal operation
of the product. Title, ownership rights, and
intellectual property rights in and to the
Software remain in Garmin® and/or its
third-party providers.
You acknowledge that the Software is the
property of Garmin® and/or its third-party
providers and is protected under the United
States of America copyright laws and interna-
tional copyright treaties. You further
acknowledge that the structure, organization,
and code of the Software, for which source code
is not provided, are valuable trade secrets of
Garmin® and/or its third-party providers and
that the Software in source code form remains
a valuable trade secret of Garmin® and/or its
third-party providers. You agree not to
decompile, disassemble, modify, reverse
assemble, reverse engineer, or reduce to
human readable form the Software or any part
thereof or create any derivative works based on
the Software. You agree not to export or
re-export the Software to any country in
violation of the export control laws of the United
States of America or the export control laws of
any other applicable country.
NAVTEQ End-user License Agreement
The software embedded in your Garmin®
product (the “Software”) is owned by Garmin®
Ltd. or its subsidiaries (“Garmin®”). The
third-party map data embedded in or
accompanying your Garmin® product
(the “Map Data”) is owned by NAVTEQ North
America LLC and/or its affiliates (“NAVTEQ”)
and is licensed to Garmin®. Garmin® also
licenses information, text, images, graphics,
photographs, audio, video, images and other
applications and data from third party data
providers (“Third Party Content Data”). The Map
Data and Third Party Content Data are collec-
tively the “Data”. Both the Software and Data
are protected under copyright laws and interna-
tional copyright treaties. The Software and Data
are licensed, not sold. The Software and Data
are provided under the following license and
CAUTION!
Neither SiriusXM® nor FCA US LLC is
responsible for any errors in accuracies in the
SiriusXM® data services or its use in
vehicles.
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 332
MULTIMEDIA 333
are subject to the following terms and
conditions which are agreed to by End User
(“you” or “your”), on the one hand, and
Garmin® and its licensors (including their
licensors and suppliers) and affiliated
companies on the other hand.
IMPORTANT: CAREFULLY READ THIS LICENSE
BEFORE USING THIS PRODUCT. INSTALLING,
COPYING, OR OTHERWISE USING THIS
PRODUCT INDICATES YOUR ACKNOWL-
EDGMENT THAT YOU HAVE READ THIS LICENSE
AND AGREE TO ITS TERMS. IF YOU DO NOT
AGREE, RETURN THE COMPLETE PRODUCT
WITHIN 7 DAYS OF THE DATE YOU ACQUIRED IT
(IF PURCHASED NEW) FOR A FULL REFUND TO
THE DEALER FROM WHICH YOU PURCHASED
THIS PRODUCT.
License Terms And Conditions
Garmin® (“we” or “us”) provides you with
storage media containing the computer
Software (the “Software”) and the embedded or
accompanying Data, including any “online” or
electronic documentation and printed materials
(together called the “Product” for purposes of
this License Agreement), and grants you a
limited, non-exclusive license to use the
Product in accordance with the terms of this
Agreement. You agree to use this Data together
with the Garmin® product for solely personal, or
if applicable, for use in your business’ internal
operations, and not for service bureau,
time-sharing, resale or other similar purposes.
Accordingly, but subject to the restrictions set
forth in the following paragraphs, you may copy
this Data only as necessary for your use to (i)
view it, and (ii) save it, provided that you do not
remove any copyright notices that appear and
do not modify the Software or Data in any way.
You agree not to otherwise reproduce, copy,
modify, decompile, disassemble, reverse
engineer or create derivative works of any
portion of the Product, and may not transfer or
distribute it in any form, for any purpose, except
to the extent permitted by mandatory laws.
Garmin® also reserves the right to discontinue
offering any Data supplied by any third party
supplier if such supplier ceases to supply such
content or Garmin’s® contract with such
supplier terminates for any reason.
Restrictions. Except where you have been
specifically licensed to do so by Garmin®, and
without limiting the preceding paragraph, you
may not use this Data with any products,
systems, or applications installed or otherwise
connected to or in communication with
vehicles, and which are capable of dispatch,
fleet management or similar applications where
the Data is used by a central control center in
dispatching a fleet of vehicles. In addition, you
are prohibited from renting or leasing the Data
or the Garmin® products containing the Data to
any other person or third party. Only those
rental car companies that are specifically
authorized by Garmin® in writing to rent
Garmin® products containing the Data to their
rental customers are permitted to rent out such
products.
nüMaps Lifetime. If you purchase a nüMaps
Lifetime subscription (sold separately) or if your
Garmin® product comes bundled with a
nüMaps Lifetime subscription, you will receive
up to four (4) Map Data updates per year, when
and as such updates are made available on
Garmin’s® website, for one (1) compatible
Garmin® product until your product’s useful life
expires or Garmin® no longer receives Map
Data from NAVTEQ, whichever is shorter. A
product’s “useful life” means the period during
which the product (a) has sufficient memory
capacity and other required technical
capabilities to utilize current map data and (b) is
capable of operating as intended without major
repairs. A product will be deemed to be out of
service and its useful life to be ended if no
9
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 333
334 MULTIMEDIA
updates have been downloaded for such
product for a period of 24 months or more.
Unless otherwise stated, the updates you
receive under the subscription will be updates
to the same geographic Map Data originally
included with your Garmin® product when
originally purchased. In some instances, your
Garmin® product might not have sufficient
memory remaining for you to load an update to
the same Map Data originally included with your
Garmin® product, in which case you will need to
either (a) select reduced Map Data coverage for
your updates, or (b) purchase separately a
microSD card or a SD card (if and as applicable
to your Garmin® product) and load all or a
portion of the Map Data coverage for your
updates to the card and insert the card into the
microSD card or SD card slot contained in your
Garmin® product. If neither of the measures in
(a) or (b) can be used to address your product’s
lack of sufficient remaining memory, then
Garmin® may conclude that the “useful life” of
your product has expired. Garmin® may
terminate your nüMaps Lifetime subscription at
any time if you violate any of the terms of this
Agreement or your subscription. Your nüMaps
Lifetime subscription may not be transferred to
another person or another Garmin® product.
No Warranty. This Product (including the Data)
is provided to you “as is,” and you agree to use
it at your own risk. Garmin® and its licensors
(and their licensors and suppliers) make no
guarantees, representations or warranties of
any kind, express or implied, arising by law or
otherwise, including but not limited to, content,
quality, accuracy, completeness, effectiveness,
reliability, merchantability, fitness for a
particular purpose, usefulness, use or results to
be obtained from the Product, or that the Data
or server will be uninterrupted or error-free.
Disclaimer of Warranty. GARMIN AND ITS
LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR LICENSORS
AND SUPPLIERS) DISCLAIM ANY WARRANTIES,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, OF QUALITY,
PERFORMANCE, MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR
NONINFRINGEMENT. NO ORAL OR WRITTEN
ADVICE OR INFORMATION PROVIDED BY
GARMIN OR ITS SUPPLIERS AND LICENSORS
SHALL CREATE A WARRANTY, AND YOU ARE
NOT ENTITLED TO RELY ON ANY SUCH ADVICE
OR INFORMATION. THIS DISCLAIMER OF
WARRANTIES IS AN ESSENTIAL CONDITION OF
THIS AGREEMENT. Some States, Territories and
Countries do not allow certain warranty
exclusions, so to that extent the above
exclusion may not apply to you.
Disclaimer of liability. GARMIN AND ITS
LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR LICENSORS
AND SUPPLIERS) SHALL NOT BE LIABLE TO
YOU: IN RESPECT OF ANY CLAIM, DEMAND OR
ACTION, IRRESPECTIVE OF THE NATURE OF THE
CAUSE OF THE CLAIM, DEMAND OR ACTION
ALLEGING ANY LOSS, INJURY OR DAMAGES,
DIRECT OR INDIRECT, WHICH MAY RESULT
FROM THE USE OR POSSESSION OF THE
INFORMATION; OR FOR ANY LOSS OF PROFIT,
REVENUE, CONTRACTS OR SAVINGS, OR ANY
OTHER DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
ARISING OUT OF YOUR USE OF OR INABILITY TO
USE THIS INFORMATION, ANY DEFECT IN THE
DATA OR INFORMATION, OR THE BREACH OF
THESE TERMS OR CONDITIONS, WHETHER IN
AN ACTION IN CONTRACT OR TORT OR BASED
ON A WARRANTY, EVEN IF GARMIN OR ITS
LICENSORS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. GARMIN’S
AND ITS LICENSORS’ TOTAL AGGREGATE
LIABILITY WITH RESPECT TO ITS OBLIGATIONS
UNDER THIS AGREEMENT OR OTHERWISE
WITH RESPECT TO THE GARMIN PRODUCT OR
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 334
MULTIMEDIA 335
THE DATA SHALL NOT EXCEED $1.00. Some
States, Territories and Countries do not allow
certain liability exclusions or damages
limitations, so to that extent the above may not
apply to you.
Disclaimer of Endorsement. Reference to any
products, services, processes, hypertext links to
third parties or other Data by trade name,
trademark, manufacturer, supplier or otherwise
does not necessarily constitute or imply its
endorsement, sponsorship or recommendation
by Garmin® or its licensor. Product and service
information are the sole responsibility of each
individual vendor. The NAVTEQ name and logo,
the NAVTEQ and NAVTEQ ON BOARD
trademarks and logos, and other trademarks
and trade names owned by NAVTEQ North
America LLC may not be used in any
commercial manner without the prior written
consent of NAVTEQ.
Export Control. You agree not to export from
anywhere any part of the Data provided to you
or any direct product thereof except in
compliance with, and with all licenses and
approvals required under, applicable export
laws, rules and regulations.
Indemnity. You agree to indemnify, defend and
hold Garmin® and its licensors (including their
respective licensors, suppliers, assignees,
subsidiaries, affiliated companies, and the
respective officers, directors, employees,
shareholders, agents and representatives of
each of them) free and harmless from and
against any liability, loss, injury (including
injuries resulting in death), demand, action,
cost, expense, or claim of any kind or character,
including but not limited to attorney’s fees,
arising out of or in connection with any use or
possession by you of the Product (including the
Data).
Canadian Map Data. The Map Data for Canada
may include or reflect data of licensors,
including Her Majesty and Canada Post. Such
data is licensed on an “as is” basis. The
licensors, including Her Majesty and Canada
Post, make no guarantees, representations or
warranties respecting such data, either express
or implied, arising by law or otherwise, including
but not limited to, effectiveness, completeness,
accuracy or fitness for a particular purpose. The
licensors, including Her Majesty and Canada
Post, shall not be liable in respect of any claim,
demand or action, irrespective of the nature of
the cause of the claim, demand or action
alleging any loss, injury or damages, direct or
indirect, which may result from the use or
possession of the data or the Map Data. The
licensors, including Her Majesty and Canada
Post, shall not be liable in any way for loss of
revenues or contracts, or any other
consequential loss of any kind resulting from
any defect in the data or the Map Data. You
shall indemnify and save harmless the
licensors, including Her Majesty the Queen, the
Minister of Natural Resources of Canada and
Canada Post, and their officers, employees and
agents from and against any claim, demand or
action, irrespective of the nature of the cause of
the claim, demand or action, alleging loss,
costs, expenses, damages or injuries (including
injuries resulting in death) arising out of the use
or possession of the data or the Map Data. The
terms contained in this Section are in addition
to all of the rights and obligations of the parties
under the Agreement. To the extent that any of
the provisions of this Section are inconsistent
with, or conflict with, any other provisions of the
Agreement, the provisions of this Section shall
prevail.
9
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 335
336 MULTIMEDIA
United States Map Data. NAVTEQ holds a
non-exclusive license from the United States
Postal Service to publish and sell
ZIP+4 information. ©United States Postal
Service 2010. Prices are not established,
controlled or approved by the United States
Postal Service. The following trademarks and
registrations are owned by the USPS: United
States Postal Service, USPS, and ZIP+4.
Canadian Map Data. Map Data for Canada
includes information taken with permission
from Canadian authorities, including © Her
Majesty, © Queen's Printer for Ontario, ©
Canada Post, GeoBase, © Department of
Natural Resources Canada. All rights reserved.
Australian Map Data. Map Data for Australia is
based on data NAVTEQ has licensed from PSMA
Australia Limited (www.psma.com.au). In
addition, the Product incorporates data which is
© 2019 Telstra Corporation Limited, GM Holden
Limited, Intelematics Australia Pty Ltd, Sentinel
Content Pty Limited and Continental Pty Ltd. If
your Product uses RDS-TMC Codes contained in
the Map Data, the traffic location codes are ©
2019 Telstra Corporation Limited and its
licensors.
Term. This Agreement is effective until such
time as (i) if applicable, your subscription term
is either terminated (by you or by Garmin®) or
expires, or (ii) Garmin® terminates this
Agreement for any reason, including, but not
limited to, if Garmin® finds that you have
violated any of the terms of this Agreement. In
addition, this Agreement shall terminate
immediately upon the termination of an
agreement between Garmin® and any third
party from whom Garmin® licenses the Data.
Entire Agreement. These terms and conditions
constitute the entire agreement between
Garmin (and its licensors, including their
licensors and suppliers) and you pertaining to
the subject matter hereof, and supersedes in
their entirety any and all written or oral
agreements previously existing between us with
respect to such subject matter.
Governing Law.
(a) For European Union NAVTEQ Data
The above terms and conditions shall be
governed by the laws of the Netherlands,
without giving effect to (i) its conflict of laws
provisions, or (ii) the United Nations Convention
for Contracts for the International Sale of
Goods, which is explicitly excluded. You agree to
submit to the jurisdiction of the Netherlands for
any and all disputes, claims and actions arising
from or in connection with the NAVTEQ Data
provided to you hereunder.
(b) For North American NAVTEQ Data and other
non-European Union NAVTEQ Data
The above terms and conditions shall be
governed by the laws of Illinois, without giving
effect to (i) its conflict of laws provisions, or (ii)
the United Nations Convention for Contracts for
the International Sale of Goods, which is
explicitly excluded. You agree to submit to the
jurisdiction of Illinois for any and all disputes,
claims and actions arising from or in connection
with the NAVTEQ Data provided to you
hereunder.
(c) For disputes, claims and actions not related
to the NAVTEQ Data
The above terms and conditions shall be
governed by the laws of Kansas, without giving
effect to (i) its conflict of laws provisions, or (ii)
the United Nations Convention for Contracts for
the International Sale of Goods, which is
explicitly excluded. You agree to submit to the
jurisdiction of Kansas for any and all disputes,
claims and actions arising from or in connection
with the Data provided to you hereunder.
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 336
MULTIMEDIA 337
Government End Users. If End User is an
agency, department, or other entity of the
United States Government, or funded in whole
or in part by the U.S. Government, then use,
duplication, reproduction, release, modifi-
cation, disclosure or transfer of the Product and
accompanying documentation is subject to
restrictions as set forth in DFARS
252.227-7014(a)(1) (JUN 1995) (DOD
commercial computer software definition),
DFARS 27.7202-1 (DOD policy on commercial
computer software), FAR 52.227-19 (JUN
1987) (commercial computer software clause
for civilian agencies), DFARS 252.227-7015
(NOV 1995) (DOD technical data – commercial
items clause); FAR 52.227-14 Alternates I, II,
and III (JUN 1987) (civilian agency technical
data and noncommercial computer software
clause); and/or FAR 12.211 and FAR 12.212
(commercial item acquisitions), as applicable.
In case of conflict between any of the FAR and
DFARS provisions listed herein and this
License, the construction that provides greater
limitations on the Government’s rights shall
control. The contractor/manufacturer is
Garmin® International, Inc., 1200 East 151st
Street, Olathe, KS 66062, USA and NAVTEQ
North America LLC, 425 West Randolph Street,
Chicago, Illinois 60606 USA.
Garmin® is a trademark of Garmin® Ltd. or its
subsidiaries, registered in the USA and other
countries. These trademarks may not be used
without the express permission of Garmin®.
NAVTEQ is a trademark in the U.S. and other
countries. All other company names and
trademarks mentioned or referenced in this
documentation are the properties of their
respective owners. All rights reserved.
DMTI Spatial, Inc. End User License Agreement
The software embedded in your Garmin®
product is owned by Garmin® Ltd. or its subsid-
iaries (“Garmin®”). The third-party postal code
data (the “Licensed Product”) embedded in or
accompanying your Garmin® product is owned
by DMTI Spatial, Inc. and is licensed to
Garmin®. Both the software and Licensed
Product are protected under copyright laws and
international copyright treaties.
THIS is a legal Agreement between you, the end
user, and DMTI Spatial, Inc. BY LOADING THE
PRODUCT(S) WITH THIS AGREEMENT YOU ARE
AGREEING TO BE BOUND BY THE TERMS OF
THIS AGREEMENT. IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO
THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT, PROMPTLY
(within 7 days of purchase) RETURN THE
PRODUCTS AND ANY ACCOMPANYING ITEMS
(including written materials) TO Garmin®
INTERNATIONAL, INC. CUSTOMER SERVICE,
1200 EAST 151ST STREET, OLATHE, KANSAS
66062, FOR A REFUND.
DMTI Spatial hereby grants to you a
non-exclusive, non-transferable license to use
the data contained on the media in this
package (the “Licensed Product”) solely for
personal non-commercial use or internal use in
your business, on a single computer, Pocket PC,
or Palm device in conjunction with Garmin®
software, and with compatible Garmin®
products that you personally own. Your use of
the data is subject to the following terms and
conditions:
You acknowledge that the Licensed Product(s)
belong to DMTI Spatial and its third party
supplier, and that the Licensed Product(s) are
copyrighted. Unauthorized copying of the
Licensed Product(s), is expressly forbidden and
you may be held legally responsible for
copyright infringement which is caused or
encouraged by your failure to abide by the terms
of this agreement. You may make one archival
copy of the Licensed Product(s), solely for your
own use, subject to the following restrictions:
9
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 337
338 MULTIMEDIA
(1) The archival copy must be treated in the
same way as the original copy; (2) No copy may
be used while any other copy is in use. If you
make an archival copy of the Licensed
Product(s), you must include on it the copyright
notice that is on the original media.
You may not reproduce, sell, rent, lease, loan,
distribute or sublicense the Licensed Product(s)
or otherwise transfer the Licensed Product(s) to
any third party, use the Licensed Product for
commercial purposes except for internal use in
your business, decompile, disassemble,
reverse-engineer the Licensed Product(s), or
use the Licensed Product to create any derived
product for any of these prohibited purposes.
You may not place the Licensed Product(s) on
the Internet without a prior written agreement
with DMTI Spatial.
In no event shall DMTI Spatial or its third party
supplier(s) be liable to you or your organization
for any indirect damages including any lost
profits, lost savings, interruption of business,
loss of business opportunities or other
incidental or consequential damages, arising
out of your possession, use of, or inability to use
the Licensed Product(s), even if DMTI Spatial,
its third party supplier(s), or any authorized
dealer, has been advised of the possibility of the
damages, or for any claim by any other party. In
no event shall DMTI Spatial have any liability for
damage in excess of the license fee paid for the
Licensed Product(s).
You shall indemnify and hold DMTI Spatial, its
third party supplier(s) and their officers,
employees and agents, harmless from and
against any claim, demand or action,
irrespective of the nature of the claim, demand
or action, alleging loss, costs, damages,
expenses, or injury (including injury from death)
resulting from your authorized or unauthorized,
use, possession, modification, or alteration of
the Licensed Product(s).
THE LICENSED PRODUCT(S) AND THE
ASSOCIATED WRITTEN MATERIALS IN
CONNECTION THEREWITH ARE PROVIDED “AS
IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER
EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, ARISING BY LAW OR
OTHERWISE, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
WARRANTIES OF EFFECTIVENESS,
COMPLETENESS, ACCURACY, MERCHANT-
ABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE
QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE
LICENSED PRODUCT(S) IS WITH YOU, THE END
USER. NO ORAL OR WRITTEN ADVICE GIVEN BY
DMTI SPATIAL OR ITS DEALERS, DISTRIBUTORS,
AGENTS OR EMPLOYEES CREATES A
WARRANTY OR IN NAY WAY INCREASES DMTI
SPATIAL’S LIABILITY AND YOU MAY NOT RELY
ON ANY SUCH INFORMATION OR ADVICE.
No statement or recommendation made or
assistance given by DMTI Spatial or by its
representatives or employees shall constitute a
waiver by DMTI Spatial or any of the provisions
herein. Nor does or will DMTI Spatial warrant
any services it may provide in connection with
the use of the Licensed product(s), to include
any assistance, training, or other consultation
with you.
This license is effective until terminated. This
license will terminate automatically without
notice from DMTI Spatial if you fail to comply
with any provision of this License Agreement.
Upon termination, you shall destroy or return
the Licensed Product(s) including any written
materials and all copies of the Licensed
Product(s) and any written materials in
connection therewith have been destroyed or
returned to DMTI Spatial.
This Agreement shall be governed by the laws of
the Province of Ontario.
©2007 DMTI Spatial Inc. (except for data
licensed from third parties).
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 338
MULTIMEDIA 339
DMTI Spatial is an authorized user and
distributor of selected Statistics Canada
Computer files under Licensing Agreement
6230.
© Copyright, HER MAJESTY THE QUEEN IN
RIGHT OF CANADA, as represented by the
Minister of Industry, Statistics Canada 1996.
Digital Topographic Data produced under
license from Her Majesty the Queen in Right of
Canada, with permission of Natural Resources
Canada.
Governing Law. The above terms and conditions
shall be governed by the laws of the State of
Illinois, without giving effect to (i) its conflict of
laws provisions, or (ii) the United Nations
Convention for Contracts for the International
Sale of Goods, which is explicitly excluded. You
agree to submit to the jurisdiction of the State of
Illinois for any and all disputes, claims and
actions arising from or in connection with the
Traffic Data provided to you hereunder.
Government End Users. If the Traffic Data is
being acquired by or on behalf of the United
States government or any other entity seeking
or applying rights similar to those customarily
claimed by the United States government, this
Data is a “commercial item” as that term is
defined at 48 C.F.R. (“FAR”) 2.101, is licensed
in accordance with this Agreement, and the
Traffic Data delivered or otherwise furnished
shall be marked and embedded as appropriate
with the following “Notice of Use,” and shall be
treated in accordance with such Notice:
Notice of Use
Contractor (Manufacturer/ Supplier) Name:
NAVTEQ
Contractor (Manufacturer/supplier) Address:
425 West Randolph Street, Chicago, Illinois
60606.
This Data is a commercial item as defined in
FAR 2.101 and is subject to the NAVTEQ Traffic
End User License Agreement under which this
Data was provided.
© 2019 NAVTEQ; © 2019 Traffic.com – All
rights reserved.
If the Contracting Officer, federal government
agency, or any federal official refuses to use the
legend provided herein, the Contracting Officer,
federal government agency, or any federal
official must notify NAVTEQ prior to seeking
additional or alternative rights in the Traffic
Data.
NAVTEQ and Traffic.com are trademarks in the
U.S. and other countries. © 2019 NAVTEQ; ©
2019 Traffic.com. All rights reserved.
HD Radio™ Technology manufactured under
license from iBiquity Digital Corporation. U.S.
and Foreign Patents. HD Radio™ and the HD,
HD Radio™, and "Arc" logos are proprietary
trademarks of iBiquity Digital Corp.
Garmin® is a trademark of Garmin® Ltd. or its
subsidiaries, registered in the USA and other
countries. This trademark may not be used
without the express permission of Garmin®. All
other company names and trademarks
mentioned or referenced in this documentation
are the properties of their respective owners. All
rights reserved.
9
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 339
340 MULTIMEDIA
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF
EQUIPPED
Remote Sound System Controls (Back View Of Steering
Wheel)
The remote sound system controls are located
on the rear surface of the steering wheel, at the
three and nine o'clock positions.
The right-hand rocker switch has a push-button
in the center, and controls the volume and
mode of the sound system. Pushing the top of
the rocker switch will increase the volume.
Pushing the bottom of the rocker switch will
decrease the volume. Pushing the center
button changes the operation of the radio from
AM to FM, or to CD mode.
The left-hand rocker switch has a push-button in
the center. The function of the left-hand switch
is different, depending on which mode you are
in.
The following describes the left-hand rocker
switch operation in each mode.
Radio Operation
Pushing the top of the switch will Seek Up for
the next listenable station, and pushing the
bottom of the switch will Seek Down for the next
listenable station.
The button located in the center of the left-hand
switch will tune to the next preset station that
you have programmed in the radio preset
push-button.
CD Player
Pushing the top of the switch once will go to the
next track on the CD. Pushing the bottom of the
switch once will go to the beginning of the
current track, or to the beginning of the previous
track if it is within one second after the current
track begins to play.
If you push the switch up or down twice it plays
the second track; three times, it will play the
third, etc.
The button in the center of the left-hand switch
has no function in this mode.
USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows a external USB device to be
plugged into the USB port, located in the glove
compartment. If equipped, there may also be
two USB ports located on the lower trim piece
right behind the driver’s sliding door that are for
charging devices only.
iPod® control supports Mini, 4G, Photo, iPod®
nano, 5G iPod® and iPhone® devices. Some
iPod® software versions may not fully support
the iPod® control features. Please visit
Apple’s® website for software updates.
NOTE:
Connecting a consumer electronic audio device
to the AUX port located in the radio faceplate,
plays media, but does not use the MP3 control
feature to control the connected device.
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 340
MULTIMEDIA 341
Connecting The External USB Device
Use the connection cable to connect a external
USB device to the vehicle's USB connector port
which is located in the glove compartment.
USB Port
NOTE:
The glove compartment will have a position
where the consumer electronic audio device
cable can be routed through without damaging
the cable when closing the lid. This allows
routing of the cable without damaging it while
closing the lid. If a cut out is not available in the
glove compartment, route the cable away from
the lid latch and in a place that will allow the lid
to close without damaging the cable.
Once the audio device is connected and
synchronized to the vehicle's USB/MP3 control
system (External USB device may take a few
minutes to connect), the audio device starts
charging and is ready for use by pushing radio
buttons.
NOTE:
If the audio device battery is completely
discharged, it may not communicate with the
USB/MP3 control system until a minimum
charge is attained. Leaving the audio device
connected to the USB/MP3 control system may
charge it to the required level.
Using This Feature
By using an external USB device to connect to
the USB port:
The audio device can be played on the
vehicle’s sound system, providing metadata
(artist, track title, album, etc.) information on
the radio display.
The audio device can be controlled using the
radio buttons to Play, Browse, and List the
audio device’s contents.
The audio device battery charges when
plugged into the USB connector (if supported
by the specific audio device).
Controlling The External USB Device Using
Radio Buttons
To enter the AUX/USB/MP3 control mode and
access a connected audio device, either push
the Aux button on the radio faceplate or push
the VR button and say "USB" or "Switch to USB."
Once in the AUX/USB/MP3 control mode, audio
tracks (if available from audio device) start
playing over the vehicle's audio system.
Play Mode
When switched to AUX/USB/MP3 control mode,
the external USB device automatically starts
Play mode. In Play mode, the following buttons
on the radio faceplate may be used to control
the external USB device and display data:
Use the TUNE control knob to select the next
or previous track.
Turning it clockwise (forward) by one
click, while playing a track, skips to the
next track or push the Voice Recognition
(VR) button and say "Next Track".
9
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 341
342 MULTIMEDIA
Turning it counterclockwise (backward)
by one click will jump to the previous
track in the list or push the VR button and
say "Previous Track".
Jump backward in the current track by
pushing and holding the << RW button.
Holding the << RW button long enough will
jump to the beginning of the current track.
Jump forward in the current track by pushing
and holding the FF >> button.
A single push backward << RW or forward FF
>> will jump backward or forward respec-
tively, for five seconds.
Use the << SEEK and SEEK >> buttons to
jump to the previous or next track. Pushing
the SEEK >> button during play mode will
jump to the next track in the list, or push the
VR button and say "Next or Previous Track."
While a track is playing, push the INFO button
to see the associated metadata (artist, track
title, album, etc.) for that track. Pushing the
INFO button again jumps to the next screen
of data for that track. Once all screens have
been viewed, the last INFO button push will
go back to the play mode screen on the radio.
Pushing the Repeat button will change the
audio device mode to repeat the current
playing track or push the VR button and say
"Repeat On" or "Repeat Off".
Push the Scan button to use AUX/USB/MP3
device scan mode, which will play the first 10
seconds of each track in the current list and
then forward to the next song. To stop Scan
mode and start playing the desired track,
when it is playing the track, push the Scan
button again. During Scan mode, pushing the
<< SEEK and SEEK >> buttons will select the
previous and next tracks.
RND button: Pushing this button toggles
between Shuffle ON and Shuffle OFF modes
for the external USB device, or push the VR
button and say "Shuffle On" or "Shuffle Off." If
the RND icon is showing on the radio display,
then the shuffle mode is On.
List Or Browse Mode
During Play mode, pushing any of the buttons
described below will bring up List mode. List
mode enables scrolling through the list of
menus and tracks on the audio device.
Tune control knob: The Tune control knob
functions in a similar manner as the scroll
wheel on the audio device or external USB
device.
Turning it clockwise (forward) and counter-
clockwise (backward) scrolls through the
lists, displaying the track detail on the radio
display. Once the track to be played is high-
lighted on the radio display, push the Tune
control knob to select and start playing the
track. Turning the TUNE control knob fast will
scroll through the list faster. During fast
scroll, a slight delay in updating the informa-
tion on the radio display may be noticeable.
In List mode, the radio Preset buttons are used
as shortcuts to the following lists on the
external USB device:
Preset 1 – Playlists
Preset 2 – Artists
Preset 3 – Albums
Preset 4 – Genres
Preset 5 – Audiobooks
Preset 6 – Podcasts
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 342
MULTIMEDIA 343
Pushing a PRESET button will display the
current list on the top line and the first item in
that list on the second line.
To exit List mode without selecting a track, push
the same Preset button again to go back to
Play mode.
List button: The List button will display the top
level menu of the external USB device.
Turn the Tune control knob to list the
top-menu item to be selected and push the
Tune control knob. This will display the next
sub-menu list item on the audio device, then
follow the same steps to go to the desired
track in that list. Not all external USB device
sub-menu levels are available on this system.
Music Type button: The Music Type button is
another shortcut button to the genre listing on
your audio device.
Bluetooth® Streaming Audio (BTSA)
Music can be streamed from your cellular
phone to the Uconnect phone system.
Refer to the Uconnect Owner’s Manual
Supplement for further information on
Bluetooth® connectivity.
Controlling BTSA Using Radio Buttons
To enter BTSA mode, push either AUX button on
the radio or push the VR button and say
“Bluetooth® Streaming Audio”.
Play Mode
When switched to BTSA mode, some audio
devices can start playing music over the
vehicle’s audio system, but some devices
require the music to be initiated on the device
first. Then, it will get streamed to the Uconnect
phone system. Seven devices can be paired to
the Uconnect phone system, but just one can be
selected and played.
Selecting A Different Audio Device
1. Push the Phone button to begin.
2. After the "Ready" prompt and following the
beep, say "Setup", then say "Select Audio
Devices".
3. Say the name of the audio device or ask the
Uconnect phone system to list the audio
devices.
Next Track
Use the Seek Up button, or push the VR
button on the radio and say “Next Track,” to
jump to the next music track on your cellular
phone.
WARNING!
Do not plug in or remove the iPod® or
external USB device while driving. Failure to
follow this warning could result in an
accident.
CAUTION!
Leaving the iPod® or external USB device
(or any supported device) anywhere in the
vehicle in extreme heat or cold can alter the
operation or damage the device. Follow the
device manufacturer’s guidelines.
Placing items on the iPod® or external USB
device, or connections to the iPod® or
external USB device in the vehicle, can
cause damage to the device and/or to the
connectors.
9
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 343
344 MULTIMEDIA
Previous Track
Use the Seek Down button, or push the VR
button on the radio and say “Previous Track,” to
jump to the previous music track on your
cellular phone.
Browse
Browsing is not available on a Bluetooth®
Streaming Audio (BTSA) device. Only the current
song that is playing will display info.
UCONNECT MULTIMEDIA — VIDEO
ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM (VES) — IF
EQUIPPED
Your rear seat Video Entertainment System
(VES) is designed to give your family years of
enjoyment. You can play your favorite CDs or
DVDs, listen to audio over the wireless
headphones, or plug and play a variety of
standard video games or audio devices. Please
review this Owner's Manual to become familiar
with its features and operation.
NOTE:
The screen is located in the 2nd row overhead
console.
Getting Started
Screen located in the overhead console:
Unfold the overhead LCD screen(s) by
pushing the button on the overhead console
behind the screen(s).
Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN or ACC
position.
Turn on the Player by pushing the Power
button, located on the far left, or by pushing
the button on the Remote Control.
When the video screen is open and a DVD is
inserted into the VES player, the screen turns
on automatically, the headphone transmit-
ters turn on and playback begins.
The system can be controlled by the front
seat occupants using either the touchscreen
radio, the DVD, or by the rear seat occupants
using the remote control.
Play Video Games
Connect the video game console to the Auxiliary
RCA input jacks or HDMI port, located on the left
side behind the second row seat.
RCA/HDMI/USB Inputs
1 — HDMI Port
2 — Audio/Video In
3 — Power Outlet
4 — USB Ports (Charge Only)
5 — Power Inverter
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 344
MULTIMEDIA 345
When connecting an external source to the AUX
input, be sure to follow the standard color
coding for the VES jacks.
NOTE:
Certain high-end video game consoles will
exceed the power limit of the vehicle's Power
Inverter. Refer to “Power Inverter — If Equipped”
in “Getting To Know Your Vehicle” for more
information.
Using The Remote Control
1. Push the Mode button on the Remote
Control.
2. While looking at the video screen, highlight
VES AUX 1, by either pushing Up/Down/
Left/Right buttons or by repeatedly pushing
the MODE button, then push ENTER on the
Remote Control.
Select VES AUX1 Mode On The VES Screen
Using The Touchscreen Radio Controls
1. Push the Menu button on the radio
faceplate.
2. Press the Rear VES button on the
touchscreen to display the Rear VES
Controls. If a channel list is displayed, press
the HIDE LIST button on the touchscreen to
display the Rear VES Controls screen.
Rear VES Button On The Touchscreen
3. Press the 1 button on the touchscreen and
then press either “AUX 1” or “AUX 2” in the
VES column (depending which AUX input is
used). To exit press the Back Arrow button
at the top of the touchscreen.
9
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 345
346 MULTIMEDIA
Play A DVD Using The Touchscreen Radio
NOTE:
Headunit DVD player does not play Blu-ray™
Discs.
1. Push the OPEN/CLOSE or LOAD button on
the radio faceplate (Touchscreen).
2. Insert the DVD with the label facing up. The
radio automatically selects the appropriate
mode after the disc is recognized and
displays the menu screen or starts playing
the first track.
Using The Remote Control
1. Push the Source button on the Remote
Control.
2. Highlight DISC by either pushing Up/Down/
Left/Right buttons or by repeatedly pushing
the Source button, then push “Enter/OK”.
NOTE:
The VES will retain the last setting when turned
off.
Using The Touchscreen Radio Controls
1. Push the Menu button on the radio
faceplate.
2. Press the Rear VES button on the
touchscreen to display the Rear VES
Controls. If a channel list is displayed, press
the HIDE LIST button on the touchscreen to
display the Rear VES Controls screen.
Rear VES Button On The Touchscreen
3. Press the Disc button on the touchscreen in
the Media column. To exit press the Back
Arrow button at the top left of the screen.
NOTE:
To view a DVD on the radio push the
Radio/Media button on the radio faceplate,
then press the Disc tab button on the
touchscreen and then the View Video button
on the touchscreen.
Viewing a DVD on the Touchscreen radio
screen is not available in all states/prov-
inces. If available, the vehicle must be
stopped and the gear selector must be in the
PARK position for vehicles with an automatic
transmission. In vehicles with a manual
transmission the parking brake must be
engaged.
Pressing the screen on a Touchscreen radio
while a DVD is playing brings up basic remote
control functions for DVD play such as scene
selection, Play, Pause, FF, RW, and Stop.
Pressing the X in the upper corner will turn off
the remote control screen functions.
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 346
MULTIMEDIA 347
Play A DVD Using The VES Player — If
Equipped
Insert the DVD with the label facing up. The VES
player automatically selects the appropriate
mode after the disc is recognized and starts
playing the DVD.
NOTE:
The VES player has basic DVD control function
such as Menu, Play, Pause, FF, RW and Stop.
Using The Remote Control
1. Push the Source button on the Remote
Control.
2. Highlight VES DISC by either pushing Up/
Down/Left/Right buttons or by repeatedly
pushing the Source button, then push
“Enter/OK” on the Remote Control.
NOTE:
The VES will retain the last setting when turned
off.
Using The Touchscreen Radio Controls
1. Push the Menu button on the radio
faceplate.
2. Press the Rear VES button on the
touchscreen to display the Rear VES
Controls. If a channel list is displayed, press
the HIDE LIST button on the touchscreen to
display the Rear VES Controls screen.
Rear VES Button On The Touchscreen
3. Press the Disc button on the touchscreen in
the VES column. To exit press the Back
Arrow button on the touchscreen at the top
left of the screen.
Select Channel/Screen 1 And DISC In The VES Column
NOTE:
To view a DVD on the radio push the
Radio/Media button on the radio faceplate,
then press the Disc tab button on the
touchscreen and then the VIEW VIDEO button
on the touchscreen.
Viewing a DVD on the Touchscreen radio
screen is not available in all states/
provinces. If available, the vehicle must be
stopped and the gear selector must be in the
PARK position for vehicles with an automatic
transmission. In vehicles with a manual
transmission the parking brake must be
engaged.
9
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 347
348 MULTIMEDIA
VES Remote Control — If Equipped
VES Remote Control
Controls And Indicators
1. Power – Turns the screen and wireless
headphone transmitter for the selected
Channel on or off. To hear audio while the
screen is closed, push the Power button to
turn the headphone transmitter on.
2. Channel Selector Indicators – When a
button is pushed, the currently affected
channel or channel button is illuminated
momentarily.
3. Light – Turns the remote control
backlighting on or off. The remote
backlighting turns off automatically after
five seconds.
4. Channel/Screen Selector Switch —
Indicates which channel is being controlled
by the remote control. When the selector
switch is in the Channel 1 position, the
remote controls the functionality of
headphone Channel 1 (left side of the
screen). When the selector switch is in the
Channel 2 position, the remote controls the
functionality of headphone Channel 2
(right side of the screen).
5. ▸▸ – In radio modes, push to seek the next
tunable station. In disc modes, push and
hold to fast forward through the current
audio track or video chapter. In menu
modes use to navigate in the menu.
6. ▾ / PREV – In radio modes, push to select to
the previous station. In disc modes, push to
advance to the start of the current or
previous audio track or video chapter. In
menu modes, use to navigate in the menu.
7. MENU – push to return to the main menu of
a DVD disc, or select playback modes
(SCAN/RANDOM for a CD).
8. ▸ / ‖ (Play/Pause) – Begin/resume or
pause disc play.
9. (Stop) – Stops disc play.
10. Up/Down/Rewind/Skip Back And
Fast Fwd/Skip Forward – When listening to
a radio mode, pushing PROG Up selects the
next preset and pushing PROG Down
selects the previous preset stored in the
radio. When listening to compressed audio
on a data disc, PROG Up selects the next
directory and PROG Down selects the
previous directory. When listening to a disc
in a radio with a multiple-disc changer,
PROG Up selects the next disc and PROG
Down selects the previous disc.
11. Mute – Push to mute the headphone audio
output for the selected channel.
12. SLOW – If Equipped – Push to slow
playback of a DVD disc. Push play (▸) to
resume normal play.
13. STATUS – If Equipped – Push to display the
current status.
14. MODE – Push to change the mode of the
selected channel. See the Mode Selection
section of this manual for details on
changing modes.
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 348
MULTIMEDIA 349
15. SETUP – When in a video mode, push the
SETUP button to access the display settings
(see the display settings section) to access
the DVD setup menu, select the menu
button on the radio. When a disc is loaded
in the DVD player (if equipped) and the VES
mode is selected and the disc is stopped,
push the SETUP button to access the DVD
Setup menu.
16. BACK – When navigating in menu mode,
push to return to the previous screen. When
navigating a DVD’s disc menu, the
operation depends on the disc’s contents.
17. ◂◂ – In radio modes, push to seek to the
previous tunable station. In disc modes,
push and hold to fast rewind through the
current audio track or video chapter. In
menu modes, use to navigate in the menu.
18. ENTER/OK – Push to select the highlighted
option in a menu.
19. ▴ / NEXT – In radio modes, push to select to
the next station. In disc modes, push to
advance to the next audio track or video
chapter. In menu modes, use to navigate in
the menu.
Remote Control Storage
The video screen comes with a built-in storage
compartment for the remote control which is
accessible when the screen is opened. To
remove the remote, use your index finger to pull
and rotate the remote towards you. Do not try to
pull the remote straight down as it will be very
difficult to remove. To return the remote back
into its storage area, insert one long edge of the
remote into the two retaining clips first, and
then rotate the remote back up into the other
two retaining clips until it snaps back into
position.
VES Remote Control Storage
Locking The Remote Control
All remote control functionality can be disabled
as a parental control feature.
To disable the Remote Control from making
any changes, push the Video Lock button on
the DVD player (if equipped). If the vehicle is
not equipped with a DVD player, follow the
radio’s instructions to turn Video Lock on.
The radio and the video screen(s) indicate
when Video Lock is active.
Pushing the Video Lock again or turning the
ignition OFF turns Video Lock OFF and allows
remote control operation of the VES.
Replacing The Remote Control Batteries
The remote control requires two AAA batteries
for operation. To replace the batteries:
1. Locate the battery compartment on the
back of the remote, then slide the battery
cover downward.
2. Replace the batteries, making sure to orient
them according to the polarity diagram
shown.
3. Replace the battery compartment cover.
9
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 349
350 MULTIMEDIA
Headphones Operation
Front seat occupants receive some headphone
audio coverage to allow them to adjust the
headphone volume for the young rear seat
occupants that may not be able to do so for
themselves.
If no audio is heard after increasing the volume
control, verify that the screen is turned on and
in the down position and that the channel is not
muted. If audio is still not heard, check that fully
charged batteries are installed in the
headphones.
Uconnect Headphones
Controls
The headphone power indicator and controls
are located on the right ear cup.
NOTE:
The rear video system must be turned on before
sound can be heard from the headphones. To
conserve battery life, the headphones will
automatically turn off approximately three
minutes after the rear video system is turned
off.
Replacing The Headphone Batteries
Each set of headphones requires two AAA
batteries for operation. To replace the batteries:
1. Locate the battery compartment on the left
ear cup of the headphones, and then slide
the battery cover downward.
2. Replace the batteries, making sure to orient
them according to the polarity diagram
shown.
3. Replace the battery compartment cover.
Accessibility — If Equipped
The accessibility feature announces DVD
functions prior to performing them. For
example, when activated, the accessibility
feature will announce that the Play button was
pressed the first time the Play button is
pressed, and the second time the Play button is
pressed it will perform the Play function. The
accessibility feature can be turned on and off in
the settings of the radio.
NOTE:
When the Accessibility feature is enabled, and
the remote control is used in the rear seats to
control the Video Entertainment System (VES),
the DVD functions will be announced in the
headsets only. The DVD functions will be
announced through the vehicle’s sound system
when the Uconnect system is being used to
control the VES system. These announcements
will be in English only.
1 — Power ON/OFF Button
2 — Volume Control Wheel
3 — Channel Selector Button
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 350
MULTIMEDIA 351
Stereo Headphone Lifetime Limited
Warranty
Who Does This Warranty Cover? This warranty
covers the initial user or purchaser ("you" or
"your") of this particular Aptiv PLC (“Aptiv”)
wireless headphone ("Product"). The warranty is
not transferable.
How Long Does the Coverage Last? This
warranty lasts as long as you own the Product.
What Does This Warranty Cover? Except as
specified below, this warranty covers any
Product that in normal use is defective in
workmanship or materials.
What Does This Warranty Not Cover? This
warranty does not cover any damage or defect
that results from misuse, abuse or modification
of the Product other than by Aptiv. Foam
earpieces, which will wear over time through
normal use, are specifically not covered
(replacement foam is available for a nominal
charge). APTIV IS NOT LIABLE FOR ANY
INJURIES OR DAMAGES TO PERSONS OR
PROPERTY RESULTING FROM THE USE OF, OR
ANY FAILURE OR DEFECT IN, THE PRODUCT,
NOR IS APTIV LIABLE FOR ANY GENERAL,
SPECIAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
CONSEQUENTIAL, EXEMPLARY, PUNITIVE OR
OTHER DAMAGES OF ANY KIND OR NATURE
WHATSOEVER. Some states and jurisdictions
may not allow the exclusion or limitation of
incidental or consequential damages, so the
above limitation may not apply to you. This
warranty gives you specific legal rights. You may
also have other rights, which vary from
jurisdiction to jurisdiction.
What Will Aptiv Do? Aptiv, at its option, will
repair or replace any defective Product. Aptiv
reserves the right to replace any discontinued
Product with a comparable model. THIS
WARRANTY IS THE SOLE WARRANTY FOR THIS
PRODUCT, SETS FORTH YOUR EXCLUSIVE
REMEDY REGARDING DEFECTIVE PRODUCTS,
AND IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES
(EXPRESS OR IMPLIED), INCLUDING ANY
WARRANTY FOR MERCHANTABILITY OR
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
If you have any questions or comments
regarding your Aptiv wireless headphones,
please email hpser[email protected] or phone:
888-293-3332
System Information
Shared Modes
This allows the VES to output radio sources to
the headphones and the radio to output VES
sources to the vehicle speakers.
If the radio functions (FM, AM, or SXM) are in the
shared mode, with the VES, only the radio is
able to control the radio functions. In this case,
VES can share the radio mode, but not change
stations until the radio mode is changed to a
mode that is different from the VES selected
radio mode. When shared, the radio has priority
over the VES or all radio modes (FM, AM, and
SAT). The VES has the ability to switch tuner
(AM/FM), SEEK, SCAN, TUNE, and recall presets
in radio modes as long as it is not in shared
mode.
9
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 351
352 MULTIMEDIA
When in shared disc mode both the radio and
the VES have control of the video functions. The
VES has the ability to control the following video
modes:
1. CD: Ability to Fast Forward, Rewind, Scan,
and Track Up/Down.
2. CD Changer (in radio): Ability to Disk
Up/Down and program all listed CD controls
(Fast Forward, Rewind, Scan, and Track
Up/Down).
The VES can even control radio modes or video
modes while the radio is turned off. The VES can
access the radio modes or disc modes by
navigating to those modes on the VES and
activating a radio mode or disc mode.
Station List Menu
When listening to Satellite audio, pushing the
remote control’s Pop-Up/Menu button displays
a list of all available channels. Navigate this list
using the remote control’s navigation buttons
(▴, ▾) to find the desired station, push the
remote control’s Enter/OK button to tune to
that station. To jump through the list more
quickly, navigate to the Page Up and Page Down
icons on the screen.
Disc Menu
When listening to a CD Audio or CD Data disc,
pushing the remote control’s Pop-Up/Menu
button displays a list of all commands which
control playback of the disc. Using the options
you can activate or cancel Scan play and
Random play.
Display Settings
When watching a video source (DVD Video with
the disc in Play mode, Aux Video, etc.), pushing
the remote control’s Setup button activates the
Display Settings menu. These settings control
the appearance of the video on the screen. The
factory default settings are already set for
optimum viewing, so there is no need to change
these settings under normal circumstances.
To change the settings, push the remote
control’s navigation buttons (▴, ▾) to select an
item, then push the remote control’s navigation
buttons (▸, ◂) to change the value for the
currently selected item. To reset all values back
to the original settings, select the Default
Settings menu option and press the remote
control’s Enter/OK button.
Disc Features control the remote DVD settings
of DVD being watched in the remote player.
Listening To Audio With The Screen Closed
To listen to only audio portion of the channel
with the screen closed:
1. Set the audio to the desired source and
channel.
2. Close the video screen.
3. To change the current audio mode, push
the remote control’s Mode button. This will
automatically select the next available
audio mode without using the Mode/Select
menu.
If the screen is closed and there is no audio
heard, verify that the headphones are turned on
(the On indicator is illuminated) and the
headphone selector switch is on the desired
channel. If the headphones are turned on, push
the remote control’s power button to turn audio
on. If audio is still not heard, check that fully
charged batteries are installed in the
headphones.
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 352
MULTIMEDIA 353
Disc Formats
The DVD player is capable of playing the
following types of discs:
DVD-Video discs (MPEG-2 video compres-
sion) (see notes about DVD Region Codes)
DVD-Audio discs (2 channel audio output
only)
Audio Compact Discs (CDs)
CD Data discs with MP3 and WMA
compressed audio format files
Video CDs (MPEG-1 video compression)
DVD Region Codes
The DVD player and many DVD Discs are coded
by geographic region. These region codes must
match in order for the disc to play. If the region
code for the DVD does not match the region
code for the player, the disc will stop playing
and a warning will be displayed.
DVD Audio Support
When a DVD-Audio disc is inserted in the DVD
player, the DVD-Audio title on the disc is played
by default (most DVD-Audio discs also have a
Video title, but the Video title is ignored). All
multi-channel program material is automatically
mixed down to two channels, which may result
in a lowered apparent volume level. If you
increase the volume level to account for this
change in level, remember to lower the volume
before changing the disc or to another mode.
Recorded Discs
The DVD player will play CD-R and CD-RW discs
recorded in CD-Audio or Video-CD format, or as
a CD-ROM containing MP3, WMA. The player will
also play DVD-Video content recorded to a
DVD-R or DVD-RW disc. DVD-ROM discs (either
pressed or recorded) are not supported.
If you record a disc using a personal computer,
there may be cases where the DVD player may
not be able to play some or the entire disc, even
if it is recorded in a compatible format and is
playable on other players. To help avoid
playback problems, use the following guidelines
when recording discs.
Open sessions are ignored. Only sessions
that are closed are playable.
For multi-session CDs that contain only
multiple CD-Audio sessions, the player will
renumber the tracks so each track number is
unique.
For CD Data (or CD-ROM) discs, always use
the ISO-9660 (Level 1 or Level 2), Joliet, or
Romeo format. Other formats (such as HFS,
or others) are not supported.
The player recognizes a maximum of
512 files and 99 folders per CD-R and
CD-RW disc.
Mixed media recordable DVD formats will
only play the Video_TS portion of the disc.
If you are still having trouble writing a disc that
is playable in the DVD player, check with the
disc recording software publisher for more
information about burning playable discs.
The recommended method for labeling
recordable discs (CD-R, CD-RW, and DVD-R) is
with a permanent marker. Do not use adhesive
labels as they may separate from the disc,
become stuck, and cause permanent damage
to the DVD player.
9
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 353
354 MULTIMEDIA
Compressed Audio Files (MP3 / WMA and ACC)
The DVD is capable of playing MP3 (MPEG-1
Audio Layer 3) and WMA (Windows Media
Audio) files from a CD Data disc (usually a CD-R
or CD-RW).
The DVD player always uses the file extension
to determine the audio format, so MP3 files
must always end with the extension ".mp3" or
".MP3" and WMA files must always end with
the extension ".wma" or ".WMA." AAC files
must always end with the extension "aac" or
"AAC." To prevent incorrect playback, do not
use these extensions for any other types of
files.
For MP3 files, only version 1 ID3 tag data
(such as artist name, track title, album, etc.)
are supported.
Any file that is copy protected (such as those
downloaded from many online music stores)
will not play. The DVD player will automati-
cally skip the file and begin playing the next
available file.
Other compression formats such as AAC,
MP3 Pro, Ogg Vorbis, and ATRAC3 will not
play. The DVD player will automatically skip
the file and begin playing the next available
file.
If you are creating your own files, the recom-
mended fixed bit rate for MP3 files is
between 96 and 192 Kbps and the recom-
mended fixed bit rate for WMA files is
between 64 and 192 Kbps. Variable bit rates
are also supported. For both formats, the
recommended sample rate is either
44.1 kHz or 48 kHz.
To change the current file, use the DVD
player’s ▴ button to advance to the next file,
or the ▾ button to return to the start of the
current or previous file.
To change the current directory, use the
remote control’s PROG UP and Down buttons
or Rewind/skip back and fast fwd/skip
forward.
Disc Errors
If the DVD player is unable to read the disc, a
"Disc Error" message is displayed on the Radio
display and the disc is automatically ejected. A
dirty, damaged, or incompatible disc format are
all potential causes for a "Disc Error" message.
If a disc has a damaged track which results in
audible or visible errors that persists for
2.0 seconds, the DVD player will attempt to
continue playing the disc by skipping forward
1 to 3 seconds at a time. If the end of the disc is
reached, the DVD player will return to the
beginning of the disc and attempt to play the
start of the first track.
The DVD player may shut down during extremely
hot conditions, such as when the vehicle’s
interior temperature is above 120°F (49°C).
When this occurs, the DVD Player will display
"High Temp" and will shut off the display until a
safe temperature is reached. This shutdown is
necessary to protect the optics of the DVD.
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 354
MULTIMEDIA 355
Display
Other Language Setup
DVD Player Language Menu
All of the Language settings have a special
Other setting to accommodate languages other
than Japanese or English. These languages are
selected using a special four-digit code.
To enter a new language code, activate the DVD
Setup Menu. To enter DVD Setup Menu stop the
DVD, enter radio disc mode, then DVD setup
and follow these additional instructions:
Using the remote control Up and Down cursor
buttons, highlight the Language item you
want to edit, and then push the remote
control Enter/OK button.
Using the remote control Down cursor button,
select the "Other" setting, then push the
remote control’s Right cursor button to begin
editing the setting.
Using the remote control Up and Down cursor
buttons, select a digit for the current position.
After selecting the digit, push the remote
control’s Right cursor button to select the
next digit. Repeat this digit selection
sequence for all four digits.
When the entire four-digit code is entered,
push the remote control’s Enter/OK button. If
the language code is not valid, the numbers
all change back to "?". If the digits are visible
after this step, then the language code is
valid.
Here is an abbreviated list of language codes.
For more language codes, please contact the
dealer where the vehicle was purchased.
Rating And Password Setup
The Rating and Password settings work
together to control the types of DVDs that your
family watches. Most DVD-Video discs have a
rating (from 1 to 8) assigned to them where
lower numbers are designated for all audiences
and higher numbers are designated for more
adult audiences.
When a DVD-Video disc is loaded, its rating is
compared to the setting in the DVD player. If the
rating of the disc is higher than the setting in the
player, a Password screen is displayed. In order
to watch the disc, the rear passenger must
enter the correct password using the password
entry method described below.
To play all discs without requiring a password,
set the DVD player’s rating to Level 8. Setting
the rating to Level 1 always requires the
password to play any DVD disc. Not all DVD
discs encode a Rating, so it is still possible that
discs designed for adult audiences can still play
without requiring a password.
Language Code Language Code
Dutch 2311 French 1517
German 1304 Italian 1819
Portuguese
2519 Spanish 1418
9
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 355
356 MULTIMEDIA
The default rating is Level 8 (play all discs
without a password) and the default password
is 0000.
DVD Password Entry
To set the password, activate the DVD Setup
Menu and follow these additional instructions:
Using the remote control Left and Right
cursor buttons, select the Rating tab.
Highlight "Change Password", and then push
the remote control’s ENTER/OK button.
Enter the current password. Select a digit,
use the remote control Up and Down cursor
buttons to set the value for the current digit,
and then push the remote control’s Right
cursor button to select the next digit. Repeat
this digit selection sequence for all four
digits.
After the four-digit password is entered, push
the remote control’s Enter/OK button. If the
password is correct, the set password screen
is displayed.
Using the remote control’s Up and Down
cursor buttons to set the value for the current
digit and the remote control’s Right cursor
button to select digits, enter the new pass-
word.
After the four-digit password is entered, push
the remote control’s Enter/OK button to
accept the change.
DVD Player Level Menu
To set the rating, activate the DVD Setup Menu
and follow these additional instructions:
Using the remote control’s Left and Right
cursor buttons, select the Rating tab.
Highlight "Change Rating", and then push the
remote control’s Enter/OK button.
Enter the current password. Select a digit,
use the remote control’s Up and Down cursor
buttons to set the value for the current digit,
and then push the remote control’s Right
cursor button to select the next digit. Repeat
this digit selection sequence for all four
digits.
After the four-digit password is entered, push
the remote control’s Enter/OK button. If the
password is correct, the Rating Level menu is
displayed.
Using the remote control’s Up and Down
cursor buttons, select the new rating level,
and then push the remote control’s Enter/OK
button to accept the change.
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 356
MULTIMEDIA 357
Product Agreement
Software
This product contains software licensed under
GNU General Public License (GPL) or GNU
Lesser General Public License (LGPL), etc. You
have the right of acquisition, modification, and
distribution of the source code of the GPL/LGPL
software. You may download Source Code from
the following website at no charge.
http://www.embedded-carmultimedia.jp/linux/
oss/download/MP_632_34W821
The website provides the Source Code "As Is"
and without warranty of any kind. By
downloading Source Code, you expressly
assume all risk and liability associated with
downloading and using the Source Code and
complying with the user agreements that
accompany each Source Code. Please note that
we cannot respond to any inquiries regarding
the source code.
THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE AVC
PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR THE
PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL USE OF
A CONSUMER TO (i) ENCODE VIDEO IN
COMPLIANCE WITH THE AVC STANDARD
("AVC VIDEO") AND/OR (ii) DECODE AVC
VIDEO THAT WAS ENCODED BY A CONSUMER
ENGAGED IN A PERSONAL AND
NON-COMMERCIAL ACTIVITY AND/OR WAS
OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO PROVIDER
LICENSED TO PROVIDE AVC VIDEO. NO
LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL BE IMPLIED
FOR ANY OTHER USE. ADDITIONAL INFORMA-
TION MAY BE OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA,
L.L.C. SEE HTTP://WWW.MPEGLA.COM.
THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE
VC-1 PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR THE
PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL USE OF
A CONSUMER TO (i) ENCODE VIDEO IN
COMPLIANCE WITH THE VC-1 STANDARD
("VC-1 VIDEO") AND/OR (ii) DECODE VC-1
VIDEO THAT WAS ENCODED BY A CONSUMER
ENGAGED IN A PERSONAL AND
NON-COMMERCIAL ACTIVITY AND/OR WAS
OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO PROVIDER
LICENSED TO PROVIDE VC-1 VIDEO. NO
LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL BE IMPLIED
FOR ANY OTHER USE. ADDITIONAL INFORMA-
TION MAY BE OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA,
L.L.C. SEE HTTP://WWW.MPEGLA.COM.
Patents
Cinavia Notice
This product uses Cinavia technology to limit
the use of unauthorized copies of some
commercially-produced film and videos and
their soundtracks. When a prohibited use of an
unauthorized copy is detected, a message will
be displayed and playback or copying will be
interrupted. More information about Cinavia
technology is provided at the Cinavia Online
Consumer Information Center at http://
www.cinavia.com. To request additional
information about Cinavia by mail, send a
postcard with your mailing address to: Cinavia
Consumer Information Center, P.O. Box 86851,
San Diego, CA, 92138, USA.
9
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 357
358 MULTIMEDIA
This product incorporates proprietary
technology under license from Verance
Corporation and is protected by U.S. Patent 7,
369,677 and other U.S. and worldwide patents
issued and pending as well as copyright and
trade secret protection for certain aspects of
such technology. Cinavia is a trademark of
Verance Corporation. Copyright 2004-2010
Verance Corporation. All rights reserved by
Verance. Reverse engineering or disassembly is
prohibited.
This product incorporates copyright protec-
tion technology that is protected by U.S.
patents and other intellectual property rights.
Use of this copyright protection technology
must be authorized by Macrovision, and is
intended for home and other limited viewing
uses only unless otherwise authorized by
Macrovision. Reverse engineering or disas-
sembly is prohibited.
Manufactured under license under U.S.
Patent #s: 5,451,942; 5,956,674; 5,974,
380; 5,978,762; 6,487,535 & other U.S. and
worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS is a
registered trademark and the DTS logos,
Symbol and DTS 2.0 Channel are trademarks
of DTS, Inc. © 1996-2007 DTS, Inc. All Rights
Reserved.
Manufactured under license from Dolby
Laboratories. Dolby and the double-D symbol
are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
ABOUT DIVX VIDEO: DivX is a digital video format
created by DivX, LLC, a subsidiary of Rovi
Corporation. This is an official DivX Certified
device that plays DivX video. Visit divx.com for
more information and software tools to convert
your files into DivX videos.
ABOUT DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND: This DivX
Certified device must be registered in order to
play purchased DivX Video-on-Demand (VOD)
movies. To obtain your registration code, locate
the DivX VOD section in your device setup
menu. Go to vod.divx.com for more information
on how to complete your registration.
DivX, DivX Certified and associated logos are
trademarks of Rovi Corporation or its subsid-
iaries and are used under license.
Trademark
Java is a registered trademark of Oracle and/
or its affiliates.
CAUTION!
Use of controls or adjustments or
performance of procedures other than those
specified herein may result in hazardous
radiation exposure.
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 358
MULTIMEDIA 359
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone
being on in your vehicle can cause erratic or
noisy performance from your radio. This
condition may be lessened or eliminated by
relocating the mobile phone antenna. This
condition is not harmful to the radio. If your
radio performance does not satisfactorily
“clear” by the repositioning of the antenna, it is
recommended that the radio volume be turned
down or off during mobile phone operation
when not using Uconnect (if equipped).
Regulatory And Safety Information
USA/CANADA
Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation
The radiated output power of the internal
wireless radio is far below the FCC and IC radio
frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the
wireless radio will be used in such a manner
that the radio is 8 in (20 cm) or further from the
human body.
The internal wireless radio operates within
guidelines found in radio frequency safety
standards and recommendations, which reflect
the consensus of the scientific community.
The radio manufacturer believes the internal
wireless radio is safe for use by consumers. The
level of energy emitted is far less than the
electromagnetic energy emitted by wireless
devices such as mobile phones. However, the
use of wireless radios may be restricted in some
situations or environments, such as aboard
airplanes. If you are unsure of restrictions, you
are encouraged to ask for authorization before
turning on the wireless radio.
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Innovation, Science and
Economic Development Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference.
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic
Development applicables aux appareils radio
exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée
aux deux conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de
brouillage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en compro-
mettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar
cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s authority to
operate the equipment.
9
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 359
360 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE:
This equipment has been tested and found to
comply with the limits for a Class B digital
device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
These limits are designed to provide reason-
able protection against harmful interference
in a residential installation. This equipment
generates, uses and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed and
used in accordance with the instructions,
may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. However, there is no guar-
antee that interference will not occur in a
particular installation.
If this equipment does cause harmful inter-
ference to radio or television reception,
which can be determined by turning the
equipment off and on, the user is encour-
aged to try to correct the interference by one
or more of the following measures:
a. Increase the separation between the
equipment and receiver.
b. Consult an authorized dealer or an expe-
rienced radio technician for help.
VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS— IF
EQUIPPED
Voice Command System Operation
The Uconnect Voice Command
system allows you to control your AM,
FM radio, disk player, USB mass
storage class device, Apple® family of
devices, Bluetooth® Streaming Audio Device,
satellite radio, and a memo recorder.
NOTE:
Take care to speak into the Voice Interface
System as calmly and normally as possible. The
ability of the Voice Interface System to
recognize user voice commands may be
negatively affected by rapid speaking or a
raised voice level.
When you push the Voice Recognition
button, you will hear a beep. The beep is your
signal to give a command.
NOTE:
If you do not say a command within a few
seconds, the system will present you with a list
of options.
If you would like to interrupt the system while it
lists options, push the Voice Recognition
button, listen for the beep, and say your
command.
Pushing the Voice Recognition button while
the system is speaking is known as “barging in”.
The system will be interrupted, and after the
beep, you can add or change commands. This
will become helpful once you start to learn the
options.
NOTE:
At any time, you can say the words “Cancel,”
“Help” or “Main Menu.”
These commands are universal and can be
used from any menu. All other commands can
be used depending upon the active application.
When using this system, you should speak
clearly and at a normal speaking volume.
WARNING!
Any voice commanded system should be
used only in safe driving conditions following
all applicable laws. Your attention should be
focused on safely operating the vehicle.
Failure to do so may result in a collision
causing serious injury or death.
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 360
MULTIMEDIA 361
The system will best recognize your speech if
the windows are closed, and the heater/air
conditioning blower is set to low.
At any point, if the system does not recognize
one of your commands, you will be prompted to
repeat it.
To hear the first available Menu, push the Voice
Recognition button and say “Help” or
“Main Menu”.
Commands
The Voice Command system understands two
types of commands, Universal commands, and
Local commands. Universal commands are
available at all times. Local commands are
available if the supported radio mode is active.
Changing The Volume
1. Start a dialogue by pushing the Voice
Recognition button.
2. Say a command (e.g., “Help”).
3. Use the ON/OFF VOLUME rotary knob to
adjust the volume to a comfortable level
while the Voice Recognition system is
speaking. Please note the volume setting
for Voice Recognition is different than the
audio system.
Main Menu
Start a dialogue by pushing the Voice
Recognition button. You may say “Main
Menu” to switch to the main menu.
In this mode, you can say the following
commands:
“Radio AM” (to switch to the radio AM mode)
“Radio FM” (to switch to radio FM mode)
“Sat” (to switch to Satellite radio mode)
“Disc” (to switch to the disc mode)
“USB” (to switch to USB mode)
“Bluetooth® Streaming” (to switch to
Bluetooth® Streaming mode)
“Memo” (to switch to the memo recorder)
“System Setup” (to switch to system setup)
Radio AM
To switch to the AM band, say “AM” or “Radio
AM”. In this mode, you may say the following
commands:
“Frequency #” (to change the frequency)
“Next Station” (to select the next station)
“Previous Station” (to select the previous
station)
“Radio Menu” (to switch to the radio menu)
“Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
Radio FM
To switch to the FM band, say “FM” or “Radio
FM”. In this mode, you may say the following
commands:
“Frequency #” (to change the frequency)
“Next Station” (to select the next station)
9
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 361
362 MULTIMEDIA
“Previous Station” (to select the previous
station)
“Menu Radio” (to switch to the radio menu)
“Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
Satellite Radio
To switch to satellite radio mode, say “Sat” or
“Satellite Radio.” In this mode, you may say the
following commands:
“Channel Number” (to change the channel by
its spoken number)
“Next Channel” (to select the next channel)
“Previous Channel” (to select the previous
channel)
“List Channel” (to hear a list of available
channels)
“Select Name” (to say the name of a channel)
“Menu Radio” (to switch to the radio menu)
“Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
Disc Mode
To switch to the disc mode, say “Disc”. In this
mode, you may say the following commands:
“Track” (#) (to change the track)
“Next Track” (to play the next track)
“Previous Track” (to play the previous track)
“Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
USB Mode
To switch to USB mode, say “USB”. In this mode,
you may say the following commands:
“Next Track” (to play the next track)
“Previous Track” (to play the previous track)
“Play” (to play an Artist Name, Playlist Name,
Album Name, Track Name, etc.)
Bluetooth® Streaming (BT) Mode
To switch to Bluetooth® Streaming (BT) mode,
say “Bluetooth® Streaming”. In this mode, you
may say the following commands:
“Play” (to play the current track)
“Pause” (to pause the current track)
“Next Track” (to play the next track)
“Previous Track” (to play the previous track)
Memo Mode
To switch to the voice recorder mode, say
“Memo”. In this mode, you may say the
following commands:
“New Memo” (to record a new memo) —
During the recording, you may push the Voice
Command button to stop recording. You
proceed by saying one of the following
commands:
“Save” (to save the memo)
“Continue” (to continue recording)
“Delete” (to delete the recording)
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 362
MULTIMEDIA 363
“Play Memos” (to play previously recorded
memos) — During the playback you may push
the Voice Command button to stop
playing memos. You proceed by saying one of
the following commands:
“Repeat” (to repeat a memo)
“Next” (to play the next memo)
“Previous” (to play the previous memo)
“Delete” (to delete a memo)
“Delete All” (to delete all memos)
Setup
To switch to system setup, you may say one of
the following:
“Change to setup”
“Switch to system setup”
“Main menu setup”
“Switch to setup”
In this mode, you may say the following
commands:
“Language English”
“Language French”
“Language Spanish”
“Tutorial”
“Voice Training”
NOTE:
Keep in mind that you have to push the Voice
Command button first and wait for the beep
before speaking the “Barge In” commands.
Voice Training
For users experiencing difficulty with the system
recognizing their voice commands or numbers
the Uconnect Voice “Voice Training” feature
may be used.
1. Push the Voice Recognition button, say
“System Setup” and once you are in that
menu then say “Voice Training”. This will
train your own voice to the system and will
improve recognition.
2. Repeat the words and phrases when
prompted by Uconnect Voice. For best
results, the “Voice Training” session should
be completed when the vehicle is parked,
engine running, all windows closed, and the
blower fan switched off. This procedure may
be repeated with a new user. The system
will adapt to the last trained voice only.
9
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 363
364
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE
FOR YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
If you are having warranty work done, be sure to
have the right papers with you. Take your
warranty folder. All work to be performed may
not be covered by the warranty. Discuss
additional charges with the service manager.
Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle's
service history. This can often provide a clue to
the current problem.
Prepare A List
Make a written list of your vehicle's problems or
the specific work you want done. If you've had
an accident or work done that is not on your
maintenance log, let the service advisor know.
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have
your vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the
situation with the service advisor and list the
items in order of priority. At many authorized
dealers, you may obtain a rental vehicle at a
minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it is
advisable to make these arrangements when
you call for an appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer and its authorized dealers
are vitally interested in your satisfaction. We
want you to be happy with our products and
services.
Warranty service must be done by an
authorized dealer. We strongly recommend that
you take the vehicle to an authorized dealer.
They know your vehicle the best, and are most
concerned that you get prompt and high quality
service. The manufacturer's authorized dealers
have the facilities, factory-trained technicians,
special tools, and the latest information to
ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a
timely manner.
This is why you should always talk to an
authorized dealer service manager first. Most
matters can be resolved with this process.
If for some reason you are still not satisfied,
talk to the general manager or owner of the
authorized dealer. They want to know if you
need assistance.
If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve
the concern, you may contact the manufac-
turer's customer center.
Any communication to the manufacturer's
customer center should include the following
information:
Owner's name and address
Owner's telephone number (home, mobile,
and office)
Authorized dealer name
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Vehicle delivery date and mileage
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 364
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 365
FCA US LLC Customer Center
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (800) 423-6343
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800)
387-9983 French
In Mexico Contact
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico City: 800-505-1300
Outside Mexico City: + (52) 55 50817568
Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands
FCA Caribbean LLC
P.O. Box 191857
San Juan 00919-1857
Phone: (800) 423-6343
Fax: (787) 782-3345
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing
difficulties, the manufacturer has installed
special TDD (Telecommunication Devices for
the Deaf) equipment at its customer center. Any
hearing or speech impaired customer, who has
access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate
with the manufacturer by dialing
1-800-380-CHRY.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that
require assistance can use the special needs
relay service offered by Bell Canada. For TTY
teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for Voice
callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with a
Bell Relay Service operator.
Service Contract
You may have purchased a service contract for
a vehicle to help protect you from the high cost
of unexpected repairs after the manufacturer's
New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires. The
Mopar Vehicle Protection plans are the ONLY
vehicle extended protection plans authorized,
endorsed and backed by FCA US LLC to provide
additional protection beyond your vehicle’s
warranty. If you purchased a Mopar Vehicle
Protection Plan, you will receive Plan Provisions
and an Owner Identification Card in the mail
within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date.
If you have any questions about the service
contract, call the manufacturer's Service
Contract National Customer Hotline at
1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call
(800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983
French).
FCA US LLC is not responsible for any service
contract you may have purchased from another
manufacturer. If you require service after the
FCA US LLC New Vehicle Limited Warranty
expires, please refer to the contract documents,
and contact the person listed in those
documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major
investment when you purchased the vehicle. An
authorized dealer has also made a major
investment in facilities, tools, and training to
assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience. You will be pleased
with their sincere efforts to resolve any warranty
issues or related concerns.
10
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 365
366 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information for the terms and
provisions of FCA US LLC warranties applicable
to this vehicle and market.
MOPAR PARTS
MOPAR® fluids, lubricants, parts, and
accessories are available from an authorized
dealer. They are recommended for your vehicle
in order to help keep the vehicle operating at its
best.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In The 50 United States And Washington,
D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect that could cause a crash or cause
injury or death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA) in
addition to notifying FCA US LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it
may open an investigation, and if it finds
that a safety defect exists in a group of
vehicles, it may order a recall and
remedy campaign. However, NHTSA
cannot become involved in individual
problems between you, an authorized
dealer or FCA US LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at
1-888-327-4236 (TTY:
1-800-424-9153); or go to http://
www.safercar.gov; or write to: Adminis-
trator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue,
SE., West Building, Washington, D.C.
20590. You can also obtain other
information about motor vehicle safety
from http://www.safercar.gov.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a
safety defect, you should contact the
Customer Service Department
immediately. Canadian customers who
wish to report a safety defect to the
Canadian government should contact
Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect
Investigations and Recalls at
1-800-333-0510 or go to http://
www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines
only), some of its constituents, and certain
vehicle components contain, or emit,
chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects, or other
reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids
contained in vehicles and certain products of
component wear contain, or emit, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause
cancer and birth defects, or other
reproductive harm.
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 366
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 367
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use
either the website or the phone numbers listed
below.
Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide
the information that students and professional
technicians need in diagnosing/trouble-
shooting, problem solving, maintaining,
servicing, and repairing FCA US LLC vehicles. A
complete working knowledge of the vehicle,
system, and/or components is written in
straightforward language with illustrations,
diagrams, and charts.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with
diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations.
These practical manuals make it easy for
students and technicians to find and fix
problems on computer-controlled vehicle
systems and features. They show exactly how to
find and correct problems the first time, using
step-by-step troubleshooting and drivability
procedures, proven diagnostic tests and a
complete list of all tools and equipment.
Owner's Manuals
These Owner's Manuals have been prepared
with the assistance of service and engineering
specialists to acquaint you with specific FCA US
LLC vehicles. Included are starting, operating,
emergency and maintenance procedures as
well as specifications, capabilities and safety
tips.
To access your Owner's Information online, visit
www.mopar.com/om
To order a hard copy of your Owner's
Information, call Tech Authority toll free at:
1-800-890-4038 (US)
1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
www.techauthority.com (US)
10
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 367
368
INDEX
A
About Your Brakes .........................................266
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) ...............240
Adding Fuel ....................................................181
Adding Washing Fluid ....................................232
Additives, Fuel ...............................................268
Adjust
Down
...........................................................28
Forward ....................................................... 28
Rearward..................................................... 28
Up................................................................ 28
Air Bag ...........................................................132
Air Bag Operation ......................................133
Air Bag Warning Light ................................131
Driver Knee Air Bag ...................................134
Enhanced Accident Response ......... 138, 225
Event Data Recorder (EDR) .......................225
If Deployment Occurs ................................138
Knee Impact Bolsters ................................134
Maintaining Your Air Bag System ..............139
Maintenance .............................................139
Side Air Bags .............................................134
Transporting Pets ......................................159
Air Bag Light ..................................94 , 131, 160
Air Cleaner, Engine
(Engine Air Cleaner Filter) ..............................235
Air Conditioner Maintenance ........................ 235
Air Conditioner Refrigerant ........................... 235
Air Conditioner System ................................. 235
Air Conditioning ................................................56
Automatic Rear ............................................51
Rear.............................................................45
Air Conditioning Filter ..............................58 , 235
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips .......................57
Air Filter ........................................................ 235
Air Pressure
Tires
......................................................... 253
Alarm
Arm The System
..........................................15
Disarm The System .....................................15
Security Alarm .............................................97
Alterations/Modifications
Vehicle
........................................................... 8
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ................. 240 , 271
Disposal ................................................... 242
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ...................... 103
Anti-Lock Warning Light ...................................97
Ashtray.............................................................78
Assist, Hill Start ............................................. 108
Assistance Towing ........................................ 312
Automatic Dimming Mirror ...............................34
Automatic Door Locks ...............................17 , 18
Automatic Headlights .......................................38
Automatic Transmission .......................165 , 244
Adding Fluid ..................................... 244 , 274
Fluid And Filter Change ............................. 244
Fluid Change ............................................. 244
Fluid Level Check .............................243 , 244
Fluid Type ........................................243 , 274
Gear Ranges ............................................. 168
Special Additives ...................................... 244
Torque Converter ...................................... 172
Axle Fluid....................................................... 274
Axle Lubrication ............................................ 274
B
Battery
................................................... 95 , 232
Charging System Light .................................95
Jump Starting ........................................... 219
Keyless Key Fob Replacement ....................10
Battery Saver Feature ......................................39
Belts, Seat .................................................... 160
Body Mechanism Lubrication ........................ 237
B-Pillar Location ............................................ 249
Brake Assist System ..................................... 104
Brake Control System, Electronic .................. 104
Brake Fluid .................................................... 274
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 368
369
Brake System
...................................... 242 , 266
Anti-Lock (ABS) ..........................................266
Fluid Check ..................................... 243 , 274
Parking ......................................................164
Warning Light .............................................. 94
Brake/Transmission Interlock .......................166
Bulb Replacement .........................................194
Bulbs, Light .......................................... 161 , 194
C
Calibration
Compass
.....................................................89
Camera, Rear ................................................179
Capacities, Fluid ............................................271
Caps, Filler
Oil (Engine) ................................................231
Power Steering ..........................................173
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) ......................241
Car Washes ...................................................263
Carbon Monoxide Warning .................. 159 , 270
Cargo
Vehicle Loading
........................................... 63
Cargo Area Cover ............................................. 63
Cargo Compartment ........................................ 63
Luggage Carrier ........................................... 79
Cellular Phone ..................................... 304 , 359
Center High Mounted Stop Light ...................197
Certification Label .........................................182
Chains, Tire....................................................260
Change Oil Indicator ........................................ 87
Changing A Flat Tire ............................. 202 , 244
Chart, Tire Sizing ........................................... 246
Check Engine Light
(Malfunction Indicator Light) ......................... 102
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety ................. 159
Checks, Safety .............................................. 159
Child Restraint .............................................. 141
Child Restraints
Booster Seats ........................................... 144
Child Seat Installation ..................... 153 , 155
How To Stow An unused ALR Seat Belt .... 152
Infant And Child Restraints ....................... 142
Locating The LATCH Anchorages .............. 149
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children .. 146
Older Children And Child Restraints ......... 143
Seating Positions ...................................... 145
Using The Top Tether Anchorage .............. 157
Clean Air Gasoline ......................................... 268
Cleaning
Wheels
..................................................... 259
Climate Control ................................................42
Automatic ....................................................48
Manual ........................................................42
Coat Hook ........................................................73
Cold Weather Operation ............................... 163
Compact Spare Tire ...................................... 257
Compass ..........................................................88
Calibration ...................................................89
Variance ......................................................89
Computer, Trip/Travel ...............................87 , 93
Console ............................................................69
Floor ............................................................69
Console, Overhead ...........................................71
Contract, Service ........................................... 365
Cooling Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) ............ 241
Cooling System ............................................. 239
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) ...................... 240
Cooling Capacity ....................................... 271
Disposal Of Used Coolant ......................... 242
Drain, Flush, And Refill ............................. 240
Inspection ................................................. 240
Points To Remember ................................ 242
Pressure Cap ............................................ 241
Radiator Cap ............................................. 241
Selection Of Coolant
(Antifreeze)
.............................240 , 271, 272
Corrosion Protection ..................................... 262
Cruise Light ................................................... 100
Cupholders............................................. 73 , 265
Customer Assistance .................................... 364
Cybersecurity ................................................ 275
D
Daytime Brightness, Interior Lights
..................41
Daytime Running Lights ............................37 , 38
Dealer Service ............................................... 233
Defroster, Windshield ................................... 160
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers ..............................42
Diagnostic System, Onboard ......................... 101
11
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 369
370
Dimmer Switch
Headlight
.............................................. 37 , 38
Dipsticks
Automatic Transmission ............................244
Oil (Engine) ................................................232
Power Steering ..........................................173
Disabled Vehicle Towing ................................224
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) .......................242
Door Ajar................................................... 95 , 96
Door Ajar Light .......................................... 95 , 96
Door Locks
Automatic
.................................................... 17
Doors ............................................................... 16
Driver’s Seat Back Tilt ..................................... 20
Driving
Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow
Standing Water
.........................................192
DVD Player (Video Entertainment System) ....344
E
Economy (Fuel) Mode
....................................167
Electric Brake Control System .......................104
Anti-Lock Brake System .............................103
Traction Control System ............................109
Electric Remote Mirrors ...................................36
Electrical Power Outlets ................................... 75
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) ......173
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) .................. 105
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light .........95
Emergency, In Case Of
Freeing Vehicle When Stuck ..................... 223
Hazard Warning Flasher ........................... 194
Jacking ...................................202 , 206, 244
Jump Starting ........................................... 219
Emission Control System Maintenance ........ 102
Engine........................................................... 231
Air Cleaner ................................................ 235
Block Heater ............................................. 163
Break-In Recommendations ..................... 163
Checking Oil Level .................................... 232
Compartment ........................................... 231
Compartment Identification ...................... 231
Coolant (Antifreeze) .................................. 272
Cooling ..................................................... 239
Exhaust Gas Caution ....................... 159 , 270
Fails To Start ............................................ 163
Flooded, Starting ...................................... 163
Oil ...........................................233 , 271, 272
Oil Filler Cap ............................................. 231
Oil Filter .................................................... 234
Oil Selection .................................... 233 , 271
Oil Synthetic ............................................. 234
Overheating .............................................. 221
Starting..................................................... 162
Engine Oil Viscosity ....................................... 234
Engine Oil Viscosity Chart .............................. 234
Enhanced Accident Response
Feature ................................................ 138 , 225
Ethanol.......................................................... 268
Exhaust Gas Cautions ..........................159 , 270
Exhaust System ...................................159 , 238
Exterior Lighting ...............................................37
Exterior Lights ............................... 37 , 161, 194
F
Filters
Air Cleaner
................................................ 235
Air Conditioning ................................. 58 , 235
Engine Oil ........................................234 , 272
Engine Oil Disposal ................................... 234
Flashers
Hazard Warning
........................................ 194
Turn Signals ............37, 100, 161, 196, 197
Flash-To-Pass ............................................37 , 38
Flooded Engine Starting ................................ 163
Floor Console ...................................................69
Fluid Capacities ............................................ 271
Fluid Leaks.................................................... 161
Fluid Level Checks
Automatic Transmission ........................... 244
Brake ........................................................ 243
Power Steering ......................................... 173
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 370
371
Fluid, Brake
...................................................274
Fluids And Lubricants ....................................272
Fog Lights ........................................37 , 39, 196
Fog Lights, Service .........................................196
Fold In Floor (Stow ‘n Go) Seating .................... 21
Fold-Flat Seats ................................................. 20
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle .................................223
Fuel ...............................................................267
Adding .......................................................181
Additives ...................................................268
Clean Air ....................................................268
Economy Mode ..........................................167
Ethanol ......................................................268
Gasoline ....................................................267
Materials Added ........................................268
Methanol ...................................................268
Octane Rating ................................. 267 , 272
Specifications ............................................272
Tank Capacity ............................................271
Fueling...........................................................181
Fuses ................................................... 197 , 198
G
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink)
.................... 63
Gasoline, (Fuel) .............................................267
Gasoline, Clean Air ........................................268
Gasoline, Reformulated .................................268
Gear Ranges ..................................................168
Gear Selector Override ................................. 222
Glass Cleaning .............................................. 265
Gross Axle Weight Rating .............................. 183
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating ......................... 183
GVWR............................................................ 182
H
Hands-Free Phone
Uconnect
.................................................. 304
Hazard
Driving Through Flowing, Rising,
Or Shallow Standing Water
....................... 192
Hazard Warning Flashers .............................. 194
Head Restraints ...............................................30
Headlights .......................................................37
Automatic ....................................................38
Bulb Replacement .................................... 196
Cleaning ................................................... 263
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch ... 37, 38
Lights On Reminder ..............................37 , 39
Passing .................................................37 , 38
Replacing ................................................. 196
Switch..........................................................37
Time Delay............................................37 , 38
Heated Mirrors ..........................................34 , 37
Heater, Engine Block .................................... 163
High Beam/Low Beam Select
(Dimmer) Switch ..............................................38
Hill Start Assist .............................................. 108
Hitches
Trailer Towing
........................................... 184
HomeLink (Garage Door Opener) .....................63
Hood Prop ........................................................61
Hood Release ...................................................61
Hook, Coat .......................................................73
I
Ignition
.............................................................11
Switch ..........................................................11
Inside Rearview Mirror .....................................35
Instrument Cluster ...........................................82
Descriptions....................................... 84 , 100
Display .........................................................85
Display Controls ...........................................85
Menu Items .................................................87
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning ................... 265
Integrated Power Module (Fuses) ................. 198
Interior And Instrument Lights .........................39
Interior Appearance Care .............................. 264
Interior Lights ...................................................39
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) ..................42
Inverter
Power
...........................................................77
iPod/USB/MP3 Control ................................. 340
Bluetooth Streaming Audio .............. 343, 362
11
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 371
372
J
Jack Location
.................................................203
Jack Operation ..................................... 202 , 244
Jump Starting ................................................219
K
Key Fob
Arm The Alarm
............................................. 15
Disarm The Alarm ........................................ 15
Programming Additional Key Fobs ....... 10, 14
Key Fob Battery Service
(Remote Keyless Entry)
................................... 10
Key Fob Programming
(Remote Keyless Entry) ................................... 10
Keys................................................................... 9
Replacement ............................................... 14
L
Lane Change And Turn Signals
........................ 37
Lane Change Assist .................................. 37 , 39
Lap/Shoulder Belts .......................................121
Latches..........................................................161
Hood ........................................................... 61
Leaks, Fluid ...................................................161
Life Of Tires ...................................................255
Liftgate ............................................................ 62
Closing ........................................................62
Opening ....................................................... 62
Light Bulbs.....................................................161
Lights ............................................................ 161
Air Bag ...................................... 94 , 131, 160
Automatic Headlights ..................................38
Back-Up .................................................... 197
Battery Saver ...............................................39
Brake Assist Warning ............................... 107
Brake Warning .............................................94
Bulb Replacement .................................... 194
Center Mounted Stop ............................... 197
Cruise ....................................................... 100
Daytime Running ..................................37 , 38
Dimmer Switch, Headlight ....................37, 38
Electronic Stability Program(ESP)
Indicator ..................................................96
Exterior ..................................................... 161
Fog .....................................................39 , 196
Hazard Warning Flasher ........................... 194
Headlights ..........................................37 , 196
Headlights On Reminder .............................39
High Beam ...................................................38
High Beam/Low Beam Select ...............37, 38
Instrument Cluster .......................................37
Interior.........................................................39
License ..................................................... 197
Lights On Reminder ..............................37 , 39
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) ..........98
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness) .............41
Park ................................................. 100 , 196
Passing .................................................37 , 38
Reading .......................................................39
Rear Servicing .......................................... 197
Rear Tail Lamps ........................................ 197
Seat Belt Reminder .....................................96
Security Alarm .............................................97
Service...................................................... 194
Side Marker .............................................. 197
Traction Control ........................................ 107
Turn Signals ............37, 100, 161, 196, 197
Warning Instrument Cluster
Descriptions
....................................... 96 , 100
Load Leveling System ......................................63
Loading Vehicle ...................................... 63 , 182
Tires.......................................................... 249
Locks
Automatic Door
............................................17
Low Tire Pressure System ............................. 115
Lubrication, Body .......................................... 237
Lug Nuts/Bolts .............................................. 266
Luggage Carrier ................................................79
M
Maintenance Free Battery
............................ 232
Maintenance Schedule ................................. 226
Malfunction Indicator Light
(Check Engine)
....................................... 98 , 102
Manual
Service
...................................................... 367
Map/Reading Lights ........................................39
Media Hub .................................................... 340
Methanol....................................................... 268
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 372
373
Mini-Trip Computer
................................... 87 , 93
Mirrors ...................................................... 34 , 36
Automatic Dimming ..................................... 34
Electric Remote ........................................... 36
Exterior Folding ........................................... 36
Heated ................................................. 34 , 37
Outside................................................. 34 , 35
Rearview .............................................. 34 , 35
Vanity .......................................................... 37
Modifications/Alterations
Vehicle
.......................................................... 8
Monitor, Tire Pressure System .......................115
Mopar Parts ...................................................366
MP3 Control ..................................................340
Multi-Function Control Lever ............................ 37
N
New Vehicle Break-In Period
..........................163
O
Occupant Restraints ......................................119
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) ............ 267, 272
Oil Change Indicator
Reset ........................................................... 87
Oil Filter, Change ...........................................234
Oil Filter, Selection .........................................234
Oil Pressure Light ............................................ 96
Oil, Engine ........................................... 233 , 272
Capacity ....................................................271
Change Interval .........................................233
Checking................................................... 232
Disposal ................................................... 234
Filter ................................................ 234 , 272
Filter Disposal ........................................... 234
Identification Logo .................................... 234
Materials Added To .................................. 234
Pressure Warning Light ...............................96
Recommendation ............................ 233 , 271
Synthetic .................................................. 234
Viscosity .......................................... 234 , 271
Onboard Diagnostic System .......................... 101
Operating Precautions .................................. 101
Operator Manual
Owner's Manual ....................................8 , 367
Outside Rearview Mirrors .........................34 , 35
Overhead Console ...........................................71
Overhead Travel Information Center ................71
Overheating, Engine ...................................... 221
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) ................... 8
P
Paint Care
..................................................... 262
Parking Brake ............................................... 164
ParkSense System, Rear .............................. 175
Personal Settings .............................................90
Pets .............................................................. 159
Phone, Hands-Free (Uconnect) ..................... 304
Placard, Tire And Loading Information .......... 249
Power
Brakes ...................................................... 266
Door Locks...................................................17
Inverter ........................................................77
Mirrors .........................................................36
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) .................75
Seats ...........................................................27
Steering ........................................... 172 , 173
Vent Windows ..............................................59
Power Seats
Down
...........................................................28
Forward .......................................................28
Rearward .....................................................28
Up ................................................................28
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts .................. 127
Preparation For Jacking ................................ 206
Pretensioners
Seat Belts
................................................. 127
Programmable Electronic Features ..................90
R
Radial Ply Tires
.............................................. 254
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) ............ 241
Radio Operation ............................................ 359
Radio Remote Controls ................................. 340
Rear Air Conditioning .......................................45
Rear Camera ................................................. 179
Rear Cross Path ............................................ 113
Rear ParkSense System ................................ 175
Reclining Rear Seats ........................................21
11
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 373
374
Recreational Towing
......................................191
Reformulated Gasoline ..................................268
Refrigerant ....................................................235
Release, Hood ................................................. 61
Reminder, Lights On ........................................ 37
Reminder, Seat Belt ......................................120
Remote Keyless Entry
Arm The Alarm
............................................. 15
Disarm The Alarm ........................................ 15
Programming Additional Key Fobs ....... 10, 14
Remote Starting
Exit Remote Start Mode .............................. 13
Replacement Bulbs .......................................194
Replacement Keys ........................................... 14
Replacement Tires .........................................255
Reporting Safety Defects ...............................366
Restraints, Child ............................................141
Restraints, Head .............................................. 30
Rocking Vehicle When Stuck .........................223
Roof Luggage Rack .......................................... 79
Rotation, Tires ...............................................261
S
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle
.........................160
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle ......................161
Safety Defects, Reporting ..............................366
Safety Information, Tire .................................245
Safety Tips .....................................................159
Safety, Exhaust Gas .......................................159
Schedule, Maintenance ................................ 226
Seat Belt Reminder ..........................................96
Seat Belts ............................................ 120 , 160
Adjustable Shoulder Belt .......................... 124
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage ..... 124
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt
Anchorage ................................................ 124
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) ........... 128
Child Restraints ........................................ 141
Energy Management Feature ................... 127
Extender ................................................... 126
Front Seat...............................120 , 121, 122
Inspection................................................. 160
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation .................... 122
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting ................... 123
Lap/Shoulder Belts .................................. 121
Operating Instructions .............................. 122
Pregnant Women ...................................... 127
Pretensioners ........................................... 127
Rear Seat ................................................. 121
Reminder.................................................. 120
Seat Belt Extender .................................... 126
Seat Belt Pretensioner ............................. 127
Untwisting Procedure ............................... 123
Seat Belts Maintenance ............................... 264
Seats ................................................. 20 , 28, 29
Adjustment ...........................................20 , 28
Heated.........................................................29
Power...........................................................27
Rear Folding ................................................20
Reclining ......................................................21
Seatback Release ........................................20
Stow ‘n Go (Fold in Floor) .............................21
Tilting ...........................................................20
Security Alarm ..................................................97
Arm The System ...........................................15
Disarm The System ......................................15
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) .................. 272
Sentry Key
Key Programming ........................................14
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) ..................................13
Sentry Key Replacement ..................................14
Service Assistance ........................................ 364
Service Contract ............................................ 365
Service Manuals ........................................... 367
Settings
Personal ......................................................90
Shift Lever Override ...................................... 222
Shoulder Belts .............................................. 121
Side View Mirror Adjustment ............................34
Signals, Turn ...............37, 100, 161, 196, 197
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) ............................ 260
Snow Tires .................................................... 257
Spare Tires ..................................205 , 257, 258
Spark Plugs ................................................... 272
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 374
375
Specifications
Fuel (Gasoline)
..........................................272
Oil..............................................................272
Speed Control
Accel/Decel
...............................................175
Cancel .......................................................175
Resume .....................................................175
Speed Control (Cruise Control) ......................173
Starting ..........................................................162
Button ......................................................... 11
Cold Weather ............................................163
Engine Fails To Start .................................163
Starting And Operating ..................................162
Starting Procedures .......................................162
Steering
Power
.............................................. 172 , 173
Tilt Column .................................................. 33
Wheel, Heated ...................................... 33 , 34
Wheel, Tilt ................................................... 33
Steering Wheel Audio Controls ......................340
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System
Controls .........................................................340
Storage ............................................................ 68
Storage Bin ...................................................... 68
Storage, Vehicle ......................................57 , 262
Storing Your Vehicle ......................................262
Stow ‘n Go (Fold In Floor) Seats ....................... 21
Stuck, Freeing ...............................................223
Sunglasses Storage ......................................... 78
Supplemental Restraint System – Air Bag .....132
Sway Control, Trailer ..................................... 109
Synthetic Engine Oil ...................................... 234
T
Telescoping Steering Column
..........................33
Tilt Steering Column ........................................33
Time Delay
Headlight
.....................................................37
Tire And Loading Information Placard ........... 249
Tire Markings ................................................ 245
Tire Safety Information ................................. 245
Tire Service Kit .............................................. 212
Tires...................................161 , 252, 257, 261
Aging (Life Of Tires) .................................. 255
Air Pressure .............................................. 252
Chains ...................................................... 260
Changing ......................................... 202 , 244
Compact Spare ......................................... 257
General Information ........................ 252 , 257
High Speed ............................................... 253
Inflation Pressure ..................................... 253
Jacking ...................................202 , 206, 244
Life Of Tires .............................................. 255
Load Capacity ........................................... 249
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) ..98, 115
Quality Grading ......................................... 261
Radial ....................................................... 254
Replacement ............................................ 255
Rotation.................................................... 261
Safety .............................................. 245 , 252
Sizes ......................................................... 246
Snow Tires ................................................ 257
Spare Tires .............................205 , 257, 258
Spinning ................................................... 254
Trailer Towing ........................................... 188
Tread Wear Indicators .............................. 255
Wheel Nut Torque ..................................... 266
To Open Hood ..................................................61
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight ...................... 186
Torque Converter Clutch ............................... 172
Towing........................................................... 183
24-Hour Towing Assistance ...................... 312
Disabled Vehicle ....................................... 224
Guide ........................................................ 186
Recreational ............................................. 191
Weight ...................................................... 186
Towing Assistance ......................................... 312
Towing Behind A Motorhome ........................ 191
Traction ......................................................... 192
Traction Control ............................................ 109
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) ............................. 109
Trailer Towing ................................................ 183
Cooling System Tips .................................. 190
Hitches ..................................................... 184
Minimum Requirements ........................... 187
Tips ........................................................... 189
Trailer And Tongue Weight ........................ 186
Wiring ....................................................... 189
Trailer Towing Guide ..................................... 186
Trailer Weight ................................................ 186
11
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 375
376
Transfer Case
Fluid
..........................................................274
Transmission
Automatic ........................................ 165 , 243
Fluid ................................................ 243 , 274
Maintenance .............................................243
Transporting Pets ..........................................159
Tread Wear Indicators ...................................255
Turn Signals ......................... 37 , 100, 196, 197
U
Uconnect
Advanced Phone Connectivity
...................314
Phone Call Features ..................................309
Uconnect (Hands-Free Phone) .......................304
Uconnect Phone ............................................311
Umbrella Holder .............................................. 72
Uniform Tire Quality Grades ...........................261
Universal Garage Door Opener (HomeLink) ..... 63
Universal Transmitter ...................................... 63
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt ....................123
USB ...............................................................340
V
Vanity Mirrors ..................................................37
Variance
Compass .....................................................89
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) .............. 266
Vehicle Loading ................................... 182 , 249
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations ...................... 8
Vehicle Storage .......................................57 , 262
Viscosity, Engine Oil ...................................... 234
Voice Command
Commands
............................................... 361
System Operation ..................................... 360
Voice Training ........................................... 363
Voice Recognition System (VR) ..................... 360
W
Warning Flashers, Hazard
............................. 194
Warning Lights
(Instrument Cluster Descriptions) ....................97
Warnings And Cautions ...................................... 8
Warranty Information .................................... 366
Washer
Adding Fluid .............................................. 232
Washers, Windshield .......................................41
Washing Vehicle ............................................ 263
Water
Driving Through ........................................ 192
Wheel And Wheel Tire Care ........................... 259
Wheel And Wheel Tire Trim ........................... 259
Window Fogging ...............................................58
Windows ..........................................................59
Rear Vent .....................................................59
Windshield Defroster .................................... 160
Windshield Washers .............................. 41 , 232
Windshield Wiper Blades .............................. 238
Wipers Blade Replacement ........................... 238
Wipers, Intermittent .........................................42
20_RT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 376
WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway motor vehicle can expose you to
chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the
engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently
when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
This Owner’s Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may also include
a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any features and equipment described in this
manual that are not on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its
products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
With respect to any vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
If you are the rst registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Booklet by calling 1-800-423-6343 (U.S.) or
1-800-387-1143 (Canada) or by contacting your dealer.
This Owner’s Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your most up-to-date Owner’s Manual, Navigation/Uconnect manuals and
Warranty Booklet can be found by visiting the website on the back cover. U.S. residents can purchase replacement kits by visiting www.techauthority.com and Canadian
residents can purchase replacement kits by calling 1-800-387-1143.
The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, resulting in an accident and
personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take their attention off the road.
Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones, computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices, by the driver while the vehicle is moving
is dangerous and could lead to a serious accident. Texting while driving is also dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle is moving. If you nd yourself
unable to devote your full attention to vehicle operation, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. Some states or provinces prohibit the use of
cellular telephones or texting while driving. It is always the driver’s responsibility to comply with all local laws.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared to help you get acquainted with your new Dodge brand vehicle and to provide a convenient reference source
for common questions.
Not all features shown in this manual may apply to your vehicle. For additional information, visit www.mopar.com (U.S.), www.mopar.ca (Canada) or your local
Dodge brand dealer.
Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels
far below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a friend or use
public transportation.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reexes are slower and your judgment is impaired
when you have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
WARNING!
20_RT_OM_EN_USC
FIRST EDITION
2020 DODGE GRAND CARAVAN
OWNER’S MANUAL
2020 DODGE GRAND CARAVAN
©2019 FCA US LLC. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. TOUS DROITS RÉSERVÉS.
DODGE IS A REGISTERED TRADEMARK OF FCA US LLC OR FCA CANADA INC., USED UNDER LICENSE. DODGE EST UNE MARQUE DÉPOSÉE DE FCA US LLC OU FCA CANADA INC., UTILISÉE SOUS LE PERMIS.
APP STORE IS A REGISTERED TRADEMARK OF APPLE INC. GOOGLE PLAY STORE IS A REGISTERED TRADEMARK OF GOOGLE.
Whether it’s providing information about specic product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s heritage, knowing what steps to take following an
accident or scheduling your next appointment, we know you’ll nd the app an important extension of your Dodge brand vehicle.
Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go directly to the App Store
®
or Google Play
®
Store and enter the search
keyword “Dodge” (U.S. residents only).
mopar.com/om owners.mopar.ca
DOWNLOAD A FREE ELECTRONIC COPY OF THE MOST UP-TO-DATE
OWNER’S MANUAL, UCONNECT AND WARRANTY BOOKLETS
U. S. Canada
